Page

Africa

Argentina

Belgian Congo

Central China

Chile

China

Colombia

Congo

Eastern Siam

Ecuador

French Equatorial Africa—Gabon

French Indo-China and Eastern Siam

French West Africa

Gabon

India

Iran (Persia)

Island World

Jamaica

Page

Japan

Kansu-Tibetan Border

Kweichow-Szechuan

Languages

Latin America

Netherlands East Indies

Palestine-Arabian Border

Persia (Iran)

Peru

Philippine Islands

Populations

Puerto Rico

Shanghai

Sierra Leone

South China

The Island World

Unoccupied Fields

Page

Africa

Argentina

Belgian Congo

Central China

Chile

China

Colombia

Congo

Congo Churches

Eastern Siam

Ecuador

French Equatorial Africa—Gabon

French Indo-China and Eastern Siam

French West Africa

Gabon

India

Iran (Persia)

Page

Jamaica

Japan

Kansu-Tibetan Border

Kweichow-Szechuan

Netherlands East Indies

Palestine-Arabian Border

Persia (Iran)

Peru

Philippine Islands

Puerto Rico

Shanghai

Sierra Leone

South China

West Indies

World Map—Western Hemisphere

World Map—Eastern Hemisphere

World Map—Folded ............................Insert

It has been our purpose to prepare an historical and descriptive Atlas of the Mission fields of The Christian and Missionary Alliance, which would serve both as a source ofnbsp;information to individuals, and a textbook for groups andnbsp;classes.

In order that the student may gain a general idea of the situation in the countries in which the Alliance operates, wenbsp;first portray the field as a whole, and then more particularlynbsp;our own work and objectives. The Land is described andnbsp;its People. Such topics of general information as Area andnbsp;Population, Climate, Government, History, Physical Features, Natural Resources, Currency, Languages, and Religions are discussed. Then we present the history of Missionary Occultation. And finally, we describe in detail, thenbsp;work of the Alliance in the various areas.

W’e are living in a world of rapid change. Since our last -Atlas was published in 1924, even the names of nations havenbsp;been altered. And when we come to a land like China, wenbsp;can scarcely recognize some cities and towns of long occupation by the new names that have now been assigned to them.nbsp;'Phis ha.s made the task of inaj) preparation particularly difficult, but we have tried to make both our facts and figuresnbsp;as nearly up to date and accurate as possible.

Ours is a spiritual warfare. Since we “wrestle not with flesh and Iflood,’’ our methods can be no more carnal thannbsp;can our weapons be material. If we advance successfully,nbsp;we must advance on our knees, and have a.s our ammunitionnbsp;the Word of God.

The Alliance movement was born in prayer in Old fifrchard, Maine, in August, 1887, when Dr. A. B. Simpsonnbsp;and a little company of God’s children assembled for fellowship. This was followed by the incorporation of Th-e International Missionary Alliance in 1889 and The Christiannbsp;Alliance in 1890. In April, 1897, these two organizationsnbsp;were united under the present name of The Christian andnbsp;Missionary Alliance. The Alliance was not founded tonbsp;establish another denomination, but to promote fellowshipnbsp;with all like-minded believers in the fulness of Christ andnbsp;the missionary enterprise.

The missionary zeal which animates the entire Alliance work at home and abroad has residted, through the grace ofnbsp;God. in so developing the work in the foreign fields that thenbsp;number of churches, members, Sunday Schools, and workers abroad exceeds that in the homeland. There are in ournbsp;foreign mission fields nearly 500 churches and over 300 unorganized groups of Christians with a total membership ofnbsp;well over 40,000. The enrollment in the nearly 950 Sundaynbsp;Schools is about 37,000. There are in active service 460nbsp;missionaries and more than 1,500 native workers.

The Alliance work in the foreign fields is supported by sacrificial gifts not only of those who are members of thenbsp;.Alliance movement in the United States and Canada, butnbsp;also of individuals, groups, churches, and church conferencesnbsp;who desire to share in world evangelization through Alliancenbsp;channels. The Christian and Missionary Alliance rejoicesnbsp;in the prayer fellowship and cooperation of all Christiansnbsp;who share in this ministry of world-wide missionary work.

The words of our Founder, Dr. A. B. Simpson, apply as truly today as when they were uttered :

“The great need of the world and the pressing call of the Master in these last days of the Christian age cause us to ask of our brethrennbsp;that they unite with us in a spirit of faith and holy purpose in thisnbsp;glorious crusade.

“What do we ask of our people?

“First, that each one of them will become imbued with the missionary spirit, which simply means the Holy Spirit and the spirit of the Risen Christ.

“Further, that they will ask the Lord to baptize them unto this especial purpose and aim, and unite their hearts in a loyal and wholehearted fellowship in this great and glorious purpose. What thenbsp;cause of missions needs today is a band of consecrated men and women who have become possessed with this one idea through the divinenbsp;inspiration, and then nothing can resist them. Shall we stand heartnbsp;to heart and hand to hand in this great and holy enthusiasm until thenbsp;church of God shall take fire and go forth to do the work that shouldnbsp;have been done centuries ago?

“Again, we ask our people to recognize the fact that the missionary interest is the chief business of every Christian, that the work ofnbsp;foreign missions is the one preeminent business of every minister,nbsp;every congregation, and every Christian. Let us unite in a greatnbsp;missionary crusade. . . . Let everything be merged in this. Let ournbsp;churches exist for this. Let our ministers preach for this. Let ournbsp;seminaries and training colleges be on fire with this one theme. Letnbsp;our laborers toil for this. Let our servant girls work for this. Letnbsp;our business men carry on their business for this. Let our consecrated women sacrifice for this. Let our homes be furnished and ournbsp;wardrobes be purchased with reference to this. And let a wholenbsp;army of true hearts prove to the world around and the heavens abovenbsp;that they understand the meaning of the Cross of Calvary, the crynbsp;of dying souls, and the glory of the coming kingdom. . . .

“And finally, this work can only be done by men and women who are filled with faith, armed w’ith prayer, and baptized with the Holynbsp;Ghost. Mere human enthusiasm will wither and die. . . . Onlynbsp;when the church at home rises to a full realization of its responsibility and trust will the thought of God for this lost world benbsp;realized, and its evangelization will not only be possible but practicablenbsp;in a single generation.’’

A PERSONAL WORD FRO3Æ THE EDITOR

AAT are grateful to the Lord of the harvest for the growing interest in our foreign missionary work as expressed in increased prayer ministry and a more widespread desire fornbsp;information concerning the foreign fields. Many individualsnbsp;and groups have asked for an Atlas of Alliance missionnbsp;fields which would give present-day facts, and we havenbsp;sought to meet this need, in so far as possible, in these pages.

Those who read this Atlas are urged to aid in making our foreign missionary work known to others. It is suggestednbsp;that Mission Study Classes he organized and Prayer Groupsnbsp;formed. The Foreign Department sends out monthly lettersnbsp;to such Groups, of which already there are many, givingnbsp;latest items from the fields. A Prayer Manual, listing namesnbsp;of fields, stations, and missionaries, and Literature describing the work on the fields, are available from the publishers.nbsp;The Alliance Weekly is issued at $2.00 a year, and gives thenbsp;latest available information concerning our foreign work.

Heartfelt thanks are due and are hereby given to the goodly number of missionaries and others, including thosenbsp;of the Foreign Department office staff, who have renderednbsp;such untiring and valuable service in the preparation of thenbsp;material in these pages.

May God cause these facts of information to be set ablaze by the fire of insjiiration through His Holy Spirit’s ministrynbsp;in the minds and hearts of all who read these Atlas pagesnbsp;until their lives shall be aglow with holy fervor and fierynbsp;zeal for the glory of God, the salvation of men, and thenbsp;building of the Church of Christ among all the tribes ofnbsp;earth.

The Indian sub-continent is the central of three jjeninsulas in southern Asia. The land frontiers of India and Burmanbsp;are varied as they extend for more than 4,000 miles fromnbsp;Baluchistan, where it borders Persia, to China and Siam.nbsp;The frontiers of India itself lie for nearly 2,500 miles opposite Persia, Afghanistan, Turkestan, Tibet, Nepal, Bhutannbsp;and Burma. Then Burma marches about 1,000 miles withnbsp;Tibet and China; turning south Burma touches the northwestern part of French Indo-China for 100 miles, then adjoins Siam for 600 miles. The coastline of India lies alongnbsp;the Arabian Sea, the Indian Ocean, and the Bay of Bengal.

Area and Population

Although the area of India is less than one-half that of the Dominion of Canada and only about three-fifths that ofnbsp;the U. S. A., yet India has a population about thirty-fournbsp;times greater than Canada and nearly three times greaternbsp;than U. S. A. The following table shows the figures (1931)nbsp;for India including Aden, Burma, Baluchistan and Assam :

In the decade 1921-1931 the population of India increased by 33,895,298, or 10.6%. The urban population is 38,985,-427, or 11% of the total. This includes all communities ofnbsp;over 5,000 people and 674 towns (out of a total of 2,575)nbsp;which have less than 5,000 inhabitants. Thus in India thenbsp;urban population is 11% as contrasted with England andnbsp;Wales 80% and U. S. A. 56.2%. The rural population ofnbsp;India is 319,852,351, which is 89% of the whole. These livenbsp;in 685,665 villages, more than one-half of which have lessnbsp;than 1,000 inhabitants each, and nearly one-third are of lessnbsp;than 500 people each.

Climate

The climate is tropical but ranges from the extreme heat of the southeast to the cooler temperatures of the northwestnbsp;mountain regions. Throughout the country in general therenbsp;are but two seasons, the dry and the rainy, also known as thenbsp;season of the northeast monsoon and season of the southwestnbsp;monsoon. In various parts of India, however, the directionnbsp;of the monsoon winds varies.

One of the most eagerly looked for news items each year in India is the first report of the monsoon which ushers innbsp;the rainy season. When the rainfall is abundant, it means anbsp;good growing season for the crops and a greater measure ofnbsp;comfort and prosperity for the people ; but when the rainsnbsp;are late and scanty, distress and famine often ensue. In thenbsp;areas where the Alliance Mission is working, the rainy season ordinarily begins in June and continues until Septembernbsp;or October and is followed by the cool season, which extendsnbsp;through February. After this the temperature increasesnbsp;rapidly until the hot season is broken by the beginning of thenbsp;rains in June. The months of the cool season are the bestnbsp;time for the missionaries to tour in the districts. During thenbsp;hot season it is important for them to escape from the heat,nbsp;if possible, by going to the hills for a few weeks of rest andnbsp;change.

Government

India is under British rule, but there are more than 600 Native States which do not come under the administrativenbsp;system of British India but have varying degrees of independence. Most of these Indian States are governed by native princes.

The Viceroy and Governor General, the highest official in the government of India, is appointed by the British Government. Executive and legislative power rest with a Council, of which at least three members must have had ten years’nbsp;service in India and one must have been a lawyer during thatnbsp;time.

The legislature consists of the Governor General and two Chambers, the Council of State and the Legislative Assembly. There are also Provincial Legislatures. About 35,-000,000 men and women are qualified to vote for the members of the Provincial Legislatures, but only about 6,000,000nbsp;may share in the election of the Legislative Assembly.

The government of Great Britain is cooperating with the government and people of India in their desire to attainnbsp;autonomy and complete self-government, and progress hasnbsp;been made during recent years looking toward the objectivenbsp;of self-government similar to that exercised by the Dominionnbsp;of Canada, the commonwealth of Australia, and other areasnbsp;in the British Empire. Since only about 28,000,000 of thenbsp;people of India can read and write and thus 92% are illiterate, it is evident that much advance must be made innbsp;education and development of the vast multitudes before thenbsp;utmost progress can be made in self-government.

History

There are three general periods of Indian history which may be classified as follows : The National or Hindu periodnbsp;from about 2000 B. C. to 1001 A. D. ; the Mohammedannbsp;Period, 1001 to 1757 A. D. ; the Period of European Dominion, 1757 to the present. Since the World War anothernbsp;important change has begun, marked by the demands of thenbsp;people of India for autonomy. The transition from European dominion to a considerable measure of self-governmentnbsp;is under way, but a long time will probably be required to putnbsp;into effect as full a measure of autonomy as other portionsnbsp;of the British Empire enjoy.

The Aryans entered the Punjab about 2000 B. C., coming from the northwest and subduing or driving southward thenbsp;aboriginal inhabitants, including the Dravidians. The eventsnbsp;of these early centuries are legendary rather than exact innbsp;historical dates. One of the first authentic dates of Indiannbsp;history is 557 B. C., the reputed year of the birth of Buddha.nbsp;Alexander of Greece was in India in 327 B. C. and for a

time foreign influence in India gained steadily through various alliances and treaties. During the fifth century the Gupta dynasty reigned supreme over practically all northernnbsp;India and the Hindus flourished in arts and religion.

Under the onslaughts of Sultan Mahmud of Ghazni, Mohammedan power was permanently established in India and Hindu princes fell before a succession of Mohammedannbsp;dynasties. About the beginning of the fourteenth centurynbsp;the Afghan power in India reached its highest point. Thenbsp;Hindus in Gujarat were subdued, the Moguls invading thenbsp;Punjab were defeated, and the Deccan was entered. In 1398nbsp;Tamerlane sacked Delhi and proclaimed himself Emperor ofnbsp;India. This dynasty was succeeded by the Great Moguls ofnbsp;the house of Timur, who reigned until 1707. In 1739 thenbsp;Persian Nadir Shaw invaded India, sacked Delhi and carriednbsp;away the famous peacock throne and a vast amount of treasure. Soon many portions of India became independent statesnbsp;and Hindu and Mohammedan adventurers established theirnbsp;own kingdoms in various places.

The Venetians, the Genoese, the Portuguese, and the Dutch had by turns traded with India and in 1602 the English appeared on the scene and for a long time the East India Company had a powerful hold on the affairs of India politicallynbsp;as well as commercially. In 1757 by the Battle of Plasseynbsp;the English General Clive won control for England of thenbsp;most populous provinces in the whole country, Bengal andnbsp;Bihar. By 1818 the British through the East India Companynbsp;were masters of the most of India, except the Punjab andnbsp;Sind. After the Sepoy mutiny and rebellion in 1857-8 British Viceroys consolidated the dominion in a time of peacenbsp;and progress. Early in the twentieth century much unrestnbsp;was caused by the rising tide of Indian nationalism, but afternbsp;the outbreak of the World War India gave hearty allegiancenbsp;to the British Empire and Indian troops fought valiantly onnbsp;many battlefields. In 1918 serious difficulties began again innbsp;India and in 1920 Gandhi started a policy of non-coöperation.nbsp;'File tide of nationalism mounted steadily until 1930 when anbsp;Conference opened in London on November 12 to considernbsp;means of meeting India’s demands for greater self-government. The membership of the Conference included thirteennbsp;British and seventy-six Indian delegates. Despite the varietynbsp;of castes, religions and races represented, and even thoughnbsp;the antagonism between Hindu and Moslem was evidencednbsp;in the Conference, yet the Indian representatives were unanimous in demanding responsible self-government for both thenbsp;Indian States and the British Indian provinces under a central government and the Conference closed January 21, 1931,nbsp;with a pledge of Indian autonomy. Some progress has beennbsp;made in the last few years to the attaining of this end, butnbsp;the diverse elements in Indian life hinder its speedy fulfilment.

Physical Features

The natural divisions of India are three: flj The hiçh mountain area.s of the north; (2) The river plains; ffij Thenbsp;peninsula proper, including the southern plateau of India.nbsp;These three geographical divisions form divisions also in language, race and characteristics of the people.

The Himalayas extend for 1,500 miles along the north in several parallel chains separated by deep valleys and tablenbsp;lands, Mt. Everest, the highest in the world, rises to anbsp;height of 29,000 feet in the northerly of these ranges. Thenbsp;Himalayas can be crossed only by passes at 17,000 to 19,000nbsp;feet. The chief of these passes are : The Khyber, the Kur-ram, the Gemal and the Bolan, which form the chief meansnbsp;of communication between India and the Northwest. In thenbsp;west the Himalaya ranees are continued by the Hindu Kushnbsp;and the Suleiman and Hala chains along the western borders.nbsp;The higher slopes of the Himalayas are devoid of vegetation,nbsp;but some of the mountain valleys are wide and fertile and,nbsp;especially in the case of Kashmir, are unexcelled for healthful climate and beauty.

The chief provinces of the river plains are Bengal, the United Provinces, the Punjab and Rajputana. On the alluvial lands of these sections are the densest population andnbsp;the richest agriculture of the empire. The principal riversnbsp;of India are the Indus, the Ganges, and the Brahmaputra.nbsp;The Indus rises on the northern slopes of the Himalayas,nbsp;sweeps around to the western extremity of the range andnbsp;flows southwestward through the Punjab into the Arabiannbsp;Sea. The Brahmaputra also rise.s on the northern slopes ofnbsp;the Himalayas and flows east on the north of those mountains, entering India at the extreme eastern point of thenbsp;ranges. The Ganges is formed by the union of the streamsnbsp;which drain the southernmost slopes of the Himalayas. Thenbsp;Ganges and the Brahmaputra finally run through Bengal andnbsp;empty into the Bay of Bengal.

The southern plateau comprises the Presidencies of Bombay and Madras, the Central Provinces and the states of Hyderabad and Mysore. This region was formerly callednbsp;the Deccan. To the north are the Vindhya mountains andnbsp;the Narbada and Tapti rivers. On the two sides of thisnbsp;plateau are the eastern Ghat.s and the western Ghats, thenbsp;latter being a higher range of mountains than the eastern.nbsp;The western Ghats form such a great barrier on the westernnbsp;coast that the rivers which rise in the mountains do not emptynbsp;into the near-by Arabian Sea, hut flow eastward across Indianbsp;to the Bay of Bengal.

Resources

About 20% of the area, chiefly in the mountains, is covered with forests, among the timber products being sandalwood, teak, ironwood, sal and cedar. The forests also yield shellac, rubber, palm balsam, turpentine, rosin and wood oils.nbsp;The date palm, banyan and acacia trees are found in variousnbsp;sections. The bamboo, the mango and the cocoanut, thoughnbsp;useless as timber, are very useful in many ways and arenbsp;widely distributed. The principal agricultural products arenbsp;rice, wheat, maize, millet, peanuts, sugar, ginger, spices andnbsp;tobacco. Cotton, jute and oilseeds are also important crops.nbsp;Cotton and silk-weaving, shawl and carpet weaving, woodnbsp;carving and metal working are important indigenous industries, Livestock furnishes another important source of income, India has important iron and other mineral ore deposits. Coal and petroleum, gold and silver are produced innbsp;considerable quantities. India ranks among the seven leadingnbsp;trading countries in the commerce of the world.

Progress

India’s railway mileage is second in extent in the world, being exceeded only by that of the United States. More thannbsp;40,950 miles of railway are in operation and new railwaynbsp;lines are being opened yearly. Although there is extensivenbsp;literature in the chief languages of India and Indian art andnbsp;architecture are famous throughout the W'orld, yet the progressnbsp;of the mass of Indian people is hindered because of the factnbsp;that more than 321,000,000 of the people are unable to readnbsp;and write. Under the influence of the British governmentnbsp;in India and with the help of many educated and enlightenednbsp;Indian leaders, definite progress is being made in educationnbsp;and economics and along industrial and jxjlitical lines. Onenbsp;of the most important influences contributing to this advancenbsp;is the work and lives of Christian missionaries and Indiannbsp;Christians, The iniquitous caste system and the conservatismnbsp;of the people with their opposition to change present greatnbsp;barriers to advancement.

Currency

The money of India is reckoned principally in rupees, annas and pies. Twelve pies make one anna, and sixteennbsp;annas equal one rupee. For many years the value of thenbsp;rupee was about one shilling fourpence in British money, butnbsp;in 1927 the Indian Currency Act placed the money on a goldnbsp;basis, fixing a new level of one shilling sixpence, equal atnbsp;that time to 36.4 cents U. S. Since the change in the valuenbsp;of the U. S. dollar, the rupee fluctuates in terms of U. S.nbsp;money. At the present time one rupee costs about 36 cents,nbsp;though the par value is listed at 61.79 cents. One hundrednbsp;thousand rupees equal 1 lakh, and 100 lakhs equal 1 crore.

Ten other languages are each spoken by more than one million people.

Bible Society records up to the end of 1934 show the following publication of the Scriptures in languages of India and Burma : Entire Bible, 22 ; New Testament only, 36 ;nbsp;Scrijjture portions, i. e. entire gospel or other book of Bible,nbsp;57 ; selections, less than entire gospel or other book, 2 ;nbsp;total, 117.

The three dialects of the Bihari language are spoken by about 28,000,000 people, yet the entire Bible has never beennbsp;translated in any one of the dialects. The New Testamentnbsp;was published in the Magahi dialect in 1911 ; and the Ixioksnbsp;of Matthew through II Corinthians in the Nagpuria dialectnbsp;of the Bihari language in 1907. The Bihari is evidently thenbsp;largest language group in the world in which the entire Biblenbsp;is not available. When we remember that, of the 225 distinctnbsp;language groups in India, only twenty-two have the entirenbsp;foible in the native tongue and only ninety-five others havenbsp;the New Testament or some Scripture portion, it will be seennbsp;that a large work yet remains to be done in making the Wordnbsp;of God available in all the languages of the people of India.

Religions

From the dawn of its history India has been a land of many religions. The majority of the jreople acknowledgenbsp;Hinduism or Brahmanism as their faith. The history ofnbsp;Hinduism is divided into several periods. First, the Vedicnbsp;era or earliest religious beliefs of the Aryan Hindus, extending from early times down to about 1000 B. C. ; second, thenbsp;development of Brahmanism as taught in the religious booksnbsp;called Brahmanas and the philosophical Upanishads. Thisnbsp;period continued until about 500 B. C. In the third periodnbsp;two religious reforms. Buddhism and Jainism, showed anbsp;strong reaction against decadent Brahmanism. This periodnbsp;continued from about 500 B. C. to 500 A. D. and epic Hinduism covers about the same time. During the next thousand years was the era of Brahmanic counter-reforms andnbsp;of sectarianism. While some changes are occurring therenbsp;has been no outstanding development in the last four centuries which would rank with the periods of the past.

Hinduism is the religion of more than 239,000,000 of the peoples of India. It boasts of 330,000,000 gods and goddesses and is a vile and impure idolatrous system. A notednbsp;writer says : “The Hindu believes that a religious motivenbsp;justifies every immorality, however gross. Indeed, lust hasnbsp;been deliberately deified, and the whole system of Hindunbsp;worship , . , is an active force for the corruption of morals.”nbsp;Since the Christian message has been widely proclaimed innbsp;India educated Hindus have sought to effect a reform ofnbsp;Hinduism through a combining of Christian ideas with thenbsp;old Hindu Vedas. These movements, such as the Brahnionbsp;Samaj and the Arya Samaj, are strongly rationalistic andnbsp;pantheistic even though progressive in spirit and seeking tonbsp;promote a measure of social reform. The Arya Samaj isnbsp;one of the most hostile and deadly enemies to Christianity innbsp;India.

Brahmanism requires the division of society into innumerable castes and thus the Hindu people are held in a rigid thraldom which jrermeates every phase of daily life and constitutes one of the greatest hindrances to missionary effort.nbsp;It restricts the circle in which marriage is permitted ; it engenders class hatred, and hinders the intellectual progress ofnbsp;the people. According to Hindu tradition the origin ofnbsp;castes goes back to the time of Brahma, when it is said thatnbsp;the Brahmans sprang from his head, the Kshatriyas fromnbsp;his arms, the Vaishyas from his thighs, and the Sudras fromnbsp;his feet. The Brahmans are the priests and have sole chargenbsp;of the sacred books; they guide and direct the rest of thenbsp;castes and offer sacrifices. They compel all others to paynbsp;them homage even to the extent of worship. The Kshatriya.snbsp;are the warriors from whom the Rajputs claim direct descent.nbsp;It is their business to govern under the direction of thenbsp;Brahmans. The Vaishyas, or husbandmen, shared with thenbsp;two higher classes the privilege of hearing the Veda.s but nownbsp;are actually more closely related to the lowest class. Thenbsp;Sudras are the servants whose business it is to wait on andnbsp;serve the three higher castes. There are now many subdivisions in the castes. No caste member may eat with persons of another caste or receive food prepared for them.nbsp;Each of the several hundred divisions of castes has its ownnbsp;elaborate rules. The outcastes are held by Hinduism in thenbsp;lowest level of human debasement and are treated with scornnbsp;and contempt, but it is from among these people that a largenbsp;portion of the Christians have been won. Some membersnbsp;of other castes have been so moved by the power of Godnbsp;through the gospel that they too have forsaken all to follownbsp;Christ, but the number of converts from the higher castesnbsp;is lamentably small.

The second great religion of India is Mohammedanism, which was introduced into India in the eleventh century andnbsp;spread rapidly. Today more than 77,600,000 Indians arenbsp;Moslems.

The Parsees, devotees of Zoroastrianism, are sun and nature worshippers. They are for the most part a highly cultured people and the Parsee women are given a place of high regard and affection in the family life, and freedom in thenbsp;affairs of the Parsee communities, in striking contrast fornbsp;the most part to the treatment of women by the Moslems andnbsp;the various Hindu cults.

A movement is in progress in India among the outcaste peoples to decide upon their future religious affiliation. Theynbsp;are turning from Hindu oppression and considering Christianity. May God grant a sweeping revival throughout thenbsp;church of Christ in India which will lead to their evangelization.

The following table shows the population by religions as given in the 1931 census :

Religion nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Adherents

Hindus 239,195,140 Muslims nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;77,677,545

Buddhists nbsp;nbsp;12,786,806

Tribal (Animists) nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;8,280,347

Christians .................... 6,296,763

Sikhs nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;4,335,771

Jains nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;1,252,105

Zoroastrians nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;109,752

Jews .................................... 24,141

Minor religions and religions not returned .. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;571,187

Not enumerated by religions nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;2,308,221

Total 352,837,778

The Hindu community is classified as follows :

Brahmans nbsp;nbsp;15,237,452

Caste 171,190,624 Non-caste or outcastenbsp;nbsp;nbsp;52,194,526

Undetermined nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;572,538

239,195,140

The census of India enumerates 137 different primitive tribes and while the total number of tribal peoples is givennbsp;as 24,613,848, yet most of these are Hindus and only 8,280,-347 profess their old tribal religions. In the Central Provinces are 4,065,277 tribesmen who live mainly in the hillsnbsp;and forests. Of these 1,975,214 profess their tribal religions.nbsp;In the province of Bombay there are 2,841,080, but onlynbsp;155,038 hold to their tribal religion. Many of these tribesnbsp;have proved to be quite open to the gospel message and thenbsp;Christian forces of India, both missionary and Indian, shouldnbsp;endeavor to see that every tribe has an adequate witness ofnbsp;the gospel within its boundaries and in its own tongue. Thenbsp;two provinces offering the greatest field for this increasednbsp;ministry are Central India and Rajputana Agency. Barodanbsp;and Hyderabad also offer many opportunities for such pioneer work.

The increase in the number of Christians in India and Burma during the past fifty years, including all races andnbsp;sects both Indian and European, Roman Catholic, Syrian andnbsp;Protestant, is shown in the following table :

1881 1,862,634

1891 2,284,380

1901 2,923,241

1911 3,876,203

1921 4,754,664

1931 6,296,763

The Christians in 1931 included 3,002,558 Protestants; 2,113,659 Roman Catholics; and 1,180,546 Syrians.

Although we rejoice in the fact that the Protestant Christians increased by 41% from 1921 to 1931 while the Hindus increased only 10.4% and the Moslems 13% during the samenbsp;period, yet when we consider the increase in numbers ournbsp;hearts should be filled with a burden of prayer and intercession. During the decade ending 1931 the number of Hindusnbsp;increased by more than 22,000,000, Moslems by aboutnbsp;9,000,000, and the total population of India by more thannbsp;33,000,000; whereas the number of Protestant Christiansnbsp;increased by less than 1,000,000, and Christians of all groupsnbsp;by a little more than one and one-half million. In othernbsp;words, the total number of professing Christians in all ofnbsp;India and Burma in 1931 (6,296,763) is less than one-fifthnbsp;as large as the increase in population during the previous tennbsp;years, and there are still more than 346,000,000 held enslavednbsp;by false religions.

Missionary Occupation

Although there is no historic proof that India was visited by apostolic messengers in the first generation of the church,nbsp;yet it seems probable that soon after Pentecost the gospelnbsp;was taken to India, for history relates that Pantaenus ofnbsp;Alexandria went to India about A. D. 190, in response to annbsp;appeal for Christian teachers, and found Christians therenbsp;who possessed a Hebrew Gospel of St. Matthew.

In a portion of southwest India extending about 200 miles along the coast and twenty to forty miles into the interior,nbsp;there is a population of nearly five million, more than one-fourth of whom are Syrian or St. Thomas Christians. Thesenbsp;claim that the gospel first came to their ancestors throughnbsp;the ministry of St. Thomas about A. D. 52. Some writersnbsp;think that he had previously visited what is now known asnbsp;the Punjab about A. D. 48-49. For many centuries thesenbsp;Christians in southwest India were considered to be a partnbsp;of the Nestorian Church. A missionary of the United Freenbsp;Church of Scotland in Madras, South India, the Rev. Johnnbsp;Stewart wrote a valuable book entitled “Nestorian Missionary Enterprise, The Story of a Church on Fire.” We commend this book to those who wish to make a careful study ofnbsp;the missionary movement which swept over all of Asia in thenbsp;early centuries of the Christian era. The zeal of Nestoriannbsp;witnesses for Christ was such that in the fourth century therenbsp;were about 350 flourishing churches in India.

Frances Xavier, a disciple of Loyola, founder of the Jesuits, commenced the great missionary work of that order in India. In 1540 he was sent by the Pope to Goa, the Portuguese colony on the west coast of India, and later labored innbsp;southern India for several years and baptized thousands ofnbsp;Indians before going on to the Malay Peninsula and later tonbsp;Japan. The zeal and devotion of this man reveals such anbsp;self-forgetting and self-denying passion for the souls of mennbsp;as to make his ministry an example of enthusiasm, loyaltynbsp;and zeal, even though he labored in connection with an organization which is to-day one of the bitterest enemies ofnbsp;Protestant religion.

Dr. A. T. Pierson calls the great missionary, Christian Frederic Schwartz, “the founder of the native Christiannbsp;Church in India.” He went to India in 1750 and ministerednbsp;with singular piety, zealous love, and extraordinary gifts fornbsp;forty-eight years. Other missionaries of this Danish-Hallenbsp;Mission did effective work for God as the first Protestantnbsp;missionaries to India.

In June, 1793, William Carey, the English cobbler, and missionary zealot, sailed to India with his wife and a companion, being compelled to travel on a Danish ship becausenbsp;the British East India Company was so hostile to missionarynbsp;work that it would not permit him to travel on any Englishnbsp;ship. For years Carey supported himself while masteringnbsp;several languages, preaching daily and working at the translation of the scriptures. Later the Governor General appointed him as teacher of Bengali, Marathi and Sanskrit innbsp;Fort William College, Calcutta. With his salary Carey supported himself and his colleagues on a frugal scale and devoted the larger portion to the promotion of missionary work.nbsp;By Carey’s labors or under his supervision Scriptures innbsp;whole or part were translated into thirty-five languages ornbsp;dialects. He compiled dictionaries in Bengali and Marathinbsp;and grammars in these and three other languages.

Among other noted early missionaries to India were : Alexander Duff, an eloquent missionary orator who not only

did effective missionary work himself but moved hundreds to go and thousands to give; Reginald Heber, who duringnbsp;his four years in India became the second Bishop of Calcuttanbsp;and so lived and wrought for Christ as to leave an undyingnbsp;memory; and Adoniram Judson, who was driven out ofnbsp;India to Burma and thus became God’s messenger to thenbsp;Karens, being used of God to win thousands to Christ asnbsp;well as to translate the Bible into Burmese. The names ofnbsp;Taylor, Scudder, Thoburn, are prominent in the long list ofnbsp;missionary heroes, both men and women, who lived and labored for Christ in India. Mrs. Sorabji, wife of one of thenbsp;first Christian converts from the Parsees, and Panditanbsp;Ramabai, a cultured and educated Brahman woman who became a Christian and was widely acknowledged to be one ofnbsp;the most distinguished women of India, are among the goodlynbsp;number of precious saints who were valiant soldiers of Christnbsp;among their own people in India.

The Directory of Christian Missions for 1934-35 gives the number of foreign missionaries as follows :

India 5,432

Burma nbsp;358

Ceylon nbsp;nbsp;240

Total 6,030

These represent fifty-three missionary societies of U. S. A., sixty-five of Great Britain, and thirty from other Europeannbsp;countries and the British dominions. In addition to these,nbsp;forty-one native societies in India, Burma and Ceylon hadnbsp;1,554 missionaries laboring in those lands. Foreign missionaries are located in 346 of the 2,483 towns in India (not including Burma and Ceylon) and in 637 of the 663,444 villages in India, leaving 2,137 towns and 662,807 villages without missionary occupation, although Indian workers andnbsp;m'embers are in several thousand villages and many towns.nbsp;Nevertheless, India remains one of the neediest mission fieldsnbsp;of the world. In the 562 Native Indian States there are onlynbsp;885 missionaries and 603,437 Protestant Christians (1931)nbsp;among a population of more than 80,000,000 people. Ofnbsp;these 885 missionaries, 551 are in Hyderbad, Mysore and thenbsp;five Madras States, leaving only 334 for the other 555 Indiannbsp;States.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

The work of The Christian and Missionary Alliance in India began in 1892 when a small group of missionaries,nbsp;organized under the name of the North Berar Mission, transferred their membership and their Mission in Akola to Thenbsp;Christian and Missionary Alliance. Seventeen new missionaries were added the first year and twelve new stations werenbsp;opened.

Although the Alliance Mission in India is a unit administratively, its work is in two distinct areas and languages. The Marathi language area is in East Khandesh, a district of thenbsp;Bombay Presidency, and in the adjacent province of Berar,nbsp;which is a part of that portion of India known as the Centralnbsp;Provinces and Berar. The Gujarati language area is innbsp;Gujarat, the northern part of the Bombay Presidency.

In area Bombay is the third largest province of India, only Madras and Burma being larger. It includes the Bombaynbsp;Presidency, Sind and 184 Native Indian States. The province has an area of 151,593 square miles and a population ofnbsp;26,347,519 (excluding Aden). There are 699 foreign missionaries and 113 Indian missionaries. (This does not include the several hundred Indian pastors and evangelistsnbsp;working in the various missions and Indian churches.) Therenbsp;are in the province 137,000 Protestant Christians, an increasenbsp;of 19.2% during the decade, 1921-1931. Of these 24.5%nbsp;are literate. The number of primitive tribesmen is the secondnbsp;greatest in India, being two and three-quarter million, andnbsp;presents a great field for pioneer effort.

The Bombay Presidency itself has an area of 77,221 square miles and a population of 17,992,053 with 299,664 listed asnbsp;Christians including Roman Catholics and Protestants. Thenbsp;184 Native Indian States and Agencies in Bombay Provincenbsp;have a population of 4,468,396. The Christian communitynbsp;numbers 16,011.

For the Central Provinces and Berar are the following figures :

Area Population nbsp;Christians nbsp;Foreign missionaries nbsp;Indian missionaries

Within the Central Provinces are seventy-five Native States having native Indian rulers. The population of thesenbsp;States is 2,483,214, of which 51,701 are listed as Christians,nbsp;including Protestants and Catholic. However, there is nonbsp;missionary work being done in ten of these Native States.

Although there has been excellent train service between the principal stations in both sections of our field in India, thenbsp;work in the districts formerly had to be carried on throughnbsp;travel by ox-cart or horse-tonga, but in recent years the roadsnbsp;have been made suitable for automobile travel and in mostnbsp;of the counties the automobile is a real aid in itinerating innbsp;the districts, thus promoting a more speedy evangelization ofnbsp;the field.

Gujarati Area

The Alliance work in Gujarat is in the Ahmedabad and Kaira (political) districts of the Bombay Presidency. Thenbsp;Alliance stations in the Ahmedabad district (area 3,846nbsp;square miles, population 999,768) are as follows :

Ahmedabad City. This city (population, 234,265), the eighth largest in India, lies about 310nbsp;miles north of Bombay and is the seat of government of thenbsp;province of Gujarat. It is an important railway junction ofnbsp;the Bombay, Baroda amp; Central India Railway, and an industrial center. Its people speak eighteen different languagesnbsp;and there are about 65,000 Moslems practically untouched bynbsp;the gospel.

From among the Hindus God has given fruit and the work, which was opened in 1894 by pioneer missionaries who entered there in 1893 for language study, has steadily grown!nbsp;until there are now two large active churches. The Simpsonnbsp;Memorial Church became in 1926 the first self-supportingnbsp;Gujarati church. In 1931 another church was formed in the-Railwaypura section of the city, and this church also is making progress in self-support.

The Ahmedabad mission district, including the two outstations—Shantipur (“Village of Peace”) and Vatwa, is now under the supervision of the missionary couple in Meh-medabad ; the principal work in the larger city being donenbsp;by the Indian pastor and members of the churches there.

The city of Ahmedabad offers an unparalleled challenge to the messenger of the Cross in Gujarat. It is to this centernbsp;that the villagers of the surrounding district come when famine or other calamity cut short their meager resource for theirnbsp;daily bread. The ever-busy cotton gins and mills always-afford a means of livelihood to those who will work. It wasnbsp;from such a center as this that Paul sent forth the livingnbsp;message to the then known world.

Mehmedabad. Twenty miles south of Ahmedabad on the

main line of the B. B. amp; C. I. railway is-the city of Mehmedabad (population, about 10,000), famous-in ancient days because of being one of the former homes of

the infamous Bluebeard. Now its reputation rests on a more sure foundation, it being the center of aggressive gospel ministry and church development. The growth of the work hasnbsp;been steady since the opening of the station in 1897 and fornbsp;many years the Mehmedabad district has had more churchesnbsp;within its boundaries than any other district in our Alliancenbsp;field in Gujarat.

Seven miles southwest of Mehmedabad lies Kaira, known for many years in Alliance circles as the site of thenbsp;Gujarati orphanage for famine girls. In 1894 a large bungalow was purchased and a station opened. In 1897 orphannbsp;girls from the Marathi famine area were sent here and innbsp;19(X) the great Gujarati famine swelled their numbers to overnbsp;600. Several times in the history of the orphanage therenbsp;have been seasons of special spiritual blessing when manynbsp;have been saved. In recent years the orphanage has beennbsp;conducted as a Girls’ Boarding School and, as mentioned innbsp;a later paragraph, has now been transferred to Dholka, wherenbsp;it is carried on in a compound adjoining the Boys’ School.nbsp;The Kaira property, with the exception of the portion onnbsp;which the native church building stands, has been sold to thenbsp;Salvation Army for its welfare work.

The district missionaries reside in Mehmedabad, supervising the work in what was formerly Ahmedabad, Kaira, Matar and Mehmedabad mission districts. The change has beennbsp;made possible by the rapid advance of the Gujarati churchesnbsp;in self-support, self-government, and evangelism. In thenbsp;combined district are the following twelve organizednbsp;churches all under native church government :

These churches had a total membership of 848. There is also a group of believers at Ghodassar.

The Alliance is the only mission agency in the combined district with the exception of the Salvation Army in Ahmedabad and Kaira and the Irish Presbyterian Mission innbsp;Ahmedabad.

Dholka. T wenty-three miles southwest of Ahmedabad is the city of Dholka with a population of aboutnbsp;12,000, from which a large area extending into the Peninsulanbsp;of Kathiawar may be reached. Dholka is probably bestnbsp;known in the Alliance because of the boys’ orphanage whichnbsp;has been located there since the opening of the station innbsp;1897. At one time, because of severe famine conditions,nbsp;more than 600 boys were cared for. Not only were thesenbsp;boys led to Christ but many of them have become faithfulnbsp;witnesses for the Lord in different parts of India and anbsp;goodly number are Indian pastors and evangelists, havingnbsp;been trained in the Gujarati Bible Training School, whichnbsp;was carried on in Dholka for many years and later conductednbsp;in Mehmedabad. The first funds for the support of thenbsp;Bible School were contributed by the orphans who each weeknbsp;went without one of their two daily meals in order that thenbsp;money thus saved might be used for the Bible School.

The orphanage is no longer carried on as such but is conducted as a Boys’ Boarding School. In 1934 as a measure of economy and convenience the Girls’ School at Kaira, whichnbsp;was also a successor of the large orphanage for girls carriednbsp;on since famine days, was moved to Dholka where the Mission has a compound sufficiently large to permit of the conducting of the two schools at a saving both of money and ofnbsp;the services of missionaries and Indian workers. Thesenbsp;schools give a considerable amount of Bible teaching in theirnbsp;regular curriculum.

Dholka is also the center of a large district in which active evangelistic work is carried on. There are three organizednbsp;churches in the district under native church government, atnbsp;Dholka, Ashapur (“Village of Hope”), the largest of thenbsp;four Christian villages in the Gujarati field, and among thenbsp;Bhils at AndhOri. These three churches have a combinednbsp;membership of 175.

There is a large territory in Kathiawar south of the Dholka district with needy multitudes who are for the most partnbsp;unevangelized. The Methodist Mission has an outstationnbsp;and church in one portion of Kathiawar but there is stillnbsp;opportunity for pioneer work.

Sanand. Sixteen miles west of Ahmedabad by rail is San-and, a city of about 6,500 people. Gospel work was begun there during the great famine of 1900 by a formernbsp;army man who gathered together orphans and housed themnbsp;in grass huts. Later this army man and his work came intonbsp;the Alliance. To the north is the native state of Kadi, whichnbsp;is open to the gospel and where the Alliance has several outstations. Much colportage work has been done and missionaries who have toured in this area found the people to benbsp;responsive listeners to the gospel. There is a small organizednbsp;church in Sanand under native church government.

Viramgam. Still farther westward from Ahmedabad at the end of the railway line from Bombay is thenbsp;city of Viramgam, the capital of a large district of the samenbsp;name. Work was begun here in 1897, but the harvest seemednbsp;long delayed. Recently the reaping began and an indigenousnbsp;church worshipping in its own building and supporting itsnbsp;pastor is hearing fruit for the Master. There is also in thisnbsp;city a large group of Christians from the sweeper caste whonbsp;hold regular meetings.

Viramgam is rapidly becoming a railway and commercial center of importance with lines reaching up into Sind andnbsp;presents a very needy field of opportunity for the gospel.nbsp;The district surrounding Viramgam is comparatively wealthynbsp;and is unique in that there are few low caste people. To thenbsp;north are a number of Native States of various sizes containing many cities, towns and villages without the gospel.nbsp;To the northwest lies Cutch, where some of our missionariesnbsp;are hoping for an opportunity to enter with the gospel message.

The North The Alliance Mission in India proposes to Country. enter as soon as possible an area called thenbsp;North Country. This section lies directlynbsp;north of Ahmedabad and east of the railway. It is estimatednbsp;that there are about 3CK),000 people without a gospel witness.nbsp;This territory is well covered with railways and many centersnbsp;are thus readily accessible. The plan being considered fornbsp;the occupation of this area is to locate a missionary couple innbsp;Ahmedabad, where during the monsoon (rainy season) anbsp;very useful ministry could be carried on especially among thenbsp;young people in the city and in Short Term Bible Schoolnbsp;work. During the dry season this missionary couple couldnbsp;move north and make their headquarters for several monthsnbsp;in some city like Mehsana. From this center much virginnbsp;territory could be entered in gospel ministry. Outstationsnbsp;should be opened as soon as possible with Spirit-filled Indiannbsp;evangelists located in the several districts. We believe thisnbsp;to be the next important line of advance for the India Mission. Let those who read these paragraphs help throughnbsp;prayer to prepare the way and thrust forth the laborers.

Marathi Area

East of Bombay lies the Marathi language area with its twelve main stations of the Christian and Missionary Alliance, beginning with Chalisgaon, East Khandesh, nearly 200nbsp;miles from Bombay, and extending eastward along the Greatnbsp;Indian Peninsula railway another 200 miles to Chandur innbsp;Berar.

The East Khandesh district of the Bombay Presidency has an area of 4,551 square miles and a population of 1,206,035.nbsp;Missionaries of two other Societies have stations in five counties (talukas), and the Christian and Missionary Alliance isnbsp;solely responsible for the talukas of Pachora, Jalgaon andnbsp;Bhusawal. In the latter district there are two stations,nbsp;Bhusawal and Nargaon.

Berar has an area of 17,767 square miles and a population of 3,441,838, of which 5,395 are listed as Christians. Fivenbsp;Missions are working in twenty counties or talukas in Berar,nbsp;but no other Society is laboring in any of the seven talukasnbsp;where the Alliance has missionaries.

Chalisgaon. Traveling northeast from Bombay about 200 miles on the Great Indian Peninsular railwaynbsp;or by automobile over the beautiful Ghat range, we reachnbsp;first this station, which is the center of a county or taluka ofnbsp;about 103,000 population and was opened by the Alliance innbsp;1895. Throughout the years the gospel has been preachednbsp;faithfully, but the district has been for the most part verynbsp;barren and only a small number of converts have been wonnbsp;to Christ. In 1932-33 a goodly number of villagers turnednbsp;to Christ and there is now an organized church under nativenbsp;church government partially, supporting its own pastor.nbsp;There is abundant evidence that the Spirit of God is workingnbsp;graciously in several villages of this district. Recently therenbsp;has been a blessed ingathering from among the Bhil tribe.

Pachora. Twenty-five miles further is the station of Pachora, opened in 1895 and occupied for twenty-five years by one lone worker whose Christlike life among the people earned for him the title of “white saint.” In 1912 anbsp;chapel was erected in this center of 120,000 population andnbsp;regular church services are held under the leadership of anbsp;native evangelist. Work has been carried on among thenbsp;Vanjari tribe and the first fruits have been won.

Jalgaon. To the north about thirty miles in a district having 100,000 population is located the next station, Jalgaon, a large cotton spinning and weaving town and thenbsp;most important trade center in East Khandesh. Here worknbsp;was begun in 1895 against great opposition and persecutionnbsp;and, while it continues to be one of Satan’s strongholds, yetnbsp;the attitude of the people has changed somewhat and there isnbsp;now a more responsive reception of the truth and each yearnbsp;some converts are baptized. The flourishing church hasnbsp;built a tabernacle practically without foreign help and provides part support of the pastor. A number of its membersnbsp;find opportunities for service in police camps, the hospitalnbsp;and the penal colony.

Bhusawal. This town, sixteen miles eastward, is the largest in a county of 66,000 population. It was formerly an important railway repair center employing overnbsp;4,000 people, but the shops have now been moved to Bombaynbsp;thus reducing the population. The Alliance began work herenbsp;in 1896 first among the English-speaking population andnbsp;later extended it to the native people. The Marathi-speakingnbsp;church is not only fully self-supporting but they contributenbsp;monthly to the Central Pastors Fund, from which other native pastors are paid. They have assumed responsibility alsonbsp;for preaching in a number of near-by villages and gospelnbsp;bands visit these places.

The Day Schools previously conducted by the Mission have been turned over to the Public School Board, thus allowing the missionaries to give their full time to spiritualnbsp;ministry.

In the English-speaking branch most of the members are railway employees who are often transferred, and thus thenbsp;full gospel message is carried to other centers as these believers are scattered. The testimony of the gospel in Bhusawal has been attended with much blessing and outstandingnbsp;healings have increased the interest.

Pentecostal workers have entered Bhusawal recently and established a church among the Anglo Indians.

Nargaon. Traveling about twenty miles southeastward we reach the station at Nargaon, the center of a village community of 60,000 in the eastern section of thenbsp;Bhusawal taluka. In 1908 a Bible Training School wasnbsp;opened here for the instruction and practical training of future workers of the Marathi language area. This school hasnbsp;been closed temporarily but is expected to be reopened.

Malkapur. Immediately after leaving Nargaon we cross the boundary between East Khandesh andnbsp;Berar Provinces and a sixteen-mile run brings us to Malkapur, a town with a large Mohammedan population situatednbsp;in a district of 160,000. Although the work here was startednbsp;in 1896, the shortage of laborers and the inability to rentnbsp;property prevented the residence of missionaries until 1912.nbsp;The difficulty of work in this Moslem place is attested by thenbsp;fact that not until 1922 were the first converts, a man andnbsp;wife, baptized. There is now a small organized church innbsp;Malkapur under native government and the signs of harvestnbsp;are encouraging.

Khamgaon. Twenty miles east on the main line of railway and then eight miles south on a branch, isnbsp;Khamgaon, a place of considerable importance and the centernbsp;of a population of 137,000. Here work began at an earlynbsp;date, there having been opened in 1893 a Girls’ Orphanage,nbsp;which now continues as a Girls’ Boarding School. The firstnbsp;generation of students having married are now sending theirnbsp;own girls back to their Alma Mater. There are two organized churches under native church government, one innbsp;Khamgaon and a smaller one in Khamgaon Rural circle.

Akola. Returning to the main line and continuing eastward for about thirty miles we come to Akola, the centernbsp;of a county with 156,700 population, commercially, politicallynbsp;and in our mission administration the most important citynbsp;on the route through Marathi country. Here a small groupnbsp;of missionaries, which had organized in 1881 under the namenbsp;of the North Berar Mission, in 1892 placed its property andnbsp;work in the hands of The Christian and Missionary Alliance.nbsp;Seventeen new missionaries were added the first year andnbsp;soon twelve new stations had been opened. Today at Akolanbsp;is located the headquarters of our whole India Mission, thenbsp;residence of the chairman, and the receiving home for newnbsp;missionaries. The Annual Missionary Conference is held innbsp;Akola.

The Marathi church in this city has a large membership and is not only supporting its own pastor but is handlingnbsp;church problems and developing the work of the church innbsp;such a way as to show a healthy growth in spiritual powernbsp;and in zeal for the upbuilding of the work. A strong Sundaynbsp;school is an efficient aid in the work of the church. There isnbsp;an unorganized group of believers at Borgaon in this district.

The work in the Akola district includes missionary itineration during the touring season and visitation of outstations, of which there are three, one being in Balapur, the countynbsp;seat. In recent years people throughout the county, whonbsp;formerly were indifferent or opposed the gospel even to thenbsp;point of stoning the workers, are now showing a real interestnbsp;in the message and high caste and low listen to the Word ofnbsp;God.

One very interesting phase of ministry in this taluka is the Boys’ School at Santa Barbara, a few miles from Akola. Anbsp;missionary is stationed here to direct the work. The boysnbsp;are trained to become strong, manly men and led into thenbsp;reality of a Spirit-filled, Christian life. The boys as well asnbsp;the teachers are faithful in witnessing for Christ to thenbsp;heathen round about.

Murtizapur. Eastward for another thirty miles finds us at Murtizapur, a railway junction and cottonnbsp;center with a county of 134,500 population where work wasnbsp;begun in 1893. It was here and at Daryapur, now an outstation, that there came the first great break in the Marathinbsp;area, and today Christians are found in thirty of the 328 villages and towns of the Murtizapur district. The largestnbsp;groups of believers in this district are in Murtizapur, Gung-shi and Jampti.

One very interesting and important ministry carried on throughout most of the year in the Murtizapur station is thenbsp;holding of special fellowship meetings in the afternoons andnbsp;evenings, giving to the high caste people especially an opportunity to come and converse about Him, Who is the Way,nbsp;the Truth and the Life. Gospel hymns are sung in Marathi,nbsp;Hindi and English. Messages are given from the Word andnbsp;personal heart to heart talks aid in the effort to reach thesenbsp;inquiring ones with the gospel. Many castes are often represented. In a recent year those coming to the bungalow services included men from twenty-two villages of the Murtizapurnbsp;taluka. Patels, village headmen, often came bringing newnbsp;friends with them. Men have come also from six surrounding counties and guests visiting friends in Murtizapur werenbsp;brought to the meetings from Gujarat, Bombay, Sholapur,nbsp;Hyderabad, Miraj, Saharanpur, Nagpur, and Balaghat.nbsp;Thus from one small center the Word of God was broadcastnbsp;to many in varying walks of life and from widespread areas.nbsp;Anjangaon. Leaving the main line of the G. I. P. railwaynbsp;we go thirty miles north on the Central Provinces railway to Anjangaon in the county of Daryapur, anbsp;town of 7,000 in a county of 130,000. Anjangaon (listed asnbsp;Daryapur in earlier years) was originally superintended fromnbsp;Murtizapur but the growth of the work required a separatenbsp;station, which was established about 1920. There are Christians in over fifty of the 237 villages. A sifting and deepening of the work is now going on. There are four outstations,nbsp;two of which—Daryapur and Akot—are county seats. Bothnbsp;of these are fruitful and promising fields. From Akot talukanbsp;came Bhivaji, an earnest and efficient evangelist, formerly annbsp;outcaste, village bred and steeped in idolatry. Now hundredsnbsp;have given up idolatry through his logical and scathing denouncement of it, combined with rare tact and real love fornbsp;souls. In this district are three organized churches undernbsp;native government—Hingini-Anjanffaon, Daryapur-Nardoda,nbsp;and Akot-Panori—with a total membership of 214.

Short Term Bible Schools and Bible Institutes are proving a very fruitful aid in the building up of the Christians in thenbsp;knowledge and service of Christ.

Amraoti. Returning to Murtizapur we again follow the main line eastward for thirty miles to Badnera,nbsp;from whence a branch railway line runs north six miles tonbsp;Amraoti, the next Alliance station in one of the largest cotton markets in Berar. Amraoti is a place of financial andnbsp;political importance, located in a county of more than 180,000nbsp;people. Work was begun here in 1893, and there is now annbsp;organized church under native government. The outstationsnbsp;where there are unorganized groups of believers under mission government include Kolhapur, Phulamala and Badnera.nbsp;In the city of Amraoti and in Badnera excellent work hasnbsp;been done in children’s meetings, and in the former citynbsp;among the Normal School girls, in addition to the usual worknbsp;in the station and district.

Chandur. Once again the main line takes us from Badnera junction about eighteen miles to Chandur, thenbsp;most eastern of our India stations, located in a county ofnbsp;over 193,000 population. Opened in 1894, this station baptized its first converts during the great famine of 1897 tonbsp;1900. For many years thereafter the work was difficult andnbsp;without large returns in the number of conversions, but during the last decade and a half the earlier years of faithfulnbsp;seed sowing have begun to show a gracious harvest.

The church in Chandur is under native government and there are unorganized groups of believers under mission government in Cherodi, Malegaon-Tewsa and Pohur. A nativenbsp;worker is also stationed in Rajura, a large town ten milesnbsp;from Chandur.

The climate of our field in India is

Children’s Home, such that it is vitally important for the missionaries to spend a few weeks eachnbsp;year at some hill station during the extremely hot season.nbsp;The Mission has a modest bungalow in each of two near-bynbsp;hill stations: Chikalda and Lonavla. The altitude of thesenbsp;places, however, is not sufficient to give a proper change ofnbsp;climate to those most in need of rest nor can the green vegetables and fruits, so important to the building up of the body,nbsp;be obtained to a sufficient degree. The hill station at Oota-camund in South India has sufficient altitude to make it annbsp;ideal place for the hot season rest time. A Home for children of Alliance missionaries is maintained here, where anbsp;fine English School is available for the educating of the children. A missionary serves as matron of the Home. Manynbsp;of the missionaries have not been able to spend the hot seasonnbsp;in Ootacamund because of the lack of accommodations in thenbsp;Children’s Home and the very high cost of renting rooms innbsp;other houses. The Mission hopes to purchase another bungalow soon so as to provide more fully for the needs of thenbsp;missionaries.

The work which the late Pandita Ramabai founded and carried on in Kedgaon,nbsp;Poona District, is still being continuednbsp;along the lines laid down by the founder. Before her deathnbsp;Pandita Ramabai provided in her will that The Christian andnbsp;Missionary Alliance in India should be asked to assume responsibility for such oversight and direction of the work atnbsp;Kedgaon as would insure its remaining true to the principlesnbsp;which had characterized its history under the blessing of God.

The Ramabai Mukti Mission, however, continues to function as a separate body under a Board of Trustees and is represented in America by The American Council of Thenbsp;Ramabai Mukti Mission, through whose efforts people in thenbsp;various denominations and church groups are made acquainted with the work, and funds are provided through thesenbsp;channels and also through interested groups in Great Britainnbsp;and Australia for the support of the valuable Christian ministries at Kedgaon for needy women of India. One or twonbsp;experienced women missionaries of the Alliance Mission in

India are usually assigned to the work in Kedgaon as a contribution of the Alliance to the Ramabai Mukti Mission.

The Indian Christian and Missionary Alliance

In November of 1931 the new constitution for the Indian Christian and Missionary Alliance came into active being andnbsp;from that time forward a self-supporting, self-governing andnbsp;self-propagating church, more conscious of itself than evernbsp;before, has been taking its responsibilities and burdens cheerfully and is proving worthy of the confidence placed in it.nbsp;In 1932 were held the first meetings of the Marathi andnbsp;Gujarati Synods, when missionaries and Indian laymen andnbsp;preachers met on a common footing and considered the problems of the Indian Church. Responsibility is passing fromnbsp;the missionary to our Indian brethren. The goal of the Indianbsp;Mission is an indigenous Indian Church. Results have beennbsp;encouraging. With the Indian church assuming responsibility financially and spiritually, greater opportunity is afforded for the missionaries to do pioneer work in hitherto-unreached areas.

The adult Christians in the Indian Alliance churches number only a few more than two thousand and with their children form a community of nearly four thousand scattered in about 175 towns and villages throughout the field. Localnbsp;conventions are held among them and Short Term Biblenbsp;Schools and night Bible classes are conducted where possiblenbsp;in order to teach the Christians to observe all that the Lordnbsp;has commanded and to train them for efficient witnessing,nbsp;and the Lord’s blessing has rested upon this phase of ournbsp;work.

These Christians out of their poverty are fully supporting eight pastors and partially supporting thirty-seven othernbsp;workers, including pastors, evangelists and teachers. Laynbsp;workers also hold many services, seeking to win the unsavednbsp;to Christ. The churches are more and more taking theirnbsp;place as coworkers with the Mission in making Christ knownnbsp;in India.

The most important mineral products are gold, diamonds, copper, coal and iron. Many large wild animals are foundnbsp;in the forests and monkeys of various kinds are found allnbsp;over the continent.

Progress

The governments and commercial interests of various European countries have during the past century and a halfnbsp;penetrated all parts of Africa for the exploration of thenbsp;natural resources and in the past few decades there has beennbsp;rapid development of transportation facilities, althoughnbsp;Africa is still the most backward continent. The buildingnbsp;of railroads and roads is progressing rapidly in many parts;nbsp;esjTecially south Africa, Rhodesia in East Africa, and northwest Africa are now provided with a network of fair highways suitable for use as motor roads. The airplane is beingnbsp;used quite extensively by European countries to form anbsp;closer link with their colonial interests. Through Missionnbsp;Schools and later government schools in many colonies, education has advanced, although hundreds of tribes are stillnbsp;enveloped in the darkness of ignorance and superstition.nbsp;Among a few tribes cannibalism still exists, mainly in connection with religious rites.

Religion

The Lutheran World Almanac for 1933 gives the following figures as to the religions represented in Africa ;

Greek or Orthodox Catholic nbsp;nbsp;5,868,089

Roman Catholic nbsp;nbsp;3,347,166

Protestant Christians nbsp;nbsp;2,768,072

Jews nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;527,499

Mohammedans 54,588,211 Others (mostly pagan tribes) 83,209,616

Mohammedanism predominates in north Africa, and in east and west Africa it has brought many millions of peoplenbsp;and many whole tribes under its sway. Hundreds of tribesnbsp;still in the depths of paganism and fetish worship should benbsp;given the gospel message before Mohammedanism lays itsnbsp;deadly hand upon them.

Missionary Occupation

d'he Moravians were the pioneers of Protestant Missions in Africa, the first missionary going in 1737 to South Africa,nbsp;where within four years there was a little group of baptizednbsp;Christians, The Dutch settlers were bitterly hostile and innbsp;1743 this pioneer was ordered home by the authorities andnbsp;never jjermitted to return. It was half a century beforenbsp;Protestant work was resumed.

During the past century many Societies from Europe and America have labored in the dark continent, among themnbsp;being the Church Missionary Society of England, Thenbsp;American Mission (United Presbyterian), Egypt Generalnbsp;Mission, Abyssinian Erontiers Mission, South Africa General Mission, Africa Inland Mission, United Brethren, Wesleyan Mission, Sudan Interior Mission, Southern Baptist,nbsp;Paris Evangelization Society, Methodist Episcopal, Presbyterian, Mennonite, Heart of Africa Mission, beside.s severalnbsp;German and Scandinavian Missions and The Christian andnbsp;Missionary Alliance.

The roster of missionary pioneers and statesmen of the dark continent includes the names of many valiant soldiersnbsp;of the Cross. Among the best known are Robert Moffat,nbsp;David Livingstone, John Mackenzie, Barnabas Shaw, Fran-cois Coillard, James Stewart, Alexander Mackay, Dr. Robertnbsp;Laws, C. T. Studd, and Mary Slessor.

The 1933 Directory of Eoreign Missions, published by the International Missionary Council, gave the followingnbsp;number of Societies in the sections named :

* The Christian and Missionary Alliance entered Gabon, southern French Equatorial Africa, in 1934. No other Society is working in this section.

t One South American Society also is working in these islands.

In several of the countries, especially in north, south and east Africa, in addition to the number of missionary societiesnbsp;listed in the table, there are missionary societies and churchnbsp;conferences which have their headquarters within the countries where they labor. This is true especially in Southnbsp;Africa, where seven large denominations have many churchesnbsp;and operate their own missionary societies. Three of thenbsp;well known faith missions working in Africa, the Sudannbsp;United Mission, Africa Inland Mission, and South Africanbsp;General Mission, have their own Councils in South Africanbsp;and are thus not included in the list of foreign missionarynbsp;societies in that area. In other sections of Africa, however,nbsp;they are listed as foreign societies.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance has work in the Belgian Congo near the mouth of the Congo River, in thenbsp;Portuguese Enclave of Kabinda, in the Gabon in southernnbsp;French Equatorial Africa, in Sierra Leone and Erench Westnbsp;Africa. Throughout French West Africa, with the exception of the coast regions and the extreme eastern portion,nbsp;the principal responsibility for the evangelization of thenbsp;various tribes lies with the C. and M. A.

FRENCH WEST AFRICA

French West Africa is a vast territory in western Africa, bounded on the west by the Atlantic Ocean, Sierra Leone andnbsp;Liberia; on the north by the southern Sahara desert boundaries of Morocco, Algeria, Tunis and Italian Libya; on thenbsp;east by the indeterminate boundary of French Equatorialnbsp;Africa; on the south by the Gold Coast, Nigeria, and thenbsp;Gulf of Guinea.

Upper Volta was a colony of French West Africa until 1933 when its territory was distributed between Ivory Coast,nbsp;French Soudan and Niger.

French West Africa has an area greater than half the area of the United States. Its population includes about 21,000nbsp;Europeans of which 70 per cent are French. The capital,nbsp;Dakar, has a population of 40,000.

Climate

Being in the Torrid Zone, French West Africa has a hot, tropical climate. There are two seasons : the rainy season,nbsp;extending from July to October; and the dry season fromnbsp;November to June, though the seasons vary considerably innbsp;various sections of the country. The dry season is muchnbsp;longer and hotter nearer the Sahara. The months of December and January are the coolest. March, April and Maynbsp;are extremely hot. The excessive humidity in the forest beltnbsp;in the south during the rainy season, and the burning heatnbsp;of the northern districts from March to May, are both verynbsp;enervating. The hill station at Dalaba with an elevation ofnbsp;4,000 feet affords relief to the missionaries who spend a fewnbsp;weeks there annually.

Government

French West Africa is governed by a Governor General and his Council at Dakar. Each colony has a Lieutenantnbsp;Governor and a full staff of French officials, with headquarters in the respective capitals of the colonies. The coloniesnbsp;are subdivided into districts called “Gerdes,” in each ofnbsp;which are a French Administrator and other officials. In thenbsp;cercles are various groups of villages and towns over whichnbsp;are “medal” or paramount chiefs (native), and over eachnbsp;village is a native chief who is responsible for the local government of his village.

History

The Arabs were acquainted with the country south of the Great Desert in the seventh century and left records whichnbsp;show a more extensive knowledge of Africa than was possessed by the Greeks and Romans. The Portuguese madenbsp;discoveries along the west coast as far south as Sierra Leonenbsp;and the Congo in the fifteenth century. A French ship sailednbsp;as far as the River Gambia in the sixteenth century, and bynbsp;the beginning of the eighteenth century it had opened up thenbsp;country of the Senegal and other portions where commercialnbsp;interests and gold brought profits and wealth.

Mungo Park preceded the company of great African explorers by fifty years. He set sail for Gambia, West Africa, in 1795 for the purpose of exploring the Niger River. Thisnbsp;trip proved unsuccessful after two years. He began a secondnbsp;expedition in 1805. This attempt carried him as far as thenbsp;rapids of Boussa beyond the buckle of the Niger, where henbsp;and his men lost their lives.

In 1822 Frenchmen reached Tombouctou, but Rene Caille was the first man to enter that city (1827-1828) and emergenbsp;alive. Richard Lander reached the mouth of the Niger Rivernbsp;in 1830. Dr. Barth in 1853 was the first to bring any definitenbsp;information concerning the Niger valley and Tombouctou.

The French occupation of the Niger valley occurred in 1883, when they captured Bamako. Samory was the nativenbsp;chief who most strongly withstood the French occupation.nbsp;His kingdom extended from Kita, which is now a station onnbsp;the Dakar-Niger railway, to the Liberian border on the south.nbsp;In eight years he had founded a kingdom of 250,000 squarenbsp;miles with a population of two million inhabitants. He attacked the French at Bamako in 1892, but was repulsed. Henbsp;then moved east to Sikasso but was unable to subjugate thenbsp;Senoufo tribe there. However, he was able to conquer thenbsp;northern part of the Ivory Coast but was slowly drivennbsp;back by the French from points in the east. He fled to thenbsp;Ivory Coast and was finally captured in 1898.

While this campaign was going on in the south an expedition was sent against Tombouctou, which was held by the nomadic Touaregs. Colonel Bonnier and his army occupiednbsp;Tombouctou in 1894. The Touaregs were pursued to La-couboa in the desert, and, thinking none of them were innbsp;sight, the army slept. The Touaregs, led by their Chiefnbsp;Chabon, came down upon the French and Colonial Bonniernbsp;and a greater part of his troops were slain in a mad stampede.

Colonel Joffre, next in command, occupied Tombouctou in 1895 and built two forts over which the flag of France hasnbsp;flown ever since. Thus, the northern Soudan came undernbsp;French control after decades of bloodshed. The French flagnbsp;flying over the forts and the bugle call to drill ringing outnbsp;each morning over the desert insure safety at the presentnbsp;time, and there is no fear of being molested or driven fromnbsp;the city by the fanatical Mohammedans.

In 1927 the government planned to open a new post between Tombouctou and Bourem on the river. The warlike Touareg tribe in that vicinity refused to allow it. When thenbsp;governor’s representative was sent to make an investigation,nbsp;and the Touaregs were told that for every white man theynbsp;killed a thousand Touaregs would have to pay the price, thenbsp;chiefs decided that they would not fight, and so the post wasnbsp;built.

A troop of camel cavalry patrols the desert regions and keeps these nomadic tribes under control, otherwise no onenbsp;would be safe in those desolate wastes. One of the caravansnbsp;coming into Tombouctou in 1927, guided by soldiers, hadnbsp;trouble. When the Arab chief was called before the officernbsp;there was an argument, and the officer was killed. The firenbsp;was returned by a soldier standing near by and as a resultnbsp;the entire village was wiped out. Uprisings have taken placenbsp;in other parts, the most recent of which was in Bobolandnbsp;during the World War. The people, believing that the government was weak on account of the war, rose up in rebellion. This was soon crushed and the people disarmed.

Physical Features

French West Africa has a low coastal plain, flanked by a range of mountains, with wide plateau in the interior, thusnbsp;partaking of the topography of Africa as a whole, which resembles an inverted saucer. The sloping rim of the saucernbsp;is the coastal plain ; the ridge around the base of the saucernbsp;represents the mountain ranges ; and the flat bottom of thenbsp;saucer stands for the central plateau.

The two great rivers of French West Africa are the Senegal and the Niger. The Niger River and its four tributaries, the Niandan, the Milo, the Bani, and the Tinkisso,nbsp;drain the Niger valley and much of the plateau. This greatnbsp;river rises on the border of Sierra Leone and flows for 1,000nbsp;miles northeast to the border of the Sahara. Here it turnsnbsp;east and then south to the Atlantic Ocean, covering a distancenbsp;of more than 2,500 miles in its entire irregular course. It isnbsp;so sluggish that high floods at its source require almost a yearnbsp;to reach its mouth in the Atlantic. The Niger is a veritablenbsp;river of life to this whole section. It abounds with fish,nbsp;crocodiles, hippopotami, ducks and geese, while many kindsnbsp;of antelope and other animals feed on its banks.

The Djallon range of mountains, bordering the coastal plain on the west, rises at some points to an altitude of 4,000nbsp;feet. To the east of the range are the vast plains and plateaux stretching north and east to the vast Sahara desert.

Resources

Fruits, palm nuts and oil, shea butter, rubber, cotton, cocoa, lumber and peanuts are the most important products exportednbsp;from Africa. On the docks at Dakar are literally mountainsnbsp;of peanuts. In a recent year 429,504 metric tons of the nutsnbsp;were shipped.

From Conakry are shipped tons of bananas, raised on vast plantations throughout Guinea. Oranges, pineapples, andnbsp;rice are also plentiful in Guinea.

From the forests of the Ivory Coast, and to a lesser extent from southern Guinea also, come mahogany and other valuable timbers, beside coffee, cocoa, kola nuts, coconuts, andnbsp;palm oil. Gold is being mined in Guinea near Siguiri. Greatnbsp;herds of cattle, sheep and goats are raised in the Soudan, andnbsp;the land yields a good supply of vegetables, millet, maize, etc.

Progress

In the colonies of Senegal, Soudan, Guinea, and the Ivory Coast there are excellent railroads, telegraph and postal facilities between the principal towns, in which there are European shops, mainly French, Syrian, and a few English.

The French have also built a network of fine roads through many portions of the colonies. In 1934 a new auto roadnbsp;was opened from the seaport of Conakry to the railroad atnbsp;Kankan in the Guinea. This connects with the Soudan routenbsp;to the Sahara. An auto route also extends from Port Bouetnbsp;in the Ivory Coast to the Sahara and Algiers, while anothernbsp;is open from Dakar, via Bamako, to Gao and across thenbsp;Sahara to Algiers. Regular auto bus, airplane passenger andnbsp;mail service are conducted across the Sahara from Gao tonbsp;Algiers during the dry season.

The three main lines of railroad are the Conakry-Kankan line, extending 415 miles inland through the Guinea; thenbsp;Grand Bassam to Bobo-Dioulasso railroad, extending aboutnbsp;475 miles through the Ivory Coast; and the line from Dakarnbsp;to Bamako covering about 600 miles.

Steamboats connect the Guinea and Soudan by way of the Niger River from the head of the Guinea railroad at Kankannbsp;to the head of the Senegal-Soudan railroad at Bamako.

The French government has established an excellent school system providing for primary elementary education, highernbsp;elementary, and commercial, and professional education. Thenbsp;primary regional schools are found in every important center, and many rural schools are being opened with a nativenbsp;teacher in charge. At Conakry, Dakar, and Bamako arenbsp;located the schools of higher education. European teachersnbsp;with native assistants are in charge of the regional schools.nbsp;In the rural schools the instruction comprises French conversation, reading, elements of agriculture, writing, arithmetic,nbsp;and other simple subjects.

Apart from the education given by the government, the children of Mohammedan parents receive instruction fromnbsp;the marabouts to the extent of being taught to repeat fromnbsp;memory verses of the Koran, even though they do not understand the meaning. The government has also providednbsp;schools in Senegal at St. Louis, and in Soudan at Djenne,nbsp;where instruction is given in theology, history, and law bynbsp;Mohammedan professors.

In every principal center where French officials reside, small hospitals are established with a French doctor and several native assistants. In the larger cities such as Dakar,nbsp;Conakry, Bamako and Abidjan are large hospitals with modern equipment.

A new museum of African arts and crafts has been opened recently in Bamako. Here, in addition to seeing the handicraft produced by the natives, representative artisans of thenbsp;various tribes are brought to the museum and taught how tonbsp;improve their crafts.

Currency

The official currency of the country is French. There are coins ranging from five centimes to two-franc pieces, andnbsp;notes from five to one thousand francs. The franc at present is worth about seven cents in U. S. money, or fifteennbsp;francs to the dollar. Before the United States went off thenbsp;gold standard, twenty-five francs could be bought for onenbsp;dollar.

In the Soudan rural districts cowrie shells are still largely used as a medium of exchange. In the forest districts ofnbsp;Guinea, bars of iron resembling arrows are used for currency. There is much gambling over the current value ofnbsp;the cowrie shells and iron bars in relation to the standardnbsp;value of the French franc. The exchange rises and fallsnbsp;constantly, though the average value is perhaps 300 to 400nbsp;cowrie shells, or ten bars of iron to the franc.

Languages and Tribes

There are more than one hundred tribes in French West Africa each speaking its own language or dialect. Meninka,nbsp;Bambara and Dioula, kindred dialects, are the trade languages, and one or the other can be understood in almostnbsp;every section. The following is the population of the principal tribes :

Religions

Mohammedanism still has a strong foothold in many sections of French West Africa, especially in Upper Senegal and along the Niger River. To the negro the appeal of Mohammedanism undoubtedly lies in the unexacting characternbsp;of its demands ; it does not in practice require him to laynbsp;aside many of his superstitious beliefs; it permits and approves polygamy; and it sanctions domestic slavery. Proposals to veil polygamy by recognizing only the principalnbsp;wife as really married and the rest as concubines have naturally and inevitably been disapproved; and the native, longnbsp;accustomed to rely on the labor of his wives is not quick tonbsp;accept a religion which deprives him of this great economicnbsp;advantage. However, during the past five years a numbernbsp;have turned to Christianity.

Millions of pagans are still worshipping idols but as the gospel enters, great numbers burn their fetishes and turn tonbsp;the living God. Fetishists are more prevalent in the Ivorynbsp;Coast and southern Guinea than in those places where Mohammedanism is found.

Missionary Occupation

There are three French Protestant Churches—in St. Louis and Dakar, Senegal, and in Sassandra, Ivory Coast. Thenbsp;Roman Catholics have churches established in most of thenbsp;centers where there are Europeans, and are active amongnbsp;many tribes. For the most part they strongly oppose thenbsp;work of Protestant missions.

The Gospel Missionary Union occupies the territory surrounding Bamako. They entered this region first in 1919 and in 1935 they had ten missionaries with three mission stations. They have confined their work to the Bambara-speak-ing people and one of the workers completed the translationnbsp;of the New Testament in that language.’

The Assemblies of God Mission of Ouagadougou is working among the Mossi people with good success. They have about fifteen missionaries and six mission stations. The Quanbsp;Ibo Mission opened a station at Bouroumbouroum in 1931,nbsp;the first to be opened in the Lobi tribe. Up to the presentnbsp;time only one station has been established, with two missionaries. The Sudan Interior Mission has one station at Fadanbsp;N’Gourma in addition to their extensive work in Nigerianbsp;(British) and in French territory to the north. The Wesleyan Mission is well established in the Ivory Coast.

The Alliance Mission has the responsibility for the upper Niger River Basin region (with the exception of the Bamakonbsp;territory) and also for the northern portion of the Ivorynbsp;Coast.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

In 1890 a party of missionaries sailed for West Africa under The Christian and Missionary Alliance and begannbsp;work in Sierra Leone with the hope of reaching the westernnbsp;Soudan. Dr. Simpson, writing in The Alliance Weekly innbsp;1896, said : “From the Soudan comes another forward cry.nbsp;Our Mission has been reinforced by six new workers duringnbsp;the year, and the line of stations from Freetown to Tibaba-dugu near the Niger are fully opened. And now, from thisnbsp;base of operations, a double advance movement is proposed,nbsp;pushing northwest to Tombouctou and eastward across thenbsp;Niger toward Lake Tchad.”

Although the vision tarried, yet Dr. Simpson and others with him held steadfast in praying, waiting, hoping and believing, and the first Alliance mission station in French Westnbsp;Africa was established at Baro in the year before his homegoing.

Early in the history of the Sierra Leone work, one of the missionaries made a trip to Paris to interview the Frenchnbsp;government in regard to obtaining permission to enter Frenchnbsp;possessions. The usual delay in governmental matters keptnbsp;him there a long time. Hope ran high. Different workersnbsp;Began studying French so that when the door opened intonbsp;the Soudan they would be ready. However, they were destined to be disappointed. The reply of the government wasnbsp;not favorable.

It was not until the fall of the year 1917 that prayer prevailed. Some Alliance missionaries, sailing for Sierra Leone, were booked via Bordeaux and Conakry on a French shipnbsp;and en route they met one of the French officials who wasnbsp;very friendly. The matter of entering French territory wasnbsp;taken up and he promised to do all he could to seek an interview with the government officials in Conakry. The interview proved very satisfactory and permission was grantednbsp;to evangelize, provided no force was employed with existingnbsp;religions.

After another interview with the Governor, two workers made a trip as far as Kankan and felt that the time had comenbsp;for our Mission to advance at once into that great unevangelized territory. The Sierra Leone Conference appointednbsp;workers to make an extended trip through the country andnbsp;find a good location for our first station. Occasionally thesenbsp;workers met a man who had heard the Word over in Sierranbsp;Leone years before, otherwise it was virgin territory wherenbsp;the gospel messenger had never traveled. They sailed downnbsp;the Niger and many large towns were visited.

It was decided to open the first station at Baro, which is a large provincial town located back from the railway aboutnbsp;one mile. A site was chosen and temporary buildings erected.nbsp;That same year a trip was made by boat down the Niger tonbsp;Bamako, the capital of the Soudan.

While the Lord was stirring the hearts of the missionaries in Sierra Leone to go into the great “regions beyond” innbsp;French West Africa, the burden for the evangelization ofnbsp;the many tribes in that vast territory was laid heavily uponnbsp;the hearts of some in the homeland who were faithful in intercession that the field might be entered and occupied in thenbsp;name of our Lord.

In the fall of 1921 the Foreign Secretary visited Sierra Leone and French West Africa as a deputation from thenbsp;Board of Managers. While present at a Missionary Conference held late in the year at Makump, a station in thenbsp;Temne tribe in Sierra Leone, the important subject of discussion was the transfer of a number of the missionary staffnbsp;from Sierra Leone to the new field in French West Africa,nbsp;where already two or three former Sierra Leone missionaries were laboring at Baro near the Niger in French Guinea.nbsp;A large map of West Africa was on the table and one of thenbsp;missionaries from Baro, placing his thumb on that portionnbsp;where the Alliance Mission was working among the Temnenbsp;and Kuranko people and pointing to the vast interior ofnbsp;French West Africa, stated that, whereas the Alliance field

in Sierra Leone could be covered by the tip of his thumb, the territory without missionary occupation in French Westnbsp;Africa could not be covered by his outstretched hand.

Accompanied by the Chairman and the missionary mentioned, the Foreign Secretary made a trip through portions of French Guinea and French Soudan from Baro down thenbsp;Niger to Bamako and overland to Bougouni and thence tonbsp;Kankan. After returning to Baro a special trip was made tonbsp;Conakry, the capital of the province, with a view to arranging for the purchase of property located in Siguiri on thenbsp;Niger, where the party had visited on their way down thenbsp;river. In very definite providences of God this property wasnbsp;secured and became the second mission station in the field.

During this deputational visit it was decided that the headquarters should be established in Kankan, the second largest city in French Guinea, as soon as property could be purchased, and plans were laid prayerfully for the placing ofnbsp;missionaries in at least ten strategic centers in large districtsnbsp;during the next few years.

As the report of the deputation was made public through The Alliance Weekly and in other ways, and especially asnbsp;missionaries on furlough from French West Africa presentednbsp;the appeal of the millions of people and scores of tribes innbsp;that field, God moved upon the hearts of His people in thenbsp;homeland and rapid progress was made in the sending out ofnbsp;a large force of new missionaries and the opening of stations.

French Guinea

Baro. Although Baro had the distinction of being the first station opened in the Niger Valley (1918), it was notnbsp;the first to show a harvest. While from time to time a number were converted from that part of the field, the villagenbsp;remained asleep until the fall of 1931. A church sprangnbsp;forth almost in a day. Old women as well as men werenbsp;converted. The Mohammedans tried to hold their ranks bynbsp;the universal word that any one dying outside their faithnbsp;would not be burled. This fear was shattered when the firstnbsp;Christian funeral was held in Baro, and today there is anbsp;faithful band who enjoy the gospel. A native teacher wasnbsp;placed in the district at Toroban, near Baro, where anothernbsp;nucleus has been gathered to form a church.

Kankan. This thriving town, the inland terminus of the railroad from Conakry, is reached by a pleasantnbsp;two days’ trip by train from the coast. The headquarters ofnbsp;the Mission is in Kankan, where a splendid property, locatednbsp;just outside the business section and near the native centernbsp;of the town, was purchased from a French trader and occupiednbsp;by the missionaries in 1922. With the exception of foreignnbsp;residents, principally French and Syrians, the communitynbsp;is quite evenly divided between Mohammedans and pagans,nbsp;though the former predominate. Kankan is located on thenbsp;Milo River and is the chief commercial city of Upper Guinea.nbsp;The population is very cosmopolitan and souls have beennbsp;won to Christ from many tribes. There are Kissiens,nbsp;Gbereses, Tomas, Foulas, Sousous, Miankas, and Senoufosnbsp;among those who have been baptized here, and today theynbsp;are scattered throughout their various tribes, giving forth anbsp;good witness to their own people.

The office of the Chairman is at Kankan and in 1930, when the mission had grown to such an extent that it demanded the Chairman’s undivided attention, an assistant wasnbsp;stationed at headquarters to oversee the business matters innbsp;the absence of the Chairman. The Annual Missionary Conference is held here, the first being in 1926. Prior to this thenbsp;Mission had been administered by a Superintendent directlynbsp;under the control of the Foreign Department.

Printing work is done at the headquarters. The office has been equipped with a multigraph and mimeograph, which arenbsp;run by trained native help under the supervision of experienced missionaries, and scripture portions are printed innbsp;every tribal language used by the missionaries. The districtnbsp;surrounding Kankan has been sown with the Word.

In 1931 a native evangelist and his wife were stationed at Dctbadougou, a village about five miles away. While verynbsp;few accepted the message in that town many from outlyingnbsp;villages were touched by the gospel and several were baptized. Workers made an itinerating trip to Silatiya, fortynbsp;miles from Kankan, and after faithfully witnessing the gospel nearly the whole -town repented and they in turn spreadnbsp;the message to many other towns in that district. A gathering place for the natives and also a comfortable hut for thenbsp;missionaries was built by the natives themselves without anynbsp;cost to the Mission. Bi-monthly visits are made by the missionaries, but in their absence the natives gather together fornbsp;worship.

A Bible School was established at Kankan, where instruction was given to the native Christians from several tribes, with the hope that they would become the leaders of thenbsp;Church. This was discontinued later, however, and sincenbsp;then there have been Short Term Bible Schools held on thenbsp;different stations throughout the field. It is expected thatnbsp;the Bible School will soon be reopened, probably at Ntorosonbsp;in the San area.

Siguiri. About three or four days’ journey down the Niger from Kouroussa, the town where the railroadnbsp;from Conakry to Kankan crosses the Niger River, is thenbsp;town of Siguiri, an important trading center with automobilenbsp;roads running to Kankan and to Bamako, the capital ofnbsp;French Soudan. Through the purchase in 1921 of a property from a Syrian trader, the Mission secured an excellentnbsp;location on a much traveled street thus enabling the missionaries to reach many passers-by with the gospel message.nbsp;Itinerating work is conducted in the surrounding country.

At Siguiri the Mission experienced their first difficulty with the government in carrying on evangelistic work. Government officials interpreted the law that no work in the villages could be done unless there was a building dedicated fornbsp;that purpose, although the missionaries could evangelize innbsp;the district. Those were perplexing days, but the Lord metnbsp;the need when an offering was received enabling the Missionnbsp;to erect a comfortable chapel on the market square. Thenbsp;Word of God has been faithfully given forth from thisnbsp;Lighthouse and many travelers from all parts of West Africanbsp;have heard the Message of Life, for Siguiri is situated in thenbsp;gold mining district of Guinea. The fact of a floating population has been a hindrance to the establishing of a strongnbsp;work in this city. The lust for gold has so blinded the eyesnbsp;and dimmed the vision of the people that they live only fornbsp;the present with no thought for the future. The proud Mohammedan teachers are seen swaggering through the streetsnbsp;and typify the arrogant spirit of the natives. Yet againstnbsp;this background of greed and pride, Jean Keita, a nativenbsp;evangelist, stands out as a trophy of God’s grace. Throughnbsp;the years his intense desire to study the Word of God causednbsp;him to forge ahead until he obtained his diploma, having finished a complete Bible course.

Kourottssa was opened as a mission station in 1926, but missionaries resided there only for a short time. It is notnbsp;probable that it will be reopened as a main station inasmuchnbsp;as Baro is only a few miles distant and there seems to be evidence of the blessing of God in retaining Baro as a missionnbsp;center.

Mamou. After the work was well established in the Me-ninka tribe and other tribes to the east, attention was turned toward the Foula race. Knowing them to benbsp;strong Mohammedans, it was believed from the very firstnbsp;that once members of this tribe were won to Christ, theynbsp;would become strong evangelists. They possess many characteristics of the white race.

In the fall of 1923 a journey was made to Mamou to seek a mission site. This place is on the railroad, midway betweennbsp;Conakry and Kankan, and is a day’s journey from eithernbsp;place. It is the principal town in a district having a population of about 153,000, made up of natives from many different tribes of West Africa. It is, moreover, one of thenbsp;strategic gateways to the strongly Mohammedan tribe ofnbsp;Foulas of Fouta-Djallon, which tribe numbers more thannbsp;655,000.

The altitude is 2,625 feet and sufficiently high to make the climate cooler and better than in lower altitudes. In the beginning of the work it was planned to have the missionarynbsp;children’s school at another place, but this plan was changednbsp;and Mamou was chosen. The Mission was fortunate in obtaining a hotel with thirteen rooms, which has been remodelednbsp;and equipped as a school for the children. While this building served for the first years of the work, a much larger sitenbsp;is needed and a few miles out from Mamou a larger concession of land is being procured. Not only will suitable buildings be erected, but there will be ample room for the childrennbsp;to have recreation grounds and also for fruit and shadenbsp;trees, etc.

Mamou is also the receiving home for missionaries sailing and arriving via Conakry and for those going to the Restnbsp;Home at Dalaba.

Dalaba. Dalaba is thirty-eight miles from Mamou and about 4,000 feet above sea level. The governmentnbsp;had thought of opening a sanitarium near this place but decided that it was too high and too great a change from thenbsp;lowlands. The heat never becomes intense on these mountains and it is an ideal place for a Rest Home. In 1924 thenbsp;Mission chose a site on a beautiful hillside overlooking anbsp;valley. Terraces were excavated on the side of the hill andnbsp;ten native houses and two more substantial dwellings werenbsp;erected. The native houses with grass roofs resemble beehives and are made after the pattern of the Foula homes. Tonbsp;this place of rest the workers go each year for a month tonbsp;regain their strength. The water is piped from a spring onnbsp;the hillside to the compound. The government, realizing thenbsp;advantages our missionaries had, opened a much larger placenbsp;two and one-half miles from our concession. This gives thenbsp;Mission the facilities of postal and telegraph service.

Labe. Labe, located ninety miles north of Mamou, is in the very heart of the fanatical Mohammedan tribe ofnbsp;Foulas of Fouta Djallon. It is the most densely populatednbsp;district of French Guinea, ¦ comprising about half a millionnbsp;souls, or one-fourth of the total population of the colony.

When a mission station was opened at Labe in 1923, the Mohammedan teachers boasted that, though the gospel benbsp;preached there a hundred years, none of their number wouldnbsp;ever yield to Christ. As in most Mohammedan work, it hasnbsp;been a very hard field, but the constant preaching of thenbsp;Word accompanied by faith and prayer has brought about anbsp;changed attitude and some advance has been made. A number of both men and women have attended services in thenbsp;chapel regularly. There are seven baptized Christians, onenbsp;of whom, a young man, feels called of the Lord to preachnbsp;the gospel. There are also a number of inquirers who havenbsp;given real evidence of conversion and have endured muchnbsp;persecution at the hands of the Mohammedans. Threenbsp;weekly evening classes for inquirers have been well attended.nbsp;The Foulas are scattered in small villages and itinerationnbsp;among them means strenuous work because of the hillynbsp;country. Eight hundred Gospels of Matthew in the Foulanbsp;language, written in Arabic script, have been sold, and withnbsp;each of these there has been the personal testimony of thenbsp;missionary or native Christian. Quantities of gospel tractsnbsp;have been scattered far and wide over many parts of the district, thus contacting thousands of individuals. It is a realnbsp;victory when a Foula Mohammedan accepts Christian literature.

Early in 1934 a group of native Christians at Netere, ten miles from Labe, constructed a permanent chapel with thenbsp;permission of the Governor. The -missionaries built a grass-roofed hut to be used as an outstation and training camp.

Velingara. The missionaries in this section heard of the Foula Counda people living north of Labe innbsp;the Senegal and a tour was undertaken in the fall of 1927.nbsp;The missionaries opened a station at Velingara and atnbsp;first the response was gratifying, but the people lacked thenbsp;stability of character that is found in other tribes of thenbsp;Soudan. The most outstanding success was the conversionnbsp;of two young men from the Labe district who had gone tonbsp;Velingara to farm. They returned to their home in Neterenbsp;and the more valiant of the two decided to build a housenbsp;for God such as he had seen at Velingara. The missionariesnbsp;taught him to read the Word and he fearlessly proclaimednbsp;the Truth that he had learned. Almost single-handed henbsp;erected a chapel that seated 150 people. In 1934 a morenbsp;suitable church was built and also a house for the visitingnbsp;missionary, and this small group of believers in the strongnbsp;Mohammedan district of Labe has been proving a great encouragement to the workers in that section. The missionaries who occupied the outstation at Velingara were withdrawn in 1933 to assist other workers in the Bobo districtnbsp;where there was a great turning to the Lord.

Kissidougou. Moved by the great need and opportunity in the Kissi tribe and encouraged by faithful prayer support in the homeland, the Mission began worknbsp;among the forest people in the Kissidougou district. Thesenbsp;were a purely pagan people and a great challenge to the Mission. A dilapidated Syrian store was rented, and the missionaries opened up the work after the field Conference ofnbsp;1926. The following year the Mission purchased propertynbsp;and built a missionary residence. In 1929 the natives builtnbsp;the first chapel which was replaced by a larger building innbsp;1931. About this time the district work began to enlarge.nbsp;Calls came from a number of kingdoms asking for instructors who would teach them the Word of God. As the missionaries answered these calls, the people turned to the Lordnbsp;in such numbers that it was necessary to send native teachersnbsp;who would work in cooperation with the missionaries innbsp;teaching these newborn babes in Christ. Since that timenbsp;there has been a steady increase in the number of converts.nbsp;Regular classes, as well as special courses in Bible instruction and primer work, have been held by the resident andnbsp;assisting missionaries, thereby establishing the young converts and meeting the aggressive opposition of the Romannbsp;Catholic forces.

Closely grouped around the Kissiens are a number of other tribes, all of which are reached from the one center.nbsp;There are six distinct language groups in this area, whichnbsp;necessitates instructing each language group in its particularnbsp;tongue. Much translation work has been done for use amongnbsp;the Kissiens and the trade language has been widely usednbsp;among all groups.

Y alankoro. This station was opened in order that the missionaries might be in closer contact with the many groups of Kissiens and other tribes people who havenbsp;expressed a desire to follow Christ. In this way intensivenbsp;training in the Word can be given more readily both at thenbsp;station and through visiting other places. Short Term Biblenbsp;Schools are held during the dry season.

Mandou. After the missionaries had spent a number of months itinerating among the Lele tribe, it wasnbsp;decided in the Conference late in 1935 to establish a missionary residence among the Lele people, the probable location being at Mandou. The population of this tribe isnbsp;10,000. After hearing the gospel a few times many burnednbsp;their fetishes and several hundred signified their desire tonbsp;become Christians.

Revival fires are burning at the Niger’s source. A number of native teachers are doing effective work but prayer is requested that many more of the native Christians shallnbsp;be filled with the Spirit and become zealous, consecratednbsp;workers.

Faranah. The first effort to secure a missionary residence in Faranah was met by the enemy with a strongnbsp;resistance, but by prayer and faith the attack was completelynbsp;foiled. A Syrian property was finally located which was farnbsp;from satisfactory but seemed to be the only one available atnbsp;the time. Missionaries took up residence here in September,nbsp;1924. Soon afterwards, however, they had to look for othernbsp;quarters and they found a native house. It was in bad condition but after repairs the workers used it as a dwellingnbsp;place until the government gave permission to build a permanent station.

Three languages are spoken in Faranah : Kuranko, San-karan, and Yalonka. The two former tribes are very similar in racial characteristics and language, while the latter is quitenbsp;different, being more closely allied to the Sousou people whonbsp;are more energetic and stable in many ways. These threenbsp;groups had equal opportunity to embrace the gospel but thenbsp;Yalonkas, true to their race, immediately went forward andnbsp;took the leadership. One of the first converts from that tribenbsp;soon developed into a native worker and, under the directionnbsp;of the missionaries, his ministry was greatly blessed in opening up many towns to the gospel. Regular itinerating tripsnbsp;are made by the missionaries from Faranah to the Yalonkanbsp;district and the results have been most gratifying. Manynbsp;have been baptized and are being taught to read the Wordnbsp;for themselves.

Short Term Bible courses have been given at Faranah, not only to the men and women of that district, but to those ofnbsp;different tribes in the Guinea. These natives receive a thorough grounding in the faith and are taught to use the scriptures in public ministry.

Macenta. A young Toma man was converted at the headquarters station in Kankan and his mind and heart constantly dwelt on the darkness of his people andnbsp;their lost condition. He asked repeatedly, “Is there no onenbsp;who can go to my people and tell them the way of life?”nbsp;When the call became more insistent, the Mission could forbear no longer and it was decided in 1930 to undertake thenbsp;evangelization of one more tribe for the Lord.

Macenta is situated in the forest belt of French Guinea about 180 miles from the station at Kankan. The automobilenbsp;road had just been completed over the mountains and it required careful driving because of the sharp curves whichnbsp;were ofttimes slippery and dangerous. Suitable quarters fornbsp;a mission station were sought but there seemed to be nothingnbsp;available in the town. A missionary couple felt led to worknbsp;among this tribe and when the Toma Christian heard thatnbsp;they had been appointed to his people, he gave up his positionnbsp;as clerk and offered to accompany them. The workers livednbsp;in a native hut for several months and, although permissionnbsp;had not been given to hold services, they were able to gathernbsp;the people together and the Message was proclaimed. Another two-room building was secured that served as dwellingnbsp;and meeting place, and after permission was granted by thenbsp;government a chapel was built seating more than 200 people.nbsp;Many were saved and in 1933 when the missionaries werenbsp;transferred to another district, this Toma Christian, who hadnbsp;become an evangelist, was appointed to the work. He is nownbsp;assisted by another native worker, and under their ministrynbsp;the church is steadily increasing in numbers.

French Soudan

Sikasso. Sikasso, the center of the Senoufo tribe and the first station to be opened in the French Soudannbsp;(1923), is a beautiful town lying in a natural basin surrounded by rolling hills. Dioulas, Foulas and Senoufosnbsp;comprise the population of Sikasso proper, the Senoufosnbsp;being in the majority. After much seed-sowing, there werenbsp;several converts, but it was not until 1931, when three of thenbsp;missionaries were stricken with yellow fever and went to benbsp;with the Lord, that a break came in the district at Fanterela,nbsp;which is twenty-five miles from Sikasso. Two of these threenbsp;workers had spent several months at Fanterela and the Wordnbsp;had been given forth repeatedly. Shortly before they passednbsp;away there were signs of an awakening and soon afterwardsnbsp;twenty young men stepped out, in spite of the fierce persecution incited by the chief who was a fetish worshiper. Notnbsp;only did the tide turn in Sikasso in 1931, but it was at thatnbsp;time that there was a great awakening in many parts of thenbsp;field.

San. San represents a vast populous district in the Soudan and was occupied by our missionaries in 1926. Anbsp;mission house was erected the following year and permissionnbsp;to preach secured. After a time of faithful sowing of thenbsp;Seed and winning of the firstfruits, the increase began to benbsp;realized in 1931. While the town of San itself presents anbsp;solid Mohammedan front, the district is still pagan. Manynbsp;a pagan boy coming in to the government school at San hasnbsp;found Christ at the Mission and then prepared the way fornbsp;the messengers of the Cross in his distant village. The Rednbsp;Bobo tribe, the Mianka tribe in this district, as well as thenbsp;Bambara tribe in which the Mission is already working, challenge us to send them missionaries. Many from these tribesnbsp;have already yielded to Christ. Short Term Bible Schoolsnbsp;are held at San and places in the district.

Ntoroso. Ntoroso, a farming town, is about twenty miles from San in the center of a district where manynbsp;are moving toward God. The first missionary residence wasnbsp;established here in 1933. Ntoroso was a pagan town, butnbsp;now all but twelve men have confessed Christ. Many havenbsp;burned their fetishes, not only in this village but in many ofnbsp;the near-by villages. On Sundays a congregation of threenbsp;hundred gather, about one hundred of whom are women.nbsp;In spite of the persecution, the building of a Mohammedannbsp;mosque, and many other things done to turn this group fromnbsp;God, the believers have become stronger and increased theirnbsp;number. Several have gone to the Short Term Bible Schoolnbsp;and were supported by their own church. Classes have beennbsp;held and many can read. Some of the Christians are visitingnbsp;other towns every week, giving the Word of God to theirnbsp;own people. Houses have been built in the near-by villagesnbsp;where the Christians meet for prayer and study, but on Sun-

days all gather at Ntoroso, which is the home church as well as the home of the missionary. It is planned to open a full-time Bible School in the near future either in Ntoroso ornbsp;Somasso.

Koutiala. Koutiala is the government post on the automobile road between Sikasso and San. The Senoufo and Mianka tribes make up most of the population of thenbsp;town and district. These tribes are for the most part pagan.nbsp;The Christian French Commander asked that we open worknbsp;here and a dwelling place for the missionary couple appointednbsp;to that station was erected in the spring of 1935.

Somasso. Somasso, a large native village in the Mianka tribe, was first heard of through a Mianka ladnbsp;who was looking for work at Kankan. From the very firstnbsp;visit of the missionary there was a response to the message.nbsp;The Governor granted permission to occupy a small lot outside of town, and two grass-roofed huts were built. Twonbsp;lady missionaries, who were appointed to this station, had anbsp;fruitful ministry teaching the new converts to read the Wordnbsp;of God, and also instructing them in the fundamentals ofnbsp;Christianity.

The surrounding towns soon heard of the movement and the missionaries’ days and evenings were filled with teachingnbsp;and leading souls to Christ. Twenty-eight were led into thenbsp;waters of baptism, and in 1934 a chapel was built. Thisnbsp;chapel represents a real triumph for the Gospel in a districtnbsp;where the government reckons the people to be the mostnbsp;degraded and worthless. The leading men of the churchnbsp;know what it is to be persecuted and suffer reproach fornbsp;Christ’s sake, but their persecutors have invariably been punished and have lost their positions and prestige in the district.nbsp;Mopti. Mopti is situated on the Bani and Niger Rivers andnbsp;in the rainy season is surrounded by water sincenbsp;the rivers overflow tbeir banks. Missionaries entered Moptinbsp;in 1924. Work among the Foulas in this district provednbsp;very difficult. The haughty Mohammedans refused to yieldnbsp;although convinced of the truth of the Message. However,nbsp;there are now two Foulas from this section who are staunchnbsp;native workers, giving forth the message to their own people.

Mopti proved to be a key for the opening of two other points in this area: Tenenkou, to the west of Mopti, in thenbsp;strong Mohammedan territory; and the Habbe country, thenbsp;home of a great pagan tribe to the east.

Tenenkou. An application was made to open religious work in Tenenkou, but it was denied at firstnbsp;because of the strife between the Foula and Touareg herdsmen, which seemed to make it unsafe for foreigners to residenbsp;in this territory. Later the workers were permitted to gonbsp;ahead with their work unhindered. Great hopes for thenbsp;speedy evangelization of these people filled their hearts, butnbsp;the people proved as obdurate as the Mopti Foulas. Thenbsp;workers were finally recalled from this district to help takenbsp;care of the awakening in a pagan tribe. The time of theirnbsp;leaving was providential for a few days thereafter the roofnbsp;of the house where they had been living fell in, which wouldnbsp;have buried them alive under a mass of timber and mud.

Sangha. Missionaries began work at Sangha, among the Habbe people, in 1931. That these people werenbsp;strong fetish worshipers was clearly proved by their numerous altars on the hilltops and in their yards. While thenbsp;Habbes build their houses on top of the rocks and on thenbsp;sides of the steep cliffs, they cultivate the sandy soil of thenbsp;valleys, and every fertile place among the rocks. If the rainnbsp;fails to come in season, they have no chance of harvesting anbsp;crop. The burning sun dries up every vestige of verdurenbsp;and plunges them into hopeless despair. A few years beforenbsp;the arrival of the missionaries a famine swept over this tribe,nbsp;causing the death of great numbers ; and soon after thenbsp;workers had settled at Sangha a crisis came that proved tonbsp;be God’s opportunity to speak to the Habbe people. Mennbsp;came to the mission station and said they had tried all theirnbsp;fetish methods to secure rain but these had failed and theynbsp;wanted to know if God, in answer to prayer in Jesus’ name,nbsp;would send rain and save their crop. The missionaries spentnbsp;about two hours in prayer and less than an hour later thenbsp;rain was falling. The next day some of the men were savednbsp;and soon forty men and six women had bowed in prayer.nbsp;Now there is a growing church at Sangha and a wonderfulnbsp;work is being accomplished also in the surrounding district.

Tombouctou. The first trip made to Tombouctou by Alliance missionaries was in October, 1924, and at that time a mission house was rented. In January, 1925,nbsp;two young men were sent to Tombouctou to live and ministernbsp;in the name of Christ in this strategic outpost. The Catholicnbsp;Mission had worked there some years before, but failing tonbsp;make any impression on the Mohammedans, they abandonednbsp;the enterprise to take up work in less difficult fields. However, one of their men who had married a Sonhrai womannbsp;of Tombouctou and could no longer officiate as a priest, remained. He compiled an excellent dictionary and grammarnbsp;of the Sonhrai language which greatly aided the missionaries in the work. Sonhrai is not only the language of thenbsp;city, but with some variations is the language of 400,000nbsp;people extending down the Niger to Dahomey.

By the fall of 1932 a great change had taken place in the attitude of many of the people toward the gospel. Many notnbsp;only came to the meetings, but remained for prayer. Thenbsp;first baptismal service was held in December, 1932, when fivenbsp;were baptized. A haughty Arab was converted and thisnbsp;stirred the town and brought the wrath of his father andnbsp;mother upon his head. He was disowned and driven fromnbsp;home, but before his father’s death he was restored to hisnbsp;family. He and others in this fanatical Mohammedan townnbsp;are Standing true to the claims of the gospel.

Work is also being carried on among the Touaregs, the wandering nomads of the desert. These wild men had beennbsp;a law unto themselves until the French occupation, and manynbsp;of them were noted for their cruelty and wickedness. Theynbsp;now visit the Mission station and listen intently to the claimsnbsp;of Christ.

The Touaregs are entirely different from any other tribe of Africa. This is noticed particularly in their customs and.nbsp;their treatment of their women. They were once a whitenbsp;race, who came down into the desert and have had no fellowship with white people since that time. Their chief occupation has been one of robbery and theft. Their victims havenbsp;been commercial men and travelers of the desert. Whennbsp;there were no merchantmen or travelers whom they couldnbsp;rob, they fought among themselves. There are three divisions of the Touaregs: (1) The Imouchars, or the Nobles;nbsp;(2) The Daggas, or the middle class; (3) The Bella Class,,nbsp;or the slaves.

The Imouchars, or Nobles, are perhaps descendants of a lost crusade or of a Roman legion that came down into'nbsp;Africa and did not get back, or of 78,000 vandals who camenbsp;over from Spain and never returned. They hold themselvesnbsp;far above the other two classes and will not intermarry withnbsp;them. The Daggas are the offspring of the Nobles and theirnbsp;concubines. The Nobles still retain their tifinar script ofnbsp;writing. However, there are none that are able to read ornbsp;write this script. The Daggas have learned to read Arabic

and many of them are very fluent in reading the Arabic scriptures. There are a few who have been trained in the French school to read French and any Latin character scripts whichnbsp;might be given them.

During the dry season the Touaregs camp along the river in order to find food for their cattle, and at this time thenbsp;missionaries itinerate among them, using tents for dwellings.nbsp;There are many hungry hearts and the workers have alreadynbsp;been rewarded with souls that have been born again. Onenbsp;Touareg has followed the Lord in baptism—the first of thisnbsp;tribe to be baptized, as far as is known, in this dispensation.

Gao. Early in the spring of 1928 the missionaries at Tombouctou felt led to divide their forces and open Gao at the buckle of the Niger. They were able to rent a nativenbsp;house which serves as a Mission station. The workers foundnbsp;that Gao was a more important commercial center than Tombouctou. From this point on the Niger a motor highwaynbsp;had been opened which leads across the Sahara, linking upnbsp;the Soudan with France. Many tourists, even from America,nbsp;avail themselves of this highway across the Sahara in theirnbsp;own automobiles.

The first baptismal service in Gao was held in 1932. Six men were baptized near the public wharf and there was nonbsp;hesitancy as each in turn acknowledged the Son of God asnbsp;his Saviour and Lord and was put beneath the waters innbsp;baptism. The false report was spread through this Mohammedan town that the Americans had paid a sum of moneynbsp;to each man who had been baptized. No man will desire tonbsp;be baptized in a fanatical town unless he really desires tonbsp;follow the Lord. The persecution that followed greatly developed this little band. An elder of the church, while on anbsp;tour with the missionary in a district where hundreds ofnbsp;pagans were turning to the Lord, felt led to stay there andnbsp;help shepherd the many flocks without a pastor. And others,nbsp;equally as true, are giving forth their testimony in Gao.

Ivory Coast

Dedougou. The Mission opened this station in 1927. The Dedougou district up to the year 1933 comprised a population of 500,000. At that time it belonged tonbsp;the colony of Upper Volta. For economic reasons this colony dissolved and the government posts were apportionednbsp;to the French Soudan and Ivory Coast colonies. The townnbsp;of Dedougou was assigned to the Ivory Coast and a numbernbsp;of the towns formerly in the Dedougou district were transferred to other districts, thus greatly reducing the numbernbsp;of towns and people for which the Dedougou governmentnbsp;officials were responsible. This new arrangement, however,nbsp;does not alter the fact that the Dedougou missionary couplenbsp;is responsible to God for approximately 500,000 native people in 500 towns. The bulk of this population belongs to thenbsp;Red Bobo, Sanmogo and Dafin tribes, the Red Bobo predominating.

The people of the Sanmogo tribe are located northeast of Dedougou but migrate to many of the government centers.nbsp;They number about 50,000 and at present are without anbsp;Protestant missionary. Several of these people have come tonbsp;the missionary for teaching but have then gone elsewhere.nbsp;The Roman priests are located in the center of the tribe andnbsp;are rapidly deceiving the people.

For the past four years work has been carried on among the Dafin people. This tribe, as well as the aforementionednbsp;Bobo and Sanmogo tribes, is almost entirely pagan. An outstation at Botmiboya, forty miles from Dedougou, is thenbsp;geographical center of the tribe and from that point numerous towns may be easily reached. Permission to preach hasnbsp;been accorded by the governor and application has beennbsp;made for four other preaching points in the tribe. The native evangelist of the Dafin tribe moves from town to townnbsp;to instruct the inquirers. The outstation is being maintainednbsp;as a training center to which people may come for teachingnbsp;and for Short Term Bible School classes.

Most of the towns in the district are accessible by automobile or bicycle as the land is comparatively level. There is one section, however, that is quite mountainous and visitsnbsp;have to be made on foot. In these localities the towns arenbsp;only four or five miles apart and during the dry season, fromnbsp;November through May, they may be reached by the missionary once a month. In several sections the continuousnbsp;rains of August and the floods of September render travelingnbsp;impossible during those months.

Bobo Dioulasso. This mission station among the pagan Bobo tribe was opened in 1923. Thenbsp;missionaries labored faithfully for a number of years butnbsp;until 1932 only a few Bobos had knelt in prayer, althoughnbsp;there were several from other tribes who had been convertednbsp;and baptized.

One of the things that impresses a visitor to a Bobo town most forcibly is the number and variety of idols and fetishes.nbsp;They are found in the houses, on top of the houses, in thenbsp;streets, under the trees, outside the towns and almost everywhere. The material forms of the fetishes vary, but theynbsp;are nearly all alike in being partly covered with black andnbsp;reddish stripes or splotches of old clotted blood from the sacrifices made upon them, and they all give one the same feeling of loathing and revulsion.

The Bobos will walk long distances to inquire the way of salvation. Frequently men have walked more than twentynbsp;miles for this purpose and then back the next day to theirnbsp;work. One man walked about twenty-five miles from a village the missionaries had never visited to attend the Sundaynbsp;service and then two weeks later he returned with eight othernbsp;men. Men from eight other towns have shown similar interest and inquirers come almost daily to repent and learnnbsp;more about the gospel. Chapels are being built by the natives themselves in the towns where there are believers, andnbsp;regular classes have been established for instruction in thenbsp;Word.

Santidougou. The first real encouragement among the Bobo people came in 1933 when aboutnbsp;twenty-five natives from one village came of their own accord desiring to be taught. It was at this time that it wasnbsp;decided to establish a station at Santidougou, also callednbsp;Parehon, where the missionaries could reside especially fornbsp;work among the Bobos and where the inquirers and Christians could be taught in their own language. Prior to thisnbsp;two towns were opened to the Gospel message and therenbsp;were interested individuals in other villages, but since thennbsp;there have been evidences of a general awakening throughout the Bobo tribe.

Bouake. A tour of the mass movement in the lower part of the Ivory Coast was made in 1925 and it wasnbsp;found that the Wesleyan Mission had entered the territorynbsp;and had made extensive plans to develop the whole districtnbsp;affected by this remarkable movement. Hearing later thatnbsp;there were great areas in the interior that had not been carednbsp;for, an investigation was made in 1929. It was found thatnbsp;the Baouli tribe, numbering 380,000, and the Gouro tribenbsp;of 250,000 were as yet unoccupied and that no society hadnbsp;planned definitely to evangelize these regions. Thus Bouakenbsp;was opened in May, 1930. Repeated trips have been takennbsp;into the surrounding district with excellent results.

Many races are gathered in the cosmopolitan center of Bouake where the work of God was blessed from the verynbsp;beginning. There are Ashantis from the Gold Coast, Dioulasnbsp;and Bobos from the north, Gouros from the west, and othernbsp;tribes. No one language is spoken by all and so an interpreter is required. Leaders were developed from the verynbsp;first group of men and they helped to bear the responsibilitynbsp;of the church.

The latest reports tell of work begun among the Agni tribe, which had been influenced by the Harris Movementnbsp;and had waited for years for a visit from a Protestant missionary. When the missionary from Bouake visited thenbsp;tribe, 27 believers were baptized in the town of Koun.

Mbayakro. The Bouake church was soon self-supporting and one of the leaders was sent to work atnbsp;Mbayakro, fifty-six miles away, where the people had responded readily to the gospel. Thus Bouake became a missionary church for they contributed toward this leader’s support. When the Christians at Mbayakro had built a commodious chapel and had begun to carry the Truth to the surrounding country, two missionaries were stationed there tonbsp;give the church further instruction. The church, under thenbsp;leadership of the native worker, was crowded at nearly everynbsp;service and within the year the believers had more thannbsp;(doubled their numbers. They conducted a prayer meetingnbsp;in a near-by town that continued far into the night. Thenbsp;work continues to prosper and the district gives promise ofnbsp;a fruitful harvest.

Toumodi. Missionaries took up residence in Toumodi in 1934 when a permanent dwelling place and anbsp;jchapel were built. This station is located near the Swamneynbsp;section where there are many opportunities for preachingnbsp;the Word, As a result of the Harris Movement, churchesnbsp;have been built by the natives in eight towns and they arenbsp;still waiting for a messenger of the gospel to teach themnbsp;more of the Way of Life. They are very desirous that ournbsp;missionaries should work in their churches and towns, andnbsp;the missionaries plan to do so as rapidly as the governmentnbsp;grants permission. Before the missionaries had been innbsp;Toumodi a year, eight converts were baptized and the blessing of God continues.

Translation and Publication Work

The New Testament has been completed in three different languages, namely: Meninka, spoken by 678,000 people;nbsp;Bambara, a trade language spoken by approximately 845,000 ;nbsp;and the Sonhrai with a population of 154,000. The Alliancenbsp;.missionaries translated the New Testament into both thenbsp;Meninka and the Sonhrai languages, but a worker from thenbsp;(Gospel Missionary Union at Bamako completed the translation in the Bambara. Genesis, Exodus, Daniel, Jonah, and anbsp;number of the Psalms have been translated into the Meninkanbsp;language. There is translation work being done in all thenbsp;languages used by the missionaries.

During the past years the translation and printing work have increased steadily. By the use of the multigraph, runnbsp;by trained natives, and the stenciling and mimeograph worknbsp;taken care of by the missionary in charge. Gospels and Scripture portions have been printed in the following languages :nbsp;French, Kissi, Bobo, Toma, Bambara, Meninka, Foula,nbsp;Habbe, Sonhrai, Dafin, Baoull, Yalonka, and Red Bobo. Innbsp;the year 1934, 1,350 copies of Scripture portions were printednbsp;in Meninka, Bambara and Kissi ; 6,500 Primers were printednbsp;in Meninka, Dafin and Red Bobo, and 500 in Baouli ;nbsp;200 copies of Bible Stories of 95 pages each in Black Bobonbsp;and 500 in Baouli ; 2,500 copies of Bible Studies in Kissi,nbsp;Baouli and Meninka, 700 copies of hymn books in Kissi,nbsp;Yalonka, Baouli and Toma; 4,300 Church Covenants innbsp;Sonhrai and French; and 1,200 copies of hymns in Meninkanbsp;and Baouli. The Gospel of Matthew has been translated intonbsp;Tamachek, the language spoken by the Touaregs of thenbsp;Sahara desert. A native scribe was secured to cut the stencils for the Gospels, Scripture portions and tracts writtennbsp;with the Arabic characters in Meninka, Bambara, Macina-Foula, Sonhrai and Fouta-Djallon.

The Indigenous Church

When one considers the magnitude of the task that confronts the missionaries in the molding and shaping of the native church in order that it might be built up in the truenbsp;and holy faith, it is realized that their sufficiency is in Godnbsp;only. The diversity of languages has been one of the greatest handicaps in the unifying and strengthening of the nativenbsp;church. Many of the tribes as yet have only small portionsnbsp;of the Scriptures in their own tongue, and it is the missionarynbsp;who has the colossal task of translating the Word into thesenbsp;unwritten languages. In some of these language groups thenbsp;Mission has been able to allot only one missionary couple.

There are regular evening Bible study classes held on nearly every mission station for those who desire to read thenbsp;Scriptures and know the Word of God for themselves. Fromnbsp;these classes the students for the Short Term Bible Schoolsnbsp;are chosen. It has been the policy in the past to hold suchnbsp;Short Term Bible Schools among the various languagenbsp;groups. They have been graciously blessed of the Lord, butnbsp;the time has come when a central Bible school is needednbsp;where the more advanced students can receive the necessarynbsp;training that will enable them to become the future pastorsnbsp;of their people.

In the French Guinea, churches have been established in five different tribes, the Kissi church being the largest. Therenbsp;are also six tribes represented in the Soudan and four in thenbsp;Ivory Coast. The Mission’s objective is to establish thesenbsp;churches on a self-supporting, self-propagating, and self-governing basis; nevertheless, due to the immense territorynbsp;and numerous tribes whose manners and customs are at greatnbsp;variance, the progress is slower in some tribes than in others.nbsp;In the pagan tribes, where Mohammedanism and modernnbsp;civilization have not yet made their imprint, these principlesnbsp;have met with hearty response, while in the Mohammedannbsp;tribes the progress has been retarded greatly.

In the various districts there are seventeen native workers, five of whom are supported by native funds. Their splendid work has greatly augmented the endeavors of the missionaries. Some districts use as helpers the promising youngnbsp;men of their own tribes who have shown evidence of leadership. As a means of livelihood they continue working onnbsp;their farms and only receive, when needed, a mere stipendnbsp;from designated funds. Just as soon as the churches arenbsp;able financially they will support their own native workers.nbsp;Several are now partially thus supported.

When the central Bible School becomes a reality many will be trained to become capable native pastors and workersnbsp;to shepherd the flocks, which in turn will mean a multiplyingnbsp;of converts and church members, and this will culminate innbsp;self-supporting and self-governing native churches.

Many of the fourteen millions of French West Africa have not yet had the opportunity of hearing the message of thenbsp;gospel. The Alliance Mission is responsible for five millionnbsp;souls, and nearly five thousand of these have already beennbsp;enrolled as inquirers. The task is tremendous when one considers the language barriers, but faith says it can be done.nbsp;This requires the cooperation in prayer of the Alliance constituency, both at home and abroad.

SIERRA LEONE

One of the early goals in the missionary zeal of Dr. Simpson and his coworkers was the evangelization of the French Soudan. The work in Sierra Leone among the Temne andnbsp;Kuranko tribes was considered to be but a first step alongnbsp;this way. As early as 1896, four years after the first Alliance missionaries entered Sierra Leone, the Superintendentnbsp;of the Alission wrote to the Board declaring their desire andnbsp;purpose to extend a line of mission stations at intervals ofnbsp;about fifty miles northward to Timhuctoo and eastward fornbsp;more than five hundred miles. Although this particular plannbsp;has never been carried out, yet the purpose and scope whichnbsp;it set forth is being realized under the providence of God asnbsp;will be seen in a study of the map and the description of thenbsp;work in French West Africa. For a more complete accountnbsp;of the work in French West Africa we commend the excellent book. The Niger Vision, published by Christian Publications, Inc.

The ministry of The Christian and Missionary Alliance in Sierra Leone has continued from 1892 until the present timenbsp;and through these years the gospel has been preached faithfully in the Temne and Kuranko tribes, although the worknbsp;among the Kurankos has not been as continuous or as widespread as that among the Temnes. For many years priornbsp;to the transfer of the missionary force to French Westnbsp;Africa with the exception of one veteran missionary whonbsp;continued work in the Temne field, there was conducted anbsp;Bible Training School at Makump, which was also the headquarters of the Mission in Sierra Leone.

Mayoso. This station among the Temne tribe was one of the centers entered in the early days of the Mission and an excellent work has been carried on through thenbsp;years. A church has been established and native workersnbsp;trained in the Word and work of the Lord. These nativenbsp;workers are now ministering in different portions of thenbsp;surrounding area and we commend the work to the prayersnbsp;of God’s people that each church may grow in spiritualnbsp;power and that many souls may be saved.

When the missionaries were transferred gradually from Sierra Leone to the French West Africa field, the portionnbsp;of Sierra Leone inhabited by the Kuranko tribe was considered to be a part of the French West Africa Mission, andnbsp;the work has been carried on from two centers.

Sambaya-Bendugu. When the deputation from the Board visited this field in 1921-22 the mission station at Bendugu had been closed for a number ofnbsp;years. With the sending out of new missionaries the stationnbsp;was reopened in 1923 and manned by colored missionariesnbsp;from our colored Alliance branches in the United States ofnbsp;America. The witness has been given with zeal and somenbsp;souls have turned to the Lord.

Monko-Bendugu. This station in the northeast portion of the field was opened about 1925 andnbsp;another missionary couple of the colored race has been steadfast in their labors for Christ among the people of the district. The ministry has resulted in bringing some preciousnbsp;souls out of heathen darkness into the saving light of thenbsp;Lord Jesus Christ.

Transfer of the Work

As the responsibilities of the Alliance have increased in French West Africa with the expanding of the work intonbsp;other tribes and larger areas, there has also come a realization that the opportunities for gospel ministry are so greatnbsp;that the utmost endeavors of the present force of missionaries and the few native workers are utterly inadequate tonbsp;the task. The movement of the Holy Spirit upon the heartsnbsp;of many in the various tribes in the larger field has not onlynbsp;given cause for great rejoicing among those who labor bynbsp;witnessing and by prayer for the French Soudan, but hasnbsp;also required the concentration of forces in order that thenbsp;harvest so abundantly promised may be surely gathered.nbsp;Hence, it is expected that the work of the Alliance in thenbsp;Kuranko field will not long continue, but that another evangelical Society, working in adjacent territory in Sierranbsp;Leone, will become responsible for the further evangelization of the Kuranko people in Sierra Leone.

Let us continue to remember both the Temnes and the Kurankos before the throne of God in our supplications andnbsp;prayers, and especially that the church members, new converts and inquirers may continue to be moved by the Spiritnbsp;of God and may come into a place of full blessing in Christnbsp;Jesus ; also that they may become channels for God to usenbsp;in carrying the message to others among their people. Innbsp;this way the Seed, sown so faithfully and ofttimes at suchnbsp;heavy cost in the early days of the Alliance work in Sierranbsp;Leone, will continue to grow until there is an abundant harvest of souls to the credit of the laborers and to the glorynbsp;of the Lord, Whom they loved and served so devotedly.

This city at the bend of the Niger on the edge of the Sahara Desert was long the goal of adventurous men, many of whomnbsp;lost their lives in endeavoring to establish business or government contacts. For a generation or more many Christiansnbsp;prayed with longing that the gospel might enter there. Tonbsp;take Christ to the people of this city and the desert tribesnbsp;beyond was the earnest expectation and objective of manynbsp;missionaries whose lifetime service was spent in coastalnbsp;regions, but their devotion and prayers give them a share innbsp;the later accomplishment when missionaries of a youngernbsp;generation entered within the walls of this long-sought goalnbsp;and planted there the banner of the Cross.

BELGIAN CONGO

Belgian Congo has a short coast line on the South Atlantic at the mouth of the Congo River but the principal part ofnbsp;this great colony is in the interior of south Central Africa.nbsp;French Equatorial Africa lies to the north and west, andnbsp;Angola (Portuguese) to the south, beyond which and to thenbsp;east is North Rhodesia; also to the east is Tanganyika, nownbsp;British, but formerly German, East Africa, and Ugandanbsp;(British) ; to the north it also touches the Soudan.

The Congo Mission of the Christian and Missionary Alliance is in the lower Congo near the mouth of the Congo River and in the northern portion of the Portuguese Enclavenbsp;of Cabinda, (or Kabinda).

Area and Population

The area of Belgian Congo is estimated at 918,000 square miles. The black population is chiefly of Bantu and Soudanese origin with some Nilotics and Pygmies. The nativenbsp;population in 1934 was 9,467,503. The white population wasnbsp;17,588 and of this number 11,423 were Belgians and 581nbsp;Americans.

The Alliance field in the Belgian Congo covers a comparatively small area in a district having a population of 380,000. The principal portion lies in a section called the Mayombe,nbsp;north of Borna. One district of the mission lies across anbsp;river in the northern portion of the Portuguese Enclave ofnbsp;Cabinda. Cabinda belongs to Portuguese Angola, and isnbsp;located between French Congo and Belgian Congo with twonbsp;ports on the Atlantic Ocean. The area of Cabinda is approximately 7,000 square miles.

Climate

The climate is hot and moist. The average mean temperature is 80.6 degrees Fahrenheit, and the average rainfall is 43.27 inches.

Government

The central government is at Brussels, Belgium. The King is represented in the Colony by a Governor-General,nbsp;assisted by a Vice-Governor-General, one or more State Inspectors and six Provincial Commissioners. The colony isnbsp;divided into six provinces and sixteen administrative districts.nbsp;Each district is divided into administrative territories ofnbsp;which there are 104 in the whole country. The capital ofnbsp;each province bears the name of the province itself.

Throughout much of Africa, tribes have been governed by Chiefs, each village having a local Chief and the districtsnbsp;having, what is termed in English, Paramount Chiefs. Thenbsp;¦colonial governments differ in the extent to which they permitnbsp;native local government, but all give some degree of recognition to the native system. Hence, in the Congo there is anbsp;local native Chief in each village and a Paramount Chief, ornbsp;Bula Matadi, rules over a district of many villages. Thenbsp;government generally deals with the natives through thesenbsp;Chiefs, though changes are being effected and the tendencynbsp;is for the colonial government to increase its administrativenbsp;work.

History

The Congo Free State had its origin in the vision of King Leopold H of Belgium, who, roused by Stanley’s discoveries,nbsp;realized the great economic possibilities in the developmentnbsp;•of the vast territory reached by the Congo. The International Association of the Congo, which he founded andnbsp;largely financed, sent Stanley back in 1879. He founded thenbsp;first station, Vivi, in February, 1880, and all twenty-fournbsp;before he returned in 1884. Leopold pushed the work withnbsp;the aid of a handful of men, mostly officers, and in 1885 thenbsp;powers in convention at Berlin recognized the association asnbsp;an independent state under his sovereignty.

The Congo Free State was ceded to Belgium by the treaty of 1907, becoming Belgian Congo under the control of thenbsp;newly created Ministry of the Colonies.

Physical Features

The Congo River is navigable for ninety-five miles from its mouth to Matadi, and in this section ply fifteen steamersnbsp;belonging to the State. Above Matadi, for over 249 milesnbsp;numerous rapids render the river unnavigable as far as Stanley Pool (Leopoldville). Above the Pool are 1,068 miles ofnbsp;navigable water reaching Stanley Falls, while several of thenbsp;great tributaries are navigable over a considerable extent ofnbsp;their course. Above the Stanley Falls the Congo is callednbsp;Lualaba and is navigable for 585 miles.

The surface of Congo is a depressed plateau basin, tilted westward, which was seemingly occupied in earlier ages by thenbsp;sea. It is unbroken by mountains except in the western partnbsp;near the Atlantic, but rises on its borders to elevations ofnbsp;6,000 feet or more. Less than half of the area is covered bynbsp;forests, while the remainder is composed of savannas andnbsp;arable land.

For several years there has been in a portion of the Congo a tract of land set apart for scientific purposes for the preservation and study of the animal and plant life of the section.nbsp;Late in 1935 the King of Belgium increased this nationalnbsp;park for scientific purposes to a much larger area in a portion of the Congo which is considered one of the most idealnbsp;sections in the world for this purpose. Here because of thenbsp;tropical location and the great range in elevations, there isnbsp;found an unusually large number of varieties of plant andnbsp;animal life.

Resources

Vast sunless and well-nigh impenetrable tropical forests fill the upper reaches of the river, covering about 25,000nbsp;square miles. The Lianas yield 3,000 to 4,000 tons of rubbernbsp;yearly. The oil palm is cultivated and palm kernels and palmnbsp;oil are exported. Copal, ivory, diamonds, gold, tin, uranium,nbsp;radium and iron are also found. Coffee, cocoa, rice, cottonnbsp;and tobacco grow freely, and cattle thrive where there is nonbsp;tsetse fly.

The chief industry is copper mining, the copper bearing belt being 250 miles long by 25 to 50 miles wide. The reserves are estimated at 40,000,000 tons.

Progress

The total railroad mileage in 1934 was 2,894 miles. There were 26,860 miles of road partially suitable for automobiles.nbsp;A motor road now runs from Rejaf, the Nile terminus ofnbsp;navigation from Khartum, to Stanleyville on the Congo,nbsp;terminus of navigation from Leopoldville on Stanley Pool.nbsp;The trip on regular service for mail and passengers nownbsp;takes five days. A railroad 249 miles long tranships freightnbsp;around the series of falls and rapids to Leopoldville on Stanley Pool. Railroads have been built around the falls on thenbsp;upper river, and to connect important points. The southernnbsp;part of Africa was at last spanned by railroad when on Julynbsp;1, 1931, the line was opened from Benguola at Lobita Baynbsp;on the Atlantic across Portuguese Angola, east to Tenke innbsp;Belgian Congo, south through Northern Rhodesia, thencenbsp;east through Portuguese East Africa to Beira, the port onnbsp;the Indian Ocean. The road is more than 2,000 miles long.nbsp;It was begun in 1903 and is designed to give an outlet fornbsp;the copper of the Katanga mines and those of Northernnbsp;Rhodesia.

In 1911 an important development was the construction of a pipeline from Matadi to Leopoldville 246 miles long fornbsp;the purpose of transporting crude oil for the use of rivernbsp;steamers. The river steamers run from Leopoldville tonbsp;Stanleyville and the tributaries of the Congo.

Airplanes fly regularly along several routes. From Leopoldville as a center, there are lines to the following places : Borna, 217miles; Stanleyville, 1,062 miles; Lusambo, 806nbsp;miles. In 1933 there were 74 post offices, 66 special telegraph offices, 29 wireless stations ; 4,000 miles of telephonenbsp;lines and 4,209 miles of telegraph lines.

In the lower Congo where the Alliance ministers there is a railway running from Boma north to Tchele-Banga, a distance of ninety miles. Some years ago the Mission built anbsp;road between the railroad station at Tchele-Banga and ournbsp;mission station at Kinkonzi, a distance of six miles. Othernbsp;roads have been built by plantation owners through some ofnbsp;their large rubber, coffee and cocoa plantations, but for thenbsp;most part travel throughout our Congo field is along narrownbsp;native paths. In all of this district there is but one postnbsp;office, which is located at Boma.

In 1933 there were eleven State schools with 5,649 pupils and 4,096 subsidized schools with 202,425 pupils. Statenbsp;schools for boys are at Boma, Leopoldville, Coquilhatville,nbsp;Lusambo, Kabinda, Stanleyville, Buta, La Kafubu and Bunianbsp;and those for girls at Leopoldville and Elizabethville. In

• 1934 the government grant to the missionaries for educationnbsp;of native children amounted to 9,288,248 francs, while thenbsp;total expenditure on education was 16,889,281 francs. Annbsp;organized medical service also exists.

The mode of living is very primitive, the houses being small huts built of reeds or the ribs of the palm branches,nbsp;roofed with layers of leaves over a network of reeds ornbsp;palms. There are no farms but the crops are grown onnbsp;small fields cleared each year in the forest or grass countrynbsp;as the case may be. The methods of agriculture are verynbsp;crude and hard work is required. Often animals of thenbsp;forest will destroy much of the crops before they can benbsp;harvested. The government is doing what it can to promotenbsp;an interest in and knowledge of better ways in agriculturalnbsp;work.

Currency

Belgian colonial francs are used in the Congo. There are half-franc and franc pieces in coins and also smaller denominations but the latter are used very little. The notes atnbsp;[»resent in circulation are of 1 ,€XX), 500, 100, 20, and 5 francs.nbsp;The five-franc notes are used by the natives but those withnbsp;larger values are used chiefly by the white population. In

• 1935 twenty-nine Belgian francs could be secured for annbsp;American dollar.

In Cabinda Enclave, a Portuguese colony, the angolares are used. The smallest piece, which is made of metal, is one-balf an angolare and the smallest denomination in paper isnbsp;five angolares. The rate of exchange in 1935 was twenty-two angolares to the dollar.

Languages and Tribes

Kiswahili is the language spoken by the natives who have been under Arab influence. Bangala is the commercial language on the Upper Congo. Fioti is used near the coast andnbsp;Erhiluba in the southern part. The language used in the Alliance field is generally called Kifioti. It is sometimes spokennbsp;¦of as Kikongo.

Religion

The religion of the native is gross fetishism. There is no religious community as in the highly developed religions ofnbsp;the Orient, but each village or group of villages has its so-called religious leaders, generally witch doctors.

The Roman Catholic Church is making every possible effort to turn the people of Congo to the Church of Rome. Hundreds of monks, priests and nuns have been sent out innbsp;the last few years.

Missionary Occupation

In the work-span of a single life Christianity has come to Congo. During the years 1878 and 1879 the first little bandnbsp;of devoted men and women missionary pioneers strugglednbsp;for a foothold on the very fringe of the deadly westernnbsp;coast that hid the equatorial empire beginning then to benbsp;known as the conventional basin of the Congo.

There were six missionaries at first but in 1930 there were a thousand, with one hundred and eighty mission stationsnbsp;and a half million adherents. In the beginning the missionsnbsp;occupied about two hundred square miles but now they arenbsp;spread over a million and a half.

The Congo Protestant Council reports the following figures for 1935 : Forty-two Protestant missions and three independent missions covering an area of 966,000 squarenbsp;miles with a population of 14,000,000. This includes Ruandanbsp;Urundi. There are 210 Protestant mission stations. Reportnbsp;from 141 of these show an adult baptized membership ofnbsp;238,807, adult adherents under instruction 275,935 and anbsp;total Protestant community exceeding 1,000,000. Protestantnbsp;schools number 10,116, scholars 335,727. The number ofnbsp;missionaries is 893, of whom 197 are single, and 315 married, women. There are 13,058 native workers.

Christian schools, hospitals and training centers are preparing hundreds of young men and women as preachers, teachers, nurses, agriculturists and skilled artisans, all with anbsp;decided Christian background. These are scattering outnbsp;everywhere among their twelve million fellows, a large percentage of them in direct and active religious service.

The Catholic statistics for the same area at the same period give 805 priests, 465 brothers, 1,057 sisters, 37 native brothers, 67 native sisters and 18,307 catechists. There are 255nbsp;stations divided among twenty-five ecclesiastical divisions.nbsp;The missionary personnel have increased by 950 during recent years. The Catholic population is given as 1,232,018,nbsp;adult baptisms during the past year being 121,109, infantnbsp;baptisms 71,960. Scholars in Roman Catholic schools number 444,427.

The Apostolic Delegate speaking recently at Leopoldville, Congo, said : “The Catholic Church is not Belgian, nornbsp;French, English,.Italian or American, it is Catholic; Belgiannbsp;in Belgium, French in France, Italian in Italy. ... In thenbsp;Congo it must be Congolese: in the construction of sacrednbsp;edifices, in the manufacture of objects for use in liturgicalnbsp;functions, lines and colors and all the elements of Congolesenbsp;art must be scrupulously observed. . . . When the nativesnbsp;are in church they must not feel that they are in a strangenbsp;house ; they must feel that they are in their own church.”

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

The field of The Christian and Missionary Alliance in Belgian Congo is a territory near the mouth of the Congonbsp;River containing a population of about 380,000. In a sketchnbsp;of the early days of The Christian and Missionary Alliancenbsp;in its world-wide ministries, as contained in the excellentnbsp;book, “Twenty-five Wonderful Years,” by Dr. George P.nbsp;Pardington, there is the following statement of the beginningnbsp;of the work in the Congo ;

The Congo has the signal distinction of being the first field to which a band of missionaries was sent. In the fall of 1884, several

years before the Alliance was organized, eight yopng men sailed for the Congo, the fruit of the first class of the New York Missionarynbsp;Training Institute (transferred to Nyack, N, Y., about 1897).

The early years were arduous ones for the missionaries, the deadly climate taking a toll of thirty-one lives. Undernbsp;the providence of God this death rate did not continue andnbsp;before the end of the first thirty years there was one periodnbsp;of seven years in which no death occurred among our Congonbsp;missionaries. Despite hardships, testings, and losses, thenbsp;work was carried on faithfully, and reinforcements sent sonbsp;that during nearly the entire period of the Alliance work innbsp;the Congo this field has had a larger number of missionariesnbsp;in proportion to the population for which the Alliance is responsible than in any other field. The backward conditionnbsp;of a primitive people often makes necessary a larger numbernbsp;of workers.

Although in the Congo field there are now more native Christians than in any other Alliance field, yet in the firstnbsp;twenty years of the Mission the results were few and therenbsp;came a time when the work in the Congo Mission was verynbsp;discouraging. A number of the leading native workers hadnbsp;backslidden and the church, then small, was practically disbanded. During the Missionary Conference that year therenbsp;was much in the local situation to dishearten the missionaries,nbsp;but they were encouraged by the promises of God and by thenbsp;reports from China and other fields, where God was working in the salvation of many souls. One missionary venturednbsp;the remark that we should not expect the same results fromnbsp;the preaching of the gospel among Africans as from amongnbsp;educated Indians or Chinese. Just then a young man, onenbsp;of the younger missionaries, stood up and in a spirit of greatnbsp;earnestness said, “Brother, I refuse to believe that the gracenbsp;of God or the Spirit of God can do less in the heart of anynbsp;man in Africa than in the heart of a man in India or China.”nbsp;The missionaries determined to take the stand that the gospel was as truly the power of God unto salvation for thenbsp;Congo field as for any other part of the world, and theynbsp;went back to their stations to pray and labor in expectationnbsp;of the harvest, in due time. An awakening soon resultednbsp;in the villages of the Maduda district and later in the Yemanbsp;district, and hundreds of natives turned to the Lord in thenbsp;next few years.

The most rapid growth of the work came after thirty years of faithful ministries on the part of missionaries andnbsp;the loyal aid of a number of devoted native evangelists.nbsp;During these years a solid foundation was laid. A reportnbsp;printed about the end of the thirty-year period states : “Recently a gracious outpouring of the Holy Spirit visited thisnbsp;field, quickening both the missionary staff and the nativenbsp;church. A number of remarkable cases of divine healingnbsp;have occurred.” The growth since that time has been outstanding as will be seen in the paragraph under The Indigenous Church.

Although this first Alliance mission field was opened in 1884 and many fields opened at a later date had had severalnbsp;visits by deputations from the Board in New York, no suchnbsp;visit was made to the Congo until in 1924—forty years afternbsp;the opening of the field. At that time the Foreign Secretarynbsp;Was privileged to visit the Congo field and another Secretarynbsp;made a visit in 1931. These visits resulted in more rapidnbsp;progress in the development of the native church as a self-governing body, and in the enlargement of the plans andnbsp;work of the Bible Training School and the other school worknbsp;throughout the field.

In 1935 there were six centers occupied by missionaries, from which they ministered throughout the field in spiritualnbsp;ministries among the churches, especially in the variousnbsp;church quarterly meeting centers and also in ^school work.

3

One of the important problems in the Congo work today is the training of the native church and a heavy responsibilitynbsp;rests upon the Bible Training School staff in order that native workers may be trained and all the native Christiansnbsp;more fully instructed in the Word of God.

A Bible Training School with a three-year course is conducted at the central station, Kinkonzi. In this school the objective of self-support is maintained and the students whonbsp;are active evangelists are chosen by the church and partiallynbsp;supported by it, the balance having to be secured by the individual students.

Bush Schools, manned by natives, are maintained in over 700 villages. Children’s Schools and Preparatory Schools,nbsp;some conducted by natives and others by missionaries, arenbsp;held at suitable centers since it became necessary to do something for the children of the Christians especially, more thannbsp;could be done at the Bush schools. The Roman Catholicnbsp;Church has made a tremendous drive to compel the youth ofnbsp;Congo to enroll under her banner. Since this effort is conducted, in a measure, under government auspices, it is doublynbsp;hard to combat. Their plan is to compel the younger generation to enter so-called government schools, which are mannednbsp;entirely by Roman Catholic priests and lay-workers.

Much has yet to be accomplished in the schools, for the vast majority of the people of Congo are still illiterate. Encouraging progress has been made educationally, and somenbsp;splendid leaders have been developed and are taking theirnbsp;places in the church. The church, however, is as yet unablenbsp;to assume fully the task of educating her own people as wellnbsp;as the second generation of Christians and the missionarynbsp;must render further aid along this line. It is the purpose ofnbsp;the Mission to conduct only that amount of school worknbsp;which is necessary for the proper development of the church.nbsp;This, however, will require a considerable increase in schoolnbsp;work during the next few years until there are native teachersnbsp;sufficiently well trained to carry forward such school worknbsp;as is required by the Christian communities.

Kinkonzi. Opened in 1895, Kinkonzi has been the central station of the Alliance work in the Congo. Itnbsp;is located in the Mayombe, six miles from Tchele Banga,nbsp;which is the terminus of the railroad running north fromnbsp;Boma.

The Bible Training School located here had an enrollment last year of sixty-eight students of whom fifteen graduatednbsp;after completing the three-year course. There are also anbsp;Women’s School, a Preparatory School, and a Children’snbsp;Primary School. Thus, the staff of missionaries is largernbsp;than in other stations of the field. One missionary is innbsp;charge of the Bible School and others teaching in this andnbsp;other schools. The missionary who is responsible for thenbsp;district work devotes his time primarily to attending churchnbsp;quarterly meetings in the various sections, to the holding ofnbsp;Bible Conferences, and in giving counsel to the pastors andnbsp;churches as may be sought by them.

There is a large, well-built brick church in Kinkonzi with a main auditorium seating about a thousand and an adjoiningnbsp;room for conference purposes. The native church has builtnbsp;houses for the Bible School students on land secured fornbsp;them by the Mission for that purpose.

Boma. The work in Boma began about 1896. Here is the Receiving Home for missionaries arriving and departing by steamer or coming down from up country fornbsp;necessary trading. The business of the mission,—includingnbsp;the receiving and transmitting of mission funds, mail andnbsp;necessary provisions, and the purchase and shipping of provisions and supplies for the various stations,—is conducted

in Boma. The missionary couple living in Borna have charge of the station as well as the Receiving Home and all thenbsp;business matters, and therefore have comparatively little timenbsp;for extensive work in the district. One of the young womennbsp;missionaries is usually stationed here for supervision of thenbsp;school work in the station and district and for other spiritualnbsp;ministry.

The missionaries on the Boma station are responsible also for the spiritual oversight of the work in the distant pioneernbsp;district of Banana, down near the coast at the mouth of thenbsp;Congo River. Native workers from Yema and other districts have also been sent to Banana. The report of thenbsp;Foreign Secretary concerning his deputational visit to thenbsp;Congo in 1931 says concerning a meeting of the evangelistsnbsp;of the Banana District held at Boma

I had a profitable time with them and gleaned something of the difficulties attending the preaching of the gospel in this section. Thenbsp;old heathen customs, so prevalent in other portions of the field in thenbsp;earlier days, such as fetishism, witchcraft and poison test, aboundnbsp;here. In addition to the necessity of breaking down the old superstitions, there is a ceaseless fight against our workers by the Romannbsp;Catholics. It would seem that the principal objective of the Romannbsp;Catholics is not to change the hearts and habits of the heathen, butnbsp;merely to keep them from accepting the Word of God as preachednbsp;by the Christians of the Mission.

A station school for children is conducted at Boma as on the other stations, but the Preparatory School for the Bomanbsp;and Banana Districts is held in Vungu. Although the Bomanbsp;congregation is small compared with many of the upcountrynbsp;churches, there is a good church building and the work isnbsp;growing.

Vungu. Opened about 1892, Vungu was the second station in the Belgian Congo Mission. Ngangila, now anbsp;])art of the Vungu district, was the first station opened. Fornbsp;many years the people were not very responsive to the gospel but more recently the work has grown and there is notnbsp;only a healthy spiritual and numerical growth among thenbsp;churches of the district, but there has been a definite advancenbsp;in Primary and Preparatory school work so that the workersnbsp;and members shall be better trained for effective servicenbsp;for Christ.

The former mission station at Lolo (opened 1901) no longer has missionaries resident there and the Lolo districtnbsp;is supervised from Vungu with the exception of one villagenbsp;which is related to the Maduda station.

Maduda. In the early history of Alliance work in Congo, Maduda (1893) and Yema (1894) were both important mission stations, later they were transferred to thenbsp;direction of the large native churches which had been established. However, in recent years it was decided that thenbsp;mission should reënter Maduda for the purpose of establishing a Normal Training School so that the native workersnbsp;throughout the field might be more adequately trained fornbsp;the important work of teaching in the village schools. Itnbsp;is hoped that the Normal School will also be a valuable supplement to the work of the Bible School, inasmuch as workers who have studied in the school at Maduda will be betternbsp;aide to profit by the Bible classes given in the Bible Schoolnbsp;at Kinkonzi. The missionaries at Maduda also have opportunity for special ministry in the district. Station schoolsnbsp;for children and Preparatory Schools are also carried onnbsp;here.

Kwimba. About ten years ago Kwimba was established as a mission station because of the growth of thenbsp;work in this district. In addition to the spiritual oversightnbsp;of the churches, a station school for children and a Preparatory School are carried on here. As in the other districts, Institutes and Bible Conferences are held in variousnbsp;church centers. Each Institute continues for two full weeksnbsp;and the teachers and evangelists from the various churchesnbsp;attend the Institute nearest to them. Because of the deepening of the spiritual life of those who attend these Institutes,nbsp;they result in increased blessing in all parts of the district.nbsp;Two years ago each of the ten churches in the district agreednbsp;to hold a regular monthly day of prayer where the teachersnbsp;could meet and bring their problems and needs of theirnbsp;school to the Lord in prayer. This has resulted in a different spirit in the work and in greater blessing, especially innbsp;the quarterly meetings.

Mboka. This station in the Portuguese Enclave of Cabinda was opened in 1907. Cabinda has a population ofnbsp;about 25,000. The Alliance field is in the northern portionnbsp;of Cabinda. Another Protestant Society has work in thenbsp;southern portion, their headquarters being at the town ofnbsp;Cabinda.

The Portuguese government requires that our native evangelists pass a government examination before receivingnbsp;permission to teach. On the whole they have been lenientnbsp;in this examination. Students satisfactorily completing thenbsp;mission’s eight months Bible Preparatory Course in whichnbsp;they are taught arithmetic, reading and' writing in Portuguese, are usually able to obtain government permits.

Many of the people in the district are slaves, having been brought over from the French Congo and sold to the natives.nbsp;This condition makes for an instability of character whichnbsp;greatly hinders the work. Another hindrance is the headnbsp;tax, which the natives have to pay, the amount being so largenbsp;that they have difficulty in earning sufficient to pay it. Thenbsp;native jjeople themselves are favorable to the work of thenbsp;mission and from every direction towns are asking for evangelist-teachers. Although Catholic persecution is often verynbsp;severe, souls are being saved wherever our evangelists go.nbsp;The crying need of the Portuguese territory is for morenbsp;native workers to labor in the Master’s vineyard.

Translation and Publication Work

A newly revised edition of the entire Bible was printed about 1933 by the British and Foreign Bible Society. Thenbsp;work of revision was done by the American Baptist andnbsp;Swedish Missions, and The Christian and Missionary Alliance, all three Missions using the same translation in thenbsp;Kifioti language. Sonie progress has been made in the translation of other Ijooks helpful to the upbuilding of a spiritualnbsp;church, but much more needs to be done along this line sonbsp;that the growing church will have more literature availablenbsp;in the native tongue.

The Indigenous Church

Although at the end of the first thirty years of the Alliance Mission in the Congo an excellent foundation had been laid, yet the native church was not large, there beingnbsp;less than 800 members and only seventy native evangelists.nbsp;However, by a gracious working of the Holy Spirit in thenbsp;Mission and in the Church, the subsequent growth was muchnbsp;more rapid and now during each year more converts arenbsp;baptized than the total membership at the end of thenbsp;first thirty years. The church membership had grown tonbsp;11,542, the 50 churches being entirely self-supporting withnbsp;22 ordained pastors and 774 other native workers. In addition, 34 men and 36 women were being trained in the Biblenbsp;School preparing to become workers in the churches andnbsp;schools.

The work qf the churches is supervised by a native Board

of Elders, who are elected by the Annual Conference of delegates representing all the churches. The government’snbsp;refusal to recognize the independent status of the nativenbsp;church increases the burdens of the church leaders. It alsonbsp;necessitates the continuance of missionary service, not onlynbsp;to assist the churches in a spiritual ministry, but also to aidnbsp;in promoting the proper welfare of the Church in its relation to the government as occasion requires.

In order to give a clearer understanding of church life in the Congo, we take for an example the district of Yemanbsp;and describe briefly the organization. The same principlenbsp;applies in the other church districts.

There are seven churches in the Yema district, as shown in the table of Congo Churches. Four of these are in thenbsp;Yema district proper and three are in Kakongo district, fiftynbsp;miles south of Yema, where work was begun in 1924. Mostnbsp;of the Kakongo teacher-evangelists and the ordained pastornbsp;are from Yema and much of their support also comes fromnbsp;Yema. Kakongo is really a mission field of the churches innbsp;the Yema district proper and these churches send part ofnbsp;their offerings quarterly to the Kakongo churches, since thisnbsp;younger field has too few Christians to support so manynbsp;evangelists. Special offerings are also taken for this advance work.

The members of the churches in the Yema district, as in other districts, are scattered throughout a large area andnbsp;regular weekly services are held in the various villages undernbsp;the leadership of native teacher-evangelists. Quarterly meetings are held at each of the seven churches, which are considered centers for the seven sections into which the entirenbsp;Yema district is divided. At the time of quarterly meetingsnbsp;and on other special occasions the members from the different villages gather at the central church in their section. Thenbsp;missionary associated with the work in that district attendsnbsp;each quarterly meeting whenever possible, but the work isnbsp;under the direction of the ordained native pastors, of whomnbsp;there are four in the entire Yema district.

In the villages where native workers are teaching and preaching there are combined school houses and churches,nbsp;built generally after the manner of native houses, the wallsnbsp;being of the ribs of palm branches and the roofs coverednbsp;with leaves, although in some instances even the villagenbsp;churches are built of sawn boards. These places are alwaysnbsp;erected by the natives without any mission help. Here services are held both during the week and on Sunday and herenbsp;those in the village who desire to learn to read are instructednbsp;in regular weekday sessions.

Statistics concerning the churches have been omitted from the paragraphs under the various stations and are givennbsp;on page 34 with a rough sketch of the Congo field. Wenbsp;trust that this display will be impressed upon the minds andnbsp;hearts of the Lord’s people until there shall be a continualnbsp;fellowship in love and prayer for the growth of the churchnbsp;in the Congo field.

CONGO CHURCHES

FRENCH EQUATORIAL AFRICA

GABON

Location of Field

French Equatorial Africa extends from Spanish Guinea, just south of the Cameroon, to Belgian Congo. Its easternnbsp;boundary is the Ubangi and Congo Rivers and the Soudan.nbsp;On the west is the Cameroon. French acquisition began innbsp;1841 and its territory has since been extended by exploration and occupation and the limits defined in a series of international conventions.

Area and Population

In 1910 the French Congo was renamed French Equatorial Africa and subdivided into three colonies under one administration, subsequently adding Chad as a colony.

Climate

The heaviest rainfall appears between September and December when the equatorial rain-belt is moving southwards ; but from the latter part of December to the earlier part ofnbsp;February there is a considerable decrease. As the sun movesnbsp;northward there is a second rainy season between the middlenbsp;of February to the middle of May and then follows the drynbsp;season when the rainfall is reduced to a minimum. Thenbsp;temperature is high throughout the year but the upland districts in the interior are cooler. The annual rainfall is between fifteen and eighteen feet.

Government

In 1934 French Equatorial Africa constitutes a single administrative unit under the rule of a Governor-Generalnbsp;who is assisted by an administrative council, and a Secretarynbsp;General who acts as his deputy in the Governor-General’snbsp;absence. The Governor-General is located at Brazzaville.nbsp;Lieutenant-Governors with their full staff of French officials, are responsible for the administration of each colony.

History

French sovereignty in the Congo area was first established by the treaty of February 9, 1839, under the King of Gabon who was on friendly terms with French missionaries and traders. He ceded his territory to France andnbsp;effective occupation took place in 1844, and in 1848 Libreville, the capital, was founded with a draft of freed slaves.nbsp;The territory was explored in several expeditions by dunbsp;Chaillu and from 1862 onwards French control was extended until it reached the Ogooue River.

Physical Features

Much of the land is covered with dense equatorial forests. Beyond the Ogooue River lie the Crystal Mountains whichnbsp;have an average height of over 2,000 feet and send offnbsp;numerous branches towards the coast. In the northeast atnbsp;the central part is the plateau of Ngunye which is 3,000nbsp;feet.

Rivers are frequently interrupted by waterfalls and rapids. but are sometimes almost level with the surface of the land,nbsp;so that a very slight rise converts large areas into marsh.

The most important river is the Ogooue, which has a length of 750 miles. It rises in the plateau of Achikouyasnbsp;and flows northwest to the confluence of the Ivindo ; thennbsp;turns west and southwest to its delta south of Cape Lopez.nbsp;The Ogooue is the only river which provides a route to thenbsp;interior, but navigation is difficult at all times, on account ofnbsp;rocks and sand banks and the strong current. Because ofnbsp;the many islands it is difficult to distinguish the banks. Bothnbsp;shore and islands are covered with most beautiful scenerynbsp;and there is an abundance of wild life.

Resources

The resources of French Equatorial Africa are quite undeveloped. There are about 300,000 square miles of tropical forests extending to the Gabon coast which contain many species of trees of industrial value. Wild rubber is the mostnbsp;important. Palm oil is produced to some extent. Coffee,nbsp;cocoa, and cotton are also cultivated. In the Chad Colonynbsp;large numbers of cattle, sheep, asses, camels, horses, andnbsp;ostriches are raised but there are no facilities for export.nbsp;Ivory is an important article of exirort ; copper, zinc andnbsp;lead are also found.

Port Gentil is the greatest lumber port in all Africa and ships are continually loading logs. These logs are floatednbsp;down the Ogooue River.

Progress

A new railway was begun in 1921 and completed in 1930 connecting Brazzaville with the Atlantic at Pointe-Noire, anbsp;distance of 318 miles. A river port is under construction atnbsp;Brazzaville to facilitate traffic between the Congo and thenbsp;railway. Miles of paths and tracks have been made by thenbsp;French but communication in the equatorial forest is chieflynbsp;by waterway in paddle-wheel steamers or motor boats.

Currency

As in other French colonies in Africa the official currency is French. However, there are coins and notes of the usualnbsp;denominations in French money especially made for Frenchnbsp;Equatorial Africa. Trade in the interior is carried on bynbsp;means of barter, cloth and other items being given to thenbsp;native in exchange for ivory, rubber, etc. Among themselves the natives use native money consisting chiefly of wirenbsp;or small metal objects, but the French currency is comingnbsp;into greater use.

The franc at present is worth a little less than 7c in U. S. money, or about 15 francs to the dollar.

Languages and Tribes

There are several language groups in Gabon, four being shown below :

• 1. Bapotmo (Bayaka)nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;3. Mitsogo

Baloumbo (Balouinbo is derisive fornbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Simba

Bapouno)

Bavoungo nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Apindjinbsp;(Apingi)

Echira nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Iveia

Masango Bavarama

• 2. Banjavi (Banzebi—native name) 4. Bakcle (Bakale)

Badouma nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Bangomo

Bavili

The Echira and Masango are sister tribes speaking the same language. There are eight or nine other languages ornbsp;tribal dialects within the bounds of the probable Alliancenbsp;field in addition to that of the pigmy tribe, the Barimba.

Religions

Gabon and Middle Congo lie beyond the full range of Mohammedan influence. The people are fetish worshipers,nbsp;and practice witchcraft. The human leopard society is active in parts of the country. The Roman Catholic Missionnbsp;is located in Gabon and the workers are putting forth everynbsp;effort to hinder Protestant missionaries from giving forthnbsp;the gospel message.

Missionary Occupation

The Paris Evangelical Mission is established in northern Gabon and in 1890 they took over the work of the Presbyterian Mission. This French Mission is located on the northnbsp;side of the Ogooue River extending north and northeast tonbsp;the border of Spanish Guinea and Cameroon. They desirenbsp;that the Alliance Mission take responsibility for nearly allnbsp;the country south of the river, keeping only a small stripnbsp;along the southern shore for themselves. This gives thenbsp;Alliance an area in southern Gabon and middle Congo, aboutnbsp;250 by 350 miles square with a population between 300,000nbsp;and 400,000 that has never had the gospel.

The membership of the Paris Evangelical Mission churches is 6,000 with 13,000 catechumens, 300 teachersnbsp;and four pastors.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

Until 1930 the entire district of South Gabon, French Equatorial Africa had been closed to missionary effort by anbsp;large commercial enterprise. The failure and withdrawalnbsp;of this company now leaves it open to the preaching of thenbsp;gospel. For several years the Paris Evangelical Mission,nbsp;working among the people in the north, had been prayingnbsp;that God would open the way and send some Mission Society to work among the savage and cannabilistic tribes occupying the plains and mountains of the south and east.

On February 15, 1933 two missionaries were appointed by the Belgian Congo Alliance Mission to make a survey ofnbsp;Southern Gabon and choose a suitable Mission site. Innbsp;December, 1934, two couples entered the country and begannbsp;to put up temporary houses of native material, with grass ornbsp;leaves for roofs, bark of trees for walls and dirt floors.

Macombo. This location was chosen as the natural center, geographically and experimentally, from whichnbsp;to reach the tribes and carry on work among three of thenbsp;major language groups. The station thus established atnbsp;Macombo (Boungolo Falls) is actually joined by path tonbsp;the two big cross-country government paths which carrynbsp;a continual stream of people from all the tribes of thenbsp;district going to and coming from the government posts.nbsp;Scores of men and women were sent by the Commandant tonbsp;make roads to the site, to clear away the forest, and to getnbsp;building material.

One missionary couple had to leave for furlough in May, 1935, but a new couple sailed for France before the end ofnbsp;the year in preparation for work in the Gabon.

Translation and Publication Work

Two hymns have been translated into four different languages. The Gospel of Mark is being translated into the Echira language and the Gospel of John, into the Bapounonbsp;language. Separate translations of the scriptures will benbsp;needed in two or three other languages, requiring years ofnbsp;earnest endeavor.

Building the Church

By the end of 1935 the church in the Alliance field in the Gabon numbered twenty-four members, twenty-three ofnbsp;whom had been baptized during the last half of the year.nbsp;A Bapouno Christian from the French Mission to thenbsp;northwest became the first native teacher in the Alliancenbsp;field. During the latter part of the year a class of fifty-ninenbsp;candidates for baptism were given a three months course ofnbsp;intensive teaching in the Word and from this group nineteennbsp;were accepted and baptized on Christmas Day, the othersnbsp;needing further instruction. The new converts representnbsp;several different tribes and are zealous in serving the Lordnbsp;and witnessing among their own people.

Writing in July, 1935, less than eight months after the field was entered, a missionary says, “Pioneering here ^lonenbsp;in the heart of the upper Ngounie river country of southnbsp;Gabon, we find the daily demands upon our time and strengthnbsp;far more than one couple can fulfill. The opportunities arenbsp;unlimited and the doors are open for fruitful evangelizationnbsp;and, we believe, an early harvest ; but, being alone, we arenbsp;greatly hampered in the double task of the foundation work,nbsp;carried on at the mission post, and the itineration which isnbsp;so needed at this time in giving us personal contacts andnbsp;making Christ known to these people. Recently I made anbsp;hurried trip to the government post at Mbigou on businessnbsp;for the Mission and at the same time visited fifty villagesnbsp;and returned impressed with the fact that we could place anbsp;hundred teacher-evangelists immediately, if we had them,nbsp;in as many villages—fertile soil, ready for the planting ofnbsp;the Word of God. At the same time I found everywherenbsp;the recent aggressive efforts of the Catholic (Jesuit) missionaries to poison the people against us and the Gospel thatnbsp;we preach. Now is a crucial period in this field and wenbsp;urge your earnest prayer that we may be given wisdom innbsp;every step and attitude taken, relative to the government, thenbsp;Catholics, and the natives, in advancing the kingdom of Godnbsp;here. We are encouraged as we see the small number ofnbsp;believers increasing. Several young men have made knownnbsp;to us their desire to be Christians and become teacher-evangelists in our mission among their own people.”

FRENCH INDO CHINA

French Indo-China lies in the southeastern part of Asia; being bounded on the north by China, where it touches threenbsp;provinces, Yunnan, Kwangsi and Kwantung; on the westnbsp;by Siam and Burma. The eastern and southern coasts lienbsp;along the Gulf of Tonkin and the South China sea.

Area and Population

Although only a little larger than the State of Texas in U. S. A. or the province of Alberta in Canada, yet Frenchnbsp;Indo-China with its area of 277,504 square miles has anbsp;population of 21,452,000. The population includes aboutnbsp;42,000 Europeans, chiefly French. The area and populationnbsp;of the five States are as follows :

The kingdom of the Cham people was strong and independent and occupied the territory lying between Hue in Annam and Saigon in Cochin-China. The Cham race is anbsp;cross between the Cambodian and the Malay. Beautifulnbsp;Cham towers in several portions of Annam testify to theirnbsp;architectural ability. For centuries there was a strugglenbsp;between the Giao-Chi and the Chams, but the conquest ofnbsp;the Chams was completed about the seventeenth century andnbsp;from that time the Chams disappear from history exceptnbsp;for a few isolated groups in certain parts of the country.

The territory now known as Cochin-China and Cambodia was occupied by the Cambodians, who in ancient days formednbsp;a part of the Khmer Empire, the kingdom being known bynbsp;the name of “Cuch-Thloc.” This people soon became intermingled with the Malays and formed a race known asnbsp;Khomen. Though showing much practical intelligence andnbsp;energy, they cannot be credited with the qualities necessarynbsp;to such building achievements as are shown by the ruinsnbsp;of the wonderful temples in Angkor and other places innbsp;Cambodia. The building of these temples and monumentsnbsp;probably began after the conquest of Cambodia by Kingnbsp;Bhavavarman, Lord of the Khmer principality of Samvornbsp;on the Mekong and vassal of a Royal Hindu house. Thisnbsp;building continued probably until the twelfth century. During this period the language of the country was Sanskrit.nbsp;About the thirteenth century the Cambodian kingdom begannbsp;to decline. The artistic skill which distinguished this peoplenbsp;was gradually lost and today they are excessively lethargicnbsp;and lazy. By the middle of the eighteenth century thenbsp;Annamese, having subjugated the Chams, completed thenbsp;conquest of the portion of Cambodia now known as Cochin-China.

In 1760 the great revolution broke out in Annam. One of the princes sought refuge in Bangkok, Siam, where henbsp;appealed to the Catholic Bishop to obtain the aid of Francenbsp;to help establish him in his kingdom. Thus began the ascendancy of French influence and control throughout all of whatnbsp;is now French Indo-China. Cambodia sought the help ofnbsp;France against Siam and in 1883 became a French Protectorate. In 1894 Siam recognized French sovereignty overnbsp;Eastern Laos. Though kings still live and nominally rulenbsp;in Hue, Annam ; Pnom Penh, Cambodia ; and Luang Pra-bang, Laos ; yet the French are the supreme power in thenbsp;government of all French Indo-China.

Physical Features

Most of Tonkin consists of forest covered mountain regions inhabited principally by various aboriginal tribes, but one-sixth of the area is a delta formed by the branches ofnbsp;the Red River and the Thai-bin. Here and in Cochin-Chinanbsp;with its low-lying lands, well watered by the many mouthsnbsp;of the mighty Mekong, are found the rich delta lands whichnbsp;are among the best rice producing regions in the world.nbsp;The Annamese live mainly in these regions and along thenbsp;coast of Annam. The western boundary of Annam is formednbsp;by a chain of mountains and plateaux, the home of a number of primitive tribes. Laos is mountainous in most of itsnbsp;area with vast forests and torrential rivers. The Mekong,nbsp;which rises in the Himalaya mountains, forms the westernnbsp;boundary of Laos and flows down through Cambodia andnbsp;Cochin-China. Cambodia for the most part is a level andnbsp;well-watered country. In the northern part of Cambodia lienbsp;the ruins of Angkor, the mecca for tourists from many partsnbsp;of the world. In the wilder mountainous regions of Frenchnbsp;39

Indo-China, elephants, tigers and other wild animals are numerous.

Resources

The chief product of the country is rice, which is grown on irrigated lands which must be covered with water duringnbsp;most of the growing season. Many ingenious contrivances,nbsp;some mechanical and others hand operated, are used for lifting the water from streams and canals to the rice fieldsnbsp;which are surrounded by dykes.

Sugar, tea, cotton, spices, maize, coffee, tobacco, manioc, vegetables, and fruits are also grown. The forests supplynbsp;rare hard woods, including teak; dye-woods, bamboo, rubber, cocoanuts and medicinal plants. The minerals includenbsp;coal, phosphates, zinc, tin, chrome, graphite and lead. Silknbsp;is produced in some Annamese homes through its entirenbsp;process from the silk worm feeding on mulberry leaves andnbsp;spinning its cocoon to the weaving of the cloth on homemade looms.

Progress

Under French influence an excellent school system from primary schools to colleges has been established principallynbsp;among the Annamese, whose language has been Romanized,nbsp;the Latin alphabet displacing the old Chinese characters. Thenbsp;French government has built 5,257 miles of colonial routesnbsp;(main roads) and 10,611 miles of local roads. Most ofnbsp;these were suitable for automobile travel. The work of roadbuilding continues steadily. One may travel from Haiphongnbsp;in Tonkin south through Annam and across Cochin-Chinanbsp;and Cambodia to the borders of Siam, a distance of aboutnbsp;1,500 miles, on good auto roads. Automobile buses operatenbsp;throughout the country wherever the roads are suitable.

The railroad mileage in 1933 was 1,699 miles, two-thirds being government owned. Saigon, Hanoi, Haiphong andnbsp;Tourane are the principal terminals. One railway line ofnbsp;28)^ miles runs from Tourcham, which is near sea level, tonbsp;Dalat, which lies at an elevation of nearly one mile. Therenbsp;are 422 principal post offices and more than 700 ruralnbsp;post offices; 6,443 kilometers of telephone lines and 19,000nbsp;kilometers of telegraph lines (1 kilometer equals about six-tenths of a mile). In the principal centers where Frenchnbsp;officials reside good hospitals have been established and electric light and ice plants built.

Currency

According to the decree of May 31, 1930, the piaster was legally established on a gold basis, 10 francs equalling onenbsp;piaster. Before the devaluation of the U. S. dollar, onenbsp;U. S. dollar would purchase two or two and one-half piasters, but now it requires about 68 cents to purchase onenbsp;piaster, the cost varying according to the value of the dollarnbsp;in foreign exchange.

Languages and Tribes

The Annamese language is the native tongue of about 15,765,000 people in Tonkin, Annam and, Cochin-China.nbsp;Cambodian is spoken by about 2,682,000. The Lao dialectnbsp;of the Thai language, spoken in Laos, is next in importance.nbsp;French is used throughout the country by the educated people in business and in government offices. In addition tonbsp;the three principal language groups, there are eighty-twonbsp;tribes speaking different languages. Some words are thenbsp;same in several languages and some of the customs arenbsp;the same in neighboring groups, but there is enough difference to name them as separate tribes. The Moi outnumbernbsp;all others, numbering about 224,000 people already subduednbsp;and an unknown number still living in their savage state innbsp;the forests, large areas of which have never been penetratednbsp;by a white man. Although the name Moi really meansnbsp;“savage or primitive people” and thus could be applied tonbsp;most of the aboriginal tribes, yet it is used by the Frenchnbsp;to designate certain tribes. Hence we use the term in thisnbsp;latter sense.

There are 222,000 Thos, and other tribes, such as the Rhadé, Phnong, Muong, Man, Stieng, Kha, numbering tensnbsp;of thousands each; while some tribes as the Ngion, Pana,nbsp;Yo, Hoyan and others are each fewer than 1,000. Thenbsp;Cham tribe is among the most civilized. Their languagenbsp;comes from the Sanskrit. A few of the tribes in Laos arenbsp;not only civilized but advanced in art. Other tribes livenbsp;in the most primitive way imaginable. Some seem to be lessnbsp;provided for than the beasts of the jungle. The followingnbsp;languages are being used in Alliance ministries :

Religions

Confucianism exercises a great influence over most of the literary class of the Annamese especially. Every third yearnbsp;at Hue the King of Annam officiates as the representativenbsp;of his people in praying and offering sacrifices to the godnbsp;of heaven and earth. Ancestral worship is universal. Thenbsp;common people mingle the idol worship of Buddhism andnbsp;Taoism with the ancestral worship of Confucianism. Thenbsp;Cambodians are strongly Buddhist, the ancient temple ofnbsp;Angkor in Cambodia being one of the holy places of Buddhism. Although the founder of Taoism taught that therenbsp;was one supreme god, yet in practice today the religion hasnbsp;degenerated in many places in Annam into a kind of sorcerynbsp;and worship of the devil. Not only in the primitive tribes,nbsp;but also among cultured Annamese, spirit worship is common. In nearly every home an altar is raised to the spiritnbsp;which is supposed to preside there.

During the past century Roman Catholicism has made rapid progress in Indo-China. Large churches and cathedralsnbsp;are found in many cities and much of the opposition whichnbsp;has sought to forbid and hinder the preaching of the gospelnbsp;in various provinces can be traced to Roman Catholic influence.

The number of Protestant Christians in French Indo-China is about 10,000, there being 7,889 active members in the native churches in the Alliance work at the close of 1934.

Missionary Occupation

There are French Protestant churches in two or three cities. The Roman Catholics have several hundred foreignnbsp;priests and nuns throughout the country and many nativenbsp;priests. The Christian and Missionary Alliance is the onlynbsp;evangelical missionary agency primarily responsible for thenbsp;evangelization of all of French Indo-China with the exception of a small section of southern Laos, and among thenbsp;Kha tribe in northern Laos.

The Swiss Protestant Mission has been working in Laos since 1902 and today has three couples in three stations innbsp;the region of Savannaket. While colportage and preachingnbsp;trips have been made by them far into the north, their worknbsp;has been confined chiefly to the south and they have a group

of several hundred Christians scattered over that part of the country. These Swiss Brethren missionaries have translatednbsp;the Bible into the Lao language, the New Testament havingnbsp;been printed in 1926 and the whole Bible in 1932.

Early workers of the North Siam Mission of the Presbyterian Church made trips through the western section of northern Laos and now there are several hundred believersnbsp;in this territory among the Kha tribe. Several years ago,nbsp;however, the Presbyterian Mission in Siam turned over tonbsp;the C. and M. A. this large field of northern Laos, althoughnbsp;the Siamese Church continues to minister somewhat amongnbsp;the Khas.

A small number of Seventh Day Adventist workers have entered a part of the field in Indo-China during the last fewnbsp;years and are now actively proselytizing among the Christian churches.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

In his report for 1895-96, which was the eighth year of the International Missionary Alliance, Dr. A. B. Simpson,nbsp;the General Secretary and Superintendent of Missions ofnbsp;the 1. M. A., said in connection with the establishing ofnbsp;Alliance work in Kwangsi, South China; “Mr. and Mrs. R.nbsp;have recently made a trip up the entire length of the Westnbsp;River and have succeeded in crossing over into the provincenbsp;of Tonkin, part of Annam, and plans are now under consideration for opening, in connection with our South Chinanbsp;Mission, a work also in that great adjacent empire of Annamnbsp;where there is not a single Protestant missionary amongnbsp;all its 22,000,000.”

Alliance missionaries in South China continued to feel the call of God upon them to open work in French IndoChina and from 1903 the burden increased and efforts werenbsp;made to reach this needy land. Three South China inNsion-aries were sent to view the land and eventually a propertynbsp;in Tourane, owned by a Frenchman, an agent of the Britishnbsp;and Foreign Bible Society—was bought by the Alliance.nbsp;Thus in 1911 the first Protestant mission station in thenbsp;Annamese section of French Indo-China was opened bynbsp;The Christian and Missionary Alliance, our missionariesnbsp;succeeding the Bible Society agent and falling heir to thenbsp;good will which he had won for the gospel in Tourane.

In 1915 missionaries entered two new stations: Faifoo near Tourane, and Haiphong, the principal seaport of Tonkin. It was planned also to enter Hanoi. Conditions duenbsp;to the World War, however, caused the French governmentnbsp;to forbid missionary residence in any part of French Indo-China except Tourane, Haiphong, and Hanoi, where thenbsp;missionaries, though permitted to remain, were not allowednbsp;to engage in active work. Four missionaries left the fieldnbsp;and five continued at Tourane studying the language andnbsp;preparing for future ministry when the field could be reopened.

Y'ithin a year the hand of God was clearly recognized as working on behalf of the Mission, the attitude of officialsnbsp;and residents changed, and better still the Holy Spirit soonnbsp;began to move mightily upon many hearts. In January,nbsp;1917, eighteen converts were baptized, bringing the membership of the native church to twenty-five. Following thenbsp;Annual Conference in September, 1916, a missionary couplenbsp;proceeded to open a station in Hanoi, the capital of Tonkin.nbsp;A printing press was purchased to be installed in Hanoi andnbsp;missionaries were working steadily at the important task ofnbsp;translating the Scriptures into the Romanized Annamese language. The British and Foreign Bible Society appointed anbsp;subagent for Indo-China and promised hearty cooperationnbsp;in publishing and circulating the scriptures. From that timenbsp;on the work has continued to grow and new stations havenbsp;been opened in each of the five states and also in Easternnbsp;Siam. For many years, however, the states of Tonkin andnbsp;Annam, which are French Protectorates, were closed to missionary residence with the exception of the cities of Hanoi,nbsp;Haiphong and Tourane, which are considered to be Frenchnbsp;possessions. In 1923 Faifoo was opened but it was not untilnbsp;late in 1927 that missionaries were permitted to labor in anynbsp;other cities of these two great states. Since that time thenbsp;government has granted increasing freedom for missionarynbsp;ministry in many provinces. Cochin-China is also a Frenchnbsp;possession and after the Mission entered Saigon in 1918 thenbsp;government granted permission for missionaries to residenbsp;and minister in many of the provinces throughout the state.

Translation and Publication Work

The missionaries in French Indo-China have had the responsibility and privilege of translating the Bible in whole or part into various languages, notably in Annamese, spokennbsp;by about 15,765,000, and Cambodian, the mother tongue ofnbsp;about 2,682,000. A beginning has been made in translatingnbsp;scripture portions into the Tho and Rhadé languages andnbsp;into one of the Moi dialects. As the message is given toother tribes throughout the field the translating of scriptureportions will be a vital part of the ministry.

Since the first press was purchased and established in Hanoi in 1918, other presses and equipment have been addednbsp;and now gospel literature is being printed in Annamese,.nbsp;Cambodian and Laotian. The first pages have been printed innbsp;the Tho and Rhadé tribal languages. Publications are also-printed in French and English. The output of the Missionnbsp;Press has grown steadily until in 1933 over 25,CXX),(XX) pagesnbsp;were printed. Over 3,OCX3,OOO pages were printed in 1922.nbsp;In 1923, 5,000 copies of the New Testament in Annamesenbsp;were published besides 65,000 scripture portions and overnbsp;200,000 tracts, books and leaflets in Annamese. In 1924nbsp;besides 80,000 scripture portions, from 500 to 3,000 copies-of various books were printed in Annamese, including Bunyan’s “Pilgrim’s Progress” ; Dr. A. B. Simpson’s “Whollynbsp;Sanctified’’ ; and “Difficulties Answered,” by Dr. R. A.nbsp;Torrey. Thus began a ministry for the enrichment of thenbsp;Annamese Church through providing in their own tonguenbsp;translations of books b\quot; Spirit-filled writers who have blessednbsp;the church throughout the world.

The Press began to issue Christian literature in the Cambodian language in 1925, including 5,000 copies of the Gospel of Luke. In 1926 the entire Bible was printed in Annamesenbsp;and thus the Word of God became available for the firstnbsp;time to one of the largest language groups then remainingnbsp;in the world without a translation of the scriptures in theirnbsp;tongue. A new edition of the Bible in Annamese is beingnbsp;printed and it is hoped that the translation of the entire Biblenbsp;in Cambodian will be ready for the press within a few years.

Annam

Although the first station opened by the Alliance was in Annam and after a few years of preparation and seedsowing the blessing of God was abundantly manifest, yetnbsp;the doors of other stations in this state were closed to missionary occupation because of government restrictions. Annamese evangelists and preachers, however, went into manynbsp;parts of Annam, often enduring bitter persecution and sometimes being imprisoned for preaching the gospel withoutnbsp;government permission. In 1929 after a period of specialnbsp;antagonism to the gospel on the part of many officials andnbsp;the issuing of strong edicts prohibiting Protestant propaganda in different places, the tide turned and official authorizations were granted for missionaries to reside and labor innbsp;different parts of this great land.

Tourane. Alliance missionaries entered Tourane in 1911. A tiny thatched chapel was built in 1913 andnbsp;two years later a living church was organized. From thisnbsp;small beginning the work has increased under the blessingnbsp;of God until at the end of 1934 there were 34 church groupsnbsp;throughout Annam, including sixteen organized churches,nbsp;twelve of which are self-supporting and self-governing andnbsp;four are under mission government.

From Tourane the gospel was taken to many other cities and towns, including Faifoo, Locthanh, Daian, Tamky,nbsp;Trouiiff-An, Queson, Catnlong and Thtibon. The work innbsp;the Tourane district has passed through much persecution,nbsp;especially prior to 1930, yet this district has furnished anbsp;large number of the preachers in the Annamese work.

An important forward step in the development of the work was taken in 1921 through the establishing of the Annamesenbsp;Bible Training School in Tourane. The attendance reachednbsp;its highest point in 1930 when 63 men and 35 women werenbsp;enrolled. During these fifteen years many Annamese mennbsp;and women have been trained in the Word and work ofnbsp;God and have gone forth as Spirit-filled laborers in pastoralnbsp;ministries and pioneer evangelism, not only in districts wherenbsp;missionaries were ministering, but in other cities and provinces where they were the first and only messengers ofnbsp;Christ.

Qui-Nhon was opened by an Annamese evangelist in 1928; Quang-Ngai was entered in 1929, and work has beennbsp;begun in other towns, including Bindinh and Ducpho.

Nhatrang. Opened first as an outstation with an Annamese evangelist in charge, Nhatrang was occupied bynbsp;a missionary couple in 1929. Soon after, intense oppositionnbsp;developed and the Annamese preacher was imprisoned fornbsp;several months. The work in the Nhatrang district has prospered and there are vigorous self-supporting churches innbsp;Phan-thiet and Ninh-Hoa, also a growing work at four outstations : Phan-rang, Phan-Ri, Tuy-Hoa, and Song-Cau.nbsp;Some work has been done also among the Cham people andnbsp;the first converts have been won to Christ from among thesenbsp;descendants of an ancient race.

Vinh. The Thanh-hoa district was entered in 1925 when an Annamese evangelist began ministry in Vinh.nbsp;Another worker entered Ha-tinh in 1927 but the govern-nient soon closed this work and it was not reopened untilnbsp;1931. A missionary couple went to live in Thanh-hoa innbsp;1928 but the opening of a chapel was not authorized by thenbsp;government until 1929. The missionaries moved fromnbsp;'i'hanh-hoa to Vinh in 1935, the latter city being more central for work throughout the province. There are threenbsp;organized churches in the district : Thanh-hoa, Vinh, andnbsp;Ha-tinh.

Dalat. This French hill station, about 4,500 feet above sea level, became a mission station in 1929, when a homenbsp;and school for the children of Alliance missionaries in F.nbsp;1. C. was established. There is now an Annamese self-supporting church at Dalat and in 1933 the first Moi churchnbsp;was organized with the first Moi convert as pastor. Junglenbsp;folk from various Moi tribes, who come to Dalat to trade,nbsp;congregate at the Moi shelter on our mission property andnbsp;hear the Word. Through these daily services and long-trips made by Moi workers into the jungle, fourteen different groups of Moi tribespeople have heard the gospel.

Dalat is also the Conference center for the French IndoChina and Eastern Siam field, and here the missionaries from other stations come each year, if possible, to take muchnbsp;needed rest in the bracing climate of the hills.

Hue. This ancient city (population, 31,885), long the seat of the great Annamese empire, is still a royal city,,nbsp;being the residence of the present king of Annam. Thenbsp;messengers of the King of glory were not permitted to labornbsp;here until the year 1930, since which time a missionary couplenbsp;have been in charge of the station and district. Not onlynbsp;the common people, but many in the royal court have heardnbsp;the gospel and some have been saved and are giving loyalnbsp;allegiance to the King of kings. During an audience whichnbsp;the missionary had with King Bao-Dai, the young Annamese-ruler, copies of the scriptures both in Annamese and Frenchnbsp;were given to him. A church has been organized in Huenbsp;and outstations have been opened in Thua-Luu, Khe-Sanh,.nbsp;Dong-Hoi, and Bô-Trach.

Banmethuot. In March, 1934, the Executive Committee on the field voted to transfer a missionary couplenbsp;from eastern Cambodia to the center of a large tribal district in the jungles of the Darlac plateau near the westernnbsp;border of southern Annam. Within a few weeks the missionary family took up their residence at Banmethuot andnbsp;began the study of the Rhadé language. Before the end ofnbsp;the year a pamphlet was printed by the Mission Press innbsp;Hanoi, giving in the Rhadé language a summary of thenbsp;Gospel.

Banmethuot is the center of a district of 200,000 or more-square miles. In this region the Rhadé is spoken hy most of the trilgt;es and both Rhadé and French are being taught innbsp;each school in all the tribes nearby. From this importantnbsp;base missionary ministry may be carried on among aboutnbsp;400,000 tribes people.

Tonkin

Tonkin has within its boundaries 27 provinces, including four military areas. In addition to the Annamese populationnbsp;of between six and seven million, there are at least twentynbsp;tribes named in government statistics, ranging in populationnbsp;from a few hundred to more than 230,000 each. The ninenbsp;principal tribes are distributed in seven provinces and fournbsp;military territories. In two of these provinces the Alliancenbsp;has mission stations and it is hoped to send missionaries ornbsp;Annamese evangelists to open work in the other provincesnbsp;where tribes predominate.

Although the Tonkinese people are Annamese by race and speak the Annamese language, yet their characteristics andnbsp;customs are quite different from those found in Annam andnbsp;Cochin-China. The spoken language in Tonkin also differs'nbsp;somewhat from the Annamese of the south.

Tonkin was entered by Alliance missionaries in 1915, and the first station was opened in 1916. Many provinces innbsp;Tonkin are yet without a gospel witness, but there are nownbsp;three centers occupied by missionaries for Annamese worknbsp;and two for work among the tribes people. Both the Mission and the Annamese Evangelical Church in French IndoChina are pressing forward into the unoccupied provincesnbsp;as rapidly as government permission is granted and fundsnbsp;are available.

Hanoi. This large city (population, 123,210) and important commercial center, the capital of French IndoChina, was entered in 1916 by an Alliance missionary couplenbsp;who are still ministering there. For many years the worknbsp;in Tonkin grew very slowly, and the government permittednbsp;ministry only in the cities of Hanoi and Haiphong, but innbsp;1924 work was begun in Tu-Nhien, an outstation fromnbsp;Hanoi, and during the last few years there has been a widespread movement in gospel ministries reaching several provinces and many districts. One missionary, with the help ofnbsp;Annamese workers, has opened five street chapels in Hanoi

and holds regular Bible Classes. Thirty gospel services are held each week in various parts of the city. The presentnbsp;outstations are: Bac-Ninh, Son-Tây, Hung-Yên, and Hà-Dông.

One of the principal ministries at Hanoi is connected with the work of the Mission Press, which has already been mentioned. The Mission owns property well located in the citynbsp;where are the mission residence and the well equippednbsp;printing plant. Near by is a large church building, and anbsp;small house for the Annamese pastor of the self-supportingnbsp;church, whose membership is made up of the local congregation and five small groups in the surrounding district.nbsp;There are also in other towns in the Hanoi district six organized churches : one fully self-supporting, the others stillnbsp;under Mission government.

Haiphong. This important seaport and gateway to northern French Indo-China has a population of overnbsp;100,000. Although missionaries resided here for a shortnbsp;time for language study prior to 1916, the first meetingsnbsp;were held in October, 1916, in a rented chapel, and thisnbsp;should be considered as the date on which the station wasnbsp;really opened. During the next five years, from 1917 tonbsp;1921, it was worked as an outstation from Hanoi, but innbsp;1921 missionaries again resided there, and it has continuednbsp;as a regular mission station. In Haiphong and in two outstations, Kieng-An and Ninh-Giang, there are three organized churches under Mission government, besides two othernbsp;outstations, Quang-Yen and Hai-Duong, where some converts have been won.

Dangson. In December, 1929, a missionary couple entered Langson, and chapel services were begun in June,nbsp;1930. While some work is carried on among Annamese, thenbsp;principal work in this district is among the Tho tribes people, of whom there are 55,000 in the province. Three outstations have been opened at Caobang, Nuoc-Hai, andnbsp;Dong-Mo. In the latter place a church has been organizednbsp;—the first among the Tho people. It is hoped that worknbsp;can be begun soon among the 50,000 Nungs who residenbsp;in the province.

Nam-Dinh. This city of 50,000 people in the southeastern portion of Tonkin near the border of Annam,nbsp;became a mission station in 1932, although for several yearsnbsp;before that time the gospel had been preached by an Annamese evangelist and an earnest group of Christians won fornbsp;the Lord. There are now two organized churches in thisnbsp;district, at Nam-Dinh and at an outstation, Ninh-Binh.nbsp;Other outstations are; Thai-Binh and Phu-Ly.

Hoabinh. Work was begun among the Muong tribe by the opening of this station in October, 1932. Although Hoabinh is a small town, yet it is the center of thenbsp;province of Hoabinh which is known as the Muong province,nbsp;there being 50,000 Muong tribes people in this province andnbsp;more in the neighboring provinces to the north and south.nbsp;The Muongs are demon worshippers but are without sorcerers or priests. Their villages are in the valleys of thenbsp;mountainous section and never include more than aboutnbsp;thirty houses. The customs and language of the Muongsnbsp;are not very different from those of the Annamese, thoughnbsp;they have a dialect of their own.

Latest word from the field tells of the probable change of the missionary residence to Hadong, which is considered anbsp;favorable center for both Annamese and tribes work. Innbsp;addition to the Muong people there are many other tribesnbsp;in northern Tonkin. The Man tribe, who inhabit the topnbsp;of the mountains and are a wild people, very difficult tonbsp;approach; the Black Thai and the White Thai; the Nungs,nbsp;the Meos, the Nhang, the Xas, and many more smallernbsp;tribes, which have never heard the gospel story, presentnbsp;a tremendous challenge to the Alliance Mission and thenbsp;Annamese Church in French Indo-China. This challengenbsp;reaches also to the churches in the homeland.

Cochin-China

This section of French Indo-China is the most highly developed and prosperous of the entire country. Becausenbsp;of Cochin-China being a French Colony rather than a Protectorate, as are the other four states, the government hasnbsp;granted greater freedom for missionary work and thus thisnbsp;state has been more widely evangelized than any other innbsp;the F. 1. C. field. Some gospel witness has been given innbsp;every one of the twenty provinces and in many of themnbsp;there are strong self-supporting churches. Within a fewnbsp;years after the beginning of work in Saigon in 1919, stationsnbsp;were opened in the principal cities of several provinces andnbsp;soon through the gracious working of the Holy Spirit hundreds of converts were won to Christ and churches established. As the work in Cochin-China grew and prospered,nbsp;a part of the missionary force was transferred to the neediernbsp;sections of Annam and Tonkin as fast as government permission was granted for the opening of new districts innbsp;those states. A missionary force of not exceeding threenbsp;couples is still retained in Cochin-China. Instead of saying,nbsp;however, that there are three mission stations, it is morenbsp;accurate to say that missionaries reside in three differentnbsp;cities, their location being chosen with a view to the missionaries aiding the churches which may invite them fornbsp;spiritual ministry and counsel, and also to share in thenbsp;further development of work in less occupied sections.

Saigon. This capital city of Cochin-China is also, during a portion of the year, the residence of the Governornbsp;and the seat of many departments of the French Indo-Chinanbsp;government. Although many of the residents are Annamese, yet Saigon (population, 123,298) has been called thenbsp;Paris of the East and is an important French city and seaport. Adjoining Saigon are the large cities of Cholonnbsp;(population, 122,818) and Gia-dinh, the former being inhabited chiefly by Chinese, the latter by Annamese.

Saigon was opened as a Mission station in 1919 and soon thereafter the Alliance secured good property as a Missionary Receiving Home and residence. Missionaries who enternbsp;or leave the field by this southern port usually spend a fewnbsp;days in Saigon, living at the Missionary Home, as do alsonbsp;those who come to Saigon on necessary business, such asnbsp;dental work, etc., or pass through the city enroute to another section. All these find a hearty welcome and truenbsp;hospitality in the Mission Home.

Within a few years after the beginning of the work, chapels were opened in Saigon and other near-by cities. Anbsp;few years ago a room was rented in a large building on onenbsp;of the principal streets and near to the railway station. Herenbsp;services were conducted daily by an Annamese evangelistnbsp;under the oversight and with the cooperation of the missionary, and within a few months hundreds signified theirnbsp;acceptance of Christ as Saviour and Lord, and thousandsnbsp;heard the gospel, many of them visitors in the city fromnbsp;distant sections of Cochin-China and southern Annam including many places which were entirely without a witnessnbsp;of the gospel. Thus the message spread far and wide. Fornbsp;several years Saigon has been the residence of the Chairman of the French Indo-China field.

Other Centers. In 1922 missionaries took up residence and began ministry in Sadec, Chaudoc andnbsp;Cantho. Mytho was opened as a mission station the fol-

lowing year. In 1926 Pinhlong became a mission station and BKtilioa was opened in 1926. Long-Xuyen w'd-s addednbsp;to the list in 1928 and in 1929 Bac-lien- became a center ofnbsp;missionary ministry. Missionaries took up residence innbsp;Thudaumot in 1932, this being the latest center to be occupied by a missionary couple. Rachgia, where the gospelnbsp;was first preached in 1928, also had a resident missionarynbsp;for a few months, but was never listed in our directory asnbsp;a mission station. In all of these centers there are nownbsp;strong self-supporting churches with the exception of Chau-doc, which is an outstation of the Binh-Long church. Innbsp;1934' there were in Cochin-China 43 self-supporting churchesnbsp;with a total membership of over 4,900, and four unorganized groups.

For the present Saigon and Mytho have been chosen as the centers where the three missionary couples assignednbsp;to Cochin-China reside, and from these places the missionaries minister in widespread areas.

Cambodia

The French Protectorate of Cambodia was closed to the gospel, because of government restrictions, until the fall of

• 1922, when the French government in Cambodia gave permission for the Alliance to begin work in that country. Thenbsp;Cambodian people as a race are more nearly akin to thenbsp;peoples of India than to the Annamese, and are not as farnbsp;advanced as their Annamese neighbors. The people are heldnbsp;in a strong grip by the Buddhist priests and the Buddhistnbsp;religion.

Even while granting permission for the beginning of missionary work in Cambodia, government officials declared it was useless for the Alliance to think of winning any converts among the Cambodian Buddhists. They stated that thenbsp;Roman Catholics had been able to make little progress innbsp;Cambodia because the people were not willing to changenbsp;their religion. Alliance missionaries entered Pnom Penh,nbsp;Cambodia, however, in February, 1923, in humble dependence upon God and with the assurance that true missionarynbsp;ministry is not a matter of persuading people to changenbsp;from one religion to another, but rather of pointing sinnersnbsp;to the Lamb of God that taketh away the sin of the world,nbsp;and when they come to know Jesus Christ as Saviour andnbsp;Lord their religion is changed and their lives are transformed. This has been proved in the twelve years of ministry in Cambodia, where God has given a gracious harvestnbsp;of souls despite the restrictions which the government stillnbsp;is enforcing against gospel ministry in many places.

In 1933 the Cambodian government sent to all the local Governors throughout the country copies of its proclamationnbsp;restricting missionary work to those counties and villagesnbsp;where work had been established prior to December 31, 1932.nbsp;Thus by proclamation of the King of Cambodia, most ofnbsp;the land is closed to gospel ministry, but men cannot in thisnbsp;way bind the life-giving Word of God or the conqueringnbsp;Christ. Despite the restrictions of earthly governments, thenbsp;work in Cambodia is making excellent progress through thenbsp;faithful ministries of the missionaries and Cambodian Christians, “the Lord working with them.”

Pnom Penh. The most important city in Cambodia, Pnom Penh (population 96,000), is on the Mekongnbsp;River and has important routes of trade and travel both bynbsp;excellent automobile roads and by river steamers. It is thenbsp;capital of Cambodia and the residence of the French Governor and the Cambodian Emperor, King Sisowathmonivong.

Alliance missionaries took up residence here in February,

• 1923, and began the study of the Cambodian language.nbsp;Services were begun and are still conducted in both Annamese and Cambodian, and by God’s grace seven converts,nbsp;five Annamese and two Cambodian, were baptized beforenbsp;the end of the first year. As soon as possible work wasnbsp;begun on the translation of the Bible. The New Testamentnbsp;was printed in 1928 and the translation of the Old Testamentnbsp;is progressing steadily. In addition to these important ministries, the missionaries at Pnom Penh for many years hadnbsp;responsibility for the carrying on of work throughout allnbsp;the southern portion of Cambodia and the oversight of Cambodian churches across the border in Cochin-China. Onenbsp;round trip to the outstations south of Pnom Penh requirednbsp;more than 250 miles travel by auto. There are now in thenbsp;Pnom Penh district two self-suigt;iDorting churches under native Cambodian church government.

Battambang. A missionary couple entered Battambang, a large center about 180 miles northwest ofnbsp;Pnom Penh, in October, 1923. From the first God’s blessing was marked in soul-winning ministries. In September,nbsp;1925, the Cambodian Bible Training School was opened withnbsp;five Cambodian men attending. The second year eleven mennbsp;were enrolled. Short Term Bible Schools are also heldnbsp;both at Battambang and out in the district so that the Cambodian converts may be instructed in the Word of God andnbsp;thus the church built up more rapidly. A number of outstations were soon established in a large area, one being innbsp;Siem Reap, a Cambodian town near the ancient temple ofnbsp;Angkor Vat. In the Battamhang district at the end of 1934nbsp;there were seven organized churches under native churchnbsp;government, and mission outstations at Siem Reap andnbsp;Muong.

Kratié. Although a missionary couple was permitted to reside in Kratié in 1930, they were forbidden bynbsp;the government to hold any public meetings. Souls werenbsp;won through personal contacts, and later the attitude of thenbsp;officials became more favorable. The gospel was proclaimednbsp;not only to Cambodians but to the Pnong tribes people.nbsp;When the missionaries were transferred to Banmethuot,nbsp;Annam, in 1934 they left a group of Christians at Kratiénbsp;who continue to meet regularly for worship and witness.nbsp;The Kratié area is now a part of the Pnom Penh district.nbsp;Kompong-Trach. This city became a mission station innbsp;1931 when one of the missionary couplesnbsp;formerly residing in Pnom Penh was transferred to Kompong-Trach. The work in the district is developing rapidly,nbsp;and there are now four organized churches under nativenbsp;church government. Government restrictions here as innbsp;other districts forbid the missionaries to enter new territorynbsp;where no Christians reside, but in many providential waysnbsp;converts are being won in new villages and the work isnbsp;being extended steadily.

Laos

Laos is the largest in area of the five states comprising the union of French Indo-China although its total population is less than one million. It is the only state not bordering on the sea and is very mountainous. It is inhabitednbsp;by the Lao or Laosian people, a branch of the ancient andnbsp;now widespread Thai race.

The Thai people were driven out of their former home in China many centuries B. C. Some went to the mountainsnbsp;of southwestern China, others into Burma, Siam, Laos andnbsp;northern Tonkin. In addition to the Lao, there are numerous tribes of varied and often unknown origin ; some antedate the Lao and gave place to them by retreating to thenbsp;mountains as the Lao came in from the north and settlednbsp;in the many river valleys. Some tribes have entered the

land since the Lao. In 1893 Laos became a French Protectorate.

The government claims a population of approximately 500,000 for northern Laos, but it is impossible to give annbsp;exact estimate because the tax returns on which the censusnbsp;report is based are far below the correct figures for thenbsp;tribes people, although they are fairly accurate for the Lao.nbsp;Luang Prahang. This, the first station of any Mission tonbsp;be occupied in northern Laos, was openednbsp;in February, 1929. It is the royal city of the kingdom ofnbsp;Luang Prabang, now a province in the French Protectoratenbsp;of Laos. Situated 1,200 miles from the mouth of thenbsp;River Mekong, it is the center of a mountainous districtnbsp;accessible only by difficult, tiring and extremely slow horsenbsp;trails, or by slow and dangerous travel up and down thenbsp;rapids of the many rivers which afford entrance into almostnbsp;all parts of this region. There will probably never be automobile roads that will aid in reaching the hundreds of smallnbsp;villages, but travel is speeded up where motor-powered rivernbsp;craft are available. The missionary must plan to be awaynbsp;on trail or river for weeks and months during the dry season,nbsp;taking along everything necessary by way of a completenbsp;camping outfit. Much itinerating has been done and a fewnbsp;converts have been baptized.

V ientiane. This second Alliance station in Laos, opened in February, 1921, is 250 miles down stream fromnbsp;Luang Prabang, and is the seat of the French Administration for Laos. The immediate territory is a fairly largenbsp;plain with mountains in the distance. Travel here is of anbsp;different nature and many villages could be reached by carnbsp;while others must be evangelized by arduous travel on thenbsp;rivers. Early in the work an Annamese preacher wasnbsp;brought in to give the gospel to the thousands of Annamesenbsp;in the city and a number of baptisms have resulted. Therenbsp;is now an Annamese church at Vientiane and good progressnbsp;is being made also in giving the gospel to the Laotians.

Among the Lao, both in Luang Prabang and Vientiane, but a mere beginning has been made and, while a few havenbsp;been baptized in each place, it is realized that the people,nbsp;made indifferent as a result of centuries of Buddhism superimposed on the primitive and underlying fear of evil spirits,nbsp;present a challenge to prayer that the mental and spiritualnbsp;barriers may be broken down to permit the entrance ofnbsp;the Light.

The city of Xieng Khouang, on the Tran-Ninh plateau at an elevation of 4,000 feet, is surrounded by mountains. Itnbsp;is both a healthful location for residence and an accessiblenbsp;center for missionary work. It is located on the new roadnbsp;midway between Vinh and Luang Prabang. Xieng Khouangnbsp;is the capital of the province of Phoueun. The establishingnbsp;of a mission station here would aid greatly in the furthernbsp;evangelization of the many tribes in northern Laos, who arenbsp;waiting for the first messenger of the gospel.

J nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;EAkSTERX SIAM

Siam lies between French Indo-China and Burma. It has an area of 200,148 square miles, about 45,000 of these beingnbsp;in the Malay Peninsula. The population was estimated innbsp;1932 to be 12,355,000. Bangkok, the capital, is a well builtnbsp;modern city with a population of over 900,000.

Until 1932 Siam was one of the last of the absolute monarchies, but in June of that year a well planned, bloodless revolution succeeded in causing the government to sign anbsp;new constitution declaring a limited monarchy with fullnbsp;franchise for the people and elected parliament. Later revolutions have led to further changes in the government.

Buddhism is the prevailing religion and in 1930 there were 16,571 temples with 127,057 Buddhist priests. In thenbsp;same year there .were 613 government schools, 4,923 localnbsp;schools, and 961 private schools with a total of more thannbsp;15.000 teachers and over 650,000 pupils.

The baht (called the tical until 1928) is the unit of currency. While Siam was on the gold standard, its value was kept at 44.24 cents, but in May, 1932, its value was fixednbsp;at about 33 cents, although it fiuctuates according to thenbsp;value of the U. S. dollar in foreign markets.

There are nearly 2,000 miles of railways in Siam. Rice is the chief product, and the staple food of the people.nbsp;Other exports include teakwood, rubber, cocoanuts, tobacconbsp;and pepper. The livestock census in 1932 included domesticated elephants 9,280, besides horses, bullocks and buffaloes.

Five Protestant missionary societies have worked for years in Siam, the principal work l^eing done by the Presbyteriannbsp;Church, whose missionaries first entered Siam in 1840, andnbsp;now have a church memljership of more than 10,000. Eastern Siam, however, is separated from the rest of the countrynbsp;by a chain of mountains extending ’ from the northwestnbsp;border of Cambodia northward to where a part of Laosnbsp;juts down into Siam.

Siam is peopled in the main by different branches of the Thai race with tribes people in the north, but Eastern Siamnbsp;is inhabited by people w’ho, though now being brought undernbsp;the influence of Siamese, their sister language, by means ofnbsp;government schools, still own the Lao language as theirnbsp;mother tongue. This is due to the fact that, following anbsp;period when the Siamese more or less ruled a large part ofnbsp;Laos, they enticed or coerced great numbers of the Lao tonbsp;cross the Mekong River, which forms the Lao-Siamesenbsp;boundary for hundreds of miles, and settled them in Easternnbsp;Siam as nationals of Siam. There are also several thousand Cambodians living in Eastern Siam.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

A number of the missionaries in French Indo-China, especially those in Cambodia, early caught the vision of the great need in the regions beyond, north of the Cambodiannbsp;section of the field. This was made known to the deputationnbsp;of the Board during a visit to the French Indo-China fieldnbsp;in 1927 and the following quotations from the deputation’snbsp;report to the Board show the steps leading to the entrancenbsp;by Alliance missionaries into Eastern Siam:

“The large area of Eastern Siam, Ixirdering on Cambodia and Laos, with a population of over three million people, is as yet without the gospel of Christ save fornbsp;some colportage work being done under the Americannbsp;Bible Society agent’s direction with workers sent outnbsp;from the headquarters at Bangkok. The A. B. S. agentnbsp;has repeatedly urged our Mission to investigate thisnbsp;field in Siam with a view to the Alliance acceptingnbsp;responsibility for the evangelization of these three million people and entering the field to establish stationsnbsp;for that purpose. The French Indo-China Mission isnbsp;awaiting eagerly the opportunity to undertake this additional task and asks permission of the Board to explorenbsp;the area and send in at least two missionary couples justnbsp;as soon as such are available. It is expected that notnbsp;only will work be carried on in Eastern Siam but thatnbsp;this will prove to be the most advantageous way for thenbsp;opening of work in the northern half of Laos.

“A study of the map will show the way in which the proposed field in Siam and Laos would join with ournbsp;present field in making a compact though extensive areanbsp;for missionary activity. The portion of Eastern Siamnbsp;which we seek to enter comprises four administrativenbsp;divisions of Siam with a combined area of 63,444 squarenbsp;miles and a population of 3,092,117. The Buddhist religion has occupied this area for generations and nownbsp;has in these provinces more than 6,000 temples andnbsp;39,000 priests. Surely the call of God and the commission of Christ are sufficiently strong for this needynbsp;people to cause the C. and M. A. to send at least twonbsp;married couples within the next few months to enternbsp;this portion of Eastern Siam. About one-fourth ofnbsp;the population of Siam and about one-third of the areanbsp;of that field beckon to us with a mute appeal of theirnbsp;great need.”

In entering new fields of missionary endeavor the C. and M. A. seeks to observe true mission comity and not to enternbsp;districts where other missionary societies are trul}- preaching the gospel. After correspondence with the Presbyteriannbsp;Mission leaders in Siam and consultation with the secretary of the Presbyterian Board in New York for the fieldnbsp;in Siam, it was learned that, with the exception of Koratnbsp;and the district surrounding it, there was no expectation thatnbsp;any part of Eastern Siam would be entered by that Mission, and it was mutually agreed that a portion of thenbsp;territory should become the responsibility of The Christiannbsp;and Missionary Alliance, Korat being reserved for the Presbyterian Mission and the National Church of Siam. In 1934nbsp;the National Church of Siam decided to withdraw fromnbsp;Korat and both the church and the Presbyterian Missionnbsp;urgently requested The Christian and Missionary Alliancenbsp;to take up work in that city and district also.

Ubon. The first mission- station of the Alliance work in

Eastern Siam was established in the city of Ubon when a missionary couple was transferred from Cambodianbsp;and opened this station in January, 1929. A railroad connects Ubon with Bangkok, the capital of Siam, but therenbsp;are few roads suitable for automobile travel and those sonbsp;used are often rough and almost impassable. The first yearnbsp;of missionary occupation was spent principally in languagenbsp;study. During the second year witness in the native tonguenbsp;began and a street chapel was opened. Uiter a very humblenbsp;church building was built and paid for by the native Christians and in 1934 a small church was organized, the members being converts won through open-air preaching andnbsp;chapel work.

The general attitude of the people in these portions of Siam is one of spiritual apathy and indifference. The difficulty of the task has been increased by the presence andnbsp;methods of Seventh Day Adventist missionaries, who camenbsp;to Ubon shortly after our Mission opened work there.

Khon-Ken. This city was opened as a mission station in 1930 and is the center of a vast and fairlynbsp;populous district. Recently the railroad to Bangkok hasnbsp;been extended to Khon-Ken and there are passable, though

rough, automobile roads which enable the missionary to reach more villages during the dry season. Chapel work innbsp;the city and open-air preaching both in the city and in thenbsp;villages have taken the Word to thousands and a few havenbsp;been baptized. A small church was established in 1934. Thenbsp;following report is typical of the work done in this and othernbsp;districts in the Eastern Siam field : “Sunday School work,nbsp;street chapel preaching, neighborhood meetings, street meetings at markets, evangelizing all the villages near Khon-Ken,nbsp;long itineraries in which we stress the sale of scripture portions, personal work and special services for inquirers. Tonbsp;accomplish these different types of work we have travelednbsp;by horse, ox-cart, automobile, raft and railroad. The worknbsp;is just begun and we need much prayer and faith that thenbsp;seed sown will bear much fruit.”

Korat. Originally occupied in 1929 by a Siamese worker of the Siam Home Mission, an organization foundednbsp;and supported by the American Presbyterian Mission andnbsp;its churches in Siam, Korat and the district in which it isnbsp;located was transferred by request and invitation of thesenbsp;groups to the C. and M. A., which occupied Korat in June,nbsp;1934'. The district is new and largely unevangelized andnbsp;the work is truly pioneer. As in all fields, so here the fruitsnbsp;of gospel ministry will be far greater if Christians in thenbsp;homeland are faithful in prayer and intercession for thenbsp;workers and the work. A Bible School for Eastern Siamnbsp;will probably be established in Korat.

It is felt that at least one other city in Eastern Siam should be occupied as a mission center and even with thisnbsp;additional station and with reinforcements through the sending out of new missionaries, it could still properly be saidnbsp;when considering the vast areas and the great population ofnbsp;Eastern Siam, What are these among so many? Yet undernbsp;the blessing of God and by His enabling they may be chan-

nels for the evangelization of needy millions. “Pray ye therefore.”

The Annamese Evangelical Church

From a small beginning when the first church was organized in Tourane in 1915, the church of Christ in French Indo-China has grown and prospered under the good handnbsp;of God. The report for 1925 records 18 organized churchesnbsp;with 3,019 members, and at a Native Conference held innbsp;February, 1925, the Annamese delegates pledged theirnbsp;churches to take special offerings for the support of thenbsp;Bible School and for the expense of the Annual Nativenbsp;Conference and also to continue to push steadily forwardnbsp;toward the goal of local self-support in all of the churches.nbsp;By the end of 1927 eight of the churches were entirely self-supporting and the total church membership was more thannbsp;4,400.

During that year the French Indo-China field adopted a plan or organization which recognizes the church as a separate body from the Mission so that each has the responsibility of directing its own affairs under the guidance of thenbsp;Holy Spirit, and at the same time provides for close fellowship and harmonious working together and for unitednbsp;consideration and action on those things which pertain bothnbsp;to the church and to the Mission. An Executive Committeenbsp;of five Annamese was chosen by the Annamese Church Conference. The Executive Committee of the church and ofnbsp;the Mission meet together for the transacting of such business as requires joint action. In 1928 the church constitution, prepared by the Joint Executive Committee, wasnbsp;adopted by the Conference of the Annamese Evangelicalnbsp;Church, and the Annamese section of the field was dividednbsp;into two districts; one including Annam and Tonkin; thenbsp;other, Cochin-China. In addition to the General Conference of the churches, to which both pastors and lay delegates from the local churches are sent, there are annualnbsp;conferences held in each district. As the work grew andnbsp;the numlier of churches increased, three districts werenbsp;formed: Cochin-China, southern and central Annam, andnbsp;northern Annam and Tonkin. Through the grace of God'nbsp;there are now 43 self-supporting churches in Cochin-China,nbsp;12 in Annam, and one in Tonkin in addition to the 13 self-supporting churches in Camliodia. The 69 self-supportingnbsp;churches throughout the field were supporting 55 nativenbsp;pastors and evangelists and aiding in the support of 24nbsp;others.

Throughout the entire field of French Indo-China and Eastern Siam more than 115 consecrated men are devoting their whole time as pastors, evangelists or colporteurs,nbsp;27 of them being ordained native pastors and one ordainednbsp;preacher was teaching in the Annamese Bible Trainingnbsp;School. There were 32 unordained native pastors, 38 evangelists and catechists, 16 colporteurs, and one engaged innbsp;special work for the Mission. The active membership of thenbsp;churches in the field was about 8,000. 'While praising Godnbsp;for the spiritual and numerical growth of the work in thisnbsp;large field, we should seek the Lord with earnest intercession for a mighty fulness of revival blessing. Many millionsnbsp;of people in this one field have never yet heard the gospelnbsp;message and only by a Spirit-filled church working in heartynbsp;cooperation with Spirit-filled missionaries and backed bynbsp;the prayers of God’s people in the homeland can the task-be accomplished for the glory of God.

The familiar expression “Latin America” has various meanings. Geographically speaking, it comprises usually allnbsp;territories, continental and insular, in the Western Hemisphere south of the United States ; from the standpoint ofnbsp;language it includes only those countries whose language isnbsp;of Roman derivation (Spanish, Portuguese, French) ; whilenbsp;in a political sense it is used to define the twenty republicsnbsp;south of the Rio^rande. This latter definition is the mostnbsp;common. The republics include : Mexico ; Guatamala, Honduras, Salvador, Costa Rica, Nicaragua and Panama in Central America; Cuba, Haiti and Santo Domingo in the Westnbsp;Indies ; Colombia, Ecuador, Peru, Chile, Bolivia, Argentina,nbsp;Uruguay, Paraguay, Brazil and Venezuela in South America.nbsp;Within the geographical limits of Latin America there arenbsp;colonial possessions belonging to Great Britain, France, Holland and the United States.

The Pan-American Union, with headquarters in Washington, D. C., represents an effort to perpetuate and strengthen the bonds of culture and common interests between thenbsp;twenty-one republics of the Western Hemisphere (includingnbsp;the United States). The Union has no political status, butnbsp;exerts a marked influence in inter-American diplomatic relations.

Arbitration and conciliation have been very prominent in Pan-American diplomacy. Although the countries of Latinnbsp;America have been unusually free from international conflicts, they have experienced considerable internal strife, leading to frequent changes of government.

SOUTH AMERICA

The area of the South American continent is about 6,800,-000 square miles, which is nearly equal to that of North America, although maps drawn of Mercator’s projectionnbsp;make South America appear much smaller. The boundariesnbsp;of the various countries are not in all cases defined beyondnbsp;dispute, and the following table gives the approximate areanbsp;and population of each :

Country nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Areanbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Potnilation

Brazil 3,300,000 sq.nbsp;mi.nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;43,340,000nbsp;(est. 1933)

Argentina 1,112,743 “nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;11,846,655nbsp;(est.

Peru nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;534,000nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;6,147,000nbsp;(est.

Bolivia nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;506,467nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;3,066,815nbsp;(est.

Colombia nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;440,846nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;9,016,000nbsp;(est.

Venezuela nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;363,728nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;3,261,734nbsp;(est.

Chile nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;289,800nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;4,403,465nbsp;(est.

Paraguay nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;196,000nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;870,197nbsp;(est.

Ecuador nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;171,287nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;2,554,693nbsp;(est.

Uruguay nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;72,153nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;1,941,398nbsp;(est.

Guiana, British nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;89,480nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;311,000nbsp;(est.

Guiana, Dutch nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;54,300nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;158,194nbsp;(est.

Guiana, French nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;34,740 “ “nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;22,169(Cen.1931)

Physical Features

South America bears a marked physical resemblance to the North American continent. It is roughly triangular innbsp;shape, with the base of the triangle in the north and the apexnbsp;at the south. In the eastern part of Brazil it has older, worn-down mountains (the Serra do Mar, Serra da Mantiqueira,nbsp;etc. ) that correspond with our Appalachian system ; and innbsp;the extreme western part of the continent it has the younger,nbsp;rugged Andes that match our Western Cordilleras. Thenbsp;Andes are 4,400 miles in length with three parallel ranges innbsp;Colombia, spread to a width of more than 300 miles in Bolivia, and are most narrow in Patagonia in the extreme south.nbsp;From north to south its principal mountain peaks rangenbsp;from the Sierra de Santa Marta in Colombia (16,640 feet)nbsp;to Aconcagua in Argentina (22,850 feet). This latter peaknbsp;is usually associated with Cbile, but in actuality lies withinnbsp;the territorial limits of Argentina.

Between the eastern and western mountain systems. South America has a vast interior plains area, corresponding to ournbsp;Mississippi region. The interior of South America, however,nbsp;is drained by three major river systems instead of our one.nbsp;The mighty Amazon and its numerous tributaries form thenbsp;largest river system in the world. The main stream is navigable from Para on the Atlantic seaboard to Huallaga, Peru,nbsp;in the lee of the Andes, a distance of more than 3,000 miles.nbsp;The La Plata system, uniting the Paraguay, Parana andnbsp;Uruguay Rivers, empties into the River Plate estuary, thusnbsp;forming one of the greatest .trading harbors in the world.nbsp;The Orinoco River rises in the headlands between Venezuelanbsp;and Brazil, and flows in a west and northerly direction beforenbsp;turning eastward toward the Atlantic. Together these threenbsp;river systems drain 3,686,400 square miles, or more than one-half the area of the entire continent.

There are, however, contrasts in the two continents. The bulk of North America is in temperate and sub-artic zones ;nbsp;whereas the larger portion of South America lies in thenbsp;tropics with unfavorable, enervating climatic conditions. Thisnbsp;region is largely tropical jungle or unwieldy savanna, and butnbsp;a fraction of the area of South America is open woods andnbsp;prairie land, as abound in our Middle West. In Northnbsp;America three-fourths of the population live on the plainsnbsp;(under an elevation of 1,000 feet), while in South Americanbsp;only one-third of the people live in similar regions, and thenbsp;great majority of these latter are found in the temperatenbsp;regions to the south.

Languages and Tribes

The people of nine of the republics of South America speak Spanish ; those of Brazil speak Portuguese. The vast majority of the Indians, numbering according to some authorities about 15,000,000, can be reached only through their ownnbsp;tribal languages. Kenneth Grubb in his book, “The Lowlandnbsp;Indians of Amazonia,” states that in this section where thenbsp;majority of the Indian population of South America is found,nbsp;there are a total of 5,214,(X)O Indians. However, no accurate figures are available but probably his more conservative estimate is nearer correct.

Religion

Roman Catholicism prevails in all parts of South America, except among the pagan Indian trilDes of the far interior.

49

Though religious liberty is a constitutional guarantee in most of the South American countries, Roman Catholicism is stillnbsp;the state religion in some of them. Introduced as it was bynbsp;the Spanish and Portuguese “conquistadores” centuries ago,nbsp;it still maintains a very intolerant position and in many instances manifests a fanatical spirit. Because of this and itsnbsp;low moral standards, there is an increasing group who havenbsp;withstood and resented its teaching, resulting in indifferencenbsp;and even atheistic views on the part of some, while othersnbsp;have shown somewhat of a friendly attitude to the teachingsnbsp;of the gospel.

Viscount Bryce made the following observation of religion in South America; “Another fact strikes the traveler withnbsp;surprise. Both the intellectual life and ethical standards ofnbsp;conduct of these countries seem to be entirely divorced fromnbsp;religion. The women are almost universally ‘practicingnbsp;Catholics,’ and so are the peasantry, though the Christianitynbsp;of the Indians bears only a distant resemblance to that ofnbsp;Europe. But the men of the upper or educated class appearnbsp;wholly indifferent to theology and Christian worship. It hasnbsp;no interest for them. They are seldom actively hostile tonbsp;Christianity, much less are they offensive when they speak ofnbsp;it, but they think it does not concern them, and may be leftnbsp;to the women and the peasants. . . .”

Missionary Occupation

Protestant missionary efforts in South America began first in 1555 when a company of French Hugenots went to Brazilnbsp;with the hope of founding a colony for persecuted Protestants. This attempt failed, and the survivors perished withinnbsp;a few years. Another attempt was made by the Dutch afternbsp;their capture of Bahia in 1624, but this also came to an untimely end. With the opening of work by the Moravians innbsp;British Guiana in 1735 and in Dutch Guiana in 1738, thenbsp;modern era of evangelical ministry in South America may benbsp;said to have begun.

Early in the nineteenth century a project began in England for a system of schools for children with the Bible as thenbsp;main textbook, and in 1820 a British Society and the Britishnbsp;and Foreign Bible Society united in sending Mr. Jamesnbsp;Thompson to South America to carry on similar school work.nbsp;Within six years many schools were opened in Argentina,nbsp;Uraguay, Chile and Peru, and Bibles were sold in largenbsp;numbers. Soon, however, the influence of the priests causednbsp;a strong reaction and the efforts of Mr. Thompson and hisnbsp;coworkers were abandoned. Captain Allen Gardener, an officer in the British Navy and a devoted Christian with a passion for the salvation of men, became a faithful witness fornbsp;Christ in the southern portion of the continent, principallynbsp;among the Patagonians, and in 1844 he was instrumental innbsp;the formation of the South American Missionary Society.

The Methodist Episcopal Church sent the first missionary from the United States to Brazil in 1836. The Presbyteriannbsp;Mission was founded in this state in 1859. Work began innbsp;Chile in 1845, and in Colombia in 1856. In the latter halfnbsp;of the nineteenth century the American Bible Society begannbsp;effective colportage work through the efforts of their colpor-ters and of missionary workers and other messengers. It isnbsp;estimated that over 2,0(X),000 copies of the Word have beennbsp;distributed in South America during the past fifty years.

In 1925 the statistics for Christian Missions in South America showed a total of 1,736 foreign missionaries residing in 365 stations. The native workers numbered 2,006.nbsp;There were 1,283 organized churches with a membership ofnbsp;over 122,000.

An authority on missionary work in Latin America said recently : “In Mexico is a more violent anti-religious movement than in any part of the world except Soviet Russia;nbsp;yet a leading official of the Mexican government wrote withnbsp;the approval of the government, ‘If Mexican children are tonbsp;be Christians, let them learn Christian doctrine from thenbsp;fountain head as found in the gospels of Jesus Christ.’ ”nbsp;Not only in Mexico but throughout all Latin America manynbsp;of the leading men, who have nothing but contempt for thenbsp;presentation of Jesus Christ as given by the Roman Catholicnbsp;Church in Latin America, have expressed their longing for anbsp;true understanding of Christ and His way so that He willnbsp;become a reality to those who profess His name and they,nbsp;in the Spirit of Christ, will be interested in the welfare ofnbsp;their fellowmen.

The speaker told of prominent business men and officials in Argentina who acknowledged the supremacy of Jesusnbsp;Christ as revealed in the gospels. This leader said also thatnbsp;a striking characteristic of Latin American life lies in thenbsp;fact that the personality of a leader, whether in the religiousnbsp;life or otherwise, has more influence than the precepts henbsp;presents. Not only the speaker referred to but others declare that there are many evidences of heart-hunger amongnbsp;the higher classes in Latin America. We who are interestednbsp;in missionary ministries there should seek the Lord for Hisnbsp;grace and power to so abound in the lives of the witnessesnbsp;for Christ as to make them, both in the Mission and in thenbsp;Church in each land, not only true exponents of gospel truthnbsp;but also that their lives shall show forth the beauties of Christnbsp;Jesus in His love and compassion, in His holiness and zeal.

COLOMBIA

Colombia lies in the extreme northwest of the South American continent and is the first country south of Panama.nbsp;It has land frontiers abutting upon Panama, Venezuela,nbsp;Brazil, Peru and Ecuador.

Area and Population

The official estimate of the area of Colombia is 443,985 square miles, but the figure usually given is 440,846 squarenbsp;miles, which equals that of California, Oregon, Washingtonnbsp;and Montana combined.

The South American Handbook of 1935 estimates the population in 1933 at 9,016,000. Of these 2 per cent are pure Indians, 5 per cent are Negroes, 35 per cent are white, andnbsp;58 per cent are mixed ; 30 per cent of the population is urban.nbsp;In population Colombia holds third place among the Southnbsp;American republics, being exceeded only by Brazil and Argentina.

Climate

Colombia presents every variety of climate from the tropical conditions along the coast to sub-arctic conditions in the high Andes. The bulk of the population lives in the highernbsp;altitudes, especially centering about Bogota in the easternnbsp;Cordillera, where temperate conditions prevail. The rainfallnbsp;varies considerably. In the Choco district there is a heaviernbsp;reported rainfall than in any other part of the continent. Atnbsp;Buenaventura, just to the south of this region, there is annbsp;average rainfall of 281 inches. In general the year is dividednbsp;into a wet and dry season but in many sections there are twonbsp;wet and two dry seasons which occur so irregularly as tonbsp;make it impossible to give definite dates.

Government

Colombia is a republic with a President elected by popular vote for a four-year term, and a Parliament consisting of thenbsp;Senate and House of Representatives. The Senators arenbsp;elected by the local legislatures of the fourteen semi-autonomous Departments, and the Deputies by popular vote. Departmental Governors are appointed by the President.

History

The honor of the discovery of Colombia belongs to Alfonso de Ojeda, who arrived at the harbor of Cartagena in 1509, but no permanent achievement was accomplished. Exploration and colonization of Colombia was begun in 1536nbsp;by Gonzalo Jimenez de Quesada. From 1740 it was a Viceroyalty of the Spanish Crown until independence was securednbsp;by the decisive victory of Boyaca, August 7, 1819. Thenbsp;revolutionary leader, Simon Bolivar, became the first president of Great Colombia. This unwieldy country broke upnbsp;in 1830 into the republics of Venezuela, Ecuador and Newnbsp;Granada (later called Colombia).

In 1861 Mosquera, leading the liberals, suppressed the religious communities, expelled the Jesuits who had entered the country and confiscated much church property, fanaticallynbsp;persecuting the clerical body. After many years of strife,nbsp;which was a constant drain on the resources and manhoodnbsp;of the country, in 1885 the conservative, or church party,nbsp;triumphed. After the Civil War which lasted from 1900 tonbsp;1903, the Conservative Party in connection with the Churchnbsp;ruled the land up until the year 1930. Since the election ofnbsp;Dr. Olaya Herrera in 1930 the Liberal (anti-clerical) Partynbsp;has been in control, for the first time since 1885. As theirnbsp;influence has increased, such important subjects as the concordat between the Church and State, as well as the old Constitution are being studied with the intention of modifyingnbsp;them. This will naturally remove the educational systemnbsp;from the hands of the Catholic Church and will possibly endnbsp;in a complete division between the Church and State. Therenbsp;is also a visible tendency for Colombia to follow in the footsteps of Mexico and other South American countries in thenbsp;expulsion of all foreign clergy.

Physical Features

Colombia divides itself into four major physiographic regions; (1) Pacific littoral and Atrato Basin; (2) Caribbean littoral; (3) the Highlands, consisting of three cordilleras of the Andes and intervening valleys, and (4) thenbsp;Eastern Lowlands of the Amazon Basin. The Magdalenanbsp;River, navigable for over 930 miles, is the chief avenue ofnbsp;commerce from the Caribbean to the interior.

The great interior region of Colombia covers nearly 290,000 square miles and is divided between the streamsnbsp;tributary to the Amazon and to the Orinoco. In the sectionnbsp;tributary to the Orinoco the Guaviare and the Meta are thenbsp;chief streams and cut their way through immense plainsnbsp;dotted with small groups of trees and clumps of palms.nbsp;Large areas are under flood in the rainy season. The principal river in the southern section tributary to the Amazon isnbsp;the Caqueta. In this area are the forests of the Amazonnbsp;region. The rivers in these forests are not well suited tonbsp;travel because of dangerous cataracts.

Resources

The principal agricultural products for export are coflfee and bananas, which go, in large measure, to the Unitednbsp;States. Colombia is the second largest coflfee-producing nation in the world. Due to excellent physical conditions, intelligent cultivation and government supervision, the coflfeenbsp;is of fine quality. Medellin “Excelso” commands the highestnbsp;price in world marts. Cotton, cacao (from which cocoa isnbsp;made), tagua (vegetable ivory nuts), tobacco, wheat andnbsp;maize are also produced in large quantities. There is extensive cattle-raising, with meat and dairy products for localnbsp;consumption, and hides and skins for export. Colombia hasnbsp;long been noted for its mineral wealth, with large exportsnbsp;of gold, silver, emeralds, petroleum and platinum. It is thenbsp;principal source of the last named mineral. Coal, iron andnbsp;asphalt are found also.

Progress

Transportation is greatly handicapped by the uneven topography of the country. There are 2,000 miles of railroads, mostly in short lines between principal cities, or around fallsnbsp;in the Magdalena. There is no standard gauge. Except innbsp;the neighborhood of Bogota, good roads are scarce. Roadnbsp;construction is in progress, and there are at present aboutnbsp;5,000 miles of highways. An automobile road has beennbsp;opened recently in the southwest, which enables direct travelnbsp;between the older stations of the Christian and Missionarynbsp;Alliance, Ipiales and La Union, with the new stations farthernbsp;north. Heretofore these two stations have been part of thenbsp;Ecuador Mission, but will now belong to the Mission innbsp;Colombia.

Telegraphic communications connect all parts of the republic and there is telephone service in the larger cities, also' long distance service from certain cities, to the United Statesnbsp;and Europe.

Four airway companies maintain regular schedules in various parts of the country, with connections to Panama, Ecuador and Venezuela.

In the Departments of Huila, Cauca and Valle, the greater part of the cultivated land is in the hands of a few richnbsp;owners, resulting in the majority of working people beingnbsp;dependent on huge cattle or coffee farms. This tends towardnbsp;general poverty and lack of independence and makes thenbsp;propagation of the gospel somewhat dependent on the willnbsp;of the landowners, since many of these are fanatical Catholics. In contrast to this, is the Department of Caldas wherenbsp;the land has been recently put under cultivation. A majoritynbsp;of the residents here are small landowners or have contractsnbsp;for working the coffee fields for other landowners. Thisnbsp;results in a spirit of independence for the poor man. Innbsp;southern Caldas the average day laborer, working in thenbsp;coffee fields, earns 30 cents per day United States in additionnbsp;to his board. Tradesmen in the cities have an average of 65nbsp;cents per day United States.

The public school system of Colombia both in the cities and in the rural districts is supported by the civil government,nbsp;but largely under the administration of the Roman Catholicnbsp;Church. Due to the lack of rural schools the majority of thenbsp;children in these districts are illiterate. In the larger citiesnbsp;there are many private schools which are taught and directednbsp;mainly by Roman Catholic orders. Since all public schoolsnbsp;are under the direction of the Catholic Church the studentsnbsp;are compelled to attend services in the Catholic Church, andnbsp;public opinion makes it necessary for them to subject themselves to the Catholic ceremonies. Thus, the problem of educating believers’ children has been a difficult one. However,nbsp;there is now before Congress a bill to put all public schoolsnbsp;in the hands of civil authorities, thus freeing them fromnbsp;Catholic oversight and prohibiting all religious teaching. Recently elementary education for the children has been madenbsp;compulsory. As for higher education in Colombia, the national Government maintains universities in the capitals ofnbsp;most of the Departments of the Republic. These are taughtnbsp;by the laity. The principal universities are found in Medellin, Popayan and Bogota.

Languages and Tribes

The principal language of Colombia is Spanish. The Indian peoples make up the bulk of Colombia’s population and have intermarried with both the Spanish and Negroes. Thenbsp;Indians that inhabit the three main divisions of the mightynbsp;Andes are mostly semi-civilized. They speak their own particular tongue or dialect, but many can speak Spanish also.nbsp;The same is true of the Indians on the central lowlands. Thenbsp;many, many jungle tribes seldom come in contact with thenbsp;white man. There are trading posts and the governmentnbsp;maintains its representatives along some of the rivers, butnbsp;these Indians speak very little else but their own dialect.nbsp;They fall into two geographical divisions, those of- the interior region, and those scattered in isolated parts throughoutnbsp;the remainder of the Republic. Of the latter the most important are those of the Choco, of the Sierra Nevada denbsp;Santa Marta, and of the Gosjira Peninsula. The Indiannbsp;population of the Choco is stated as 23,000 of whom a relatively large number belong to the tribal, undomesticated Indians known as the Chocos and form a distinct linguisticnbsp;family.

Religion

Roman Catholicism is recognized as the religion of the country. By the Concordat of 1892 “the public educationnbsp;and instruction shall be organized and directed in conformitynbsp;with the dogmas and morals of the Catholic religion.’’ Therenbsp;is a limited tolerance, however, according to Article 40 ofnbsp;the Constitution, which provides that “the exercise of allnbsp;forms of worship, which are not contrary to Christian moralsnbsp;nor to the laws, is permitted.’’

Missionary Occupation

Protestant work was begun in June, 1856, when Rev. H. B. Pratt of the Presbyterian Church, U. S. A., opened atnbsp;Bogota the first mission station in Colombia. Mr. Pratt wasnbsp;a man of great industry and no small talent and among othernbsp;achievements he made a well-known translation of the Biblenbsp;into Spanish. The first church congregation was organizednbsp;in Bogota in 1861, but its six members were all foreigners.nbsp;The first Colombians were received into the church in 1885.nbsp;The Presbyterian Mission has done effective work both innbsp;evangelization and church ministries, and in educational worknbsp;in the northern and eastern portions of the republic.

The Gospel Missionary Union entered Cali and Palmyra in the west in 1912. This Mission has been active in evangelization, churches have been organized in several places andnbsp;itineration is carried on in all directions. In Palmyra thenbsp;Gospel Missionary Union has two training schools, one fornbsp;deaconesses and one for evangelists. The Cumberland Presbyterian Church of the U. S. A. maintains a church andnbsp;school in Cali, founded in 1926, and several preaching pointsnbsp;in the Department of Caldas. The Brethren Mission arenbsp;working to a small extent in the region of Barranquilla onnbsp;the northern coast. In 1935 they also occupied the city ofnbsp;Pasto in the Department of Narino. In 1929 the Baptistnbsp;Church of Cuba sent two native pastors to evangelize in thenbsp;Caribbean littoral. In 1933 the World Wide Evangelizationnbsp;Crusade established work in the Departments surroundingnbsp;Bogota, the capital, with headquarters there. They intend tonbsp;occupy all unevangelized territory in the region.

The British and Foreign Bible Society, the Protestant Episcopal Church and the Scandinavian Alliance are alsonbsp;preaching the Word in Colombia, and the Seventh Day Adventists have work in the country.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

Missionaries of the Christian and Missionary Alliance in Ecuador made several trips over the border into southernnbsp;Colombia and through these visits some contacts and friendships were formed. From the first there was strong opposition from the Roman Catholic Church and the priests offerednbsp;most determined resistance. However in 1923 missionariesnbsp;located in Ipiales in the Department of Narino, an area containing nearly a half million souls.

Ipiales. During a season of earthquakes in 1923, God gave an open door in this city and a'mission center wasnbsp;established, the first Alliance station in Colombia. The response to the message was very encouraging. However, thenbsp;Roman Church continued its determined efforts and in 1926nbsp;a mob was organized and the home of the missionaries wasnbsp;besieged. It became necessary for the missionary couple tonbsp;leave for a short time but God made their return possible,nbsp;and since then the work has continued but not without hindrances. But while the work in the city has been somewhatnbsp;discouraging, the country sections have offered a more fruitful opportunity. Groups of believers have sprung up in thenbsp;valleys and on the mountain sides at from one to three daysnbsp;distance from Ipiales. At a recent regional conference aboutnbsp;thirty believers sat together at the Lord’s Supper and testified of the Lord’s goodness to them and their zeal to get thenbsp;gospel out to their own people. Many calls for meetings andnbsp;instruction are coming from various country districts.

Because of lack of proper roads to the north, this station was for many years a part of the Ecuador Mission but in

1935 a highway linked this station with the north and the Ipiales and La Union stations were transferred to the Colombia Mission. There is a small organized church in Ipialesnbsp;under Mission government.

La Union. Seven years after the Alliance missionary couple entered Ipiales for the beginning of missionarynbsp;work in the Department of Narino they moved, in 1930, tonbsp;the town of La Union with a view to making that a centernbsp;for ministry in a large district. This town holds an important place in the Panama hat industry of southern Colombia.nbsp;The gospel has been preached widely throughout the districtnbsp;and there has been considerable encouragement, especially innbsp;the rural sections.

At present no missionary couple is resident in the Department of Narino, but the work is being carried forward under the leadership of an experienced native worker.

Popayan. The work in the northern part of the field was begun in 1926 at Popayan, the capital of the Department of Cauca. This Department with its 10,384 squarenbsp;miles has a population of 332,585. It is the seat of academicnbsp;and ecclesiastical activity. Because the railroad runs only asnbsp;far south as Popayan, most of the traveling must be done onnbsp;horseback over a very mountainous country. On thesenbsp;mountains live many of the inhabitants and especially Indians, who constitute 32 per cent of the population of thisnbsp;Department. The gospel has been welcomed among severalnbsp;tribes of these Indians.

The first Protestant (or evangelical) baptismal service in Popayan took place in October, 1931, when five were baptized. Two of this number are now serving as native workers. The headquarters of the Alliance Mission in Colombianbsp;is in Popayan.

Santander. This town of about 8,000 population was opened in 1927 as an outstation from Popayan,nbsp;and in 1930 a missionary took up residence there. Meetingsnbsp;were held regularly in Santander and outlying districts andnbsp;in one of these centers the believers have built their ownnbsp;chapel and a few have asked for baptism.

Nieva. As a result of a long itinerating trip the Department of Huila, representing 10,394 square miles and a population of about 200,000, was entered by thenbsp;Alliance in 1930 and a missionary couple settled in Nieva,nbsp;where they found a few families interested in the gospel.nbsp;Meetings were begun, the attendance has been good andnbsp;there is a faithful group of baptized believers.

Since work was established in Huila in 1930, practically all of this Department has been reached by the Gospel, although results have been few in some sections due to fanaticism. From the center of Neiva the work has been enlargednbsp;to include the southern part of the Department of Tolimanbsp;where a number of small congregations have been founded.nbsp;As a result of the Colombian-Peruvian war and the activitiesnbsp;in Huila and the Oriente, an auto road has been constructednbsp;from Neiva to Floriencia, which is the capital of the Department of Caqueta. This Department lies to the East ofnbsp;the Eastern Cordillera and reaches down to the Amazonnbsp;basin. As soon as communication was opened an advancement was made into this region with the gospel, resulting innbsp;a small group of believers in this important center. Fromnbsp;this area it is now the plan of the Mission to reach out farther into the Amazon work.

Gigante. In 1935 another station was opened in the Department of Huila in the town of Gigante, a small center near the city of Garçon, where the Catholicnbsp;Bishop of the Department lives and where the station willnbsp;probably be established in the future.

Armenia. One days journey from Popayan by train is the city of Armenia in the Department of Caldasnbsp;with a population of 25,000. This is one of the principalnbsp;centers of coffee production in Colombia. Armenia is anbsp;city of commercial importance situated on the main routenbsp;of travel between the Pacific Coast and the capital of thenbsp;Republic. Due to the intensive coffee cultivation, there isnbsp;a dense population in this region.

Alliance work was opened here in 1932, the missionaries being the only evangelical workers. From the beginningnbsp;the work was successful being aided by the previous effortsnbsp;of colporteurs of the Bible Society in that section. The missionaries formed about nine groups of believers in the district. As the work grew, the need for native workersnbsp;became evident and some small effort has been made tonbsp;establish Short Term Bible Schools to prepare some of thenbsp;young men and women who desire to enter Christian service. These schools have developed until in 1935 a group ofnbsp;Christian young people gathered in Armenia for the firstnbsp;short session of a Bible Institute. There are now thirty-twonbsp;congregations and four organized churches in this section.

Manizales. In the fall of 1934 a new station was opened in Manizales, the capital of the Departmentnbsp;of Caldas, a city of 70,000 population. The Brethren Mission had occupied this center previously but had not succeeded in securing a foothold here. The Lord has blessednbsp;the efforts of the Alliance missionaries and despite severenbsp;opposition a small congregation has been established. Fromnbsp;this center, work is being carried on to the north and southnbsp;through almost half of the Department. This region is onenbsp;of the most fanatical sections of Colombia. As a result thenbsp;opposition is tremendous and evangelization very slow.

Planting the Church

Although the oldest station in the Alliance field in Colombia was entered only a little over twelve years ago and the main section of the field has been occupied less than tennbsp;years, yet there has been such a response to the gospel thatnbsp;there are now eight organized churches and 48 groups ofnbsp;believers and inquirers. These churches are still undernbsp;Mission government, but they are showing an active interestnbsp;in indigenous development.

As the number of converts increase in the various districts, additional Short Term Bible Schools will be needed-The Mission is planning to establish also a full time Bible Institute for the training of native workers. Let us fellowship with the Mission in this needy and responsive pioneernbsp;field to the end that soon there shall be not only a thrivingnbsp;Bible School but a strong self-supporting group of nativenbsp;churches, who will themselves become the principal agencynbsp;for the evangelization of their people.

ECUADOR

“El Ecuador” is the Spanish for “the Equator,” and the , country lies athwart that imaginary line, and extends fromnbsp;J 100 miles north of it to 400 miles south. It is bounded onnbsp;the north and east by the Republic of Colombia, and on thenbsp;J south and east by Peru, and extends westward to the Pacificnbsp;Ocean,

Area and Population

The area of Ecuador is indefinite. The extreme official ® Ecuadorian claim is 275,936 square miles; the South Ameri-* can Handbook of 1935 gives the estimate of 171,287 squarenbsp;miles, and others give the greatly reduced figure of 118,500.nbsp;® The vast frontier'east of the Andes, in the drainage basin ofnbsp;® the upper Amazon, is unsurveyed and largely unexplored,nbsp;® and is claimed by both Ecuador and Peru. The Archipelagonbsp;of Colon (Galapagos Islands) in the Pacific Ocean, some 600nbsp;5 miles from the coast with an area of 2,868 square miles, be-? long to Ecuador.

Estimates of the population vary greatly, due in large measure to the lack of information concerning the aboriginesnbsp;of the land, and range from 1,500,000 to 2,500,000. Thenbsp;® bulk of the population lives in the interandean plateau.nbsp;J

Climate

f The climate varies with the altitude, ranging from tropical t to sub-artic. The temperature of the Pacific littoral is mod-¦j erated by the cool Humboldt current offshore. The city ofnbsp;Guayaquil, in the heart of the tropics, has an average temperature of 78° F. The climate of the cities in the highernbsp;i altitudes is compared with that of our spring. There are twonbsp;t major seasons, dry from June to November, and wet fromnbsp;- December to May. On the whole, the climate is healthy fornbsp;' the tropics.

i nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Government

s

Ecuador is a constitutional Republic. The executive power 3 is vested in the President, who is elected for a period of fournbsp;e years. The legislative power is in the hands of the Nationalnbsp;g Congress, which consists of a House of Senators and a Housenbsp;of Deputies. The judicial power lies with the Supreme Courtnbsp;in Quito, and lower courts as established by the Constitution.nbsp;There is also a Council of State with fifteen members, including the five members of the Cabinet. The provinces (17nbsp;' in number) are administered by a governor appointed by thenbsp;s President.

1 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;History

t

{ Before the beginning of the sixteenth century, the Indians J. of the mountain region in what is now Ecuador and those ofnbsp;{ the Upper Napo, including what is now Tena, were conquered by the Incas of Peru, who imposed upon these Indians the Quichua language and caused them to become annbsp;integral part of the Inca empire, sharing its civilization. Thenbsp;j Indians of the Oriente, except the Upper Napo, were nevernbsp;j conquered by the Incas and still retain their individual tribalnbsp;languages and organization. Among the latter are thenbsp;y Zaparos, Jivaros, Iquitos and the Mazenas.

g With the advent of the Spaniards the Andean region became a province of Peru, and later of New Granada. It was “Great Colombia” under Bolivar from 1822 to 1830. Ecuador has had a rather unsettled political career with twelvenbsp;constitutions, including that of 1929. The influence of President Gabriel Garcia Moreno (1861-1865, 1869-1875), annbsp;energetic statesman, but a religious zealot who delivered hisnbsp;country to the Papacy by the Concordat of 1861 and placednbsp;all education in the hands of the clergy, is still felt in thenbsp;country. Until the revolution of 1895 and the presidency ofnbsp;Eloy Alfaro in 1897, the government was largely under thenbsp;domination of the clergy. Since that time the Republic hasnbsp;been under the liberal régime (anti-clerical).

Physical Features

The Andes traverse the country from north to south in two parallel ranges, with a dozen peaks above 16,CXX) feet innbsp;elevation. Their altitudes are variously estimated and thenbsp;highest are Chimborazo (21,424 feet), Cotopaxi (19,550nbsp;feet), Cayambe (19,534 feet), and Antisana (19,260 feet).nbsp;Between the two cordilleras lies the interandean plateau, withnbsp;an average elevation of 8,500 feet, which is suitable for sustenance agriculture. To the west of the mountains the relatively narrow coastal plain slopes to the Pacific. Beginningnbsp;on the eastern slope of the Andean range, the Oriente extends eastward into the lowland plains of the Amazon. It isnbsp;largely covered by virgin tropical jungle, and is sparsely inhabited by Indian tribes along its mighty rivers (as the Napo,nbsp;Curaray, Santiago and the Pastaza) that flow into the Amazon system.

Resources

Cacao has been the most important agricultural product of Ecuador, but production has been reduced by the ravages ofnbsp;the Witchbroom disease. Coffee, tagua, sugar, bananas arenbsp;also exported ; while cereals, cotton, tobacco, etc., are grownnbsp;for local consumption. Crude oil is now the leading exportnbsp;of Ecuador. Gold is mined and washed in several parts ofnbsp;the country. Manufacturing is limited to sugar refining,nbsp;making of Panama hats, cotton goods and minor industries.

Progress

There are approximately 500 miles of railroads. The principal line is the Guayaquil and Quito railway, completednbsp;in 1908. During the past few years transportation has beennbsp;greatly improved by automobile and bus service made possible by the improvement and construction of motor roads innbsp;different sections of the Republic. There is telegraphic andnbsp;telephone service in all the larger centers and internationalnbsp;communications are maintained by cable, radio, and a triweekly air service of the Pan-American Grace Airways.nbsp;There are several radio broadcasting stations operating in thenbsp;larger cities.

Government schools are operated throughout the Republic, though the training of the youth still lies, to a great extent,nbsp;in the hands of the Roman Catholic Church through theirnbsp;institutions. There are three universities, located in the citiesnbsp;of Quito, Guayaquil, and Cuenca.

Currency

The Ecuadorean “sucre” (named after General Sucre of Independence fame) is normally worth twenty cents in U. S.nbsp;currency. Twenty-five sucres ($5.00) constitute a “condor.”nbsp;Recently, however, the exchange has been at the rate of tennbsp;sucres to one United States dollar.

Languages and Tribes

Spanish is the language of Ecuador, although it is by no means the only language spoken and used in the Republic.nbsp;The highland Indians (Incas), numbering hundreds of thousands, speak Quichua. This language has penetrated into thenbsp;northern jungle and is spoken also by those of the Naponbsp;region, including Tena. In the southern Oriente (jungle)nbsp;is an entirely different race—the Jivaros—known as “headhunters,” who speak their native tongue; while toward the

Pacific on the western foothills of the Andes is to be found the Cayapa tribe. The Aucas of the Napo-Curaray regionnbsp;are another distinct race who are practically unknown tonbsp;civilization.

Religion

Fanatical Roman Catholicism prevails in the Sierra section, while religious indifference is characteristic of the coastal provinces. Liberty of conscience and freedom ofnbsp;worship are guaranteed by the Constitution and the government takes a very fair attitude toward evangelical missions.

Missionary Occupation

Among the early evangelical witnesses of Christ in Ecuador was the Reverend Francisco Penzotti, agent of the American Bible Society, who gladly suffered hardship, persecution and imprisonment for the cause of the gospel. Until thenbsp;closing years of the nineteenth century Ecuador was closednbsp;to the messenger of the gospel, but as soon as the doors werenbsp;opened two men of the Gospel Missionary Union entered innbsp;1896. Later one of these went to Colombia, where his ministry still continues. The other worked independently innbsp;Ecuador for many years, making wholesome contacts for thenbsp;gospel in connection with his work as a teacher in the leadingnbsp;college of the city of Guayaquil. In 1922 he and his wifenbsp;joined The Christian and Missionary Alliance where his ministry is continuing with much blessing.

The work of the gospel has been greatly furthered through the excellent work done by the British and Foreign Bible Society and the American Bible Society, both of which are operating throughout the whole Republic. Each Society has anbsp;group of colporters who cooperate not only with the Alliancenbsp;missionaries, but with the native workers as well.

Evangelical radio broadcasting is doing a great deal to break down prejudice and open up doors for the entrance ofnbsp;the gospel into many homes. This is being carried on bynbsp;two independent missionary couples, who are laboring in thenbsp;cities of Quito and Guayaquil. Through these two radio stations, HCJB and HC2JB, the gospel is being broadcast notnbsp;only locally but reaches out to the neighboring republics.nbsp;Every opportunity is given to The Christian and Missionarynbsp;Alliance missionaries to witness for Christ over these stations.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

The first missionaries of The Christian and Missionary Alliance went to Ecuador in 1897, going first to the cities of Quito and Montecristi. In 1920 our Society was named asnbsp;the one responsible for the evangelization of the Republic ofnbsp;Ecuador through an action of the committee representing thenbsp;various mission boards working in Latin America. Thenbsp;Gospel Missionary Union continues to share in the task by anbsp;small group of missionaries occupying three centers. Thenbsp;Seventh Day Adventists have a number of workers in thisnbsp;republic, but unfortunately, as in many other fields, theirnbsp;work is largely that of proselyting among inquirers and converts won by other Missions.

Since the first missionaries of The Christian and Missionary Alliance entered Ecuador, the work has been carried on faithfully, though for many years with few visible results.nbsp;The devoted lives and zealous labors of the early missionariesnbsp;together with the ministries of those more recently sent tonbsp;the field, are now beginning to bear fruit, which is evidencednbsp;in the building of the church of Christ in different parts ofnbsp;the Republic and in the Department of Narino in southernnbsp;Colombia. With the opening and growth of the Alliancenbsp;Mission in central and southern Colombia, the work innbsp;Narino, including the stations of Ipiales and La Union, hasnbsp;been made an integral part of the Colombia Mission of thenbsp;Christian and Missionary Alliance.

The last annual report shows six organized churches in Ecuador, the largest of these being in Guayaquil and Quito.nbsp;Others are in Ambato, Montecristi, Manta, and Esmeraldas.nbsp;In addition to these there are over thirty unorganized groupsnbsp;of believers. A strong Bible Training School is being conducted at Ambato and work is being carried on throughoutnbsp;Ecuador, including two districts in the Oriente among thenbsp;jungle Indians.

Missionary work in Ecuador may be best understood by dividing the field into three regions, whose people and theirnbsp;response to the gospel are distinct from one another :

The Coast

In this region there is much apathy to any religion, and but little opposition to the preaching of the gospel.

Guayaquil. Guayaquil (population, 120,000), the chief seaport and commercial city of Ecuador, is situated on the right bank of the Guayas River, thirty miles from its mouth. Although occupied for many years by the Gospelnbsp;Missionary Union, Alliance workers did not permanentlynbsp;locate here until 1920. A large and flourishing church is thenbsp;center of gospel work in this city and neighboring provincesnbsp;through the efforts of missionaries, native workers, and thenbsp;voluntary servjpe of individual members. The Sunday services in the Guayaquil church reach a much larger number bynbsp;being broadcast over Station HC2JB. Milagro, Duran andnbsp;Santa Rosa are the principal outstations, manned by nativenbsp;pastors.

Salinas. In the province of Guayas lies Salinas, a cable station and holiday resort. It is connected with Guayaquil by both rail and motor road. Missionary worknbsp;was begun here by the Alliance in 1930. This point is usednbsp;as a center for reaching out into the surrounding towns andnbsp;villages, and the spiritual growth is encouraging. In Lanbsp;Libcrtad and Ancon, two outstations, God’s blessing has beennbsp;especially manifest.

Manta. This town with a population of 10,000, on the southern side of Manta Bay, a fishing port and exporter of Panama hats, tagua and coffee, is the geographicalnbsp;center of work along the central stretch of coast. However,nbsp;the missionary uses the town of Montecristi (population,nbsp;2,000), six miles from Manta, as the main center for doingnbsp;itinerating work throughout the whole province, which wasnbsp;first entered in 1897. Several evangelistic campaigns havenbsp;been held with success and God has blessed the Regionalnbsp;Native Conventions.

Bahia. Bahia (population, 3,000) is a port about thirty miles north of Manta. This outstation is at timesnbsp;a mission station and is a good center for work throughout the littoral as far as the frontiers of Colombia.

Esmeraldes. This station (population, 3,000), the capital of the province of the same name, stands atnbsp;the mouth of the Esmeraldes River. Work was begun innbsp;this place largely through the efforts of the native church,nbsp;and in 1935 missionary residence was established to care fornbsp;other sections of the province as well as to evangelize thenbsp;Cayapa Indians.

The Sierra

The high plateau between the two ranges of the Andes is the most productive and healthful portion of Ecuador. Itsnbsp;cities lie at an altitude of from eight to ten thousand feet

above the sea. In most places there is strong opposition to the gospel.

Quito. Quito (population, 110,000), the capital of Ecuador, is situated at the base of the volcano Pichincha in a very picturesque valley. It was the ancient capital ofnbsp;the Shiri Indians, and later of the conquering Incas. Rainfall is abundant, with an average of forty inches throughoutnbsp;the year, which occurs chiefly from October to May. Thenbsp;temperature averages 60° F. Day and night are of equalnbsp;length and darkness falls regularly at 6:00 p. m. The citynbsp;is connected with Guayaquil to the south and Otavalo andnbsp;Ibarra to the north by railroad, and by motor roads to southern Colombia and Riobamba. It is the seat of the Romannbsp;Catholic archbishopric and is noted for its many conventsnbsp;and churches.

The first Alliance missionaries entered this city in 1898. Besides the local Alliance church with its activities that reachnbsp;¦out into the different parts of the province, there is a finenbsp;work being carried on in the penitentiary under the ablenbsp;leadership of one of the church elders. The headquarters ofnbsp;the Ecuador Mission of the Christian and Missionary Alliance also the school for missionaries’ children are locatednbsp;here. The book store, “Realidades,” operates from this center and most of the literature is printed here.

Ambato. Ninety miles south of Quito on the Guayaquil and Quito railway is Ambato (population, 25,-000). Here the climate is temperate and favorable to orcharding and vine growing. It is conspicuous as the mostnbsp;liberal city of the Sierra. Alliance work was begun here innbsp;1922. The Bible Institute of Ecuador is favorably locatednbsp;here, as it offers many opportunities to the students for presenting the gospel to the Ecuadorians and Indians who livenbsp;in the surrounding towns and villages.

Among the outstations from Ambato is Latacunga (population, 24,000), twenty-five miles north of Ambato, capital of the province of Leon and the center of the dairying industry in Ecuador. It is one of the most conservative townsnbsp;in this section of the Sierra and for this reason was verynbsp;difficult to enter, but through faithful visiting and systematicnbsp;propaganda it has greatly changed in its attitude toward thenbsp;gospel. Salache, also an outstation, a thickly populated Indian center, was entered for the first time in 1931.

Riobamba. Riobamba (population, 30,000), the capital of the Province of Chimborazo, became an Alliance station in 1925. It is an ancient Indian town in thenbsp;midst of a rich agricultural region and very strategically located for a center of evangelism. It is on the main railwaynbsp;line to Quito with which it is connected also by motor road.nbsp;From this city different towns of the province are reachednbsp;as well as Guaranda in the neighboring province.

Cuenca. This city of 40,000 population, the third in size in Ecuador, is the capital of the Province ofnbsp;Azuay. It is located in the south-central portion of the Republic, 190 miles south of Quito and 117 miles southeastnbsp;from Guayaquil. Because of its university and seminaries,nbsp;it is called the “Athens of Ecuador.” It has long been considered one of the most violently fanatical cities in Latinnbsp;America in its opposition to the gospel. The first missionarynbsp;occupation was by the Alliance in 1930 and the city is anbsp;center for extensive itinerating.

Loja. The city of Loja (population, 10,000), the capital of the province of the same name, which lies just northnbsp;¦of Peru, has been an objective of the Ecuador Mission. Systematic itineration was first started in this province in 1930.nbsp;Due to the fact that it is somewhat isolated these itineratingnbsp;trips are of unusually long duration.

Indian Work

Work among Indian tribes is carried on in both the Sierra and the jungle sections. The highland Indians form a largenbsp;percentage of the population living in the Sierras almostnbsp;throughout the entire length of the Republic. In two strategic centers mission stations have been opened.

Agato. In the province of Imbabura to the north, aggressive evangelism is being carried on from the station at Agato, which is entirely an Indian center. There are no less than 40,000 Indians in the almost immediate vicinity.nbsp;Since the opening of this station in 1918, itinerating has beennbsp;carried on, not only among the Indians of the province, butnbsp;also among the Spanish-speaking people. The populationnbsp;of the province includes 60,000 Indians and 50,000 Spanish.nbsp;In the early days of the work the only means of travel tonbsp;Quito was by horseback, now both auto road and railroadnbsp;are available.

Classes are conducted by the missionaries to teach the Indians to read and write. The Seed has been sown faithfully and now the harvest is being gathered. Late in 1935nbsp;there came a marked increase in spiritual blessing in thenbsp;work among the Indians and within five weeks eighty-fournbsp;Indian inquirers were instructed in the Way and prayed.nbsp;Some of these were truly saved. Now Indians are becomingnbsp;so concerned about their soul’s salvation that they are coming to the mission station asking how to be saved. Praynbsp;that the revival spirit may continue and increase.

Two centers for Spanish work are Otavalo, the post office for Agato, and Ibarra, the capital of the province.

Colta. Colta, where our second station is maintained, opened in 1934, is the most thickly populated Indiannbsp;center in Ecuador, having an elevation of over 11,000 feetnbsp;and situated by the beautiful lake that bears the same name.nbsp;Personal and public evangelism as well as a great deal ofnbsp;visitation work is being carried on among these Indians innbsp;their own language. The Spanish town of Cajabamba, thenbsp;railroad station for Colta, also receives the gospel witnessnbsp;from here.

There are also two centers of missionary endeavor among the forest or jungle Indians in eastern Ecuador:

Chupientsa. In the southern Oriente, the work among the Jivaros (headhunters) of the Morona andnbsp;Santiago sections was opened in 1929 at Chupientsa. Thenbsp;Indians of this region were never conquered by the Incas ofnbsp;Peru, hence their language bears no relationship to the dialects of the Napo or highland Indians. The Red Men frequent this station and are also reached by itinerating done innbsp;the jungles. A small school is being carried on and Sundaynbsp;services are held. As a result, several have definitely accepted Christ.

Tena. In the northern part of the Oriente, along the upper reaches of the Napo River, there is a considerablenbsp;Indian population which is reached from the station at Dosnbsp;Rios (“Two Rivers”), near the town of Tena entered bynbsp;Alliance missionaries in 1926. Thousands of Indians havenbsp;visited this station, sometimes coming a distance of from sixnbsp;to seven days’ journey. In order that the Indians may havenbsp;the opportunity of reading the Bible for themselves, a primary school is being conducted by the Mission and is financednbsp;largely by government appropriations. The Mission compound, composed of thatched roof bamboo houses for mis-

sionaries’ dwellings, workshop and chapel, and especially the converts, though few in number, speak of the triumphs andnbsp;encouraging progress of the gospel in that needy area.

Translation and Publication Work

Comparatively little translation work has been done on this field as Spanish is the language of the country. For manynbsp;years the Spanish Bible has been in circulation all over thenbsp;Republic. The great majority of the Indians, however, arenbsp;illiterate and those who can read naturally understand theirnbsp;own language better. For this reason, some years ago thenbsp;Gospel of Luke was translated into Quichua and at the present time a revision is being made jointly by missionaries ofnbsp;the Gospel Missionary Union and The Christian and Missionary Alliance. The former society is also beginning translation work on one of the Gospels into the Jivaro tongue.

Rcalidades, the field magazine in Spanish, was published for the first time in 1932. Its growth has been quite satisfactory, having already a circulation of almost 1,000 paidnbsp;subscriptions. A great majority of the tracts that are distributed in the Republic are printed locally, a conservativénbsp;estimate being about 200,000 annually. Recently tracts havenbsp;been published in Quichua for the Indian population. Newspaper evangelism has also proved an effective and God-blessed ministry.

The Indigenous Church

Progress along this line in the Ecuador field has been somewhat slow, but God is blessing and leading forward innbsp;this most important work. While not many of the nativenbsp;brethren have been able to give themselves entirely to thenbsp;ministering of the Word, it is refreshing to note that on thenbsp;whole the church on the field is realizing more and more thenbsp;privileges and responsibilities of giving out the gospel tonbsp;their fellow-countrymen. This is evidenced by the fact thatnbsp;there is a great readiness to help in Sunday School and Dailynbsp;Vacation Bible School work, and also in the directing ofnbsp;gospel services and in preaching. Not only is there spiritualnbsp;growth, but, as is always the case, this is accompanied by annbsp;increase in the free-will offerings.

For the past few years National Conventions have been held and these have been a source of much blessing in thatnbsp;they have created a spirit of unity among the different groupsnbsp;and churches as well as increased the spiritual vision of all,nbsp;and especially the isolated believers in the country districts.nbsp;It has been gratifying to see God’s Spirit working in some ofnbsp;these gatherings in the conversion of sinners and the consecration of believers. Indeed these conferences bear the earmarksnbsp;of a real Alliance Missionary Convention. The missionarynbsp;spirit of seeking to evangelize the needy parts of the fieldnbsp;is truly manifest and most encouraging. A national committee is endeavoring to stimulate prayer and interest throughnbsp;the publication of a bulletin, as well as printing tracts periodically. These activities are entirely indigenous as to personnel and financial support. Funds are also distributednbsp;through them for the native workers in the Bible Institutenbsp;and out in the field. There are a few groups who are beingnbsp;ministered to by consecrated laymen, and native pastors arenbsp;out in active service in pastoral work and extensive itinerating.

Thank God for the missionary vision that is slowly gripping the hearts of the nationals, thus enabling them to shoulder more faithfully their responsibilities in carrying thenbsp;gospel to their own people and leading them on to the goalnbsp;of the Indigenous Church.

The name “Peru” (originally spelled “Piru”) was given to the country by the Spaniards. The name is of uncertainnbsp;origin ; but to the conquistadores, the land of the Incasnbsp;meant the fabled source of inexhaustible riches.

Peru lies on the west coast of South America facing the Pacific Ocean and is bounded on the north by Ecuador, andnbsp;Colombia in the extreme eastern section, on the east bynbsp;Brazil and Bolivia, and on the south by Chile.

Area and Population

Peru is the largest South American country on the Pacific coast, and has an area of 482,114 square miles. This wasnbsp;the estimate given by the League of Nations in 1934 butnbsp;the official estimate usually given is 532,184 square miles.nbsp;This area approximates that of Texas, Arizona, Nevadanbsp;and L'tah. The uncertainty in regard to the actual area isnbsp;caused by the conflicting claims of Ecuador and Peru innbsp;the Amazon Basin, a century-old dispute that involves 100,-000 square miles. The settlement of that boundary controversy was undertaken by President Roosevelt by annbsp;agreement of Feb. 6, 1934.

“West Coast Republics of South America” of the World Dominion Survey Series gives the following statement onnbsp;population : “Reckoning the total population at 4,000,000,nbsp;the several racial elements may be estimated approximately

Concerning population figures the Survey says : “There are no adequate census returns by which to reckon the num-’jcr of inhabitants in Peru. In the absence of any verifiednbsp;figures, the total population is estimated variously at fromnbsp;three million to six and a quarter million. The governmentnbsp;statistics give 6,147,000. Many writers are content to takenbsp;this population as the most authoritative, but some havenbsp;taken steps to verify the figures and these invariably give anbsp;much lower estimate. Probably there are about four million.”

Although the people of pure Spanish descent are only about 15 per cent of the total, yet these form the dominantnbsp;portion of the population. The chief Indian peoples are thenbsp;Quichua and the Aymara. The latter are copper colored ornbsp;olive brown, of medium stature, have great strength andnbsp;make fierce warriors. The former are lighter in color,nbsp;equally strong, but of more docile character. The presencenbsp;of several thousand people of Asiatic blood is explained bynbsp;the importation of coolies during the middle of the nineteenth century to labor in the Guano deposits and by laternbsp;'mmigration, which, however, has now been terminated bynbsp;the Peruvian legislature.

Climate

There are three climatic zones, corresponding to the major physiographic regions. The narrow coastal belt, in the lee ofnbsp;the lofty Andes, is relatively arid, and high temperaturesnbsp;are moderated by the Humboldt current offshore. The highnbsp;Sierras have lower temperatures varying with the altitude,nbsp;and rainfall ranging from 10 to 50 inches per year, mostlynbsp;between October and March. In the altitude above 15,000nbsp;tn 16,000 feet there is perpetual snow. Temperatures andnbsp;humidity are high the year round in the Montana, or tropical eastern lowlands lying in the Amazon Basin.

By provision of the new Constitution promulgated April 9, 1933, the President of the Republic is elected for a five-year term, and is not eligible for réélection until one termnbsp;has elapsed. Congress consists of the Senate, whose members serve for six-year terms, one-third of which are electednbsp;every two years ; and the House of Deputies, elected for anbsp;five-year term. The Supreme Court sits at Lima, and therenbsp;are 12 judicial districts with minor tribunals. There are 23nbsp;departments, divided into 114 provinces.

History

The ancient Incas, sedentary Indians of relatively high civilization, made their homes centuries ago in the well irrigated upland valleys of Peru. The Spaniards under Francisco Pizarro, Diego Almagro and others, were drawn tonbsp;their land by the lure of gold ; and quickly overran thenbsp;country and replaced the native dynasty and organization.nbsp;Peru became the seat of the Spanish colonial régime, andnbsp;was therefore the last to throw off the yoke of Spain in thenbsp;War of Independence. After the throes of the revolutionary period, Peru entered the “Guano Era,” which lastednbsp;from 1846 to the middle 1880’s. The guano for export wasnbsp;secured on the desert islands along the southern coast, andnbsp;found a ready market in Europe and in the Southern States.nbsp;During the boom years (1863-1873), the guano tax suppliednbsp;three-fourths of the state revenues, and the trade furnishednbsp;capital for irrigation, railroad and highway projects ; withnbsp;the result that Peru was 50 years ahead of the other Southnbsp;American lands.

Difficultie.s with Chile brought on the Nitrate War (1879-1884), with disastrous results for Peru. The nitrate regions were lost and the foreign debt greatly increased ; and the guano trade virtually ceased to exist. Peru stood stillnbsp;until 1905 ; since which time much progress has been made.nbsp;The thorny “Problem of the Pacific,” as the Tacna-Aricanbsp;boundary settlement has been called, was finally settled innbsp;1929, with the former province going to Peru and the latternbsp;to Chile. The frontier with Colombia had been adjustednbsp;in 1924. In 1932 some Colombians seized the frontier postnbsp;of Leticia on the Amazon River; and after a war scare, thenbsp;region was returned to Peruvian sovereignty by the Leaguenbsp;of Nations.

Physical Features

Peru has three major physiographic regions. (1) The narrow littoral, arid, with short rivers and deep valleys,nbsp;where cotton and sugar are raised under irrigation. Thirtynbsp;per cent of the population is found on the coast. (2) Thenbsp;high sierras, with an elevation of 12,0(90 feet above sea level,nbsp;form the backbone of the country. Two ranges enter Perunbsp;from Ecuador in the north, broaden into three ranges, thenbsp;Western, Central and Eastern ; and these join near Cerronbsp;de Pasco to form a “niido” or knot. Thence the mountainsnbsp;divide into two cordilleras. Western and Eastern, in middlenbsp;Peru, to reunite near Lake Titaca in the southeast to formnbsp;the Nudo de Viclanota. From that point one range entersnbsp;Chile, and another, Bolivia. The Western Cordillera of thenbsp;Peruvian Andes is the highest, with no pass under 8,000nbsp;feet elevation. In the Sierra there are seven peaks towering above 19,000 feet; the highest being Huascaran (alt.nbsp;22,187), Coropuna (21,700), Huandoy (21,088), Mistinbsp;(20,013), and Hualcan (19,945). (3) The Montana is thenbsp;third region, and is the sparsely populated tropical rainnbsp;forest toward the east of the Sierra.

The major rivers of Peru, the Maranon, Huallaga and tributaries of the Ucayali, rise in the Sierra, and break

through the mountains in magnificent gorges known as “pongos” to reach the Amazon system. There are 58 shortnbsp;rivers in the coastal region.

Resources

From the day the Spaniards in Panama heard of “Piru,” the mineral wealth of the land has been its chief economicnbsp;asset. Its principal products from the earth are copper,nbsp;silver (fourth ranking world producer), gold (largely asnbsp;by-product of copper), lead, zinc, and vanadium. Peru isnbsp;the principal source of the last-named mineral, and suppliesnbsp;80 per cent of the world demand. These minerals are nownbsp;overshadowed in importance, however, by petroleum (“blacknbsp;gold”) which is found in large quantities at sea level alongnbsp;the northern coast. There are prospects of additional oilnbsp;fields in the Sierra and in the Montana.

Agricultural products for export include cotton, sugar, rice and coffee, produced in the irrigated valleys of the littoral. Grains, vegetables, fruits, etc., are likewise raised.nbsp;There is considerable export of wool, especially that ofnbsp;Alpaca. Some forest products are exported from the Montana, as wild rubber, tagua, medicinal plants (quinine, copaiba, quillaia, etc.), and balata.

Progress

The lofty Andes, with imposing cordilleras and nudos, create considerable isolation between the centers of population in Peru. There are 2,810 miles of railroads, built usually under staggering difficulties. The Central Railway ofnbsp;Peru is the highest standard gauge road in the world, reaching an altitude of 15,805 feet at La Cima, and requires thenbsp;use of 65 tunnels and 67 bridges, with numerous switch-backs. The cities are connected by telegraphic communication, and there is wireless telephone service to the Unitednbsp;States and Europe. Good air transportation is maintainednbsp;north and south and to Iquitos and the Brazilian frontiernbsp;on the Amazon River.

The law of February, 1921, made elementary education compulsory and free. In 1930 there were 3,562 public elementary schools with 317,000 pupils and 6,200 teachers;nbsp;and 492 private schools with 28,402 pupils. In 1930 therenbsp;were 1,531 students attending the University at Lima.

Currency

The basis of Peruvian currency is the sol, worth normally 28 cents in United States money. Nickel coins are the solnbsp;and the half sol, 20, 10 and 5 centavos. There are 100 centavos in a sol. The copper coins are the 2 centavo and 1nbsp;centavo pieces.

Languages

Spanish is the language of the country. The highland Indians speak Quichua or Aymara, and those of the Montana have their own tribal languages.

Religions

Roman Catholicism is the State religion, and churches and convents are under government protection. Lima is the seatnbsp;of the archbishopric, and there are 13 bishoprics. Untilnbsp;1915 no act of public worship other than Catholic was allowed by law. Religious liberty is guaranteed by the Constitution. The Romanist hierarchy has shown considerablenbsp;intolerance toward any liberalization of the laws regardingnbsp;religious worship, as is evidenced by the decree of 1929,nbsp;which prohibited non-Catholic schools. Experienced observers predict that conditions between Church and Statenbsp;will become like those in Mexico if this intransigence of thenbsp;clergy is maintained.

In 1928 there were 525 separate religious orders, congregations and other corporations of the Roman Catholic church. These had 1,580 priests, 2,438 chapels, 52 conventsnbsp;and monasteries, and 60 other buildings used for religiousnbsp;purposes. Those ministering therein, besides the bishops,nbsp;include 112 district vicars, 679 regular clergy, 600 secularnbsp;clergy, 498 nuns and 692 others.

Missionary Occupation

The first known evangelical missionary to Peru was James Thomson, who arrived in that country in June 1822. Henbsp;soon secured the cooperation of many priests in educationalnbsp;work and in the distribution of the Scriptures, and as a result of the eagerness with which the New Testaments werenbsp;received in Peru and other South American republics, thenbsp;British and Foreign Bible Society issued its first completenbsp;Spanish Bible. Mr. Thomson left Peru in September, 1824.nbsp;intending to return but he never again reached that field-A great evangelical opportunity was allowed to pass away-

In 1825 a Presbyterian minister, sent to report on the missionary possibility of South America, reported that henbsp;found on the west coast “great ignorance, superstition andnbsp;. . . iniquity.” He believed that these lands did not providenbsp;a congenial soil in which to sow the Seed of God’s Word.

In 1833 a representative of the American Bible Society spent two months in Lima and found some who desired tonbsp;organize a Bible Society but he did not encourage them andnbsp;finally decided it was not worth while to continue his service in the field.

In 1877 Bishop William Taylor of the Methodist Episcopal Church travelled down the west coast and founded the William Taylor self-supporting Missions, but the principalnbsp;attention was given to school work and the missions werenbsp;withdrawn a little later.

The real beginning of the evangelization of Peru was the ministry of Francisco G. Penzotti, agent of the Americannbsp;Bible Society, who arrived in Callao in 1888. He sold Scriptures extensively and built up a large congregation. In 1890nbsp;he was imprisoned in southern Peru hut was set at liberty-Again in the same year he was imprisoned in Callao because of promoting the circulation of the Scriptures. At hisnbsp;trial the Roman Catholic priests took firm stand against him-The authorities attempted to induce him to escape from thenbsp;country and save them from embarrassment of the trial, butnbsp;he refused and the trial became a matter of interest throughout the civilized world. However, not until March, 1891,nbsp;was this hero of the gospel set free and the first great battlenbsp;of religious liberty in Peru won.

In 1891 the first resident missionary of the Methodist Episcopal Church began work in Callao. In 1893 a missionary of the English Brethren and two other Englishnbsp;missionaries arrived. At first the progress was slow, butnbsp;gradually both the interest of the people and the numbernbsp;of missionaries increased until now according to the 1933nbsp;edition of the Directory of Foreign Missions, four Britishnbsp;Societies and nine United States Societies are doing missionary work in Peru. A South American Society, called thenbsp;New Testament Missionary Union, is working in Peru andnbsp;there are two groups of native churches—The Alianza Evan-gelica del Peru (Evangelical Alliance of Peru) and thenbsp;Iglesia Evangelica Peruana (Peruvian Evangelical Church )-The object of the first named is to “promote fraternal relations and cooperation between the various evangelical groupsnbsp;in Peru.” Its activities have so far been related mainly tonbsp;the region of Lima and Callao. The Iglesia Evangelica

Peruana has as its object “the evangelization of Peru.” Concerning this work the Directory states : “The income is partly provided by subsidies from the Evangelical Union ofnbsp;South America ; London, England ; and by The Christiannbsp;and Missionary Alliance, New York. The balance is subscribed by the members of the churches.” This furthernbsp;word is also given : “To date the Iglesia Evangelica Peruananbsp;is organized only in Central Peru. There are over 80 organized congregations and groups in fellowship with thenbsp;Iglesia Evangelica Peruana. These hold church services regularly, mostly in private houses and they ordain the paidnbsp;ministers.”

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

The Christian and Missionary Alliance entered Peru in the year 1925 when a party of three was sent out with anbsp;view of opening a station among the Campa Indians ofnbsp;Eastern Peru. Besides language study, much hazardousnbsp;exploration was necessary before deciding on the best pointnbsp;for the establishment of a base station, and it was not untilnbsp;August, 1926, that the party actually started work amongnbsp;these uncivilized sun worshippers of the jungles.

During the year of preliminary exploration it became obvious that there were wide areas in the mountains untouched by any missionary society. The Inca Indians inhabiting thenbsp;Andes in Bolivia, Peru, and Ecuador are a people who arenbsp;still largely unevangelized and a challenge to the Church ofnbsp;God; and our Board of Managers quickly realized that thisnbsp;field also was one of opportunity and promise.

Further exploration resulted in work being opened in March, 1926, in Huanuco, a town of some eight thousandnbsp;inhabitants and of strategic importance as a base for worknbsp;in the whole region among the Quichua-speaking Indiansnbsp;of the northern section of Central Peru.

A missionary of an English Society for many years had carried on a very fruitful ministry among some of the Indians in the central mountain region and a very promisingnbsp;indigenous work was begun. Later this missionary arrangednbsp;that a considerable portion of the field, where this excellentnbsp;work was beginning should be turned over to The Christiannbsp;and Missionary Alliance to be a part of the Alliance fieldnbsp;in the Sierra. The spirit of loyalty to Christ and to thenbsp;gospel is strong among these native Indian Christians andnbsp;the work is growing both in spiritual power and in numbers.

It was not until January, 1930, that The Christian and Missionary Alliance opened work on the coast in the capital of the Republic. Not only does Lima and the surroundingnbsp;area, including a population of some three hundred and fiftynbsp;thousand souls, offer a most fruitful field of evangelization;nbsp;hut it had become increasingly necessary, as the work grewnbsp;in the jungle and in the mountains, to have representationnbsp;in the capital. All roads in Central Peru lead to Lima, andnbsp;that city must be the base for any society carrying on extensive work in the interior.

Thus the Alliance was working in all three sections of the country, namely, the Coast, the Sierra, and the Jungle.nbsp;The plan of the Society in undertaking work in Cahuapanasnbsp;had been to establish a base in the river town of Iquitos,nbsp;from which strategic point the work among various tribesnbsp;of Indians in the jungles could be directed and pushed forward. However, through an arrangement of mission comitynbsp;the Inland South America Missionary Union entered Iquitosnbsp;and within a few years it seemed to the two Missions that itnbsp;was advisable for the station at Cahuapanas and the worknbsp;among the Campa Indians to be transferred to the Inlandnbsp;South America Missionary Union. This was done in 1934.nbsp;One of the missionary couples formerly working among thenbsp;Campas was then on furlough and, with the approval of thenbsp;Christian and Missionary Alliance Board, they became missionaries of the other Society and returned to their field ofnbsp;labor in the jungle.

Huanuco. Huanuco, a town of about eight thousand souls and situated at six thousand feet elevation, isnbsp;a strong Catholic center. It is the See of a bishop, with anbsp;Franciscan monastery, a convent, a seminary, and a verynbsp;large number of priests. The town is not essentially an Indian center, but it is the capital of the Department and anbsp;strategic center whose occupation is necessary for the successful evangelization of the Indian territory around it andnbsp;beyond. Huanuco was opened in 1926 but the work did notnbsp;extend into the provinces until 1929. The church at thisnbsp;place is entirely self-supporting, and what is still more encouraging, self-propagating. The members not only holdnbsp;evangelistic meetings in other sections of the town, but youngnbsp;men of the congregation make long trips from time to timenbsp;into the Indian territory beyond, carrying the message ofnbsp;salvation.

There is a day school at Huanuco with a large enrollment which is largely self-supporting. This not only gives opportunities for work among the children but has been the meansnbsp;of entrance into many of the best homes and enlisted thenbsp;sympathy of the town.

The results in Huanuco were not obtained without much uphill work and sacrificial service. Opposition from allnbsp;quarters had to be met and overcome, and the fanaticism ofnbsp;the town faced and vanquished, but today it is a most fruitful field and a worthy example of spontaneous expansionnbsp;under divine leadership.

The work among the Indian population of the mountains is most encouraging. Though scattered over the mountainsnbsp;at altitudes varying from six to fifteen thousand feet, livingnbsp;under the most primitive conditions, and in the gross darkness of ignorance, vice, superstition, and fanaticism, thesenbsp;Indians are responding in a most remarkable way to thenbsp;Gospel of grace and liberty. A movement of the Spirit isnbsp;taking place among this long-neglected people, and doors ofnbsp;opportunity are opening faster than the mission can enter.

Fanaticism is widespread in Peru and persecution is almost invariably the lot of the converts. On one occasion the fanatics persuaded the local authorities to visit withnbsp;them a certain small community of Christians. As a result,nbsp;their humble homes were burned, likewise the Gospel literature found in their possession, and they themselves beatennbsp;mercilessly. One young Indian with his back bleeding askednbsp;why he had been so treated and being informed that it wasnbsp;because he had deserted the religion of his father, replied,nbsp;“You may heat me to death, but I will not deny the Lordnbsp;Jesus Christ.”

Due to the rugged nature of the region, the lack of travelling facilities, and the limited number of workers, it is difficult to effectually follow up the results obtained among the Indians. Each group of converts receives a visit from anbsp;native evangelist only at long intervals, and it is not morenbsp;than once, or possibly twice a year that a missionary is ablenbsp;to visit these outposts of the Gospel. Though lacking anbsp;sufficient number of trained native workers to satisfactorilynbsp;care for the large partially evangelized areas, some degreenbsp;of success by way of consolidation is being realized throughnbsp;the holding of Bible Conventions. These conventions arenbsp;held in different centers every few months, the believersnbsp;coming long distances—sometimes three or four days’ journey—to attend. In connection with these gatherings nonbsp;expenses whatever are incurred by the mission beyond the

actual travelling expenses of the missionaries and native workers who may attend.

Still another interesting feature of the work is the system that is developing for the training of native workers. Atnbsp;the close of each Bible convention a missionary and nativenbsp;worker give instruction to converts who are able to remainnbsp;for one, two or three weeks as occasion offers. Classes arenbsp;held in the homes of some local convert while the studentsnbsp;find hospitality in other Christian homes in the community.nbsp;These courses are made suitable to the needs of the humblenbsp;brethren who are, without remuneration, giving their timenbsp;to widespread evangelism, and it is encouraging to see thenbsp;numbers of young Indians who take advantage of such opportunities.

For the training of young men of some educational advantages, but who are unable to attend a regular Bible School, a two-months’ course of study is offered every year at somenbsp;suitable center. The courses are carefully planned and prepared by the missionaries who conduct the classes ; and special effort is made to develop the spirituality of the student,nbsp;not only giving him a greater knowledge of the Word butnbsp;leading him into deeper spiritual experiences with his Lord.nbsp;Results have been most encouraging, this type of trainingnbsp;having become an important factor in the evangelization ofnbsp;the country.

Lima. Lima, the capital of Peru, is probably the most fanatically Catholic city on the west coast of South America. It has a population of nearly three hundred thousand, and in the immediate vicinity there are several smallernbsp;towns of importance. Callao, whose harbor is one of thenbsp;finest on the Pacific coast, is the chief ocean port of Perunbsp;and the principal way of approach to Lima, eight miles inland. The Alliance Mission has a hall at Lima, seating aboutnbsp;one hundred persons. It is simple but attractive and verynbsp;strategically located. It is situated on a main thoroughfarenbsp;of heavy traffic only five blocks away from the famous Plazanbsp;de Armas, the heart of the city, where are found the Presidential Palace, the palace of the Archbishop, and the historical cathedral of Pizarro where lie the bones of this cruelnbsp;•conqueror.

At every service there are some who hear the Gospel for the first time, and many among the stream of pedestriansnbsp;who continually pass the door receive tracts. The nucleusnbsp;¦of believers pays its miscellaneous expenses and a small percentage of the rent which, because of the central locationnbsp;of the hall, is rather high. It is hoped, however, that theynbsp;will gradually become able to assume the responsibility ofnbsp;their entire expenses.

The Bible School is located at Lima and the enrollment of students includes some from other evangelical Missions ifnbsp;Peru.

The province of Canta lies directly north of and adjacen* to Lima. One of the native workers, a graduate from thenbsp;Lima Bible School has proved himself an indefatigable andnbsp;spiritual worker. He visited over fifty towns and villagesnbsp;and the seed was sown faithfully throughout the province.nbsp;The work is new and thus far has had very little attentionnbsp;from the missionaries, nevertheless a number of convertsnbsp;have been baptized. The population of this province isnbsp;about 30,000.

The Lima-Ica area can be worked, together with Canta. from Lima itself and consists of the coastal area of thenbsp;southern half of the Department of Lima and the wholenbsp;Department of Ica. There are several flourishing towns onnbsp;or near the coast and it should be a fruitful field.

Huacho. The Huacho area lies north of Lima and extends from the western base of the Andes to the Pa'nbsp;cific Coast. Huacho, a minor port 70 miles north of Callao,nbsp;is the natural outlet for the cotton and sugar grown in thenbsp;fertile Huaura Valley. A missionary couple is stationed innbsp;the town of Huacho where there is a small group of believers. There are several other groups in this area, which,nbsp;though new, are becoming centers of propaganda from whichnbsp;we hope the Gospel will radiate into the whole region. Anbsp;native worker is also stationed in this area, which has nnbsp;population of about 120,000.

The Growing Church

Few mission fields have a more hopeful outlook for the development of truly indigenous and spiritual churches thannbsp;the Alliance field in Peru, but with the small force of missionaries a larger number of native workers was needednbsp;capable of holding Bible Conferences and Short Term Biblenbsp;Schools among the groups of believers in the various sections of the field. To this end the work of the Bible Schoolnbsp;is proving both necessary and productive, but much remainsnbsp;to be accomplished and we commend the effective ministriesnbsp;of the missionaries and the native church in Peru to thenbsp;prayer fellowship of God’s people that the ministry of evangelism, pastoral work, Bible teaching and the printed pagenbsp;may be continually and increasingly blessed of God.

CHILE

The Republic of Chile lies on the west coast of South America, occupying the narrow strip of land from the crestnbsp;¦of the Andes to the South Pacific. It extends from aboutnbsp;20° to 55° below the equator. Chile is bounded on thenbsp;north by Peru and Bolivia ; on the east by Argentine, fromnbsp;which it is separated by the massive Andes. The Pacificnbsp;Ocean lies to the west and in the south it stretches to thenbsp;Antarctic Ocean.

Area and Population

Seventh in size among the republics of South America, Chile ranks fifth in population and third in per capita wealth,nbsp;and is, therefore, one of the most energetic and prosperousnbsp;nations in Latin America. It extends for an extreme lengthnbsp;of 2,620 miles from north to south with a coast line ofnbsp;2.900 miles, and has an average width of 100 miles northnbsp;of the 40th parallel, and even narrower toward the south.nbsp;At no point is the eastern boundary along the crest of thenbsp;Andes, and bordering on Bolivia and Argentina, more thannbsp;250 miles from tidewater. Its area of 286,322 square milesnbsp;is slightly greater than that of the eight south Atlanticnbsp;states of the United States of America.

The census of November 27, 1930, showed a population of 4,287,445, an increase of 555,872 in ten years. The majority are mestizos (mixed) of superior stock. The Spaniards who effected the conquest and settlement of Chilenbsp;came largely from the more vigorous and energetic elementsnbsp;of northern Spain, and the Araucanian Indians with whomnbsp;they mingled were inferior to none on the South Americannbsp;continent. The upper class of Chile is of Spanish descent,nbsp;with intrusions of British, Irish, German and other bloods.nbsp;The middle class is likewise largely European in origin.nbsp;Estimates of full-blooded Indians vary from 30,(XX) tonbsp;100,000 for the Araucanians, and an indeterminate numbernbsp;(not large) of nomadic Fuegans in the far south.

Climate

Upper Chile is a desert, and more arid than the coast of Peru. In some regions there is no record of rainfall fornbsp;more than 200 years. Middle Chile enjoys a “Mediterraneanquot; climate—cool, short winters with frequent rains,nbsp;and long, hot, sunny summers. Lower Chile has abundantnbsp;rainfall, is cloudy, cold and stormy, and is known to sailorsnbsp;as the “Roaring Forties.” The summer temperature therenbsp;averages 51° F. and winter, 35°.

Government

Due to the traditions of creole aristocracy the Chilean Constitution of 1833 provided for a highly centralized formnbsp;¦of republican government ; but through the years this Constitution has been gradually liberalized. It was not replaced,nbsp;however, until 1925, when the new Constitution, drafted bynbsp;President Arturo Alessandri, was adopted by popular refer-«nduni on August 30th of that year. The president isnbsp;elected for a six-year term by direct vote of the electorate,nbsp;and appoints the nine Cabinet members. All legislation isnbsp;initiated by the Chamber of Deputies (143 in number);nbsp;and the function of the Senate (45 members) is revisionary.nbsp;The Deputies are elected for a term of four years, the Senators for one of eight years.

History-

After the initial exploration of Chile by Diego Almagro in 1535, colonization was undertaken the next year by Pedronbsp;de Valdivia. The Spaniards found the Araucanian Indiansnbsp;of middle Chile to be a highly developed, homogenious people that offered fierce resistance to the advance of the whitenbsp;men. Spanish aggression was bitterly opposed, and Spainnbsp;spent more men and money in the conquest of Chile thannbsp;in any other part of the New World. After the middle ofnbsp;the 19th century the Indians were subjugated by Chileannbsp;arms and driven beyond the Bio-Bio River. As has beennbsp;noted, the mixed element of Chilean population is formednbsp;of vigorous stocks.

Independence was secured through efforts of leaders like Bernardo O’Higgins, Admiral Cochrane and others; Afternbsp;the Indian Wars, the attention of the Chileans was turnednbsp;to agricultural development and the nitrate trade. Therenbsp;was a considerable immigration of Europeans, especiallynbsp;British and German.

After her victory over Peru and Bolivia in the Nitrate War (1879-1883), Chile prospered through her greatly expanded mineral production. In the latter half of the lastnbsp;century there prevailed a period of strained relations withnbsp;the United States on account of the “Baltimore Incident,”nbsp;the conduct of Minister Egan, the seizure of the contrabandnbsp;vessel “Itata” in Chilean waters, and the like; but fortunately relations improved after the turn of the century. Bynbsp;arbitration of King Edward VII, based on the Holdich Report, the boundary with Argentina was settled in 1902.nbsp;The boundary with Peru was adjusted in 1929.

Physical Features

Chile is a prosperous and progressive country despite many handicaps, as (1) 70 per cent of its terrain is mountainous, (2) 40 per cent is parched desert, (3) 30 per centnbsp;is too cloudy and cold for agriculture and human comfort,nbsp;and (4) only 10 per cent, largely in middle Chile, fostersnbsp;a marked agricultural development. There are three physiographic regions.

( 1 ) The arid north, or upper Chile, north of the 30th parallel. The coastal escarpment rises al)ruptly out of thenbsp;sea, to a height of 3,000 feet in some places, and as a resultnbsp;there are no good harbors. Fifty to seventy miles inlandnbsp;lie the broad nitrate pampas, desolate except where humannbsp;industry extracts wealth from the desert. To the east risenbsp;the lofty Andes. Only one river reaches the ocean, in contrast to the 52 of the Peruvian littoral. Until it becamenbsp;commercially profitable to extract nitrate from the atmosphere, two provinces of upper Chile, Tarapaca and Anta-fogasta, furnished 95 per cent of the world’s supply ofnbsp;sodium nitrate.

• (2) Middle Chile, from 30 to 42 degrees, south latitude.nbsp;Here again the mountains come down to the sea, but therenbsp;are several good harbors, as at Valpariaso and Puerto Montt.nbsp;Inland lies the Central Valley, where rainfall is augmentednbsp;by irrigation, the arable land is abundant and very productive. Four-fifths of Chile’s inhabitants live in Middle Chile.nbsp;Eastward rise the towering Andes, with majestic peaks likenbsp;Aconcagua (23,080 feet the highest in the Americas) on thenbsp;border of Argentina, Corcoputi (22, 162 feet) and El Muertonbsp;(21,227 feet). The Uspallata Pass, utilized by the Trans-andean Railway to Buenos Aires, lies at an altitude ofnbsp;12,780 feet above sea level. Near the railroad and on thenbsp;frontier stands the “Christ of the Andes,” to commemoratenbsp;the settlement of boundary with Argentina. The statue isnbsp;made of Chilean and Argentine cannon, molten together, andnbsp;faces northward.

• (3) Lower or South Chile, from 42° to bleak Tierra delnbsp;Fuego. The region is rugged, heavily wooded, with manynbsp;rapid rivers and some lakes, and numerous islands offshore.

Population decreases toward the south, and sheep raising is the principal industry.

Resources

The principal wealth of Chile lies in its minerals. Of these, nitrates from upper Chile have predominated untilnbsp;recently. Chile had a practical monopoly on the industrynbsp;until after the World War. More than 100 million tonsnbsp;were exported in the century 1830-1930. The industry hasnbsp;been demoralized by competition of synthetic nitrogen fertilizers developed largely in the United States and Germany.nbsp;Iodine is produced as a by-product of the nitrate industry,nbsp;and Chile furnishes 90 per cent of the world’s supply.

Chile ranks second in world production of copper, and is a large exporter of iron from the provinces of Aracamanbsp;and Coquimbo. The coal reserves (mostly inferior grades)nbsp;are estimated at 2 billion tons.

Agricultural exports include fruits (fresh, dried and canned), wine and raisins. Chile is quite self-sufficient withnbsp;grains and vegetables, and has large quantities of live stocknbsp;(cattle, horses, hogs and sheep). There is considerable export of wool.

Progress

All Chile faces the sea, and Chilenos are world-famous sailors. Most of its transportation is sea-borne. There are,nbsp;however, 6,752 miles of railroads, the longest line being thenbsp;Longitudinal (2,862 miles, with spurs, 3,133 miles). Therenbsp;are 24,400 miles of motor roads, of which 5,000 are improved. Modern airports serve the airways. Santiago andnbsp;Valparaiso are linked by wireless telephone with the largernbsp;cities of the United States and Europe ; and there is cable,nbsp;telegraph and telephone service. There are three commercialnbsp;radio stations.

Education is free and supported by the state, and since 1920 has been compulsory. A fundamental reform of thenbsp;educational system is in progress and plans for several hundred new, modern schools have been made at a cost of morenbsp;than $7,000,000. A State University at Santiago has annbsp;enrollment of about 4,000 students. The Roman Catholicsnbsp;also have a University in the same city with an enrollmentnbsp;of about one-fourth as many. There is a University at Concepcion and one being established at Valpariso.

Currency

The unit of Chilean currency is the peso, which for many years was worth about twelve cents in United States money.nbsp;In 1935 the gold peso was stabilized at a par value of 5.19nbsp;cents United States. However, pesos can often be boughtnbsp;in commercial transactions for a little over four cents.

Languages and Tribes

The official language of Chile is Spanish. This is spoken by practically all the inhabitants except the aborigines ofnbsp;the south. The Indians are principally Araucanian. Manynbsp;of these live on reservations established by the government.nbsp;German is spoken by a considerable number of people ofnbsp;German descent.

Religion

Until the new Constitution of 1925, Roman Catholicism was the state religion and it is still the dominant one, butnbsp;there is now complete freedom of worship. The Mapuchenbsp;Indian lives in dread of the invisible powers though hisnbsp;ideas of religion are few and vague. The Mapuche hasnbsp;some idea of a supreme being, who created man and animals,nbsp;earth and water, but is inaccessible to the ordinary mortal.nbsp;The spirit of evil and misfortune is considered responsiblenbsp;for physical calamity and personal disasters. The MapucheSnbsp;have no place of worship and no idols, and their religiousnbsp;rites are mainly connected with witchcraft. The Mapuchenbsp;“medicine woman,” called “machi,” is a power among hetnbsp;people since she fills the various offices of prophet, priestnbsp;and physician.

Missionary Occupation

Three British Societies and seven U. S. A. Societies are working in Chile, the former being the British andnbsp;Eoreign Bible Society, the Salvation Army, and the Southnbsp;America Missionary Society. The oldest missions are thenbsp;Methodist and the Presbyterian, who until quite recentlynbsp;had limited their activities to the north and central portionsnbsp;of the country. Their work extends from the nitrate fieldsnbsp;in the north to Santiago, the capital city, and as far southnbsp;as Concepcion. The Methodists have some churches established in the section where the Alliance is working. Thenbsp;Southern Baptist Mission, in addition to their work alongnbsp;evangelistic lines, have a splendid school in Temuco. Othernbsp;American Societies, besides those named above and Thenbsp;Christian and Missionary Alliance, are the Y. M. C. A-,nbsp;the Y. W. C. A. and the Seventh-Day Adventists. • Somenbsp;years ago a Pentecostal church was established under thenbsp;name of the Methodist Pentecostal church. In Santiagonbsp;they have the largest of any evangelical church in the country. Their churches are completely self-supporting.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

The eighth annual report of the Christian and Missionary Alliance work, presented in April, 1897, records the namenbsp;of one missionary couple in Chile. A year later another mannbsp;had entered the field and as the work grew, stations werenbsp;established and churches planted.

Victoria. In this first station of the Alliance in Chilcr opened in 1897, one of the missionaries, havingnbsp;the German language, was able to win many of his ownnbsp;people to the Lord and to strengthen the faith of some believers whom he met in his travels. After some time henbsp;secured materials and began printing, on a small scale, hisnbsp;first work being to publish regularly a periodical called Th^nbsp;Alliance.

In 1899, after sufficiently mastering the Spanish languagCr two evangelistic groups were formed, one of which had aSnbsp;its objective the opening of gospel work in Valdivia andnbsp;surrounding country ; the other in the large island of Chiloe-There is today in Victoria an organized church under nativenbsp;church government having a membership of 50.

Valdivia. With the work well established in Victoria, it was considered opportune to open work definitely in Valdivia and the three missionaries transferrednbsp;their activities to that city. Many months passed beforenbsp;anyone dared to embrace the gospel, but finally there waSnbsp;a break and souls were won to the Lord and the worknbsp;definitely opened in Valdivia. It was here that the first national pastor was accepted and began his activities as assistantnbsp;to the missionary. At the end of the year 1900 the firstnbsp;Alliance chapel in Chile was dedicated to the service of the'nbsp;Lord, which caused a fresh outbreak of opposition. Everynbsp;window in the building was broken and a wire screen had tnnbsp;be placed at the windows to keep the stones from entering thenbsp;building. However, the continued faithful ministries of missionaries and Chilean workers in Valdivia bore fruit. Anbsp;church was established and now the work is entirely under

native church government. The local church has a memberin ship of 108.

15 Temuco. Work was begun in the city of Temuco in 1898 by a German missionary who sowed the seednbsp;faithfully and God gave the increase. In 1907 a chapel wasnbsp;erected which, though burned in 1908, was speedily rebuilt.nbsp;The work in this city has continued to grow steadily andnbsp;there is today a strong self-supporting church which standsnbsp;as a lighthouse in the darkness. In 1933 it was necessary tonbsp;;5 enlarge the chapel to accommodate the many hungry soulsnbsp;ànbsp;nbsp;who came to hear the gospel message. The membership of

11 the church is 130. Temuco is the headquarters of the iC mission.

y In Temuco is located the Bible histitute, which was begun in 1923, and which has already prepared a number of thenbsp;15 present national workers and still continues in this importantnbsp;I* branch of the work. A chapel has been opened in connectionnbsp;1' with the Bible Institute and the Lord has blessed in the sal-vation of a number of souls and the organization of a secondnbsp;¦ê church, which has fifty members, thus making two Alliancenbsp;churches in Temuco.

.1 ^ncud. This is the center of the work on the Island of iCnbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Chiloe, which is an exceptionally hard field. For

iC many years faithful work has been carried on but with few ¦p permanent results. The Roman Church resists bitterly every

• Y nbsp;nbsp;attempt to reach the people with the gospel, this being, asnbsp;someone has called it, their last citadel in Chile. The peoplenbsp;are sunk in sin and superstition. A missionary couple and anbsp;Bible Institute graduate have been stationed at Ancud andnbsp;the work there has been blessed so that the chapel was en-larged. The activities of the missionaries extend to manynbsp;Sections of this large island and with their motor launch theynbsp;are able to reach many points which before were inaccessible.nbsp;Evangelistic and colportage trips have been made into a largenbsp;unevangelized region south of Chiloe and hundreds of Biblesnbsp;and Testaments have been distributed.

'¦i T'raiguen-Lefueluan. As a result of a deputational trip ¦f*nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;made by a delegate from the Board

3' m 1925, work was opened toward the end of the year among the Mapuche Indians, the first station being at Pua, south ofnbsp;P Victoria. This work has flourished and today there is annbsp;active church in that place with one of their own Mapuchenbsp;I’oys, trained in the Bible Institute, in charge of it. In 1929nbsp;Cr the missionary felt led to open up a new center and afternbsp;j5 'Considerable surveying of the district a station was openednbsp;iJ about seven kilometers from the city of Traiguen. Therenbsp;e- are now a number of outstations from Traiguen. Duringnbsp;jC 1934 it was deemed advisable for the missionary to reside innbsp;Traiguen rather than to live among the Indians, which wasnbsp;dangerous and unsatisfactory. From this center the mis-it sionary is able to reach out to many points and also enter new

• Y nbsp;nbsp;places.

;lt;1 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Publication Work

-e

From the beginning of the work in Chile the printing press •k played an important part in the evangelization of thenbsp;jx people. The plant is not modern, all type being set up bynbsp;band. A new press has been purchased recently to replacenbsp;gt the old foot-pedal press. However, as many as 1,500,000nbsp;Pages of gospel literature have been printed in a year.

¦ƒ to

A

This includes two monthly papers, one in German and one in Spanish. The latter, a sixteen-page paper called Saludnbsp;y yida (Health and Life) has had a blessed ministrynbsp;throughout Chile and in other Spanish-speaking countries.nbsp;The monthly circulation is about 2,000 copies. Gospel tractsnbsp;and Spanish hymnals are also printed.

The Indigenous Church

Following the visit of the Board’s deputation to Chile in 1925 the cause of self-support took a decided step forward,nbsp;and since then the churches have taken notable strides in thisnbsp;direction. Since January, 1928, much of the work in Chilenbsp;has been under the direction of the National Church. Threenbsp;national pastors and two laymen from the Administrativenbsp;Committee, which is in charge of all the Chilean work. Twonbsp;missionaries also are on the Committee in an advisory capacity. Gradually the subsidy from the Alliance treasury innbsp;New York has been reduced and in the same proportion thenbsp;financial responsibility has been assumed by the nativenbsp;church. The church has responded nobly and before thenbsp;financial crisis there was every prospect that the goal of complete self-support would be reached speedily. The economicnbsp;pressure of recent years has somewhat retarded the progressnbsp;but the work goes forward under the blessing of the Lord.

There are over twenty organized churches in the Alliance in Chile and more than seventy preaching points, all of whichnbsp;are manned by Chilean pastors. The principal organizednbsp;churches are located in the following places :

In addition to the above churches and groups, there are four organized churches under mission government as follows : At Ancud in the Island work is a church having 67nbsp;members ; the German work has a membership of 137 ; thenbsp;Indian work, 26 ; and the church in connection with the Biblenbsp;Institute has a membership of 54. Pray that as these arenbsp;transferred to the Chilean church government, there may benbsp;an increase of blessing and of membership through a definitenbsp;soul-winning ministry carried on by the present believers.

In the carrying out of the Board policy for the reduction of the subsidy and the transfer of the work to the nativenbsp;church, the subsidy to the church will soon cease and thenbsp;missionaries will be transferred to other spheres of ministry.nbsp;Thus, there will be placed upon our brethren in the Chileannbsp;churches of the Alliance a heavy responsibility, in which wenbsp;should continue to share through prayer fellowship. It isnbsp;planned to have an experienced missionary from a near-bynbsp;field visit the churches annually during the next few years innbsp;order to aid and encourage them in their full gospel ministries through the holding of special services and Bible conferences as may be arranged by the churches. Only throughnbsp;a Spirit-filled ministry and membership can the work go forward to the fulfillment of God’s purpose. Let us pray for anbsp;heaven-sent revival to be manifest throughout the churchesnbsp;in Chile.

ARGENTINA

Almost 7,CXX) miles southward from New York lies the Argentine, considered by many the most progressive of thenbsp;eighteen Latin American republics. Argentina is bounded onnbsp;the north by Bolivia and Paraguay ; on the east by Paraguay,nbsp;Brazil, Uruguay and the Atlantic Ocean ; to the south Tierranbsp;del Fuego touches the Antarctic Ocean ; and on the west liesnbsp;Chile. By regular steamers it is reached in sixteen to eighteennbsp;days, but airplane service carries mail and passengers in sixnbsp;days from New York. Argentina lies almost wholly in thenbsp;Temperate Zone, a significant factor in the development ofnbsp;an aggressive people. On the banks of the Rio de la Platanbsp;has arisen one of the most beautiful and enterprising citiesnbsp;of the world, Buenos Aires, the New York of the Southernnbsp;Hemisphere. Events of recent years reaffirm the importancenbsp;of this country in the future of South America and all Pannbsp;American affairs.

Area and Population

Argentina is the largest of the Spanish-speaking countries of South America, the language of the largest republic,nbsp;Brazil, being Portuguese. Its area of 1,153,418 square milesnbsp;is approximately the size of the United States east of thenbsp;Mississippi and Texas, or more than five times the size ofnbsp;France. It extends for a distance of 2,300 miles from Bolivianbsp;to Cape Horn.

The Argentinians believe their land to be capable of supporting one hundred million people, though the present population according to the official estimate of December 31, 1933, is only 12,028,646. The Indian population is estimatednbsp;to be between 20,000 and 30,000, most of these living onnbsp;reservations or in the far south. Statisticians believe thatnbsp;the population of Argentina will double in twenty-five yearsnbsp;because of its low death rate and high birth rate. Argentinanbsp;is more a land of immigrants than is the United States, one-fourth of her people being of foreign birth. The largestnbsp;number come from Italy. The enormous influx from European lands is one of the major factors in Argentine history.nbsp;It helps to account for the fact that the nation is so nearlynbsp;white. The older Indian and Negro elements have been entirely submerged. It has made for political steadiness, sincenbsp;the new settler comes out primarily to acquire property andnbsp;improve his material situation, and therefore throws his influence on the side of public order. It has contributed to thenbsp;rapid economic success of the republic, by increasing thenbsp;man power of the nation and by introducing habits of thriftnbsp;and industry.

Climate

The position and climate of the Argentine in the Southern Hemisphere are similar to those of the United States in thenbsp;Northern. It extends over 2,000 miles from north to south,nbsp;from the semi-tropical area of the north, whose products arenbsp;similar to those of our own Gulf States, to the bleak semi-arid sheep lands of Patagonia, which may be compared to ournbsp;Montana. One has said, “It is bounded on the north bynbsp;groves of palms and on the south by eternal snows.” Between these extremes lie the vast, open grassy pampas, without trees except those planted by man, the heart of the Argentine, reaching nearly 1,000 miles from the Atlantic to thenbsp;foothills of the Andes. It corresponds to our western prairies, with a climate healthful for man and beast. Because ofnbsp;the reversed position on the map the seasons are found opposite from ours on the calendar. Although snow rarelynbsp;falls except in the south, the rainy winters in houses with nonbsp;heating plants are trying to North Americans.

Government

The Constitution of the Argentine is closely modeled on that of the United States. It vests the executive power in anbsp;president, elected for a term of six years, and not eligiblenbsp;for two successive terms. The national congress is composednbsp;of a Senate, whose members are elected for nine years ; andnbsp;a Chamber of Deputies, elected for four years by universalnbsp;male suffrage. The fourteen provinces enjoy a large measure of self-government.

History

From the beginning, the story of the Argentine has been unusually dramatic. In colonization, republican government,nbsp;and Protestant missions the drama proceeds in the samenbsp;manner : superb effort, tragedy, delay, renewed efforts,nbsp;growth, success.

In 1516, one hundred and four years before the Pilgrims arrived in Massachusetts, the first party of Europeans landednbsp;on the shores of the Rio de la Plata, seeking a passage to thenbsp;Indies. Fierce Indians attacked the party killing many, including Diaz de Solis, the leader. The rest were so discouraged that they returned to Spain. A later attempt to settlenbsp;also met dire results. The third, in 1580, became a permanent colony. Colonization continued until Buenos Aires wasnbsp;a well-established port with a number of trading posts in thenbsp;interior. The cattle ranches flourished prodigiously attracting more immigrants. From 1810 to 1816 that Georgenbsp;Washington of the South, Jose San Martin, led the growingnbsp;colonies through their war of independence. Years of turmoil and chaos followed until 1853 when the present Constitution was framed. The development since that time hasnbsp;been one of the marvels of Western history. Far-seeingnbsp;statesmen have so planned the various departments that todaynbsp;they make for the high civilization of the country.

The events of the past few years, like those of other nations, show currents of unusual unrest. As 1934 opened the Government was engaged in crushing a formidable revolt ofnbsp;Radicals. One hundred thousand alleged Communists werenbsp;arrested in 1933. At least eight Fascist organizations arenbsp;reported active.

A moderate improvement in economic* conditions during 1934 offered some hope of relaxation of political tension.nbsp;Exports increased in volume and value. Legislation hasnbsp;been enacted to help unemployment relief through publicnbsp;works and land colonization ; farm relief measures guaranteenbsp;minimum prices to grain and dairy products producers.

Physical Features

There is but one river of great importance, the Parana, which with its tributaries drains a larger area than the Mississippi. Extending north from Buenos Aires through Paraguay it forms the highway for transportation of productsnbsp;for all that section. It is so large that ocean-going vesselsnbsp;can ascend it 400 miles to Rosario, the second city in importance. The Rio de la Plata, not a river as the earlynbsp;explorers believed, is simply the estuary of the Parana, butnbsp;Buenos Aires situated on it is 120 miles from the Atlantic.

On the boundary between Argentina and Brazil are the Iguazu Falls, which are higher, and in the rainy season carrynbsp;a greater volume of water, than any other falls in the world.

The Gran Chaco is the section near the boundary of Paraguay, a rolling country of forests interspersed with grass lands. From here come the pine and quebracho logs andnbsp;mate.

Forming the boundary between Chile and Argentina are the snow-capped Andes, rising here to their greatest heights.nbsp;High on the ridge stands the famous statue of “The Christ

of the Andes,” as a symbol of lasting peace between the two nations. As neither would concede the honor of having thenbsp;statue face the other’s country, the face and raised hand ofnbsp;the Saviour are turned to the north, perhaps a symbol thatnbsp;He is expecting His blessing to reach these lands from Hisnbsp;people of North America.

Resources

The wealth of the Argentine is chiefly agricultural : cattle, wheat, corn, linseed, sugar, wine, cotton, quebracho wool.nbsp;Meat packing is the principal industry. Corn is raised innbsp;greater quantities than in our own land, and only onenbsp;nation competes with the Argentine in the raising of flax.nbsp;Sheep are raised in the south ; in other parts swine and goatsnbsp;are taking their place. There has been little exploitation ofnbsp;the mineral wealth except in petroleum fields.

Progress

In 1933 there were 25,000 miles of railroads, the best network in South America. A new branch was completed in 1934 to the scenic lake region of the south. In thirty-sixnbsp;hours modern trains make the trip of 900 miles from Buenosnbsp;Aires to Valparaiso, Chile, over the lofty Andes and throughnbsp;its two-mile tunnel. Airplanes are in regular service. Onenbsp;of the great newspapers. La Nacion, receives more wordsnbsp;daily by cable than any other newspaper in the world. Bynbsp;law free secular education is compulsory between the ages ofnbsp;6 and 14. Schools patterned after those of the United Statesnbsp;have been established for half a century in the larger cities,nbsp;yet illiteracy is still high in outlying sections. There are fivenbsp;national universities: the two largest being the Universitynbsp;of Cordoba, founded in 1613, numbering 3,000 students; andnbsp;that of Buenos Aires with 11,000. In 1932 the automobilenbsp;registration was 331,000 and the total highway mileage,nbsp;131,000. In 1934 the government approved of the expenditure of 229,000,000 pesos for new roads and 15,000,000 fornbsp;repairs.

Currency

The money current in Argentina is the paper peso, with coins for small change. The gold peso is worth a little lessnbsp;than the American dollar, while the paper peso at its best isnbsp;worth less than fifty cents. In July, 1934, it was down tonbsp;thirty-one cents.

Languages

The generally spoken language is Spanish. Here it is beginning to show slight changes due to the influence of the large Italian population. Colonies of considerable size existnbsp;which still speak the language of their European parentage.nbsp;Many English-speaking people live in Argentina.

Religion

Although there is no State religion it is required that the President be a Roman Catholic. This church is in part supported by the government and to it the vast majority nominally adhere. All creeds are tolerated and freedom of worship is guaranteed. Actually there are many atheists. Thenbsp;Thirty-Second Eucharistic Congress held in Buenos Aires innbsp;1934 brought thousands of visitors from all over the worldnbsp;and the bonds of the church were strengthened, making thenbsp;work of evangelical missions more difficult. Numerous anticlerical demonstrations occurred during the celebrations.

Missionary Occupation

The forerunner of evangelical missions was James Thomson, a Scotchman. Arriving in 1818, he founded hundreds of schools in which the Bible was the book used to learn tonbsp;read. Many Bibles were distributed and occasional sermonsnbsp;preached. The authorities gave hearty support. After threenbsp;years he felt he should answer the demands of Chile. Henbsp;left behind well-organized schools which should have becomenbsp;ever-widening circles of blessing, but the Church did not seenbsp;its opportunity and workers were not sent out. “Had prepared, consecrated men and women been sent out in sufficientnbsp;numbers to carry on the work begun by Thomson, the religious history of the region, and all of South America, during the past century would have been a very different one.

The Methodists, now the largest in numbers, started in 1836. As early as 1877 the Stundists of Russia organizednbsp;meetings in their farming communities, later to become padnbsp;of the vigorous work of the Southern Baptists. The Seventhnbsp;Day Adventists have thrown a strong force into the field—nbsp;76 in 1924—and stand next to the Baptists in results.

In 1928 Principal mission stations ............... 7S

Missions and societies ................... 42

Foreign workers (not including wives) .. 4S4

National workers (not including wives) .. 326

The Protestant community of probably 100,000 includes all Protestant foreigners.

The work of most of these societies is still confined largely to Buenos Aires and the other four large cities. The Christian and Missionary Alliance is not working in the fournbsp;largest cities. No other Society is working in the placesnbsp;where The Christian and Missionary Alliance has churches.nbsp;There still remain sections where no Protestant missionarynbsp;has yet entered and where very little is known even of thenbsp;Roman Catholic religion.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

In 1897 the Alliance began work in Argentine in a section entirely unoccupied by any other Society. Some missionariesnbsp;were transferred from Brazil, and in 1903 the first Christiannbsp;and Missionary Alliance church was erected in La Plata.nbsp;This station was later transferred to the Baptist Society.

In the fall of 1922 an aggressive evangelistic campaign was begun. Tent meetings, open air services and theaternbsp;meetings were held by one of the missionaries who was setnbsp;apart as mission evangelist. Through the efforts of thesenbsp;engaged in this work many new centers were entered, first innbsp;the holding of tent meetings and then as converts were wonnbsp;churches were established. The Alliance is responsible tonbsp;give the gospel to more than 500,000 people in the Argentine.nbsp;Azul. This modern and beautiful city of about 58,000 inhabitants was opened by an Alliance pioneer in 1897.nbsp;In spite of -many difficulties the work has gone forwardnbsp;steadily. The church of sixty-six members is fully self;nbsp;governing and self-supporting. There is a fine group otnbsp;young people who take part zealously and ably in the Sunday-school and church services and in their own work. Thenbsp;women are very consecrated and do much visiting and personal work for the Lord. The church in Azul has openednbsp;up a preaching place in one of the suburbs. There is keennbsp;interest and good attendance. The pastor of the Azul churchnbsp;visits in Hinojo whenever possible to minister to the believers there who are unable to have a pastor, for full-timenbsp;ministry.

In 1922 a Bible School was established at Azul with fourteen students. During the following years the Bible School grew and flourished and its ministry and influence spread farnbsp;and wide. In later years of the school another evangelicalnbsp;mission took part in teaching ministries and sent their young’nbsp;men for training. A few years ago the Bible School work

was discontinued inasmuch as the churches in the Alliance field in the Argentine were unable to support any additionalnbsp;pastors and evangelists and the mission subsidy was beingnbsp;annually reduced in accord with the policy of the Board ofnbsp;Managers to gradually transfer the responsibilities for thenbsp;field to the Argentinian churches. For many years the Headquarters of the Alliance mission was at Azul and laternbsp;the pastor of this church became the Superintendent of thenbsp;Argentinian Conference.

With the return of the missionary couple to Argentina about two years ago, it W'as decided that the residence of thenbsp;missionary had best be established in some town where therenbsp;Was no local church of the Alliance work, in order that thenbsp;pastors and churches would feel more responsibility andnbsp;more freedom to go forward with their work, hence the mission residence was established at Moron, a city well locatednbsp;for the ministry of travel throughout the field and the missionary devotes his time and energy to visitation of the various churches and districts to aid and encourage the workersnbsp;and those to whom they minister. Although the subsidy tonbsp;the churches in the Argentine has been reduced annually fornbsp;several years and is expected to cease in the near future, yetnbsp;the missionary couple will D. V. continue ministry for several years.

Translation and Publication Work

From the beginning the distribution of literature from the British and Foreign Bible Society and the American Biblenbsp;Society has been an adventurous and effective service. Fromnbsp;the high Andes and lone hamlets come remarkable testimoniesnbsp;of the transforming power received through the reading ofnbsp;tract or Scripture portion. As in all South America, therenbsp;'S a crying need for the right kind of literature to reach thenbsp;throngs who never enter a Gospel hall, but who are constantly reading. The Seventh Day Adventists find readynbsp;buyers. Well-prepared evangelical reading matter wouldnbsp;have untold influence for the Kingdom of God.

The Indigenous Church

In order that the work in Argentina may have the continued and, we hope, increased prayer fellowship of many of the Lord’s people, we are giving here a brief survey of thenbsp;Work in the various cities and towns, some of which werenbsp;Occupied for years as mission stations but all of which arenbsp;tiow under the direction of the native church conference.nbsp;There is a total church membership of 326 in Argentina withnbsp;^5 additional baptized believers in unorganized groups.

In Olavarria the work is gradually but surely forging tihead under the leadership of a devout and talented youngnbsp;Pastor. There is rich promise in store for this large centernbsp;of 21,000 inhabitants in a district of 61,000 people. Thisnbsp;Pastor also visits the work in La Prida located eighty-eightnbsp;kilometers away. The congregation in the latter place paysnbsp;i'js traveling expenses but is unable to help very much withnbsp;fils support. The churches in these two towns have adequatenbsp;buildings fully paid for.

In the town of Carhue, which, with the surrounding district has a population of 30,000, there is a promising little Congregation. The Sunday School seldom has less than eightynbsp;attendance and there is a hopeful nucleus of young people.nbsp;The pastor of the Carhue church also ministers in Puannbsp;Where there is a very good church with several young mennbsp;''’ho cooperate loyally and capably. The town of Puan hasnbsp;a population of 7,000 and there are 20,000 in the surrounding district. There are good church properties in Carhuenbsp;and Puan, the latter fully paid for.

Guamini town and section has a population of 20,750. It has for years been one of the “dry” places, but there is nownbsp;a growing work with a Sunday School in charge of a youngnbsp;woman who studied for a time in the Bible Institute. Thenbsp;church group here has bought a good lot and plan to erect anbsp;very modest building. In Bonifacio are a few faithful Christians who worship in a rented room. Guamini and Bonifacionbsp;are also visited by the pastor of the church in Carhue but thenbsp;caring for the work in these four towns is a very heavy responsibility and there is need for additional help in pastoralnbsp;ministries.

One of the most important cities in our Alliance field in the Argentine is Nueve de Julio. Here there is a fine groupnbsp;of Christians who, out of their extreme poverty give liberallynbsp;to the pastor’s support. The property was purchased and anbsp;chapel built during the last few years and most of the indebtedness has been paid off. This city has a population ofnbsp;59,600 and the pastor and church have a large field ofnbsp;ministry.

Two hundred kilometers from Azul is the town of Sala-dillo with a population of 17,600 in a district of 37,000 people. The pastor of the Azul church visits the group of believers here to minister to them once every two or threenbsp;months, and the believers meet together regularly to praynbsp;and sing and to praise God.

The congregation of the church in Pico is one of the largest in our Argentine field and new converts are beingnbsp;won constantly. The Sunday School has an attendance ofnbsp;more than one hundred. Although the work here is facingnbsp;many difficult problems, there are bright prospects.

In the small town of Catrilo is a splendid chapel and parsonage fully paid for and a group of believers to whom a pastor is faithfully ministering. He also ministers to thenbsp;church in Salliqiielo. Here is a good Sunday School innbsp;charge of a young lady who graduated from the Bible Institute and later married the son of a prosperous farmer in thatnbsp;section. Thus through the ministries of pastors and members the work goes forward despite many obstacles.

In two other towns not far from Pico, namely Tejedor and Colonia Sere work has been begun by a young Biblenbsp;School graduate who is sacrificing to the utmost in order tonbsp;win souls and plant the church of Christ in these sections.

A young woman graduate of the Bible School is located in Tapalque where she does a faithful work for the Lord.nbsp;She has also charge of the work in Alvear and has been ablenbsp;to win a fine group of women and girls.

The pastor-evangelist located in Lohos ministers also in Roque Perez, Marcos Paz, Las Her as, and other places innbsp;his fervent zeal for evangelism and soul-saving ministry.nbsp;Many are listening gladly to the story of salvation andnbsp;through the prayers of God’s people, the ministries of thisnbsp;faithful servant of Christ will be increasingly fruitful.

In Villegas, and Ameghino there are small groups mostly of new converts who are showing promise of sturdy development. Many other places not named in this Atlas accountnbsp;have souls dear to the Master and afford opportunity for allnbsp;the evangelistic effort and pastoral ministry which the Alliance work in the Argentine could possibly render during thenbsp;next few years even under circumstances of great revivalnbsp;blessing and of continual growth. Let us pray for ournbsp;brethren in this field, that revival may be realized and growthnbsp;may be steady.

China, the home of a highly civilized nation when Europeans were still in the condition of primitive barbarianism and with a history reaching back to 2205 B. C., occupies anbsp;territory in the Eastern part of Asia about one third largernbsp;than continental United States.

Area and Population

Including those portions of territory to the North and West of China proper which either now or formerly havenbsp;been more or less under the influence and control of thenbsp;Chinese government, Chinese territory extends from latitudenbsp;53° north to 18° north and from longitude 74° east to 134°nbsp;east. It comprises China proper, eighteen provinces ; Tibet,nbsp;Sinkiang, previously known as Eastern Turkestan, Mongolia,nbsp;and the Manchurian provinces which now form the nominally independent, but Japanese controlled, country of Man-choukuo. The frontier of this last country marches fromnbsp;the northeast westward to the southwest with Siberia, Russian Turkestan, India, Burma, Tonkin; and the country isnbsp;bounded on the east by the Pacific Ocean and Korea.

China Proper, 18 provinces 1,532,815 sq. mi. 370,69'1,374 Mongolia 1,367,600nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;1,800,000

Sinkiang nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;550,340nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;2,500,000

Tibet nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;463,200nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;2,000,000

Manchuria (Manchoukuo). nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;363,700nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;27,996,044nbsp;(including

Jehol)

In the provinces where the Christian and Missionary Alliance have missionary work the following estimates of area and population are given:

The above figures are the latest estimates available for all the provinces. It should be remembered, however, that thesenbsp;figures are not based on accurate surveys or census, but arenbsp;the estimates of departments of the Chinese government.nbsp;For example, the latest estimate of the population of Kansunbsp;is from ten to eleven million, whereas the 1926 estimatenbsp;given above shows 7,422,818.

Climate

There is a wide variety in the climate of China since it extends from the colder temperate regions of the north tonbsp;the semi-tropical southland, and from the Pacific Coast tonbsp;the high mountain areas in portions of the interior, especially in the west.

Government

The ancient Manchu dynasty which had governed China for centuries was overthrown by a revolution in 1911 and anbsp;republic was established. In 1931 the government at Nanking, the new capital, called a People’s National Convention.nbsp;The 450 delegates adopted a provisional constitution, whichnbsp;rearranged the executive departments and gave to the Chairman of the State Council (General Chiang Kai Shek) thenbsp;power to appoint the Ministers of the Departments. Thisnbsp;new constitution declared all Chinese equal before the lawnbsp;and that the various districts (hsiens) should enjoy thenbsp;right of election, initiative, referendum and recall. Citizensnbsp;are guaranteed free speech and a free press. Twelve technical experts of the League of Nations are stationed innbsp;China at the recjuest of the Chinese government to aid innbsp;the development of sound government policies.

Because of the strong Influence of communist bands and the control which military leaders have in many provinces,nbsp;much of the benefit of a truly democratic government cannot be enjoyed by multitudes of the Chinese people. Thenbsp;government at Nanking is endeavoring to suppress communism and to strengthen the hold of the Central Government throughout the provinces and to develop in the provinces just and stable governments.

History

The traditional history of China begins 2500 B. C. when three emperors brought the people out of barbarism to anbsp;comparatively high state of civilization. Authentic history,nbsp;however, begins with 722 B. C. when the records extantnbsp;showed that there already existed such a high state of civilization as to corroborate the Chinese claims to a greatnbsp;antiquity.

The first of the long succession of dynasties was founded 2205 B. C. by Yu; but the longest, the Chow dynasty (1122nbsp;B. C. to 245 B. C.) produced the three great philosophers:nbsp;Confucius, Mencius and Lao-tse. This was the feudal period of China’s history.

From 221 B. C. China remained an empire for 2000 years. Architecture, art, and literature flourished during an age ofnbsp;chivalry. Monumented public works were erected and thenbsp;empire extended to north, south and west so that at one timenbsp;the frontiers reached to the Persian Gulf and the Caspiannbsp;Sea. On the other hand, there were internal strife and rebellions and external wars with Tatars and Mongols. Dynasties rose and fell. In 1260 A. D. the Mongols acquirednbsp;China after a struggle of more than one hundred years : butnbsp;within another century their dynasty was overthrown. Afternbsp;three centuries all returned to China’s rule under the Mingnbsp;dynasty. The land was again acquired by aliens when thenbsp;Manchus, a Tatar tribe, established their rule and maintainednbsp;the Tsing dynasty for over two centuries. A notable revoltnbsp;against the Tsing dynasty was the Taiping rebellion whichnbsp;extended from 1850 to 1864. The leader of this rebellionnbsp;called himself Twen Wang or “Heavenly King” and endeavored to overthrow the reigning Tatar dynasty (Manchu)nbsp;and establish a native Chinese dynasty to be called Tai-pingnbsp;(Great Peace). This rebellion was crushed by the armynbsp;organized by the American General, F. T. Ward, and lednbsp;after his death in 1862 by the noted English General, thennbsp;Major C. G. Gordon (“Chinese Gordon”) until the end ofnbsp;the rebellion in 1864. Manchu rule continued until thenbsp;establishment of the Republic in 1911.

China’s intercourse with European and American countries having more liberal forms of government, aided io causing the people of China to become dissatisfied with thenbsp;absolute monarchy which under various dynasties had rulednbsp;the country for more than 3000 years. In 1908 Emperornbsp;Kwang Hsu outlined a constitution and promised that anbsp;parliamentary form of government would be establishednbsp;within nine years. However, this was too slow and on October 11, 1911, a revolt broke out against the Manchu government, fighting taking place in Central and South China.

The liberal faction called the Kuo Min Tang (National Party), headed by Sun Yat Sen, held a Provisional Assembly at Nanking in December, and on December 29, 1911,nbsp;Dr, Sun Yat Sen was elected President. After six weeksnbsp;leadership Dr. Sun Yat Sen decided to give way to Yuannbsp;Shih Kai, the Commander-in-Chief of the old Imperialnbsp;army who had been one of the chief factors in bringingnbsp;about the abdication of the monarchy. Yuan Shih Kai rulednbsp;as a dictator until his death in June, 1916.

The World War and the Russian revolution had a marked effect upon Chinese political life. Nationalism was arousednbsp;and a national party was reorganized. After the death innbsp;1925 of Dr. Sun Yat Sen, a military campaign swept throughnbsp;the country. This was aided by communistic propagandanbsp;methods brought into China by the Russian Advisor, Michaelnbsp;Borodin. Peking was captured in 1928. A young and practically unknown military commander, who had led the southern Chinese armies in the struggle to overthrow the northernnbsp;seat of government, became the leader of the new nationalistnbsp;government, which was established at Nanking and was soonnbsp;recognized by the European and American governments.nbsp;This nationalist government severed diplomatic relations withnbsp;Russia but a native type of communism under Russian influence continued to dominate large areas, especially in thenbsp;province of Hunan, Kiangsi, Hupeh and Honan. In 1934nbsp;this leader. General Chiang Ka Shek, led his armies in anbsp;determined attack upon the communist stronghold in Kiangsinbsp;and drove the Red bands to northwestern China. However,nbsp;bands of armed communists still exist in different sectionsnbsp;of the central China provinces and portions of Hunan andnbsp;Kweichow as well as Shensi in north China are either undernbsp;communist domination or are subject to frequent raids bynbsp;the armed bands.

Both General Chiang Kai Shek and his wife are Christians and the Church of Christ should be faithful in prayer that the government in China shall be developed along thenbsp;most enlightened lines and shall be enabled to bring the nation under its proper control.

Physical Features

There are three great natural divisions of China each being related to a prominent river and the land tributary thereto.

The basin of the Hwang Ho, or Yellow River, has an area of about 600,000 square miles and includes six of thenbsp;eighteen provinces of China proper: Kansu, Shensi, Shansi,nbsp;Hopei, Honan and Shantung. The Yellow River valley maynbsp;be taken as the type and definition of North China. Thenbsp;six provinces are distinct from the rest of China in manynbsp;essential features. The climate, the food products, the character and mode of life of the inhabitants are different fromnbsp;those obtaining in the south; even the rice grown here isnbsp;quite distinct from the rice of the south. The people arenbsp;slower moving and of finer physique than the southernnbsp;Chinese. This area is the first definitely settled by the Chinese people as we know them today.

The Hwang Ho or Yellow River is about 2,500 miles long and in its basin live about 100,000,000 people. The rivernbsp;rises on the Odon-tala plain between 14,000 and 15,000 feetnbsp;above sea level. Two streams here combine to form twonbsp;lakes : Lake Jarin and Lake Orin. From these lakes flownbsp;the waters of the Hwang Ho to its outlet in the Gulf ofnbsp;Chihli. As the river leaves Chinghai and enters Kansu itnbsp;flows through a valley which in the course of 150 miles descends from 8,000 feet to 5,200 feet at the town of Lanchow.nbsp;The direct distance between Lanchow and Tungkwan is 300nbsp;miles, whereas the river flows 1,200 miles between the twonbsp;places. In 1854 the course of the river was changed atnbsp;Kaifeng from its southeastern way to a northeastern course.nbsp;The Hwang Ho has been called “China’s Sorrow” becausenbsp;of the disastrous results which have followed the change otnbsp;its course and many competent judges believe that anothernbsp;change is probably about to take place.

The second great division of China is the Yangtze-Kiang Basin. Rising in the confused Central Asian mountains onnbsp;the northern slopes of the Tangla range the headwaters otnbsp;the Yangtze are fully 16,000 feet above sea level some 200nbsp;miles from its source. The first 400 miles the river flowsnbsp;on the high Tibetan plateau and does not fall more thannbsp;200 feet. It then descends from the Tibetan plateau to thenbsp;lower Szechuan level, a drop of 6,800 feet in 150 miles.nbsp;From Batang on the Tibetan Chinese border the river fornbsp;the next thousand miles is known as the Kinsha Kiang-Just before reaching the junction with the Min River thenbsp;Yangtze forms the boundary between Szechuan and Yunnan. Between Batang and Suifu, a distance of about 1,000nbsp;miles, the river falls 8,000 feet. The Yangtze River is 3,200nbsp;miles long, and its entire basin covers 756,500 square miles.nbsp;In China the River Yangtze forms the main artery of trade,nbsp;commerce, and every form of communication with Centralnbsp;China and thus opens up to foreign trade the greater partnbsp;of China proper, the people in the Yangtze basin absorbingnbsp;no less than 60 per cent of the foreign trade of the wholenbsp;country. The Yangtze basin is not only larger but in Chinanbsp;proper is richer than either of the basins north or south.nbsp;It has a temperate climate. Several great treaty ports arenbsp;open to foreign trade, including Shanghai, Wuhu, Hankownbsp;and Changsha. In China proper the Yangtze basin formsnbsp;the heart of the country with an area of nearly 600,000nbsp;square miles and a population of 180,000,000 people. Therenbsp;are often serious floods along the Yangtze and during thenbsp;disastrous flood of 1931 the river rose more than fifty feetnbsp;at Hankow. The Yangtze is navigable from its mouth fornbsp;a distance of about 1,700 miles beyond the city of Suifu.

The West River or Si Kiang basin includes four provinces with an area of about 390,000 square miles and a populationnbsp;of 60,000,000. The West River rises in the northeasternnbsp;part of Yunnan Province and flows through Yunnan andnbsp;along the frontier between Kweichow and Kwangsi. Itnbsp;then flows through Kwangsi Province until it reaches thenbsp;city of Wuchow, about 900 miles from its source, thencenbsp;entering the Province of Kwantung. The river has a totalnbsp;length of 1,118 miles, 387 being in the Province of Kwangsi.nbsp;It is navigable for several hundred miles. A continuousnbsp;line of mountains separates the West River basin from itsnbsp;northern neighbor in Central China. These mountains formnbsp;an effectual barrier with only two passes of any importance.nbsp;The river flows for the most part through a tropical andnbsp;semi-tropical region. The Chinese of South China, especiallynbsp;the Cantonese, have been in touch with western people andnbsp;western ways more fully than those in other sections ofnbsp;China. Many aboriginal tribes people live in South China.

Resources

China is essentially agricultural. The average farms are small and the implements crude, but cultivation is intensive.nbsp;There is much irrigation, crops are rotated and the production of fruits, cereals and vegetables is regarded as beingnbsp;quite efficient, care being taken to keep up the fertility of thenbsp;soil. Large forests are rare, bamboo is widely used.

Among the principal agricultural products are cotton, tea, wheat and other grains. Rice is grown in all but threenbsp;provinces and in the south, sugar, indigo and various cerealsnbsp;are important products.

The silk industry has flourished for 4,000 years. China now produces 27 per cent of the world’s supply. Modernnbsp;cotton manufacturing began in 1895 and has grown to be anbsp;huge industry.

Most of the provinces of China contain immense deposits coal, the annual production being about 29,000,(XX) tons.nbsp;Iron ores are plentiful in several northern provinces. Pe-holeum is abundant although the oil industry has not beennbsp;developed extensively. The Yunnan deposits of copper orenbsp;3re among the richest in the world. Copper, tin, gold, silver,nbsp;!^ad, mercury and other minerals are found in several provinces. The chief exports of China are silk, beans and beannbsp;products, tea, cotton, skins and furs, animal wools, cereals,nbsp;sesame seed, peanuts and peanut oil, medicines, tin, anti-niony and copper.

Progress

. The first railway was opened in 1876. In 1931 there were ”r China proper a little over 12,000 miles of railroads andnbsp;iiew lines are being built. Considerable progress is beingnbsp;i^ade in the construction of roads. In 1933 the road mileagenbsp;'ras more than 40,000 miles ; in that same year 38,136 auto-’’lobiles were registered, most of these being in a few ofnbsp;lhe largest cities. Rapid advance is being made in some ofnbsp;’^he provinces in road building, and there are now a numbernbsp;of bus routes connecting principal centers.

The nationalist government is seeking to improve the standards of education, and the number of pupils in thenbsp;elementary schools increased from 2,793,633 in 1912 to 11,-667,888 in 1935. The number of colleges and universitiesnbsp;rose from four to 82. There were about 500,000 high schoolnbsp;students in 1,440 schools in 1935. In April of that year thenbsp;I'anking government decreed that all male students in highnbsp;Schools and colleges must take at least one year of intensivenbsp;¦Uilitary training. A Chinese graduate of Yale has selectednbsp;1'300 Chinese characters that occur most frequently in thenbsp;Vernacular and has made four low priced textbooks usingnbsp;these characters. Five million laborers and farmers havenbsp;heen taught to read through the use of these textbooks, andnbsp;Ihe government hopes to increase literacy among young people between the ages of 16 and 20 until at least 20,000,000nbsp;'Ian read and write.

Currency

The principal unit of Chinese money has been for many years the Mexican dollar. The Chinese government in 1932nbsp;®®t as a standard unit for the Chinese dollar a weight ofnbsp;“^6.6971 grammes, consisting of 88 per cent pure silver, 12nbsp;Per cent copper alloy. Coinage of the new Chinese dollarnbsp;^as begun at the large new mint in Shanghai, March 1,nbsp;^1^33, and on April 7, the government decreed that the usenbsp;pl the Shanghai tael should be abolished in favor of thenbsp;I-hinese dollar or yuan.

The average exchange of the Chinese dollar in terms of ynited States money was 26.39 cents in 1933 ; in 1934,nbsp;34.09 cents. In September, 1935, the value was 38.359nbsp;'i^nts and by the end of the year it had dropped to a littlenbsp;'’Ver 30 cents. In 1935 the financial situation became acute,nbsp;partly because of the United States government’s endeavornbsp;?.raise the world price of silver by purchasing large quan-'hes at high prices. In recent months the Chinese govern-J^^rit has undertaken to confiscate silver and has adoptednbsp;'he policy of a managed currency. Time alone will tell thenbsp;Effectiveness of these measures.

Languages

The written language of China has 8,000 to 9,000 char-®Eters and between 40,000 and 50,000 separate ideographs, the characters are formed out of a little more than 200nbsp;'^dicals. Although there are two principal spoken lan-^ijages, the Mandarin and the Cantonese, and others lessnbsp;Widespread, such as the Fukien, each of these languages be-W? quite different from the other, yet the written languagenbsp;the same for all. The China Year Book says, “As regards the spoken language, Chinese is much easier thannbsp;Japanese and compares favorably with Russian, Polish ornbsp;Finnish. The difficulty of the tone system has been exaggerated. If the rhythm of the sentence is correctly enunciated, the speaker will be understood even where the tonesnbsp;are incorrect, but he must guard against emphasizing thenbsp;wrong word in the phrases.”

The official language. Mandarin, is understood in all the provinces north of the Yangtze, in a part of Kiangsu southnbsp;of the Yangtze, in Kwangsi, Yunnan, Kweichow, and a portion of Kiangsi. In the coast provinces, viz., that part ofnbsp;Kiangsu east of Chinkiang and the coast south of thenbsp;Yangtze, Chekiang, Fukien and Kwantung, the official language is not intelligible to the uneducated and to few of thenbsp;educated classes. The Fukien and Cantonese languages arenbsp;quite different from the Mandarin.

The Tibetan alphabet is a variation of Sanskrit and only consonantal, the vowels having to be supplied by certainnbsp;marks. It contains an elaborate tone system easily learnednbsp;by one familiar with Chinese.

The aboriginal languages of China contain numerous varieties spoken in Yunnan, Kweichow, Kwangsi and in part of Szechuan. The vocabulary is limited and simple. Thenbsp;Yao and Lolo languages have several dialects.

Religions

The religions of China are Confucianism, Buddhism and Taoism. Most Chinese profess all three of these religions,nbsp;giving chief emphasis to whichever one they may desire.nbsp;There are also between five and ten million Mohammedansnbsp;in China (although some estimates give as high as twentynbsp;million or more). Roman Catholics number about 2,600,000nbsp;and Protestant Christians, about three-quarters of a million.

Confucianism is derived from the teachings of Confucius, the great Chinese philosopher who lived about 2,500 yearsnbsp;ago. It is realty a system of political and social ethics rathernbsp;than a religion. In theory Confucianism is opposed to idolatry, yet idolatry and nature worship accompany ancestralnbsp;worship. Taoism is a materialistic departure from the philosophy of its founder, Lao-tse, who was born fifty yearsnbsp;before Confucius. It is full of superstition and through itnbsp;the Chinese are in bondage to many demons and evil spirits.nbsp;Buddhism was brought from India by the Emperor Ming Tinbsp;in 67 A. D. Although a foreign religion among a peoplenbsp;who for ages despised foreigners and things foreign, yet itnbsp;has gained general recognition and its temples and shrinesnbsp;are found throughout China.

Religion plays an important part in the life of the Chinese, but it is a religion of superstition and materialism rather than of spiritual appeal. Temples erected to manynbsp;gods are everywhere. Every pagan home has its idols andnbsp;shrines. Fear rather than love is the dominant feeling toward the idol or god. Ancestral worship dominates in nearlynbsp;every home. In none of the three ancient religions of Chinanbsp;is there a distinct conception of God or a conscious sensenbsp;of sin.

Missionary Occupation

The first entrance of Christianity into China was from the eastern churches as the followers of Christ moved onward in their proclamation of the gospel. By the close ofnbsp;the first century a Christian Bishop had his seat in the citynbsp;of Arbel, east of the Tigris. During the third and fourthnbsp;centuries the Christian faith spread into Persia and centralnbsp;Asia. From the eighth to the thirteenth centuries the Nestorian church had its most prosperous days so far as favornbsp;among the nations was concerned, and from centers such asnbsp;Bagdad merchants and missionaries became witnesses fornbsp;Christ in far off lands, churches being established from

Mesopotamia to China and from south India to Mongolia. Tradition hints that the gospel had entered China throughnbsp;the work of St. Thomas, the Apostle, but there is no historical foundation to prove this. However, it is possiblenbsp;that Indian Christians may have visited China in the fourthnbsp;and fifth centuries.

The first reliable record of the presence of Christianity in China dates from the T’ang dynasty, 618-907. One ofnbsp;the evidences of the presence of Nestorian Christians innbsp;China is the famous monument of Hsianfu uncovered innbsp;1623 or 1625 by workmen who were excavating for thenbsp;foundations of a building. The monument was erected innbsp;781 and on it is inscribed the history of Nestorianism innbsp;China. Other records have come to light showing that thenbsp;Nestorians translated a number of books and tracts into thenbsp;Chinese language. Imperial edicts of Chinese rulers issuednbsp;in the seventh to the ninth centuries contain references tonbsp;Nestorianism and it is thought that the first missionary arrived in the capital A. D. 635. Whatever influence the Nestorians may have had in those early centuries, it is clear thatnbsp;the church then planted did not survive in China. Laternbsp;efforts brought temporary results and Chinese records speaknbsp;of twenty-three Christian families around Chinkiang earlynbsp;in the fourteenth century. There were also Nestoriannbsp;churches in Yangchow, and Nestorians in Yunnanfu, innbsp;Kansu, and in Hokianfu in Chihli. However, many of thenbsp;Nestorian Christians in these communities were probablynbsp;foreigners and not Chinese.

So far as history records, the first Roman Catholic missionary to reach China was a Franciscan, John of Monte-corvine, who was born in Italy about 1246 A. D. His missionary journeys began in 1272, and in 1291 he and another friar and a merchant went to India for thirteen months.nbsp;Later John went on to China where by 1305 he had baptizednbsp;about 6,000 converts. Other priests and bishops were sentnbsp;out by the Pope, but by the latter part of the sixteenth century no certain traces of the work remained. About twonbsp;centuries later Roman Catholic missionaries again enterednbsp;China and the Church has grown since that time until nownbsp;the Romanists number more than two and a half million.

Protestant Missionary effort in China was urged by spiritual leaders in Great Britain long before actual work was undertaken. The first Protestant missionary to reside innbsp;China was Robert Morrison. The London Missionary Society, then barely ten years old, began planning in 1805 fornbsp;a Mission to the Chinese. The Directors asked two men tonbsp;go but both declined and finally Robert Morrison was sentnbsp;and he ministered alone for several years. Morrison begannbsp;the study of the Chinese language through the use of anbsp;manuscript in the British Museum. The East India Company’s hostility to missions made it impossible for him tonbsp;travel to China as a missionary directly from England andnbsp;he was obliged to come to the United States and seek passage on an American ship. He set sail from New York innbsp;1807 and arrived in Canton in September of that year.nbsp;There he continued the study of the language with the helpnbsp;of two Chinese Roman Catholic Christians and in 1809 became a translator for the same East India Company whichnbsp;had refused him passage on their ships two years before.nbsp;Morrison faithfully continued his missionary ministry andnbsp;baptized his first Chinese convert July 16, 1814. The progress was slow and during the first twenty-five years of thenbsp;Mission he and his colleagues baptized only ten Chinese.

The first missionary to come to China as a coworker with Morrison was William Milne, a Scotchman of scholarlynbsp;taste and linguistic ability. He and his wife arrived innbsp;Macao in July, 1813, but the authorities ordered them tonbsp;leave almost immediately. Milne went to Canton and laternbsp;made his home at Malacca. In 1818 Morrison began annbsp;Anglo-Chinese College at Malacca. In 1842 the school wasnbsp;moved to the new British colony at Hongkong. Being annbsp;excellent student with an unusual capacity for hard work,nbsp;Morrison with the aid of others completed the translationnbsp;of the Old and New Testaments by the year 1819 in addition to much other work. The British and Foreign Biblenbsp;Society helped with the publication of his translations of thenbsp;Scriptures and the London Missionary Society sent reinforcements for missionary work.

In 1822 or 1823 the American Bible Society began helping in the distribution of the Scriptures among the Chinese, and in 1833-34 it employed a Chinaman as a colporter. Innbsp;1836 the British and Foreign Bible Society sent an agentnbsp;to Macao and the same year the Church Missionary Societynbsp;sent out its first missionary. Two missionaries from thenbsp;continent of Europe also began ministry along the coast ofnbsp;China early in the 1830s.

In 1829 two men sailed from America to China, David Abeel to be chaplain to the many American sailors in Chinese waters, and Elijah C. Bridgman under the Americannbsp;Board for work among the Chinese. They were given freenbsp;passage and other assistance by the American merchant engaged in the China trade, D. W. C. Olyphant, whose earnestnbsp;religious convictions were so well known that his looms innbsp;the Canton factories were called “Zion’s Corner.” In 1833nbsp;a missionary of the General Missionary Convention of thenbsp;American Baptists began work among the Chinese in Bangkok and in 1836, J. L. Shuck and wife arrived at Macao,nbsp;the first Baptist missionaries to China. The Protestantnbsp;Episcopal Church sent out its first missionaries in 1835, thenbsp;Presbyterian Board in 1838, and the American Methodistsnbsp;in 1847. Other Societies in Europe and America begannbsp;work in later years but space permits us to mention onlynbsp;a few.

The China Inland Mission began work in China in 1866. The founder, J. Hudson Taylor, had sailed to China, in 1853nbsp;at the age of twenty-one under the Chinese Evangelizationnbsp;Society and did valiant service for Christ until illness forcednbsp;him to return to England in 1860. In 1857 Taylor hadnbsp;severed his connection with the Chinese Evangelization Society and labored independently trusting God for all hisnbsp;support. While in England the burden of inland Chinanbsp;pressed heavily upon him and God so blessed the organization and labors of the China Inland Mission which he wasnbsp;instrumental in founding, that at the time of Mr. Taylor’snbsp;death at Changsha, Hunan, there were 828 missionaries ofnbsp;the China Inland Mission in China. The latest report ofnbsp;the China Inland Mission shows the following: Missionaries, 1,368; Chinese workers, 3,830, including 2,382 voluntary workers; communicants, 83,208.

Under the inspiration and example of the China Inland Mission, three organizations were formed to undertake missionary work in China. The first missionaries of the Swedish Mission to China and the German China Alliance sailednbsp;in 1890. Two years later the Scandinavian Alliance Mission began work there.

Toward the close of the last century opposition to missionary work became more violent and in 1900 the Boxer uprising caused heavy loss both to the Missions and to thenbsp;Chinese Christians. The number of Roman Catholic martyrs included 47 European missionaries, and 30,000 Chinesenbsp;Catholics were either killed or died from privation. Aboutnbsp;134 Protestant missionaries and 52 children suffered martyrdom. One-third of these were associated with the Chinanbsp;Inland Mission, and 21 missionaries and fourteen childrennbsp;were in The Christian and Missionary Alliance. The Chinese Protestant Christians who lost their lives for Christ’s

sake numbered about 1,912, including three Mongols. Although the young Chinese churches thus early paid a high price for their faith, yet the blood of the martyrs becamenbsp;truly the seed of the Church.

The latest report of the Directory of Foreign Missions records the names of three denominational church bodies innbsp;China: The Holy Catholic Church of China (Protestantnbsp;Episcopal) established in 1913 ; the Church of Christ innbsp;China, formed in 1927 by a union of churches which grewnbsp;out of the missionary work of fourteen Protestant agencies ;nbsp;the Lutheran Church of China, established in 1917, beingnbsp;formed of the churches of a number of Lutheran Boardsnbsp;working in China. The number of Missions and other organizations formed in China or having their headquartersnbsp;there totals 25. This includes The China Inland Mission,nbsp;previously mentioned but counted here because its headquarters are in Shanghai. Missionary Societies laboringnbsp;ir; China include 2 from Australia, 21 from Great Britain,nbsp;34 from the United States and Canada, 25 from the continent of Europe and 5 Korean Societies.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance sent its first missionaries to China in 1888. Ten years later Alliance missionaries were witnessing for Christ in Anhwei, Hupeh, Plunan, the Tibetan frontier of Kansu, Shansi, Mongolia,nbsp;Kwangsi and in the great cities of Peking, Shanghai, andnbsp;Tientsin. Kenneth Latourette in a History of Christiannbsp;Missions in China says, “With the exception of Anhweinbsp;and the three cities named, these districts, it will be noted,nbsp;were among the most difficult in which to maintain missions.nbsp;In Kwangsi the Alliance was apparently the first Protestantnbsp;body to establish a permanent station, although that hadnbsp;been attempted by members of at least three other Societies.nbsp;The prolonged effort to penetrate Tibet by way of Kansunbsp;was made in the face of almost continuous danger and entailed great heroism.”

At the present time The Christian and Missionary Alliance is working in seven interior provinces and in the city of Shanghai. Its active force of missionaries in China, including those on furlough, numbers 103. There are aboutnbsp;240 Chinese workers and a church membership of over 5,000.nbsp;The Alliance fields in China still present a challenge fornbsp;prayer, for giving, and for going that the millions for whomnbsp;the Alliance is responsible may be given the gospel messagenbsp;and many more among them come to know Him, Who is thenbsp;Way, the Truth and the Life.

KANSU-TIBETAN BORDER

The Province of Kansu in northwest China is bounded on the north by Sinkiang (Eastern Türkistan) and Ningsianbsp;(a province of Inner Mongolia) ; on the east by Ningsianbsp;and the Chinese province of Shensi ; on the south by thenbsp;province of Szechwan; and on the west by Chinghai (Koko-Nor). The Kansu-Tibetan Border Mission of The Christiannbsp;and Missionary Alliance has as its sole responsibility thenbsp;southwestern part of Kansu province, that portion of thenbsp;Sino-Tibetan marches that forms the boundary of the Chinese field, and all that portion of northeast Tibet that extends in a westerly and southwesterly direction from thenbsp;Chinese frontier to the limits of habitation where the centralnbsp;plateau rises to forbidding heights, or to those points alongnbsp;the trade routes where the central government of Lhasa hasnbsp;•control. Thus, the location of the Alliance field in northwest China presents not only a heavy responsibility in anbsp;large Chinese and Moslem field, but also a most strategicnbsp;position along the border of northeast Tibet—a wonderfulnbsp;.opportunity that has resulted in the actual occupation ofnbsp;«enters in Tibetan country.

Area and Population

Kansu, while one of the largest provinces in China in area, is one of the smallest in population. The boundaries havenbsp;recently been pushed westward so that its present area isnbsp;147,051 square miles. The distances in this part of Chinanbsp;should be considered in terms of time required for travel asnbsp;well as in miles. From the nearest railway terminal innbsp;Shensi to Lanchow, the capital of Kansu, the journey bynbsp;mule requires eighteen days; by auto the trip is made innbsp;five or more days according to the condition of the roads;nbsp;whereas the airplane takes but three hours between the twonbsp;cities.

The population of Kansu is estimated at from ten to eleven million. The Christian and Missionary Alliance areanbsp;in Kansu and among the Tibetan tribes to the west hasnbsp;about 3,500,000 people.

Climate

The climate of the field varies out of all proportion to the variations in latitude and, though the medium altitudes ofnbsp;the Chinese field result in a temperate and healthful mean,nbsp;the higher elevations of the border stations and much of thenbsp;Tibetan field combined with long dry winters and excessivenbsp;wind have been found rather trying to the health of thenbsp;missionaries. The cycle of the seasons follows the changesnbsp;of the solar year more nearly than in the States, making allnbsp;the seasons earlier.

Government

All of the Chinese field and some of the Tibetan field is under the Chinese government and full official protection andnbsp;liberty of movement and work is accorded the missionaries.nbsp;Along the border there are certain areas where the Tibetannbsp;tribal rule still exists, largely dominated by Chinese control,nbsp;and here the missionaries have a satisfactory official statusnbsp;as holding passports granted by the Chinese government.nbsp;There is a third region where Chinese control is entirelynbsp;nominal and in such districts movement and residence isnbsp;only possible when the local rulers, recognizing the claims ofnbsp;friendship, have given permission and protection. Althoughnbsp;residence in such areas is no simple matter and several rebuffs have been experienced, yet God has graciously openednbsp;to the Alliance more ground than the Mission is able tonbsp;occupy with the present force. The local rulers may benbsp;either tribal chiefs, kings—so called—or lamasery authorities.

History

The history of the Chinese portion of this interesting bit of borderland is a fairly continuous record from the timenbsp;of the Chinese migration into the Yellow River basin overnbsp;four thousand years ago. The people of that period left mnbsp;the loess very interesting archæological traces of their culture that link closely with the dawn of the Chinese historicalnbsp;period. By the second century B. C. the history of thenbsp;Chinese field is quite authentic and in detail. It includesnbsp;such items as the story of the Ouigour Tartars, who finallynbsp;accepted Islam and settled in the Tong Hsiang of Hochou',nbsp;where as a distinct linguistic and racial group they constitute a responsibility and a challenge ; the arrival fromnbsp;Samarkand of the Salar Moslems ; the subjugation andnbsp;eventual absorption of the Tibetan tribes of the Minchoquot;'nbsp;district; and the colonization of Taochow by military colonists from Nanking.

Much, less is known of the history of the Tibetan area-There are distinct traces, both archæological and philological, of the dominance of Mongol influence during the time of thenbsp;Yuan dynasty, followed by migratory movements from Central Tibet and Lhasa. The population of most of our Tibetannbsp;field has no traditions extending back more than 250 yearsnbsp;and it is probable that most of the peoples of northeastnbsp;Tibet took up their present locations less than three hundrednbsp;years ago. Recent history is largely made up of the recordnbsp;of inter-tribal warfare punctuated by several rather unsuccessful attempts on the part of the Chinese government tonbsp;extend its authority over the liberty-loving Tibetans. Thenbsp;brief dominance, by Moslem military leaders, of a portionnbsp;of the field greatly facilitated the occupation of Labrangnbsp;and Hehtsuh.

Physical Features

The country, on the whole, is high and mountainous-Starting from the eastern boundary where the elevation is 5,000 feet, the mountain ranges extend in a northwesterlynbsp;direction, rising gradually to over 20,000 feet above seanbsp;level. Between these ranges are wide and fertile valleys-The Yellow River and its tributaries constitute the onlynbsp;waterways in the province. These rivers are of little commercial importance, since transportation by boats is practically impossible.

The topographical aspects of the field are of great interest as there are three distinct areas. Much of the Chinese fieldnbsp;is a continuation of the great loess plateau of northern Chinanbsp;and, though barren and treeless in appearance, is astonishingly fertile, producing an abundance of grain as well asnbsp;fruit and vegetables. Years of drought sharply affect thisnbsp;area, resulting in famine and near famine conditions. Alongnbsp;the border there is another belt of well wooded, well waterednbsp;mountainous country beautiful to look at but of lesser fertility; and finally there are the Tibetan grasslands of whichnbsp;only the lower fringes are cultivated, the greatest part beingnbsp;too high—11,000 to 12,000 ft.—for any use except as pasturelands. This latter area of great extent and inhabited bynbsp;nomadic tribes is at once the greatest part of the Alliancenbsp;potential field and the least worked.

Resources

Large deposits of gold, copper and coal are known to exist, and abundant crops of grains and fruits grow on thenbsp;well irrigated plains. The inaccessibility of the provincenbsp;and the local difficulties of travel have thus far prevented

the development of the immense mineral and agricultural resources of the province.

Progress

Although Kansu is chiefly a “province of transit” the means of communication are few and very poor. There arenbsp;no railroads, no navigable rivers, and only a few importantnbsp;trade routes that are wide enough to accommodate cartnbsp;traffic. For the most part goods are carried on the backs ofnbsp;camels, mules and donkeys, and not infrequently on thenbsp;backs of men.

During the latter part of 1935 the government at Nanking sent many thousands of soldiers into Kansu ostensibly tonbsp;protect the province because of hordes of Chinese communists threatening to invade Kansu. With the comingnbsp;of the soldiers there has been a great impetus to roadbuilding and fairly good roads are being built between many principal points in the province. In The Christian and Missionary Alliance section of the field, roads have already beennbsp;built from Lanchow to Hochow, Lanchow to Titao, Lan-chow to Kongchang; and a road is being built from Titaonbsp;to Minchow, now called Minhsien. In recent years airplanesnbsp;are operated between Lanchow, Kansu, and Sian, Shensi,nbsp;the present terminus of the Long-Hai railroad.

Under the present Chinese government a good public school system is provided even in the far off province ofnbsp;Kansu. There are also high schools and a provincial college.

Currency

The currency for centuries among the Chinese and Moslems of this field was silver bullion. In recent years the silver dollar and copper cents have been in use. The valuenbsp;of the silver dollar in the foreign exchange is based on thenbsp;current value of the Mexican dollar which is the recognizednbsp;unit in Chinese currency. Its value fluctuates greatly, at thenbsp;present time being about $.30 U. S. for each dollar Mexican.nbsp;Lump silver or bullion continues to be used among thenbsp;Tibetans.

Languages and Tribes

There are four large and distinct language groups in the Kansu-Tibetan Border field, viz., Chinese, Tibetan, Turki,nbsp;and Mongolian. In addition to these there are two or threenbsp;small language groups in little-known, out-of-the-way corners, while the still undefined southern border of the Tibetannbsp;field touches, if it does not include, some of the polyglotnbsp;divisions of the Ja-rong or aboriginal tribes, speaking a dozennbsp;or more different languages.

Religions

The religion of the Chinese portion of the field is largely the usual combination of Confucianism and adulterated bynbsp;the polytheism of Taoism and the mysticism of Buddhismnbsp;that is found over most of China. Yet as each of thesenbsp;three factors are found in varying proportions, so differentnbsp;districts are more idolatrous or materialistic in degree as thenbsp;case may be. Mohammedanism is held with fanatical zealnbsp;by three large groups, namely the Tong Hsiang people ofnbsp;Tartar origin, the Salars of Turkish origin, and the Ta Shinbsp;Moslems originally of Arabian extraction but now predominately Chinese in race and language yet fanatically Moslemnbsp;in faith. The Tibetans are almost without exception thenbsp;adherents of Lamaism—the Tibetan form of Buddhism—nbsp;and are completely under the despotic religious rule of thenbsp;Lamaist hierarchy.

Missionary Occupation

The first missionaries to enter Kansu Province were two men of the China Inland Mission, who went there in 1872.nbsp;The China Inland Mission has its headquarters for thisnbsp;field in Lanchow, the capital of the province. Here theynbsp;conduct a large, well-equipped hospital in addition to theirnbsp;evangelistic and school work. Alliance missionaries enterednbsp;Kansu in 1895. The Christian and Missionary Alliancenbsp;field there is located in the southwest of the province, thenbsp;China Inland Mission in the southeast, center, and northwest, and the Scandinavian Alliance Mission in the northeast. The Assemblies of God (Pentecostal), Seventh Daynbsp;Adventists and Roman Catholics also have some work irtnbsp;Kansu.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

The original purpose of our Kansu Mission was to enter the closed land of Tibet. It is impossible to enter Tibetnbsp;from the north and the western and southern borders werenbsp;already occupied by other Societies, whereas the entire Chinese-Tibetan border was unoccupied. Therefore, the Alliance chose to approach Tibet from the Kansu side. Tongarnbsp;and Taochow (Old City) were the two largest outlets fromnbsp;northeastern Tibet and the latter station was opened in 1895nbsp;as the base for Tibetan work.

In eastern Tibet there are no cities, towns, stores or inns, but the center of Tibetan life is the Lamasery. Therefore,nbsp;the work in this section must be evangelistic itineration andnbsp;this can only be done by first entering into “traveling agreements” of friendship with the leading Lamas of the Lamaseries, village head-men, chiefs of clans, and other influentialnbsp;men.

The plan of campaign of the Alliance Mission on the Tibetan Border is to complete the occupation of a few leading Lamasery towns along a line eighty miles from the bordernbsp;and four hundred miles in length, working from these asnbsp;centers while at the same time continuing to work the bordernbsp;clans from the previously occupied centers of Chone, Taochow and Hochow. There is no restriction placed uponnbsp;intercourse across the border. No other Society is workingnbsp;in the area above indicated and the population there fornbsp;which the Alliance is responsible is one-half million Tibetansnbsp;with a million more in the adjacent country to the west.

In describing the stations those relating to the Tibetan work are given first in the order of their opening, followednbsp;by those established for the carrying on of work among thenbsp;Chinese.

Taochow. In 1895 the Christian and Missionary Alliance (Old City) opened work in Taochow (Old City) which,nbsp;although itself a Chinese city, had on threenbsp;sides large Tibetan communities at a distance of only a fewnbsp;miles. Indeed more Tibetans can be reached from Taochownbsp;than from most places inside the border, because great numbers of this nomadic people come to Old City on business.nbsp;There is a small Chinese church in Old City.

Labrang. Very early in their work the Kansu missionaries planned an evangelistic center in Labrang withnbsp;its more than 3,000 priests, the greatest Tibetan monasterynbsp;in all northeastern Tibet, but attempted entrance was repulsed. However, in 1919 the local power of Lamaism wasnbsp;broken by Moslem troops. Not long after a house wasnbsp;rented, and in 1922 missionaries took up residence there,nbsp;witnessing steadily in the city and surrounding villages. Thenbsp;new Chinese name for Labrang is Hsia Ho Hsien.

As the most influential religious, political and commercial center of Northeast Tibet, Labrang has afforded remarkable'

opportunities for witnessing in a way that has touched all of northeast Tibet and for maintaining contacts with manynbsp;of the Tibetan leaders. The guestroom work in this centernbsp;has been greatly used in furthering these ends. On the othernbsp;hand, the tyrannical power of the Lamasery authorities isnbsp;nowhere quite as great as in the Labrang district and a number of recent secret believers are still too fearful to makenbsp;open confession of faith.

Lupa, also called Lupasi, and Chone were opened as mission centers in 1905. Ä further statement concerning them is given in a later section.

Hehtsuh. Another important station for Tibetan work is Hehtsuh, located midway between Old Taochownbsp;and Labrang. It is surrounded by an extensive and wellnbsp;populated farming district with outlying nomadic clans andnbsp;IS the most easily worked district in the field, the periodicnbsp;markets giving a splendid opportunity for evangelistic worknbsp;while the village population is most encouragingly accessible.nbsp;Work was begun here by Alliance missionaries in 1923 andnbsp;a missionary couple reside in this center and witness throughout the district.

Lhamo. Southwest of Taochow about one hundred miles from the Chinese border are two Lamaseries ofnbsp;considerable size, one on either side of a valley throughnbsp;which runs a small stream. These are located in a sectionnbsp;called Stag Tsang Lhamo, the three words meaning “tigernbsp;den goddess.” After much prayer and negotiating with thenbsp;Lamasery authorities, a station was opened here in 1930 atnbsp;Lhamo, a center of a large district of nomadic tribes. Thenbsp;population of Lhamo itself is about 2,000 but in the surrounding district are about 30,000 for which the Alliance isnbsp;responsible.

The lawlessness of the region has greatly added to the difficulties and problems of missionary life and work in thisnbsp;place, but a large number of nomadic tribes have beennbsp;reached by itineration and guestroom work and in a waynbsp;Lhamo has proved itself to be the gateway for the furthernbsp;occupation of northeast Tibet. Contacts secured and maintained here have resulted in the remarkable opportunity innbsp;the kingdom of Ngawa, five days to the southwest beyondnbsp;the knee of the Yellow River where an invitation to comenbsp;and work the region has been reinforced by the offer of anbsp;place in which to live, and only the lack of workers has keptnbsp;the Mission from taking advantage of this unique offer.nbsp;There have been a few open professions of faith in connection with the work in Lhamo and Denga.

Denga. Between Lhamo and Taochow is the district of the fourteen clans of Tiehpu (Tebbu). For manynbsp;years the missionaries maintained contact with a few friendsnbsp;among the upper clans, looking forward to the time when itnbsp;would be possible to open a station among them. In 1932nbsp;this was brought to pass through the purchase of a plot ofnbsp;land, building of a missionary residence, and the locating ofnbsp;a missionary couple there. Life has not been easy amongnbsp;the truculent clans of the Tebbu valley, but the district has

been opened in a remarkable way to the missionary and from this point a number of itinerations have resulted innbsp;the knowledge of new and unreached sections that are asnbsp;yet unoccupied.

In the process of starting work among Tibetans on the border the Mission opened cities in Chinese territory also,nbsp;and thus began the Chinese work in Kansu.

Minchow. In 1896, the year after opening the first Tibetan station at Taochow, the missionaries establishednbsp;a Chinese station in the neighboring city of Minchow, laternbsp;opening Tanchang and several smaller places as outstations.nbsp;This station is also known as Minhsien. There is a thrivingnbsp;Chinese church there of 76 members.

Taochow (New City) became a mission station in 1905. See description in a later paragraph.

Titao. The next Chinese station was established in 1905 at Titao, the first Christian and Missionary Alliancenbsp;post to be reached after the long and dangerous journeynbsp;overland from the railhead. Titao is the headquarters ofnbsp;the Kansu-Tibetan Border Mission with the Chairman’s residence. The work in this important Chinese center has beennbsp;fruitful in a large number of conversions, and a flourishingnbsp;church of over 220 members is active in proclaiming Christnbsp;in the district. The new name for Titao is Lin Tao Hsien.nbsp;Kongchang. This center of a large district having 25,000nbsp;population, was first opened as an outstationnbsp;from Titao, but was made a main station in 1917. Thenbsp;Chinese church has a membership of over sixty, twenty-twonbsp;of these having been baptized in one year recently. Thenbsp;church is developing along purely indigenous lines and isnbsp;marked by independence and virile faith. The new namenbsp;for Kongchang is Longhsi.

Hochow. Formerly an outstation of Titao, Hochow (New name Tao Ho Hsien) became a main station innbsp;1917. The importance of this city lies not only in its sizenbsp;as a center of a district of 400,000 population, but also innbsp;its being a stronghold of Mohammedanism and also a suitable point from which to make trips into adjacent territory.nbsp;The Chinese work in this city has been fruitful and therenbsp;is now a church of considerably over 100 members.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance is responsible for the evangelization of three different racial groups of Moslems in its West China field. The largest group, callednbsp;Chinese Moslems, were originally of Arab stock but nownbsp;speak Chinese and use Arabic only in connection with theirnbsp;religious services. They are several hundred thousand innbsp;number and are to be found all over the Alliance field,nbsp;though the largest settlements are around Hochow. Thisnbsp;city, due to its large Moslem population and influence isnbsp;known as the Mecca of China. Seven-tenths of the largenbsp;west country population is Moslem. Little intensive worknbsp;has been done among this large group though they are thenbsp;most intelligent and open of the three groups. A missionary couple was sent recently to this field for work amongnbsp;these Moslems.

East of Hochow is a group of Moslems known as the Tongsiang or “East Country’’ Moslems. They are of Mongol, or Tartar, origin and speak a Mongolian dialect to thenbsp;present day. Though they number more than a hundrednbsp;thousand, they have hardly been touched with the gospelnbsp;except on brief itinerating trips.

Shunhua. Three days journey west of Hochow are the Salar Moslems. Originally inhabitants of Central Asia they still speak a Turki dialect through most of thenbsp;men speak also Chinese or Tibetan. Numerically the smallest group, they are becoming increasingly important politically and religiously. Although work was begun at Shunhua, on the banks of the Yellow River, in 1927, as yet therenbsp;have been no outward results except in a breaking down ofnbsp;individual prejudice on the one hand and increase of opposition on the other. There is a small Chinese church here.

The Chinese Church

The ultimate goal of the Mission has ever been the establishment of an independent, indigenous church. In 1930 the Chinese Church in West China attained such a status, thenbsp;missionaries acting in the capacity of advisors. The elevennbsp;organized churches of Chinese Christians, with a total membership of over 600 and more than 300 earnest inquirers, arenbsp;now under native church government and entirely self-supporting, the 15 Chinese pastors, evangelists and Bible women being supjxirted by the churches. During the last fivenbsp;years the Mission has shifted the emphasis from Chinese tonbsp;Tibetan and Moslem work so that today two-thirds of thenbsp;foreign missionary force of the Alliance is engaged in worknbsp;among the two latter classes of people.

Among the centers where the churches and their Chinese pastors have taken over responsibility for the Chinese worknbsp;in the districts are the four named below, three of whichnbsp;have been former mission stations.

Taochow (New City)., In 1899 Alliance missionaries began work in this thriving Chinese city and in 1905 a station was established, but is no longer maintained as such,nbsp;being now under Chinese direction. There is a small churchnbsp;here. Taochow (New City) is now called Lin Tan Hsien.

Kuanpu was opened first as an outstation from Titao. R is important as a large market town in the center of a populous district. A small church has been established here.

Lupasi, originally called the Lelacheur Memorial station, situated on the south bank of the Tao river five miles southnbsp;of Taochow (Old City) in the territory of the Chone Prince,nbsp;was opened as a mission station about 1905. The Missionnbsp;acquired at small cost a defunct Tibetan Lamasery. Worknbsp;is carried on in the populous and extensive Tao river valley-There are a number of Tibetans from nearby villages whonbsp;regard the local Chinese church as their church home andnbsp;form a nucleus of what it is hoped will grow into a distinctnbsp;Tibetan church.

Chone, a Tibetan center, was opened as a mission station in 1905. Situated on the north bank of the Tao Rivet,nbsp;fifteen miles southeast of Taochow (Old City), Chone is thenbsp;seat of government of 48 clans of Tibetans. Many Tibetannbsp;villages are reached from this station. Chone is no longernbsp;a mission station, but is now a part of the Lupa district-The Chinese Church in Chone has taken responsibility fornbsp;the Chinese work in the district.

Although the Mandarin speaking missionaries will continue to have important spiritual ministries among the Chinese churches, the principal eflfort in the coming years will be directed to soul-winning eflforts among the Tibetan tribesnbsp;and the Moslem groups. A great and effectual door is opennbsp;to the Alliance in the Kansu-Tibetan Border field, and therenbsp;are many adversaries, but He that is with us is far greaternbsp;than all the forces of the enemy. Let us in the homelandnbsp;stand in faith and prayer, in love and sacrifice, in zeal andnbsp;courage, with all our beloved colaborers in this field so thatnbsp;not only shall the work among the Chinese increase, but anbsp;living church be builded from among the Moslems andnbsp;Tibetans, through whom in turn the gospel shall be taken iquot;nbsp;this generation to hitherto unreached tribes.

CENTRAL CHINA

The field of the Central China Mission of The Christian and Missionary Alliance is located in the provinces ofnbsp;Anhwei, Hupeh and Hunan, Lying chiefly in the populousnbsp;valley of the Yangtze River this field extends for about 700nbsp;miles from the eastern section in Anhwei to the westernnbsp;border of the field in Hunan,

Area and Population

Although the figures for the provinces are shown under China as a whole, we repeat them here for the three provinces in which the Central China Mission ministers :

Area nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Potniiation

Province nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(1932 est.)nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;(1926 est.)

Anhwei ................. 55,090 sq,nbsp;mi,nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;20,198,840

Hupeh .......... 70,312 “nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;28,616,576

Hunan .................. 83,188 “nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;40,529,988

The Alliance is responsible for approximately 6,400,000 people in the Central China field and another 10,000 is considered our responsibility in Shanghai, The Alliance fieldnbsp;in Hupeh is confined principally to one city, Wuchang,nbsp;though business matters are carried on largely in Hankow,nbsp;These two cities with Hanyang comprise the Wuhan centernbsp;located on the Yangtze River with a total population in 1931nbsp;of 777,993,

Climate

In Central China the climate compares favorably with other countries in a similar latitude, being somewhat likenbsp;that in the United States of America, There are four seasons corresponding approximately to the seasons at homenbsp;except that the summer is longer and the heat much morenbsp;oppressive partly because of the humidity. It is necessarynbsp;for the missionaries to go to some nearby mountain resort,nbsp;such as Kikungshan or Ruling, for one or two months innbsp;the hot season. Here as in other high altitudes the weathernbsp;is cooler and invigorating. The Annual Missionary Conference is held during this vacation period.

The winter is cold and damp with much rain and with snow and ice during a month or two from late Decembernbsp;to February, The lowest temperature is about 14° abovenbsp;zero. Spring comes after the Chinese New Year, which isnbsp;later than our New Year, Rains fall quite regularly in thenbsp;spring months, filling the rivers, pools, and water holes, andnbsp;the heavy summer rains following in June, July and partnbsp;of August often cause damaging floods throughout the central China provinces, especially in July, There is usuallynbsp;beautiful weather in the fall months.

Government

The three provinces in which our Central China field is located, Anhwei, Hupeh and Hunan, have each a more stablenbsp;government than in some other provinces in China, and arenbsp;more closely allied to the central government. Each province has a fully established provincial government, but thenbsp;city of Hankow is one of six special municipalities undernbsp;the direct control of the Executive Yuan in Nanking, Thenbsp;six cities are: Nanking, Shanghai, Tsingtao, Tientsin, Han-how and Canton,

Physical Features

The Yangtze River flows through the center of Anhwei Province, To the south the land is mountainous with finenbsp;forests and beautiful scenery. North of the river is a richnbsp;alluvial plain given over to the growing of rice. Whennbsp;these plains are visited by drought or flood severe faminenbsp;conditions often follow. Ocean steamers can travel upnbsp;the Yangtze during the high water season as far as Hankow, The Yangtze also flows through Hupeh Province andnbsp;large tributaries cross Hunan, The western portion ofnbsp;Flui^eh is mountainous,

Hunan, a picturesque province is six-tenths mountainous, three-tenths plains, and one-tenth water. The Siang Rivernbsp;rises in Kwangsi and flows north through Hunan formingnbsp;a great highway of trade between the Yangtze valley andnbsp;Kwantung, The Yuan River rises in Kweichow and flowsnbsp;in a northeasterly direction through the cities of Shenchowfunbsp;and Changteh, The Tze and the Li Rivers drain the centralnbsp;and northern sections of the province. All these riversnbsp;empty in the Tungting Lake in northeast Hunan and thusnbsp;connect with the Yangtze, When the rainy season prevails innbsp;Hunan and the Yangtze is at flood, Tungting Lake becomesnbsp;a large body of water covering more than 4,000 square miles.

Resources

Anhwei Province produces large quantities of rice, tea and silk. The Wuhan center in Hupeh, comprising thenbsp;cities of Wuchang, Hanyang and Hankow on the Yangtzenbsp;River, is called the Chicago of China, In Hanyang arenbsp;China’s greatest iron works, Hankow is a busy international port. The industry, commerce and agriculture ofnbsp;Hupeh make it a prosperous province.

From Hunan Province comes much of the lumber used along the Yangtze, Sixty per cent of the people of Hunannbsp;are farmers. Tea, antimony, coal and tung oil are amongnbsp;the exports.

Progress

The principal routes of travel in this area are by the water ways—along the rivers and in western Hunan by the lakesnbsp;also. There are several bus routes in Anhwei and a railroadnbsp;runs from Wuhu to Wanchih also to Nanking, there connecting with the railway from Nanking to Shanghai, Therenbsp;are bus routes also from Tsingyang to the Yellow Mountainsnbsp;beyond Taipingshien. South of the river in Anhwei practically all travel is by sedan chair. The railways in Hunannbsp;include from Wuchang to Changsha and Changsha to Chu-chow, these being sections of the Canton-Hankow railroad.nbsp;The Peiping-Hankow railway is a main artery of railroadnbsp;travel between the Wuhan cities and the north. Other railways are being constructed and new bus lines are beingnbsp;established.

Postal and telegraph facilities in these provinces have increased greatly during the last few years.

There is a good school system throughout the three provinces and in the principal cities there are middle schools and higher educational institutions, Wuchang is one of thenbsp;greatest government educational centers in China,

The principal hospitals were for years carried on by the Mission Societies, but Chinese organizations are now making some progress in hospital work.

Currency

The regular currency of the Chinese government is in use in Central China, In exchange circles the dollar is stillnbsp;called Mex, but since 1933 it is officially and properlynbsp;known as the Chinese dollar or yuan. The value of thenbsp;Chinese dollar fluctuates considerably in the world markets.nbsp;At present it stands at a little over 30 cents United States.

Languages and Tribes

The Mandarin is used throughout the field, though there is some difference in dialect between Anhwei and Hunan,

Approximately one-tenth of the inhabitants of Hunan Province are aborigines belonging to the Miao family. These tribespeople live in small isolated communities in the mountain fastnesses of the south and southwest.

Religion

See paragraph on Religion under China.

Missionary Occupation

The China Inland Mission was the first Protestant society to begin organized missionary work in Anhwei, a settlement being effected in Anking in 1869. For sixteen years the China Inland Mission was the only mission at work innbsp;the province, four stations being occupied. The Americannbsp;Church Mission was the second to enter Anhwei, openingnbsp;a station in Wuhu in 1885. Most of the other missionsnbsp;working in the province entered during the years 1881 tonbsp;1900, including the Christian and Missionary Alliance innbsp;1888.

A pioneer of the Wesleyan Mission in Central China made a missionary journey into Hunan in 1865, and about fivenbsp;years later two noted missionaries passed through northernnbsp;Hunan on their journey to Szechuan. Between 1875 andnbsp;1886 several attempts were made to establish permanent mission residence in various cities, but the missionaries werenbsp;usually soon driven out by rioting mobs. One of the earliestnbsp;missionary efforts in Hunan was that of the American Presbyterian Mission in the extreme south and a little group ofnbsp;Christians in Linwu was organized into a church in 1894,nbsp;the first duly organized Protestant church in Hunan. Innbsp;1897 two men of the Christian and Missionary Alliance secured a house in Changteh and were soon followed by missionaries of the Cumberland Presbyterian Church and thenbsp;China Inland Mission. That same year the London Missionary Society established its first Hunan station in Yochow.

Much of the information concerning early missionary occupation in China has been taken from that great survey of the various provinces in China, “The Christian Occupationnbsp;of China,” edited by Milton T. Stauffer and published innbsp;1922 by the China Continuation Committee. This book tellsnbsp;of the opening of Changsha by an Alliance missionary, whonbsp;first visited that city in 1898 and who is still ministering innbsp;the Alliance work in Central China. The editor says :

He followed this visit by others, and later by regular residence on a boat just outside the west gate of the city, whence he made dailynbsp;trips within the walls for preaching and bookselling. This steady,nbsp;quiet work, combined with his persistent courage and unfailing courtesy, finally opened the gates of Changsha to all Protestant missions.

In 1861 tw'0 missionaries of the London Missionary Society moved inland to Hankow. Three years later Wuchang was occupied and in 1867 a missionary of the London Missionary Society was appointed to reside there. The firstnbsp;missionary of the Wesleyan Methodist Missionary Societynbsp;entered Hankow in 1862 and other missionaries followednbsp;soon after. The Protestant Episcopal Church began worknbsp;in Wuchang and Hankow in 1868, and the China Inlandnbsp;Mission entered Wuchang in 1874. These and other societies soon extended their ministries to many portions ofnbsp;the province in widespread evangelistic tours. The Christian and Missionary Alliance entered Wuchang in 1893 innbsp;order to establish in Wuchang and Hankow suitable businessnbsp;agency and mission headquarters for the carrying on of thenbsp;work further inland. In addition to extensive work by thenbsp;Homan Catholics the following Protestant agencies are laboring in various parts of these provinces :

The China Inland Mission

The Advent Christian Mission

The Methodist Episcopal Mission

The American Episcopal Mission

The Christian Mission (Disciples)

The Oriental Missionary Society (Chinese workers only)

The Presbyterian (North)

The Baptist Southern Convention

An Independent Faith Mission (in Wuhu only)

With the exception of four or five of the larger cities the above named Protestant groups have no missionaries in areasnbsp;for which the Alliance is responsible.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

The first missionaries of The Christian and Missionary Alliance to settle in Central China entered Wuhu in 1888.nbsp;This city with its pagoda-crowned hills is two days travelnbsp;by river steamer from Shanghai. After devoting more thannbsp;a year to the study of the language, work was begun innbsp;Wuhu city in 1890 and the next year Tatung, also on thenbsp;Yangtze 60 miles above Wuhu, was opened. In 1893 Dr.nbsp;Simpson visited both these cities and a few years later anbsp;superintendent of all Christian and Missionary Alliance Eastnbsp;Asia fields was appointed with headquarters at Wuhu, wherenbsp;a large receiving home for training our Central and Westnbsp;China missionaries was erected. This home and the missionnbsp;headquarters have been removed but we still maintain innbsp;Wuhu a mission station and residence with rooms for missionaries on interior stations in Anhwei Province arrivingnbsp;and departing at this river port.

A further forward move was made in 1893 when Wuchang was entered and in 1897 two Alliance missionaries entered Hunan and began work in Changteh. Thus thenbsp;three sections of the Central China field were opened. Thenbsp;same pioneer spirit has prevailed through the years, andnbsp;since 1922, further advance westward has been made intonbsp;entirely unevangelized counties in Kweichow and Szechuan.

Anhwei Province

The Alliance field in Anhwei includes a territory larger than the State of New Jersey and with a population of overnbsp;4,000,000. Of the nine central stations, six lie in thenbsp;Yangtze plain and three are located among the southernnbsp;mountains. Missionaries reside in only four of these centers, the other five being manned by Chinese workers.

Wuhu. Wuhu, the largest city in Anhwei Province, is a treaty port, noted as a great rice market and anbsp;growing commercial center. A small river divides the citynbsp;from east and west. One-fourth of the city lies south ofnbsp;this small stream and in this section the Alliance Missionnbsp;and church are the only evangelical agencies. The work begun here in 1890 by missionaries who entered for languagenbsp;study in 1888 has grown, not only in the city and the surrounding district, but in other districts in Anhwei so thatnbsp;now there are a number of growing churches, some of whichnbsp;are self-supporting and self-governing. There is a membership of over 50 in the Wuhu church.

Wanchih, Ihsien and Kimen, which formerly were mission stations, are now manned by Chinese workers and these districts are supervised by the missionaries from Wuhu.nbsp;Wanchih is an important commercial center 30 miles southeast of Wuhu. It lies in the midst of a densely populatednbsp;plain which is dotted with towns and crowded with villagesnbsp;and easily reached by the many waterways. Work wasnbsp;opened here in 1896 and, although progress has been slow,nbsp;there is a growing church with a membership of 49. Thisnbsp;church has for years been self-supporting. Ihsien andnbsp;Kimen are each centers of large counties of 100,000 or morenbsp;population. A small church has been established in Ihsien.nbsp;Missionary work was begun in Kimen in 1923. While the

people have been friendly toward the missionaries they are so bound by their old customs and by idolatry that few havenbsp;been willing as yet to confess Christ. Kimen needs prevailing prayer.

Tatung. This city, opened as a mission center in 1891, is located on the south bank of the Yangtze. It isnbsp;an important port and the gateway to a populous plain ofnbsp;several counties, the name meaning, “great thoroughfare.”nbsp;There is a small church in Tatung and a growing work innbsp;the district.

The work in the former mission stations of Taiping, and Tsingyang is now carried on by Chinese workers and isnbsp;supervised from Tatung. Newly established bus routesnbsp;greatly facilitate travel in these districts. Tsingyang, 48nbsp;miles southwest of Nanling and 15 miles south of Tatung,nbsp;was entered by Alliance workers in 1896. It is a wallednbsp;city of about 15,000 population in a county of over 200,000.nbsp;There is a church of 45 members and an aggressive worknbsp;is carried on in the district including a work among the pilgrims who come from five provinces to the Mountain of thenbsp;Nine Glories to worship at a shrine marking the traditionalnbsp;burial place of Guatama Buddha. Taiping, entered aboutnbsp;thirteen years ago by Alliance missionaries, is a bigoted andnbsp;conservative city two days journey from Tsingyang in thenbsp;mountains of southern Anbwei. The church here has anbsp;membership of 38 and there is abundant opportunity fornbsp;evangelistic ministries in the surrounding district.

Nanling. This important center was entered in 1895 by Alliance missionaries after they were twicenbsp;stoned out of the place. It is a walled city of about 20,000nbsp;people, 47 miles south of Wuhu in a county of 200,000nbsp;population and with an adjoining county just as large. Therenbsp;is a thriving church of over 100 members and four churchesnbsp;in other towns in the district have a total membership of 96.nbsp;Lukiang. The only Alliance mission station in Anhweinbsp;north of the Yangtze is Lukiang, a county seat,nbsp;and the center of a large district of more than a half millionnbsp;population. At first the missionaries who entered the citynbsp;in 1921 were driven out and the rented property destroyed,nbsp;but there is now a church of 33 members, and anothernbsp;church in the district at Hsiang-An.

Hupeh Province

The principal purpose of the Alliance in entering Hupeh in 1893 was to establish at Wuchang a base for extendingnbsp;the work further west, and to provide in Hankow acrossnbsp;the river from Wuchang a business office to care for transactions of money and purchase and shipment of goods fornbsp;the missionaries in Kansu and Hunan. However, the blessing of the Lord has extended to the work throughout thenbsp;district around Wuchang and there are now nine churchesnbsp;n the Hupeh section of the Alliance field.

Wuchang. Wuchang, the capital of Hupeh Province, was the first Alliance station in the Central Chinanbsp;field west of Anhwei Province, missionaries entering innbsp;1893. As the work in Hunan Province developed, Wuchangnbsp;became the natural center for the headquarters of the Central China Mission and the transfer from Wuhu to Wuchang was made in 1904. Wuchang is a great official andnbsp;residential city and a Chinese educational center. The Alliance church in the city has a membership of over 100 andnbsp;there are eight additional churches in other towns throughnbsp;the district.

In 1909 a Bible Training School was established in Wuchang for the training of Chinese workers. During the past quarter of a century many graduates have gone into thenbsp;Central China and Kweichow-Szechuan fields where theirnbsp;ministries are being blessed of God.

Hankow. For many years the Alliance Mission carried on in Hankow an extensive Business Departmentnbsp;and home for the convenience of missionaries passingnbsp;through the city or coming to Hankow on business. Thenbsp;work of this Business Department, as it was generally called,nbsp;was of much value to the Alliance Missions in West andnbsp;Central China. However, in later years, with the development of commercial facilities in China, the necessity for itnbsp;was lessened and in 1929 the property was sold and arrangements were made for the necessary business matters of thenbsp;Alliance Missions to be carried on through the Lutherannbsp;Business Agency in Hankow. At the request of the Lutherans an Alliance missionary couple has been loaned to themnbsp;to be in charge of and supported by their Agency.

Hunan Province

Although some missionary work was begun in Hunan a number of years before the Alliance entered that province,nbsp;yet most of the principal cities were still closed to the gospel and the Alliance missionaries had a blessed share in thenbsp;opening of missionary work in several of these cities. Today there are four Alliance mission stations in Hunan.nbsp;Changsha, the capital was a proud heathen city which longnbsp;resisted the entrance of the gospel, but under the providencenbsp;of God an Alliance missionary was instrumental in thenbsp;swinging open of the gates for the entrance of the ambassadors of Christ. In due time a thriving church was plantednbsp;in Changsha and the work prospered in the district. However, in 1922 it was decided to transfer the Alliance worknbsp;in Changsha to one of the other missionary agencies in thatnbsp;city and set free some Alliance missionaries and funds fornbsp;pioneer advance into unoccupied counties further west innbsp;what is now the Kweichow-Szechuan field of the Christiannbsp;and Missionary Alliance.

Changteh. This was the first Alliance station in Hunan-This large city of about 2(X),000 people was entered about 1900. There is a church of 104 members supporting their own pastor and fully self-governing and fivenbsp;other churches are in the district. The city of Changteh isnbsp;an important center through which missionaries pass innbsp;travelling to and from their districts in northern Hunan,nbsp;Kweichow and Szechuan. During recent years communistnbsp;bands have been active in the district around Changteh andnbsp;all the missionaries of the societies working there have hadnbsp;to flee, but always returned as soon as conditions permitted.

Hanshow. This city was first opened as an outstation from Changteh. Several years later (1913) it became a main station when two young women of the Alliancenbsp;Mission took up residence there. In 1917 they were joinednbsp;by a third lady missionary and these three have continuednbsp;in the work in this district since that time. The value ofnbsp;continuity in service is shown in the growth of the work.nbsp;There are now in the Hanshow (also sjielled Hansheo) district 35 centers, including 23 outstations where churches arenbsp;established and 12 other preaching places. There are baptized Christians in all of these places but only 11 of the outstations have resident Chinese workers. The membershipnbsp;of the Hanshow church is 121 and that in other churches ofnbsp;the district 622. Evangelistic Bands have had a fruitfulnbsp;ministry for many years in the Hanshow district and morenbsp;recently in Changteh. The use of Evangelistic Bands is onenbsp;of the most effective ways of spreading the gospel in China,

and the Alliance Missions in Central China, Kweichow-Szechuan, and South China are seeking to increase the number of such Bands so that every district can have the benefit of their ministries.

Lihsien. Sixty miles north of Changteh lies the city of Lihsien (also called Lichow) with a populationnbsp;of about 18,000 in a county of nearly half a million people.nbsp;The Alliance opened a main station here in 1921. Besidesnbsp;the church in the city there are two other churches in thenbsp;district. This station too is in the area frequently threatenednbsp;by communist bands but the work is growing and a goodnbsp;spirit is manifest in the churches.

The Indigenous Church

Not only the faithful ministries of the missionaries and the Chinese workers, but the witness of Chinese Christiansnbsp;have been used of God in the salvation of souls and thenbsp;building of churches so that there are about 55 churches innbsp;the Central China field, of The Christian and Missionarynbsp;Alliance with a total membership of over 1,700. All ofnbsp;these churches are under Joint Native Church and Missionnbsp;government, being related to the Provincial Councils, andnbsp;10 are self-supporting. There are ten ordained pastors andnbsp;uiore than 40 other Chinese workers in full time ministry.nbsp;The Hunan Provincial Council was formed in 1927 and thenbsp;Councils for the other sections a little later. The seriousnbsp;floods and communist raids have brought about severe famine conditions in some portions of the field and our fellownbsp;Christians there should have our continual prayer ministrynbsp;and love in Christ. These conditions have so impoverishednbsp;the members in some of the churches as to cause real hardship and suffering, but nevertheless the work goes forwardnbsp;and reports of recent Conferences show the presence andnbsp;blessing of God with His people.

SHANGHAI

The Shanghai Municipal Area has a population of 3,490,-'62 (1935). It comprises the International Settlement (pop. 1.007, 868 of whom 30,000 are foreign nationals) administered by the Shanghai Municipal Council; the French con-i^ession (pop. 496,536) administered by a Council under thenbsp;Trench Consul General ; and the Municipality of Greaternbsp;Shanghai (pop. 1,986,358) entirely governed by Chinese.

The city of Shanghai is China’s commercial and industrial capital and chief seaport. More than one-half of the importnbsp;trade of China and over one-third of her exports passnbsp;through this city. Shanghai is situated on the bank of thenbsp;^hangpoo River, twelve miles above its mouth at Woosung.nbsp;Large ocean steamers come up to its docks.

Many Missionary Societies and a number of Faith or Independent Mission groups are working in Shanghai. Thenbsp;beadquarters of the China Inland Mission are here. Thenbsp;Loor of Hope Mission carries on a fruitful work for womennbsp;3rid children and some of the missionaries in this work arenbsp;former students of the Missionary Training Institute atnbsp;Nyack. A few years ago The Bible Seminary for Womennbsp;quot;’as moved from Nanking to Shanghai. For many yearsnbsp;°ne of the Alliance missionaries of Central China has beennbsp;3ssigned for teaching ministry in this excellent school, whichnbsp;'S one of the potent forces for Christ in China.

Shanghai. The Christian and Missionary Alliance began work in Shanghai in 1900. For many years anbsp;''aluable and fruitful coeducational school was conducted.

Students in this school not only received a good primary and high school education, but were also taught the Wordnbsp;of God, and many Christian young men and women fromnbsp;this school are now in business life or in Christian ministrynbsp;in various parts of China. The school was closed somenbsp;years ago, and the whole time of the workers is now devotednbsp;to aggressive evangelism and regular spiritual church ministries.

The Chinese Church (The Ella M. Stewart Memorial Church) at the edge of the mission compound is well attended and the members are on fire for God. The threenbsp;missionaries and 14 Chinese workers are doing a work bynbsp;the enabling of the Holy Spirit which makes this one ofnbsp;the most productive centers in the Alliance fields in China.nbsp;There is a church membership of nearly 400. The scope ofnbsp;ministries includes Bible teaching in the Shanghai Biblenbsp;Institute, and special Bible Conferences and evangelisticnbsp;meetings in other cities also.

Shanghai is also the center for the Alliance Press Depot, which was opened here in 1932. Here are carried on thenbsp;publication and distribution of the Bible Magazine and manynbsp;full gospel books and leaflets. The Bible Magazine is nownbsp;edited jointly by a Chinese and a missionary editor, thenbsp;latter being one of the veteran Alliance missionaries of thenbsp;Netherlands East Indies, who was formerly of South Chinanbsp;where the publishing work was conducted in Wuchow fornbsp;many years. In one year the output of this Alliance Pressnbsp;Depot was as follows :

Salvation Tracts ....................... 775,657

Books for Christians ................... 9,639

Scripture Motto Cards ................. 4,149

Tracts for Christians .................. 38,908

Bible Magazines ....................... 22,673

Total pieces

This literature goes into the hands of Chinese in many denominations and in every province of China. Let us pray that it shall be used of God to strengthen the faith and enrich the lives of many who may be sorely tested in these trying days in China.

Praise God for the manifold ministry which is accorded to each of the Alliance workers in Shanghai, the great cosmopolitan city of China, and for the blessing which flows tonbsp;every part of that vast land.

KWEICHOW-SZECHUAN MISSION

The Kweichow-Szechuan field of The Christian and Missionary Alliance is located on the borders of four provinces, namely, the northwestern part of Hunan Province, the southwestern part of Hupeh Province, the northeastern portionnbsp;of Kweichow and the southeastern part of Szechuan Provinces.

' nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Area and Population

Although we give here the figures showing the area and population for the four provinces, it should be understoodnbsp;that the Kweichow-Szechuan field is only in the adjacentnbsp;corners of these provinces. The area given is the 1932 estimate and the population is according to the estimate of 1926.

Province nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Areanbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Population

Kweichow nbsp;nbsp;68,139nbsp;sq. mi.nbsp;nbsp;11,291,261

Szechuan 155,843 “nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;52,063,606

Hunan nbsp;nbsp;83,188nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;40,529,988

Hupeh nbsp;nbsp;70,312nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;“nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;28,616,576

These counties are larger in area than what we in America usually know as counties. The six counties in Kweichownbsp;are about equal in area to the State of Ohio. It requiresnbsp;14 clays to travel across the field from north to south, andnbsp;10 days from east to west. Siu-shan is about 1,500 milesnbsp;inland from Shanghai.

Climate

The climate is moderate, very mild winters with temperatures below freezing for only a few weeks. The rainy season is in May and June. The summers are rather hot.nbsp;sometimes reaching 100 degrees, but the nights are coolnbsp;because of the altitude.

Government

The provinces are under a military form of government, the magistrates and all other officials being appointed bynbsp;the military powers in the different provinces. The centralnbsp;political government at Nanking, however, is endeavoringnbsp;to establish in the provinces as rapidly as possible a civilnbsp;government rather than military.

Physical Features

As a whole this section is mountainous. The waterways form the most inexirensive means of travel and thus thenbsp;stations opened so far are along the rivers. For the mostnbsp;part the country is well watered. The principal rivers flowing through this area are the U River, in parts called thenbsp;Kongtan River, which flows from Kweichow north andnbsp;joins the Yangtze River at Fowchow (new name Fowling) !nbsp;and the North River, the northern branch of the Yuennbsp;River from Hunan. This river passes Siu-shan and another branch goes by Longtan. Another southern branchnbsp;of this North River goes into Kweichow to Song-tao. Thenbsp;cities yet unopened, with one exception, are not accessiblenbsp;by water and can be reached only after days of mountainnbsp;climbing.

Resources

These districts are famous for the Tung oil, oil pressed from nuts of the Tung trees, and used in making paintsnbsp;and varnishes. A well known oil called Siu-Iu is producednbsp;throughout the whole district and is shipped in large quantities to foreign countries. The salt industry is very large,nbsp;salt being carried froffi the salt wells further west in Szechuan throughout these neighboring provinces. There arenbsp;also some coal mines. Kweichow and Szechuan are thenbsp;home of the “poppy-growing” industry and great quantitiesnbsp;of opium are exported. The export trade in opium is a

military monopoly. Rice, corn, wheat, oats and a variety of vegetables are grown. The district also raises a varietynbsp;of fruits, especially citrous fruits such as oranges andnbsp;pumeloes; also persimmons, etc.

Progress

This section is without any good roads. The building of motor roads has been considered but so far nothing hasnbsp;been done. A road has been partially built from Changtehnbsp;in Hunan through Tao-uen and Shen-chow, which is tonbsp;continue to the borders of Hunan and Szechuan. Therenbsp;are no railways in this section.

Currency

While the standard currency is the Mexican silver dollar, yet the copper coin, issued by the provincial authorities, isnbsp;largely used in trade. The value of the copper coin fluctuates greatly. In 1923 a silver dollar cost about 2,4(X) “cash”nbsp;or 240 copper coins, while in 1934 it went as high as 10,000nbsp;cash. Prices of commodities follow these fluctuations. Thesenbsp;conditions are very hard on the people, and react unfavorably on the offerings of the Christians.

Languages and Tribes

With the exception of a portion of the Song-tao country, the common Mandarin Chinese is spoken. The aboriginalnbsp;tribes in the Song-tao district speak Miao.

Religions

Buddhism, Taoism and Confucianism are the principal religions. Temples and shrines are more numerous in thisnbsp;western section than in the eastern portions. There is another more primitive religion consisting of sacrifices to evilnbsp;spirits, presided over by priests called Lao si. This religionnbsp;is very prevalent, especially on the Kweichow side.

Missionary Occupation

While there are a number of missionary societies doing excellent work in other portions of these provinces, the twelve,nbsp;counties of the Alliance field are without other missionarynbsp;occupation.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

At the Conference of the Central China Mission held in Hankow in December, 1922, it was decided that a Committeenbsp;should make a survey of the unoccupied districts in the extreme western portions of Hunan and Hupeh Provinces.nbsp;The survey party, composed of two missionaries and twonbsp;Chinese workers, left Changteh, Hunan, on March 10, 1923,nbsp;and during a two months’ trip surveyed, not only the above-mentioned parts, but also the southwestern section ofnbsp;Szechuan and the northeastern section of Kweichow. Allnbsp;these districts were unoccupied by any Mission. The findings of this Committee were reported at the Central Chinanbsp;Conference in the summer of 1923, and it was decided tonbsp;open two stations : Siu-Shan in Szechuan and Songtao innbsp;Kweichow, both of which could be reached by waterways.nbsp;The party of six missionaries appointed to this new section,nbsp;accompanied by two native evangelists, two Bible women,nbsp;two colporteurs, and a small Evangelistic Band arrived atnbsp;their destination in December, 1923. In the Annual Conference of 1934 it was decided to make this western field a separate Mission to be called the Kweichow-Szechuan Mission.nbsp;Song-tao. This station in Kweichow Province was openednbsp;in December, 1923. Property was secured andnbsp;there are now two chapels in the town, one for Chinese andnbsp;one for the tribespeople. Three outstations, Ta-Ping-chang,nbsp;Meng-chi, and Kan-lung-Keo, have been opened from Song-tao, but the last named of these was later placed under thenbsp;station at Siu-shan, it being nearer to that city. More thannbsp;100 converts have been baptized in that district since thenbsp;opening of the work. About one-half of the converts arenbsp;Miao tribespeople.

Siu-shan. In December, 1923, property was purchased and a station opened in Siu-shan in Szechuan Province. There are now four outstations and one other preaching point in connection with this center. The outstations arenbsp;Ping-Kusi, I-Mei, Chin-Chi-Chang, Kan-lung-Keo, the lastnbsp;named being located in the Song-tao district, though supervised from Siu-shan.

Long-tan. At this busiest town in Uy-Yang county in the province of Szechuan, a mission station wasnbsp;opened in the summer of 1931. Property was purchased bynbsp;the Mission. Late in 1935 two men were baptized, the first-fruits of the work at Long-tan (also spelled Lung-tan).

Peng-shui. On the first day of the year 1932 a missionary couple opened work at Peng-shui on the Kong-tan River in Szechuan, property having been acquired by thenbsp;Mission. The baptized Christians numbered fourteen in thenbsp;spring of 1935. It was from this station that an Alliancenbsp;missionary was taken captive by communist bands and heldnbsp;for several weeks until he escaped through the grace of God.

The Red Menace

In northwestern Hunan and portions of Szechuan and Kweichow are many thousands of Chinese Reds. Thesenbsp;communist bands are a great scourge to the Chinese peoplenbsp;and bitter opponents of the gospel message. During the pastnbsp;two years missionaries of several societies have had to flee innbsp;haste from their districts as the communist armies approachednbsp;in order to save their lives or avoid being held for ransom.nbsp;Other sections of China from time to time are overrun bynbsp;these bands, but in this area the menace is almost continual,nbsp;despite the efforts of the Chinese armies to subdue them.

The Chairman of the field writes : “China as a whole stands in much need of prayer. There are a goodly numbernbsp;of Christian men in the government working hard to savenbsp;their country, but Japan is pressing them hard and the anti-Red campaign has to be given up at times in order to copenbsp;with these other problems.” Pray that in the face of hernbsp;many problems the Chinese government will be steadfast innbsp;her stand against communism whether from within or fromnbsp;without. Pray also that the missions and the churches innbsp;China shall be on fire for God and take advantage of presentnbsp;opportunities for witnessing while most of the doors arenbsp;still open.

The Indigenous Church

The Christians have been taught from the beginning of the work that, as soon as they were able to support their ownnbsp;work, the missionaries hoped to move on to new territory.nbsp;The Christians are active in helping in the evangelistic program throughout the district. In the two older stations thenbsp;general expenses of the work, as well as part of the nativenbsp;preacher’s salary, are met by the churches.

No foreign style buildings have been built in this field and such remodeling as has been done is consistent with the expectation that soon the Chinese churches will he able to takenbsp;over the work without too great a burden of upkeep. Praynbsp;for these infant churches and for the large districts wherenbsp;as yet our Lord has no followers. These millions for whomnbsp;Christ died have a right to an opportunity of hearing thenbsp;gospel message and seeing it revealed in the lives of truenbsp;believers.

SOUTH CHINA

The South China Mission of The Christian and Missionary Alliance is located in the inland province of Kwangsi the extreme southern part of China. On the east Kwangsinbsp;¦S bordered by the province of Kwangtung ; on the north,nbsp;hy the provinces of Hunan and Kweichow ; on the west, bynbsp;the province of Yunnan; and on the south by the provincesnbsp;of Kwangtung, China, and Tonkin, French Indo-China.

Area and Population

The Kwangsi Government Report for 1934 gives the area of the province as 83,076 square miles ; and the population,nbsp;W,734,100. Thus the area is nearly equal to that of Pennsylvania and Ohio combined and the population almost asnbsp;large as that of the State of New York. Some estimatesnbsp;pve a much larger population in Kwangsi. The Southnbsp;China Mission seeks also to evangelize some portions beyondnbsp;the border. The foreign population is very small, being approximately only 150, located principally in the larger cities.

Climate

The climate of Kwangsi is tropical in the south, about one-third of the province lying within the Tropic of Cancer.nbsp;Thus, the heat is excessive and the humidity great fromnbsp;^Hy to September. In the north the climate is more moderate, although changes of temperature are sudden, and frostnbsp;and snow not uncommon in winter. The most pleasant season of the year is from October to December, during whichnbsp;period most of the itinerating work in country districts isnbsp;earried on. The damp, rainy season begins in January, lasting through April, and is followed in the summer months bynbsp;heavy tropical showers, which bring China’s many riversnbsp;to flood tide.

Government

The province has a civil Governor, who is theoretically appointed by the Central Government at Nanking. Thenbsp;arrny, however, is not under the control of the Governornbsp;hnt has its own leader, also appointed by Nanking. Subjectnbsp;to Nanking’s approval, the government political office nominates a group of Commissioners who form the Governor’snbsp;cabinet. The province is divided into districts, each districtnbsp;presided over by a magistrate.

, The above method is only a temporary one. The Kuom-¦ngtang—China’s National Party—has taken upon itself the responsibility of teaching the people methods of conductingnbsp;a democratic form of government. Its objective is the election of all government civil leaders by the people and thenbsp;bringing of China’s military forces under complete controlnbsp;of the central government.

Kwangsi, being so far south of the Central government’s ^oat of power, and because of poor communications, hasnbsp;quot;’orked independent of the central government to a largenbsp;oxtent. This has been the cause of serious differences whichnbsp;”1 the past have resulted in much bloodshed. However,nbsp;'vithin more recent years, motor roads have been opened,nbsp;oven in the most backward provinces, and the airplane is anbsp;oommon sight. Thus the day of a really united China isnbsp;quot;lade possible in the not distant future.

History

Kwangsi was one of the last provinces to be conquered by fhe Chinese. Lying so far to the south and representing anbsp;Sreat tract of unexplored territory, it was called “Kwangsi,”nbsp;aieaning Broad-West; while the area to the east was callednbsp;“Kwangtung”—Broad-East. Because of its distance fromnbsp;the center of the larger body of migrated Chinese in thenbsp;Yellow and Yangtze river valleys and being inland, it required centuries before the Chinese undertook to subjugatenbsp;Kwangsi fully.

Approximately a thousand years ago the famous General, Ti Chin, defeated the Kwangsi aboriginal General, Nongnbsp;Tsz Koo. The victor’s soldiers then settled in the province,nbsp;exacting tribute for their Emperor. Since then Kwangsi hasnbsp;been known as a wild, dangerous province. This is due, nonbsp;doubt, to the constant trouble between the Chinese and thenbsp;aboriginal people, who were being pushed back by their conquerors deeper into the mountain fastnesses. The Emperornbsp;appointed a Viceroy, who represented him as ruler of thenbsp;two provinces of Kwangtung and Kwangsi.

In 1911 Kwangsi joined in the revolutionary efforts against the Manchus and, with the other provinces, established a republican form of government. Since that timenbsp;Kwangsi’s history has been written in bloodshed. She hasnbsp;survived experiences which would have terminated the existence of many a modern state in other countries. Isolation, poverty, corruption of its civil and military officials,nbsp;indefiniteness of its political aims, and the machinations ofnbsp;outside influences have all contrived for the demise ofnbsp;Kwangsi. But she has survived and, provided there is anbsp;definite uniting of provincial and government forces,nbsp;Kwangsi’s future history should be bright with hope of realnbsp;advancement on all lines.

Physical Features

The entire province of Kwangsi is very mountainous, being the last step downward from the Himalayan and Tibetan heights. Extending north and west from Wuchow arenbsp;numerous mountain ranges, growing higher and higher toward the highlands of Kweichow and Yunnan. Many ofnbsp;the mountain ranges are of limestone formation. These arenbsp;fantastic in shape and make parts of Kwangsi unrivalled fornbsp;scenic beauty. The granite mountain ranges to the northnbsp;are covered with pine and camphor trees.

Perhaps no province in China is blessed with such a network of rivers as is this inland province of Kwangsi. Four large rivers with their important tributaries penetrate tonbsp;every part of the province and for centuries have been thenbsp;highways of travel and transportation.

Tigers, leopards, armadillos, porcupines, civet-cats are found throughout the province, and monkeys are very common near the borders of Tonkin.

Resources

Rice is the main agricultural product, two crops a year usually being harvested. Wheat is raised in the north;nbsp;sugar cane and corn are grown extensively in the west;nbsp;peanuts, sweet potatoes, water chestnuts, cotton, hemp, arrowroot, and tea are also raised in various parts of the province.nbsp;Great quantities of wood oil and anise oil, also cinnamon andnbsp;lumber, are exported yearly from Kwangsi. Ebony, teak,,nbsp;camphor, maple, pine, bamboo, and banyan tree.s are thenbsp;most common. There is considerable silk culture in thenbsp;province, the mulberry tree supplying leaves for the silknbsp;worm. Kwangsi’s minerals are largely untouched. Gold,,nbsp;silver, copper, asbestos, and galena are found in scatterednbsp;areas. Large deposits of tin, antimony and. coal are awaiting mining.

Progress

Kwangsi, formerly known as one of the most backward provinces in China, has completely reversed the situation in

recent years. Experts from many foreign nations have been engaged as advisors. These include engineers, aviation experts, chemists, educators, military advisors, and other scientifically trained men. Besides these, a corps of especiallynbsp;trained Chinese experts are working on a program whichnbsp;has earned for the once backward Kwangsi the title of “Thenbsp;Model Province.”

The government has pushed forward a well laid plan for motor roads. There are now approximately 2,500 miles ofnbsp;motor roads connecting practically every large city in thenbsp;province and more are under construction. Kwangsi hasnbsp;yet to have its first railroad, but the airplane and motor carnbsp;have played a very important part in the marvelous stridesnbsp;made in recent years.

Until recently there were no modern industries in the province. Now Kwangsi is not only planning to supplynbsp;largely its own demand for modern manufactured articles,nbsp;but expects to export as well. At present there are cottonnbsp;mills; glass, leather, alcohol, sulphuric acid and munitionnbsp;factories. Sugar and cement factories are to be erected innbsp;the near future.

Good electric light plants have been installed in the principal cities. A modern pathological laboratory, the finest of its kind in China, has been built at Nanning. Modern educational methods have replaced the old. A splendid university has been established in Wuchow. New hospitals, Chinese controlled, have sprung up in all the cities and largernbsp;towns. A mass educational movement has been launchednbsp;with the objective of giving every person in the province atnbsp;least a chance for an education.

Currency

China’s monetary system is a source of great bewilderment to foreigners and Kwangsi is no exception. There are three distinct currencies in use, each valued in terms ofnbsp;copper cents. (The cash is used now only in isolated areas.)

First, the Kwangsi dollar, the common medium of exchange, is about 30% cheaper than the national silver dollar. However, the provincial government has issued a new “big”nbsp;dollar whose silver value is the same as the National silvernbsp;dollar, the object being to do away with the “little” dollar.

Second, the National silver dollar. This has the backing of the Central Government and is used in the Customs andnbsp;Post Office.

Third, the Hongkong dollar. This dollar, having the backing of the British government, is in great demand insomuch that it is usually at least 10% higher than the Nationalnbsp;silver dollar, although both are on the silver basis. Becausenbsp;of Kwangsi’s proximity to Hongkong, most purchases arenbsp;made there and thus the Hongkong currency is the one withnbsp;which the missionary has his largest dealings.

In the interior the people talk in terms of copper coins and much prefer them to silver as there are no counterfeits.nbsp;Copper currency exchange varies as to the number receivednbsp;for a silver dollar in various parts of the province.

Late in 1935 the Chinese government passed a decree changing the monetary system of China from its long standing silver currency basis to a controlled currency regulatednbsp;by the government. It remains to be seen whether the nequot;'nbsp;policy will be effective or permanent.

Languages and Tribes

The province of Kwangsi is divided roughly into two main language areas by a line drawn diagonally from northnbsp;of Lungchow in the west to Chaoping in the east. Northnbsp;of this line Mandarin speaking Chinese are in the majoritywhile south of the line Cantonese predominates. In bothnbsp;sections of the field there are large numbers of aboriginalnbsp;tribesmen speaking various dialects of their own. Mandarinnbsp;speaking Chinese are prominent in official and educationalnbsp;circles, while the Cantonese lead in business enterprises-Mandarin is considered the national language and is taughtnbsp;in all public schools. The written language is practicallynbsp;the same in Mandarin and Cantonese, but the pronunciatio*’nbsp;is different entirely.

Many years ago, when China was divided into feudal states, practically the whole of South China was inhabitednbsp;by various wild tribes. In course of time the Chinese rulersnbsp;extended their territory and presently came into armed cofl'nbsp;flict with the aborigines of the southland. Many tribes wet^

defeated and driven into the wild mountain territories where today they have their own homes. These tribesmen stillnbsp;comprise fully one-half of the population of the entirenbsp;province. They are made up of many tribes, chief of whichnbsp;are Chwang, Yao, Tung, Miao and Hakka. Many of thesenbsp;tribes people, in addition to their own dialect, speak a smattering of Mandarin or Cantonese although thousands, particularly the women, speak nothing but their own tribalnbsp;tongue.

In addition, there are scores of dialects spoken throughout the province. As a rule, the ancestors of Kwangsi’s peoplenbsp;came with the conquering Chinese army or later in series ofnbsp;migrations and have kept up the dialect spoken by theirnbsp;forebears. The men nearly always speak Cantonese ornbsp;Mandarin, but the women know scarcely a word of either.

None of the tribes are so numerous or so easy of access as the Chwang, who are members of the Great Tai race,nbsp;found also in the provinces of Yunnan and Kweichow, innbsp;Burma, Siam, and French Indo-China. This tribe has intermingled with the Chinese much more fully than any othernbsp;and, in the large city areas, the Chwangs are steadily losingnbsp;many of their tribal customs and characteristics. Alliancenbsp;missionaries have worked among this great tribe who formerly ruled a large part of western Kwangsi. It was foundnbsp;in the northwest that the prevailing language was Chwang.nbsp;On an eight hundred mile trip in that area, thousands innbsp;the country markets could understand scarcely a sentencenbsp;of Mandarin. The Alliance Mission has made this tribe,nbsp;with its approximately three million souls, a subject ofnbsp;prayer, and increased work among them will be carried onnbsp;as God enables.

One of the least known and most primitive of the tribes is the Yao. This tribe is divided into a number of smallernbsp;tribes. Work among these people is being undertaken bynbsp;the Chinese Conference of The Christian and Missionarynbsp;Alliance, but urgent help is needed to reach these primitivenbsp;people shut away from the gospel centers by some of thenbsp;highest mountain ranges in Kwangsi.

The Tung tribe, estimated at 3CK),OOO, live in the wild mountain fastnesses of northern Kwangsi and the neighboring province of Kweichow. In 1931 the Mission began worknbsp;among this people, appointing a missionary couple to thisnbsp;field. The work calls for rugged pioneering. As yet therenbsp;are very few converts, but there is a great open door. Asnbsp;the missionaries have visited these tribesmen in their mountain villages, they have rejoiced to note the eagerness withnbsp;which the Tungs have listened to the gospel.

The various Miao tribes, scattered through the north and western part of the province, number many tens of thousands and present a challenge of unreached peoples fornbsp;whom the Alliance Mission is responsible.

Religions

In Kwangsi there are several sects of Buddhism, Taoism and Mohammedanism. During the past few years the student class endeavored to destroy idolatry. Temples werenbsp;broken into and idols smashed. The buildings were thennbsp;seized by the authorities and are now used as public buildings, mostly schools. At present Buddhism and Taoism arenbsp;being revived and there is distinct government encouragement to Confucianism. China’s past experiences have shakennbsp;the faith of many in the gods of wood and stone, and todaynbsp;the opportunity of the church is unprecedented.

Missionary Occupation

The natives of Kwangsi were for years opposed to the foreigner settling in their midst and met every attempt ofnbsp;entrance with determined opposition that reached the pointnbsp;of mob violence and bloodshed. In the west a French priestnbsp;was brutally murdered and a serious outrage was perpetratednbsp;in the city of Nanning. During these early pioneer days,nbsp;the martyr spirit was always in evidence as brave men, withnbsp;hearts burning to save the lost, attempted repeatedly tonbsp;enter the province, heroically faced hardships and dangers,nbsp;seeking to glorify their Lord and Saviour.

The Alliance and the Southern Baptists were the first to secure a permanent foothold in 1896. Later the Englishnbsp;Wesleyan and the Church Missionary Society opened work,nbsp;confined largely to Wuchow and the northeastern corner otnbsp;the province. Beside these, work is being carried on by thenbsp;Bible Churchman’s Missionary Society, the Faith and Lovenbsp;Mission, the Pentecostal Mission, the Church of God, andnbsp;the Chinese Independent Church. Seventh Day Adventistsnbsp;are established in several of the larger cities. French andnbsp;American Roman Catholic organizations are workingnbsp;throughout the province. The American Bible Society, thenbsp;British and Foreign Bible Society, and the National Biblenbsp;Society of Scotland have worked together with the variousnbsp;Missions for years in circulating the Word of God through'nbsp;out Kwangsi.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

In 1892 Dr. A. B. Simpson made a world-wide tour of mission fields and visited South China, calling at Canton andnbsp;spending a few days in that city. His soul burned with anbsp;passion for China’s unreached millions, especially for thenbsp;nearby inland province of Kwangsi—then unopened to thenbsp;gospel. Upon his return to America a call for volunteersnbsp;was made and a missionary couple sailed for China on October 25, 1892, and took up their residence in Canton, readynbsp;to enter the closed province when God opened the way.

Two years later Dr. Simpson again visited China and advised that as soon as sufficient recruits arrived they should enter the still closed and hostile province of Kwangsi. Bynbsp;1896 the little group of missionaries were ready for thenbsp;venture of faith, the securing of a permanent residence »’nbsp;the forbidden province. Surveys had already been madenbsp;and Wuchow was the city for which those intrepid pioneersnbsp;set forth. After weeks of travel, the little boat finallynbsp;reached Wuchow and the Lord marvelously opened the waynbsp;for the rental of a “haunted house.” God was definitelynbsp;leading and this city proved to be a really strategic basenbsp;from which to pioneer to the ends of the province.

The objective of our Kwangsi Mission has been the evaU' gelization of the entire province. After nearly forty yearsnbsp;of service there are still millions who have not been reachednbsp;with the Gospel. These are largely in the far interior pot'nbsp;tions of the province. The forty years is a record of Godsnbsp;faithfulness amid great danger and opposition. Mission'nbsp;aries have been persecuted, stoned, robbed, mobbed, drivennbsp;out of cities ; have passed through riots and faced dangersnbsp;of civil war; have been kidnapped and held for ransomgt;nbsp;and have passed through the Red scourge. One missionarynbsp;was called to his reward through the medium of a hostilenbsp;bullet and more than a dozen others have gladly laid downnbsp;their lives for the work in this province. This is part otnbsp;the price paid for the souls won by The Christian and Missionary Alliance in Kwangsi.

Missionaries and Chinese evangelists and pastors are preaching the gospel in the two principal Chinese languages.nbsp;Mandarin and Cantonese, and in the Tung tribal language-Chinese workers bear witness also in Chwang, Yao aiionbsp;K’eh-chia (Hakka).

The following stations now occupied by missionaries ate described in the order of their opening.

Wuchow. In 1896 the honor of having the first resident missionary within Kwangsi’s hostile borders fellnbsp;to the Alliance Mission. The work thus started amidstnbsp;great persecution and trial has never been abandoned. Fromnbsp;the first residence, a “haunted house” the work has grownnbsp;until there is now a church membership of over 150. Thisnbsp;church has for years been self-supporting and not only sonbsp;but, through its own paid workers and voluntary helpers, isnbsp;pushing out into the surrounding territories and openingnbsp;other cities to the Gospel message.

Wuchow, a city of 86,000, is the “gateway of the province,” situated at the junction of the West and Cassia Rivers and over 200 miles from Hongkong and Canton. It is thenbsp;oldest provincial city, having been built in A. D. 592 and wasnbsp;the seat of government until 1665 when the Governmentnbsp;was transferred to Kweilin.

Having secured living quarters, the base of our missionary operations was removed from Macao to Wuchow, where hasnbsp;remained our Mission Headquarters for South China. Herenbsp;the Annual Missionary Conference is held, also the bi-annual gathering of the Chinese Alliance.

The Alliance Receiving Home is located on the hilltop opposite the city of Wuchow and here most of the missionaries have spent long months of hard language study preparatory to going inland.

In order to train Chinese workers in the Word, two Bible schools were opened in Wuchow, one for men and one fornbsp;Women. The Alliance message is being made known throughout South China through this medium. The enrollmentnbsp;averages about 60 students, not only from Kwangsi and thenbsp;surrounding provinces but also from several nearby countries. The students represent many parts of the Christiannbsp;Church. These Bible Schools are now fully self-supporting.

A Primary School for girls was also opened in Wuchow. This school is now carried on by the Wuchow Chinesenbsp;Church and is self-supporting with an enrollment of aboutnbsp;195.

The Wuchow Church has supported a worker among the near-by Yao mountain tribesmen for several years and therenbsp;’S now a church nucleus there. Besides this the Wuchownbsp;church has opened an outstation recently.

banning. This city, with a population of 80,0(X) situated on the West River 360 miles west of Wuchownbsp;¦On the main trade route to Yunnan province, was opened innbsp;^897. Just north of this city the great aboriginal chief received his final defeat and from that time Nanning has retained its importance. In 1907 it became the capital of thenbsp;province.

Opposition characterized the beginning of this work, but God overruled and there has been a steady growth. As anbsp;result of the Anti-Church movement of 1925 the churchnbsp;suffered greatly in the loss of membership but in 1933, withnbsp;a membership of 50, it became fully self-supporting and hasnbsp;also opened a new outstation. Nanning is the main stationnbsp;in the district where there are six churches with a totalnbsp;membership of nearly 200 Christians. The Men’s Shortnbsp;Term Cantonese Bible School is conducted here for threenbsp;months of each year. In this area are many unreachednbsp;Ch wang tribesmen along the lower reaches of the Red River.

Kweilin. Situated 250 miles north of Wuchow on the

Cassia River, Kweilin, the provincial capital of 70,000, was the first station opened in the Mandarin language area. (1898.) Years of unusual blessing rested onnbsp;the Kweilin church and district. On April 26, 1924, thenbsp;one used of God to open the work in this city was killed,nbsp;shot by a stray bullet fired from a robber’s rifle. During thenbsp;Anti-Christian campaign of 1925 the Kweilin church suffered greatly. The ten churches of the district have gonenbsp;through a fiery trial, but God’s promises are being realized.nbsp;They are pressing toward self-support and hope also to takenbsp;the Gospel to the unreached in their district. The Districtnbsp;church membership is now about 309.

A Mandarin District Short Term Bible School of three months duration is held annually in this city.

Line how. In 1906 the most strategic city in the great north west, the city of Liuchow with a population ofnbsp;34,000, was opened. From this center a network of riversnbsp;and roads radiate throughout the province, and into thenbsp;neighboring province of Kweichow.

A strong church was early established but, like many other of the larger churches, in 1925 it was severely tried. Atnbsp;present there is a strong local church and district membership of about 130. For three months each year a Shortnbsp;Term Bible School is carried on.

This great district is a natural center for evangelistic band work. In the north are the Tung and Miao tribesmen andnbsp;in the west are great numbers of the Chwang tribesmen. Itsnbsp;borders in the north push beyond the provincial boundarynbsp;line into the province of Kweichow to the city of Kuchow.nbsp;Lungchow. The city of Lungchow was opened to the Gospel in 1906. It is an important city locatednbsp;over 500 miles from Wuchow on the border near Frenchnbsp;Indo-China. While the people of the city are largely Chinese, seven-tenths of those residing in the district are eithernbsp;Annamese or Chwang tribesmen. This city has sufferednbsp;much during Communist and revolutionary movements andnbsp;a once large church membership has decreased to about 100nbsp;in the whole district.

The territory around Lungchow is very needy. Various tribes occupying the mountain areas await the entrance ofnbsp;the Gospel.

Poseh. Poseh (also called Pakshik) is situated in the extreme west of the province of Kwangsi, about 250 miles from the capital city of Nanning. It is a great centernbsp;for the opium caravans from Yunnan and Kweichow. Hundreds of thousands of dollars worth of this drug is broughtnbsp;to Poseh and shipped by launch down the river to the coastnbsp;or wayside markets. The tax on opium is one of the chiefnbsp;sources of revenue for the Kwangsi government.

Work in this city was begun in 1913 by a Standard Oil Agent whose heart, burning with a love of souls, led him tonbsp;give up selling oil and start out in faith to preach the Gospel, God blessed his testimony and a number were won tonbsp;the Lord. A few years later because of ill health he wasnbsp;forced to leave the field and the Christian and Missionarynbsp;Alliance assumed full responsibility and sent missionaries tonbsp;carry on the work. Communists, bandits and political turmoil have made the work difficult but God has blessed.

The growing church has now a membership of over fifty. Thus far there are only three outstations, but thenbsp;greater part of the district is still unreached. Various tribesnbsp;of the Miaos and hundreds of Chwang villages lie in thisnbsp;District where much ground still awaits to be claimed fornbsp;Christ.

Kingyuen. This city with a population of between forty and fifty thousand is a natural center for thenbsp;evangelization of vast stretches of northern Kwangsi, whichnbsp;are inhabited chiefly by Chwang tribesmen. This stationnbsp;was opened in 1918. The church here has now a membership of about 100 and has recently reached the basis of self-support.

From this center it is hoped to reach the unevangelized in western Kwangsi. Already God is blessing and opening upnbsp;opportunities among the Chwangs in this area.

Changan. Changan, situated one hundred miles north of Liuchow, is the gateway to the mountainous sections inhabited by the Tung and Miao tribesmen. Being thenbsp;terminus for launch and bus traffic, it is a busy distributingnbsp;point for the tribesmen and Chinese living in the far interior. In 1923 missionaries took up residence in the citynbsp;for the first time. God has blessed the work and the littlenbsp;group of two or three enquirers has now grown into a congregation of earnest, genuinely converted men and womennbsp;who meet regularly in a suitable chapel on a main thoroughfare.

Fuluh. Lying among the mountains north of Changan and but a few miles from the Kweichow border isnbsp;Fuluh, the natural center for work among the Tung aboriginal tribesmen. While only a small market place, it isnbsp;still the most important village on the long River and anbsp;natural distributing point for the tribe as they bring theirnbsp;wares for barter with the Chinese.

Fuluh became a mission station in February, 1932, with the Tung tribe as the missionaries’ objective. Years ofnbsp;language study and survey work were necessary before muchnbsp;could be done, but now there are signs of an awakenednbsp;interest in the Gospel on the part of this people and a greatnbsp;turning to God from among this tribe is expected.

Kowloon Home. In order that the children of Alliance missionaries in South China might havenbsp;proper opportunity for attending school, at a cost within thenbsp;range of the modest allowances they receive, it was decidednbsp;in 1933 to establish a hostel in Kowloon as a home for missionaries’ children under the supervision of a missionarynbsp;couple. Kowloon is across the bay from Hongkong andnbsp;many English and Chinese who have offices or business innbsp;Hongkong make their homes in Kowloon. A residence herenbsp;combines the advantage of protection under the British flag,nbsp;since Kowloon like Hongkong is under British control, andnbsp;excellent English school facilities. Thus the children livenbsp;in the Alliance hostel and attend public school.

The places named below were opened as mission centers in the order given, but the missionaries no longer reside innbsp;these centers, the work being carried on by Chinese workers.

Kwaiping, a city situated at the junction of the West and Willow Rivers, 140 miles west of Wuchow, was openednbsp;in 1897. The church has a membership of over 90 and isnbsp;the main station in a district with ten other churches havingnbsp;a total membership of about 325.

There is a school for the blind located here which is now under the management of the Chinese Conference. Thenbsp;local church recently opened a primary school, mainly fornbsp;the children of Christians, under Chinese oversight.

Tangyuen was opened to the gospel in 1897. Only 35 miles west of Wuchow, it was early a training ground fornbsp;new missionaries. Here were experienced many thrillingnbsp;trials, but God marvelously preserved those early workers,nbsp;and today there is a growing work in this city.

Pinglo, in the Mandarin area, was opened in 1904. Lying south of Kweilin on the Cassia River, it soon became a center for expansion and a new district was formed which nownbsp;comprises four churches with a total membership of aboutnbsp;100.

Pinglo is in a newly exploited and wealthy mineral area. Because of new motor roads, the opportunity of the churchnbsp;in the opening of new districts is distinctly greater.

Watlam. In the southeastern corner of Kwangsi, situated in a fertile plain with a population of 50,000 lies the city ofnbsp;Watlam, which was opened in 1904. This large district hasnbsp;a population of about half a million. During the first fewnbsp;years, the work here was not very encouraging, but in laternbsp;years God worked mightily.

This district, with a church membership of almost 500, has taken the lead in self-support which has been the causenbsp;of great praise on the part of the Chinese church. In 1933nbsp;the entire district of six churches became fully self-supporting, the total budget of $3,500 Mex. being met throughnbsp;voluntary subscriptions. Not only has God taught them tonbsp;trust Him for the supply of their running expenses but alsonbsp;they have bought and repaired church property looking tonbsp;the Lord to supply these needs as well.

Pingnam, opened in 1905, as a mission center, is the natural gateway to the Yao tribesmen. Varied has been itsnbsp;history. At present it is a stronghold of the Americannbsp;Roman Catholic church. The membership of the Alliancenbsp;church is small but the district, comprising several churches,nbsp;presents a challenge of opportunity, great need, and manynbsp;unevangelized villages. A church was established for thenbsp;Yaos in one of their villages and the work has now beennbsp;transferred to the Chinese Conference as a field for evangelization.

Work

and blessing the printed Word might wield in China, a printing press wasnbsp;set up at Wuchow which has issued many hundred thousands of tracts, needful Bible expositions and also a bimonthly Bible Magazine. Bible Magazine readers are foundnbsp;in every province of China and many other countries wherenbsp;Chinese reside. The Press continued its ever-increasin»nbsp;ministry at Wuchow until Oct. 5, 1932 when it was destroyed by fire. The press headquarters were then movednbsp;to Shanghai where the printing is done by the Commercialnbsp;Press. Since this change the Press is having an even widernbsp;and more varied ministry.

In 1935 a new Chinese Alliance Hymnal was published-The hymns were collected, edited or translated by a Coni' mittee on the field with a view to furthering Alliance trut»nbsp;and testimony in China.

The Indigenous Church

The objective of the South China Mission has been to establish on Chinese soil an indigenous church that will benbsp;self-supporting, self-governing and self-propagating, and tonbsp;this end both missionaries and Chinese workers are earnestlynbsp;laboring. A Joint Committee, composed of five Chinesenbsp;elected by the Chinese Conference and five missionariesnbsp;elected by the Missionary Conference, has the oversight ofnbsp;all work that is supported partly by Chinese and partly bynbsp;mission funds. Self-support is rapidly developing. Thenbsp;Chinese Conference and Chinese Executive Committee havenbsp;heen organized along the same lines as the Missionary Conference and the Mission Committee, and they function in anbsp;similar manner also. When a congregation can supply six-fenths of its running expenses, including salaries, etc., itnbsp;passes from the oversight of the Joint Committee to thenbsp;direction and management of the Chinese Committee. Bynbsp;increasing its offerings ten per cent annually it becomes self-supporting within four years. Already eleven such churches,nbsp;with a total membership of 884, are under the direction ofnbsp;this Committee. Ten of these churches are entirely self-supporting and the eleventh is pressing toward the goal.nbsp;If is expected that each year other congregations will attainnbsp;fu this standard.

The Chinese Conference and Committee have taken over Jhe management of the Blind Children’s School at Kwaip-[ug ; conduct other schools for Christian boys and girls ;nbsp;have assumed responsibility for the rent of all rented chapelsnbsp;throughout the province; have charge of the colportagenbsp;'Vork; and are prepared with the Alission Committee to takenbsp;initiative in opening new work in pioneer areas. Thenbsp;^hinese Church has accepted the great unevangelized Yaonbsp;fountain territory, where live thousands of unreachednbsp;Whesmen, as their field for evangelization. They issue Thenbsp;^Hance JVeekly in Chinese, which has been recognized bynbsp;me government as entitled to special postal privileges, andnbsp;'hey also issue a Sunday School paper which they hope willnbsp;become The Chinese Sunday School Times. It already hasnbsp;a circulation of more than 400 and is read in almost everynbsp;province in China as well as in several foreign countriesnbsp;where Chinese have emigrated.

The work of the missionary is now largely that of pioneering among South China’s many tribes, her walled cities and isolated mountain areas whose people are still unreached.nbsp;When missionaries participate in any way in the work ofnbsp;the native church, it is done at the request of the Chinese.nbsp;In the sphere of the Bible School work and teaching ministrynbsp;the native church feels that the missionary is urgently needed.nbsp;He also has an important advisory ministry in cooperationnbsp;and fellowship with the Chinese leaders and the nativenbsp;church. The indigenous church should not be merely anbsp;separate and independent organization, but a member in fullnbsp;communion with the entire Body of Christ.

An important phase of the work is the ministry of Chinese Evangelistic Bands, who are reaching out into the interiornbsp;pioneer areas carrying the Gospel to peoples and tribesnbsp;where the missionary has never gone. In one month members of a band gave a brief gospel message in 1,800 homesnbsp;and preached in all the towns and villages of that sectionnbsp;while another band sent its members two by two into everynbsp;village within a radius of five miles from their base and largenbsp;crowds gathered night after night to hear the evangelisticnbsp;message. At the first preaching center nearly a score turnednbsp;to the Lord and before the band moved on to their next placenbsp;a number of converts were baptized and a place providednbsp;by these converts where meetings were continued.

Kwangsi contains large neglected areas filled with countless tribesmen that await evangelization and there are also fifty cities within the province in which as yet no church hasnbsp;been established. To reach these approximately three million tribespeople means loneliness and isolation, hardship andnbsp;privations. The need is appalling. A gigantic task stillnbsp;awaits the messenger of the cross in the interior of Kwangsinbsp;Province.

This field comprises the areas known as Palestine, Transjordan, and a section of Syria. The deserts and the sea form natural boundaries on the east, south and west. There is nonbsp;natural boundary on the north. The artificial post-war divisions give Palestine a boundary line on the south drawnnbsp;from Rafa on the Mediterranean Sea to Aqaba on the Rednbsp;Sea; the Jordan on the east; the Mediterranean Sea on thenbsp;west; and on the north an irregular line drawn generallynbsp;east and west from Accha to the northern shore of Lakenbsp;Galilee extending northward near its eastern end to includenbsp;an arm of land near the headwaters of the Jordan. Transjordan is bounded on the west by the Jordan, on the southnbsp;and east by Saoudia Arabia, on the northeast by a narrownbsp;strip of Iraq, and on the north by Syria. This whole area,nbsp;once a part of Turkey, is now divided into Mandate Territories.

Area and Population

Palestine has an area of 10,100 square miles, about the size of Vermont, and a population as given in the census ofnbsp;1931 of 1,035,154. Transjordan has an area of about 16,000nbsp;square miles and a population of perhaps 300,000.

The French Mandate of Syria has a total population of 2,628,150 as given in the census returns for 1932 and has anbsp;total area of 57,900 squarenbsp;follows :

Republic of Lebanon State of Syria nbsp;Latakia nbsp;Djebel Druz

The following interesting figures show the increase in Jewish population in Palestine since the close of the Worldnbsp;War :

Jezmsh Population

1919 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;57,000nbsp;(est.)

1922 nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;83,794nbsp;(census)

1931 174,610nbsp;(census)

1935 250,000-300,000 (est.)

The official figures of the Palestine government for Jewish immigration show that in the month of March, 1935, 7,196nbsp;Jews entered Palestine, this being the highest number fornbsp;any one month in the history of Zionism. It is almost asnbsp;much as the total for the entire year 1930.

Climate

On the Coastal Plain and in the Jordan Valley the summers are very hot. In the mountains and the high plains of Syria and Transjordan the heat during the day is intense,nbsp;but nights are usually cool. Winter temperatures are notnbsp;low but the continued rains produce a dampness indoors thatnbsp;often causes illness. Normally the rainfall is limited to anbsp;period between November and March.

Government

To Great Britain was given the responsibility to rule Palestine by Mandate, September 29, 1923. Under this agreement Great Britain is obliged to facilitate the establishment of a National Home for the Jewish peoples and at the samenbsp;time to safeguard the rights of all other inhabitants. Thenbsp;head of the government is a resident High Commissioner,nbsp;appointed by the Crown.

Transjordan is also under British mandate but the so-called Balfour Declaration relative to Jewish Immigration is not applicable east of the Jordan. The High Commissionernbsp;of Palestine is responsible to the home government for affairsnbsp;in Transjordan, over which he has placed a British Residentnbsp;located in Amman, the capital of Transjordan. Besides thenbsp;British authorities, there is a local government presided overnbsp;by H. H. The Emir Abdullah, with a legislative assemblynbsp;which first met in April, 1929.

At the same time that Great Britain received the Mandate for Palestine and Transjordan, France was given the mandate over Syria. This section has been divided into fournbsp;political divisions or states, having varying amounts of localnbsp;autonomy.

History

This bridge between the East and the West has been a battle ground of the nations. The early history of Palestinenbsp;is given in interesting detail in the Old and New Testaments.nbsp;After the fall of Jerusalem to Rome in 70 A. D. Palestinenbsp;had a checkered history for a millenium and a half until itnbsp;was conquered by the Turks. From 1517 Turkey had fullnbsp;control of its destinies until during the World War, whennbsp;on December 9, 1917, General Allenby, now Field Marshallnbsp;Viscount Allenby, entered Jerusalem afoot and with headnbsp;uncovered as the leader of the conquering British army. Thenbsp;forces advanced with the help of its right wing of untrainednbsp;Arabs under Colonel Lawrence until all the area had beennbsp;subdued. Post-war jealousies caused disturbance and uncertainty for a period but by the end of 1923 Great Britain andnbsp;France had their respective areas of occupation.

Physical Features

The Coastal Plain extends irregularly the whole length of the country and is at places fifteen miles wide. A mountainnbsp;range forming the high backbone of the country is toppednbsp;by majestic Hermon, whose peak is capped with snownbsp;most of the year. The small streams rage in torrents in thenbsp;winter and are but dry stony valleys for the larger part ofnbsp;the year. East of these mountains is the great rift of thenbsp;Jordan reaching its lowest level at 2,600 feet below sea levelnbsp;in the depths of the Dead Sea, the surface of which is 1,292nbsp;feet below the Mediterranean. The highlands in the eastnbsp;are about the same altitude as those on the west, i. e. 2,000nbsp;to 3,000 feet. This plateau gradually becomes less and lessnbsp;fertile until the desert areas are reached where there can benbsp;no regular crops.

Resources

Post-war investigation and development have shown that Palestine has great natural resources. A concession to exploit the salts in the Dead Sea was granted in 1929. Thenbsp;estimated value is $1,182,000,000,000. Sand wastes alongnbsp;the coastal plain have been irrigated and planted with citrusnbsp;fruits, 5,000,CXX) boxes of which were exported in the seasonnbsp;of 1934 and 1935. Some claim to have found oil in thenbsp;country, but there has been no large scale development in thisnbsp;direction. Wheat, fruits and olives are grown. Sheep andnbsp;goats are raised for local markets. Oranges, wine, soap, andnbsp;olive oil form the chief exports. One of the leading industries is the care of the thousands of tourists who travel extensively in the land from year to year.

Progress

The post-war development has been almost phenomenal. This is particularly true of Palestine, though in a lesser

degree it applies to Syria. A railroad built for military purposes during the war now joins with the old Jaff a-Jerusalem railway and with the Hedjaz railway giving direct servicenbsp;from the Suez Canal to Damascus and Stamboul ; and, innbsp;another direction, to Ma’an on the Moslem pilgrimage road.

Regular through motor service to Baghdad and points in Iran (Persia) starts from Jerusalem, Haifa, Beirut, or Damascus. Intercontinental air service has a stop in Palestinenbsp;or Syria for passengers going to the east or west. Motornbsp;roads connect all the cities. In Syria it is reported that allnbsp;villages can be reached by automobile in dry weather. Innbsp;Palestine and Transjordan this is rapidly becoming the case.nbsp;The main arteries are well surfaced everywhere, and 10,0(X)nbsp;automobiles are now registered in Palestine as compared withnbsp;SOO in 1920.

A pipe line conveying crude oil from Mosul (Nineveh) in Iraq to the Mediterranean Sea was completed in 1934 atnbsp;Sreat cost. One line ends at Tripoly, Syria, and the other atnbsp;Haifa, Palestine. In both of these ports tank ships collectnbsp;their liquid cargo to be delivered to the European consumer.

Jewish immigration has brought great sums of money into Palestine. Some forty thousand persons were admitted intonbsp;me country in 1934 as legal immigrants. Many of thesenbsp;^uie as capitalists with a minimum of $5,000 each person.nbsp;Ihe Jewish city, Tel Aviv, has grown in fifteen years fromnbsp;t'vo thousand to nearly one hundred thousand Jewish inhabitants. There are over one hundred colonies where Jews livenbsp;“n the land and raise vegetables, fruits, and dairy products.

Currency

.The Syria pound equals twenty French francs and is di-^ided into one hundred piasters. The Palestine pound equals “tie pound Sterling and is divided into one thousand mils.

siK^ Moslem responds to the call to prayer, if at all pos-w, no matter where he is or what he is doing, yet his flyers are in the name of a dead prophet and are vainnbsp;petitions. We who know a living God and pray in thenbsp;'ne of Christ, our Redeemer and Intercessor, should benbsp;/'ve faithful in prayer on behalf of the vast multitudes of

Ih who know not the Way to God.

Languages

The general language of the land is Arabic. The Mandate authorities use their own languages in their respective areas.nbsp;Palestine has three official languages and all proclamations,nbsp;stamps, coins, street signs, etc., are printed in English, Arabic,. and Hebrew. The Jewish immigrant with his score ofnbsp;languages immediately places his child in a school where thenbsp;language of training is Hebrew and in a few weeks the childnbsp;is teaching his old parents the language of their ancestors.

Religion

Most of the inhabitants are Moslems of the Sunni group. Jerusalem is one of the holy cities of Islam. There havenbsp;always been numbers of Christians and most of the Easternnbsp;Churches have units in this area. The Roman Catholicnbsp;Church and some of the Protestant groups are represented.nbsp;The tendency is for Romanism to increase and other formsnbsp;of non-evangelical Christianity to decrease. In Palestinenbsp;proper Judaism, both Orthodox and Reformed, is to benbsp;found in city and colony. In Djebel Druz, a part of thenbsp;Syria area, are fifty thousand Druzes.

Missionary Occupation

American, British and European missionaries are in the area. Except in the larger cities, these groups are not oftennbsp;found in the same places. Educational work is carried on,nbsp;ranging from kindergarten to the American University ofnbsp;Beirut. Medical work is conducted in well equipped citynbsp;hospitals and in small village clinics. Some of these groupsnbsp;have a definite evangelistic message for the lost. There arenbsp;more than 200 Protestant missionaries in Palestine, including many independent workers.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

The work of The Christian and Missionary Alliance began in Jerusalem, Hebron and Jaffa in the nineties. Early efforts were undertaken quietly and included visitation in thenbsp;villages, meetings for women and children, and Sunday services in the home of the missionaries.

Palestine

Jerusalem. Work was begun here in 1890 and in 1904 a church was organized with a memliership consisting of representatives of several of the different groupsnbsp;in the city. In 1913 a substantial stone building was erected.nbsp;This included a church auditorium with Sunday-school roomnbsp;below as well as an attached residence, and soon became thenbsp;Mission headquarters and the center of activity for worknbsp;among the city and village folk near by. Hundreds of villages may be visited from this place.

Beersheba, at one time a main station of the mission, is now visited at regular intervals by the missionary resident innbsp;Jerusalem. Here contacts can be made with a local population of 1,500 and a floating population of 50,000 Arabnbsp;nomads.

Some years ago a friend donated funds sufficient to enable the Mission to purchase a lot with simple buildings whichnbsp;house the work among the Jews in the city of Jerusalem.nbsp;A reading room and a library prove to be attractions tonbsp;numbers who remain for private conversation, and a meetingnbsp;room provides place for public services where the gospel isnbsp;proclaimed in Hebrew. Each Saturday evening as hundredsnbsp;of Jews pass the doors on their end-of-the-Sabbath promenade, hymns are sung and the message of life and salvation

is given out. Sometimes the audience is most attentive and courteous and sometimes it is otherwise.

Transjordan

Madaba. At Madaba, opened in 1921, regular services are held with the Oriental Christian groups. A largenbsp;Sunday school meets regularly, women’s meetings are alsonbsp;conducted and visitation work is carried on. The missionaries visit in the district among the roaming tribesmen, wherenbsp;over the ever-present coffee cup, the message of salvation isnbsp;given. The missionaries also visit annually, in season, thenbsp;hot baths a few miles from this station, where thousandsnbsp;congregate from near-by and distant places. There is anbsp;small group of baptized believers in Madaba.

Kerak. At Kerak, where mission work was begun by the Alliance in 1923, the activities are along similarnbsp;lines to those in Madaba. Itineration is carried on in thenbsp;highlands and among the degraded nomadic groups in thenbsp;Dead Sea area. Kerak has been called the key city to northern Arabia and many Arabs come from distant places to thisnbsp;center for government business and commerce. A group ofnbsp;believers have been baptized here and another group ofnbsp;young women would have been baptized if their parents hadnbsp;not forbidden it. These witness in their homes and to theirnbsp;neighbors of the great things God has done for them.

Ma’an. Work has been carried on in Ma’an since 1926.

This city, an oasis in the desert, was formerly under the control of the King of Arabia and for that reasonnbsp;was closed against missionary occupation. Its transfer tonbsp;the Transjordan government in 1924 made it possible fornbsp;The Christian and Missionary Alliance to open a missionnbsp;station. Except for an occasional government official andnbsp;merchant, the population is entirely Moslem. Nomad Arabsnbsp;come from distant grazing lands to buy and sell and get government aid. It is an important military outpost for bothnbsp;the Transjordan and British governments. One young mannbsp;here had a glorious conversion. He was imprisoned, wasnbsp;poisoned, and after severe testings was able to escape tonbsp;Jerusalem where he is witnessing for the Lord. Just onenbsp;proof of the fact that the Lord will yet cause ways to be innbsp;the wilderness and streams in the desert.

Syria

In the Syria area we work only in the plains of Hauran and in Djebel Druze, south and southeast of Damascus. Thenbsp;Christian and Missionary Alliance inherited a work startednbsp;independently by a friend. Since 1921 the Society has beennbsp;doing an aggressive soul-saving work in this great field. Thenbsp;inhabitants are Moslem, Druze, and nominal Christians, principally Greek Orthodox and Roman Catholic. Most of thenbsp;work is among these Christian groups. As individuals arenbsp;converted they witness also to the Druzes and Moslems.

¦Dera’a. A missionary is stationed at Dera’a (opened 1927), from which center he itinerates into the whole district. Four churches have been organized without pastors.nbsp;Several of the believers have proved to be soul-winners andnbsp;gt;n some cases make extended itinerations to distant villagesnbsp;after their fields are planted or their harvests gathered. Anbsp;feature of this work has been prolonged evangelistic meetings in the villages. The groups are composed of very poornbsp;farmers who in many cases are tithing their produce for thenbsp;work of the Lord. The mission conducts no secular educational activity, but some of the local groups have arrangednbsp;for a Protestant school-teacher who also takes the preachingnbsp;services.

Arabia

That section of the great Arabian Peninsula nearest to cur Transjordan fields, formerly called Hedjaz and Nejdnbsp;but now called Saoudia Arabia, has been an objective of ournbsp;niission for many years. A few trips were made into thenbsp;Country until the government forbade further crossing of thenbsp;border. Here is the Holy Land and center of Islam ; herenbsp;King Ibn Saud has control of the lives and destinies of hisnbsp;desert subjects. Although it is forbidden to bring or sendnbsp;copies of the Bible into Saoudia Arabia, copies have beennbsp;faken and there is reason to believe that they have been readnbsp;in the shadow of the Kaaba—the central point of Moslemnbsp;pilgrimage.

The Indigenous Church

There are four organized churches in the Alliance work in this field, located as follows: Jerusalem in Palestine;nbsp;Chasm and Jebaib in Syria; and Kharaba in the Hauran,nbsp;Dzebel-Druze section. All of these churches are under nativenbsp;church government. This, however, in the Palestine-Arabian Border field refers to the fact that they are self-governing congregations rather than to the thought of a conferencenbsp;of churches as organized in many of our larger fields.

The blessing of God is being realized in gracious measure nt the present time in these various churches and the field isnbsp;looking forward to an increase in numbers and in the spiritual life of the believers which will be felt in a more effectivenbsp;evangelization and the establishing of churches in othernbsp;places. Let us, through earnest prayer ministry, share withnbsp;file faithful missionary and native colaborers in this strategic

Arabs and Jews are earnestly and sometimes bitterly contending for leadership in and possession of the Promised Land of Palestine. God has promised the land to His peoplenbsp;Israel, but they can enjoy their inheritance only when theynbsp;acknowledge Christ at His coming again to be their Messiahnbsp;and Lord. Jesus said, “It is not for you to know times or thenbsp;seasons, which the Father hath put in his own authority. Butnbsp;• ¦ . ye shall be witnesses unto me both in Jerusalem, and innbsp;all Judea, and in Samaria, and unto the uttermost part of thenbsp;earth.” Let us preach the gospel faithfully to all the tribesnbsp;of earth that a people may be gathered out for His Namenbsp;and the Church be made ready for His return.

IRAN (Persia)

By government decree, effective March 21, 1935, the old name “Iran” has been substituted for the more modern namenbsp;“Persia” in all cases. This name is derived from the rootnbsp;meaning “the country of the Aryans,” and was originallynbsp;given to the great plateau extending from the Caspian Seanbsp;to the Persian Gulf and from the Tigris to the Indus. Thenbsp;boundaries are in some cases uncertain, but in general Iraq,nbsp;the Persian Gulf, Baluchistan, Afghanistan, Turkestan, thenbsp;Caspian Sea, and Trans-Caucasia form its limits.

Area and Population

Its area is 628,000 square miles, of which a vast portion is desert. The population is estimated at 9,000,000, including 2,000,000 nomads of various types.

Climate

The climate varies with the elevation. In the north and mountainous districts the winters are severe and the summers are warm. On the plains near the Gulf, where Thenbsp;Christian and Missionary Alliance force is located, the heatnbsp;is almost unbearable in summer. It is reported to be one ofnbsp;the hottest areas on the inhabited portion of the earth’s surface. In 1935 temperatures were reported reaching as highnbsp;as 127 degrees Farenheit.

Government

Until 1906 Iran was an absolute monarchy. At that time a National Assembly was established and a constitutionnbsp;adopted. In 1924 this assembly deposed the then reigningnbsp;Shah and elected the leader of the army, Riza Khan Pahlevinbsp;as hereditary Shah. This present Shah is progressive andnbsp;in spite of the binding traditions of his people is able tonbsp;make steady progress and development.

History

The inhabitants are Aryans and were probably at one time one with the inhabitants of India. In the ninth century B. C.nbsp;there were several tribes on the Iranian plateau, among themnbsp;the Medes, the Parthians, and the Persians. About 550nbsp;B. C. Cyrus, after defeating some of his neighbors, foundednbsp;the kingdom of Persia. However, this able general died innbsp;battle against the eastern Nomads in 528 B. C. His son wasnbsp;weak and eventually another general, Darius, got the throne.nbsp;He enlarged the boundaries and met defeat only at the handsnbsp;of the Greeks in 490 B. C. His son, Xerxes, succeeded himnbsp;and after suffering defeat at the hands of the Greeks againnbsp;settled down to a life of luxury at the court. Weak kingnbsp;followed wicked king until Alexander the Great brought defeat to Persia on the field of Issus in 324 B. C. The earlynbsp;death of Alexander prevented the restoration of order innbsp;Iran and civil strife was added to the foreign war horrors.

For centuries internal and external wars left only records of bloodshed and trouble. But even then no invader wasnbsp;able to get into the heart of the country. xÀrtabanus (209-226 A. D.) assumed the title of King of Kings of the Iranians. He was the founder of a dynasty and the restorer ofnbsp;the religion of Zoroaster. Several kings followed and theirnbsp;reigns were filled with stories of persecutions of the Christians and wars with the Romans. Khosru succeeded to thenbsp;throne in 590 A. D. His love ,for his beautiful and Christiannbsp;wife is the subject of song. During the height of his powernbsp;a messenger arrived demanding that he proclaim Mohammed,nbsp;of Mecca, the Prophet of God. He treated the message withnbsp;contempt. By 650 A. D. the followers of that same Mohammed had conquered and forced their religion on Iran.

Within a few years the kings were strongly Moslems of the Shi’a sect.

In the thirteenth century the Mongols invaded Iran and it is said that the country has never recovered from the atrocities perpetrated at that time. The Tartars came and Irannbsp;became but a province of Tamerlane’s vast domains. Innbsp;1499 Ismail established the Sefavi dynasty, a Shi’a king withnbsp;his successors. Since that time king has followed king andnbsp;dynasty has succeeded dynasty at irregular intervals. Now,nbsp;once again, a strong ruler leads his happy and willing subjects.

Physical Features

Iran is largely a plateau, averaging 4,000 to 5,000 feet above sea level. This plateau is bounded by two important mountainnbsp;ranges : the Elborz range, skirting the northern extremity,nbsp;and shading off into the fertile slopes of the Caspian Seanbsp;provinces ; and the Bakhtiari mountains, running fromnbsp;northwest to southeast, and cutting off the plateau region ofnbsp;the interior from the plains of Iraq and the Persian Gulf.nbsp;Both of these ranges contain many peaks over 10,000 feetnbsp;high, snow-clad the year around, and furnishing naturalnbsp;reservoirs for the cultivated gardens which spread theirnbsp;verdure over the intervening valleys.

With the exception of the Caspian Sea provinces, which are covered with forests and the beautiful cultivated gardensnbsp;along the banks of streams and rivers, Iran is a desert. Thenbsp;winter rains bring limited grazing possibilities for the flocksnbsp;of the Nomads, but for nine months out of the year thenbsp;desert prevails.

Resources

The chief industry is agriculture. Wheat, barley, rice, fruits, gums, drugs, wool, and cotton are the chief products.nbsp;Some wines are famous. Carpets made on hand looms arenbsp;produced in several districts. This is the only importantnbsp;manufacturing enterprise in Iran. Opium from Iran flndsnbsp;its place in the world market.

The oil fields in the southwest of the country, near the head of the Persian Gulf, form the richest single field known.nbsp;A concession to exploit oil has been granted and the Britishnbsp;government owns a controlling interest in the operating company. About fifty square miles have been worked scientifically and without waste. A 135-mile pipe line conductsnbsp;the oil to Abadan, where refineries with a capacity of 100,000nbsp;barrels a day are located. Here the oil is loaded for thenbsp;markets of the world. Recently readjustments concerningnbsp;the area of concession and the amounts of royalties to thenbsp;Iran Government were made to the great satisfaction ofnbsp;government and people.

Foreign trade became a government monopoly in 1931. The right of import and export of all natural and industrialnbsp;products, and the fixing of a temporary or permanent rationbsp;of imports and exports is the prerogative of the government.

Progress

A railroad is being built to connect the Persian Gulf with the Caspian Sea. It is estimated that the cost will be aboutnbsp;$1(X),OC)O,CXX) and for the present the revenues from thenbsp;sugar and tea monopolies are set aside for this purpose.nbsp;There are 4,000 miles of first-class motor roads in additionnbsp;to the poorer roads and dry weather tracts. Iran has a navynbsp;of six Italian built gunboats on the Persian Gulf.

In recent years public education has made rapid strides. In 1932 there were said to be 3,642 schools with 182,000nbsp;pupils. Recently the government has arranged that therenbsp;will be no foreign elementary educational work in Iran, innbsp;part because of the impression that a foreign education makesnbsp;the Iranian less loyal to his country.

Currency

Since March, 1930, the unit of currency has been the silver Rial equal in October, 1935, to about seven cents U. S. Thenbsp;Rial is divisible into one hundred dinars.

Religion

About 7,500,000 of the people are Moslems of the Shi’a sect. There are about 850,000 Sunni Moslems. Besidesnbsp;these there are Parsis, Armenians, Nestorians, Jews, Bahaisnbsp;and a few Protestants.

Missionary Occupation

For many years the American Presbyterians in the north and the Church Missionary Society in the south have donenbsp;missionary work in Iran. In both areas a church has beennbsp;established consisting of converts from the Oriental Christian groups and some converts from Judaism and Islam.nbsp;For several years negotiations, thus far without success, havenbsp;been in progress to unite these two churches.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

In 1928 The Christian and Missionary Alliance was invited by the Church Missionary Society to evangelize a section of southwest Iran which they had been unable to reach. In 1930 a missionary couple from the Palestine-Arabiannbsp;Border Mission of the Alliance settled at Mohammerah onnbsp;the Shatt-el-Arab. A year later a new missionary couplenbsp;was sent out and entered Bushire. In 1933 conditions developed which seemed to indicate the advisability of changingnbsp;the station from the smaller and more provincial town ofnbsp;Mohammerah to the wider field of Ahwaz. A home wasnbsp;secured on one of the main streets and the missionaries begannbsp;making friendly contacts with the people and slowly developing a ministry of evangelism among those that could be contacted. Early in 1934 it was decided to close the Bushirenbsp;station in order that both missionary families could ministernbsp;in the important city of Ahwaz.

Ahwaz. Ahwaz is the capital of the province of Khuzistan in southwestern Persia. From a village of a fewnbsp;Arab huts, it has grown in the last two decades into thenbsp;present thriving little metropolis of about 35,000 people. Itnbsp;occupies the two banks of the Karun River, about eightnbsp;miles above the port of Mohammerah.

Public preaching services are not permitted in Ahwaz, but meetings are held for Christian people, Bible classes for converts and inquirers ; the homes of friends are visited, Anbsp;book room in the business section of the city has been openednbsp;for the sale of Christian books and other wholesome literature. As time permits, visits are made to outlying localitiesnbsp;for the visiting of the converts and the reaching of othersnbsp;with the gospel. There are unorganized Christian groups innbsp;Ahwaz, Mohammerah and Abadan.

The opening of work in Iran (Persia) by the Alliance was not with the view of establishing a new Mission innbsp;another separate field, but rather as an advance in pioneernbsp;evangelism in a needy outpost.

JAPAN

The island empire of Japan, also called Nippon and the Sunrise Kingdom, lies in the north Pacific Ocean oiï thenbsp;coast of China and Siberia from 21° 45' to 50° 56' northnbsp;latitude and from 119° 18' to 156° 32' east longitude. Thenbsp;territory comprised within this limit consists of four largenbsp;islands : Hondo, Shikoku, Kyushu, Hokkaido, and aboutnbsp;4,000 smaller islands; also 'Taiwan (Formosa), southernnbsp;Karafuto (Saghalien below 50° lat.) and the peninsula ofnbsp;Chosen (Korea).

Although Manchukuo is nominally independent, it is actually under Japanese control and influence, to such an extent that it should be mentioned in connection with the study of Japan. Manchukuo comprises the former Chinese provinces of Fengtien, Kirin and Heilungkiang which macle upnbsp;Manchuria and a fourth province, Jehol. The westernnbsp;boundary is undefined. Within the last few months of 1935nbsp;Japan and Manchukuo extended their control into a portionnbsp;of Chahar, and the trend is steadily westward through innernbsp;Mongolia, and also into northern China.

The average annual increase of population in Japan proper for five years, 1929-1933, was 910,518. According to thenbsp;census of 1925, 44 per cent of the entire population was innbsp;rural towns and villages with less than 5,000 each.

The Manchukuo Year Book of 1934 gives the area of that new country as 460,383 square miles and its population innbsp;1932 as 29,606,117. The population figures include several

-districts in addition to the four provinces named above. The balance of the study concerning Japan in this Atlas will benbsp;confined to the Island Empire of Japan proper.

Climate

The climate covers a wide range, the southernmost island being subtropical and northernmost, subarctic. In winter thenbsp;told is intense in Japan proper for its latitude, owing to thenbsp;told air currents brought over the Asiatic continent by thenbsp;winter monsoon, but is milder than in districts of the samenbsp;latitude in Manchukuo and Siberia. In summer the air temperature on land is high, frequently close and sultry. Innbsp;Hokkaido it is hot in the day time, cold in the evening andnbsp;¦early morning.

Government

Japan, previously an absolute monarchy, is now governed under a constitution promulgated February 11, 1889. Thenbsp;Emperor, who is declared to be “sacred and inviolable,” exercises the whole of the executive powers with the advicenbsp;and assistance of the Cabinet Ministers, whom he appointsnbsp;and who are responsible to him. He declares war, makesnbsp;peace and concludes treaties ; he “exercises the legislativenbsp;powers with the consent of the Imperial Diet” ; he has supreme command of the army and navy and he “determinesnbsp;the organization and peace standing of the army and navy.”nbsp;The Emperor has a privy council to consult with on important affairs of state and which interprets the Constitution.

The Emperor bears the title of Tenno, but the appellation by which he is called in relation to external affairs is “Kotei”nbsp;—a word of Chinese origin. Only foreigners make use ofnbsp;the poetical title. Mikado. The Constitution of Japan, Chapter I—The Emperor—and Article 1 says : “The Empire ofnbsp;Japan shall be reigned over and governed by a line of Emperors unbroken for ages eternal.” Article 3 says, “Thenbsp;Emperor is sacred and inviolable.”

The Imperial Diet consists of two houses : The House of Peers, composed of members of the Imperial family, of thenbsp;¦Orders of nobility, and of those persons who have been nominated thereto by the Emperor ; The House of Representatives composed of members elected by the people.

Japan is the best governed nation in Asia, especially in the Far East. Under the Japanese government the people ofnbsp;Ja])an are for the most part, law-abiding, industrious andnbsp;loyal, yet there is a healthy spirit of independence. The control of the central government over the people of Japan isnbsp;ni marked contrast to other and larger Eastern Asiatic countries.

History

It is claimed by the Japanese that their empire was founded by the first Emperor, Jimmu Tenno in 660 B. C. and that thenbsp;¦tlynasty founded by him still reigns. With this date beginsnbsp;the real known history of the empire.

About 500 A. D. the inhabitants became one people ruled by one emperor. About 670 A. D. a noble family, the Fuji-quot;'ara became prominent. They governed as agents of thenbsp;^uiperor and it was the custom of the emperor to marry onenbsp;¦of their daughters. Later a military family the Minamotonbsp;Sained ascendency and established feudalism. Intrigue, in-'^oinpetency, and indolence combined to keep the nation fromnbsp;advancing. In the sixteenth century so low had the thronenbsp;Sunk that it paid China the sum of 1,000 ounces of gold annually to permit their emperor to use the title “King.” Aboutnbsp;1.600 common soldiers with wit and courage took the powernbsp;away from the military families and later one of them,nbsp;^eyasu, became supreme. He founded the line of thenbsp;Tokugawa Shoguns which ruled until 1868. The militarynbsp;families known as the Samurai were subjects of the closestnbsp;inspection. Wealth became of little consideration but honor,nbsp;courage, loyalty and filial piety ranked high in the Samurainbsp;code of ethics. For two and a half centuries these peoplenbsp;ruled and lyeyasu stands out as one of the greatest of Japan’snbsp;statesmen.

About 1542 commercial contacts were made with Portugal. Other Europeans came into the country and for religiousnbsp;and national reasons quarreled with one another, until Japannbsp;felt it better to stop all contacts with the West. The doornbsp;opened again in the Nineteenth Century and both British andnbsp;American ships were to be seen in the harbors. After refusing to treat with the American Commodore Perry, they invited him back and made a treaty. This was the beginningnbsp;of the end of the power of the Samurai, for the people turnednbsp;against them. But in spite of the conservative attitude ofnbsp;the people events moved forward and in only fifty yearsnbsp;after the doors of Japan were reopened to Western influencenbsp;we see it the winner in international combat with Russia, anbsp;great nation of the West.

A constitution was drawn up. Englishmen were invited to assist in the building of the railroads ; Americans to help innbsp;the postal service, agriculture, and education; Frenchmen tonbsp;train her soldiers and to cast the laws ; and Germans to assistnbsp;in the medical science and local government.

Japan has set in order her local affairs and has since gained control of Korea, Formosa, Manchuria, Jehol, andnbsp;part of Chahar.

Physical Features

This area is of volcanic origin and very mountainous. In the vast transverse fissure crossing the mainland from thenbsp;Sea of Japan to the Pacific rises the group of volcanoes,nbsp;mostly extinct or dormant, with the majestic sacred mountain, Fujiyama, lifting its white cone sixty miles west ofnbsp;Tokio to an altitude of 12,425 feet.

The Japanese coastline is deeply indented, measuring more than 17,000 miles, and few places are far removed from thenbsp;mountains or really distant from the sea.

Japan is a land of many earthquakes. The earthquake zone, where the average is said to be four slight ones a daynbsp;with very serious ones only every six or seven years, has itsnbsp;greater center along the Pacific coast near the Bay of Tokio.nbsp;On September 1, 1923, Japan suffered the worst disaster innbsp;its history when a great earthquake shock, followed by a tidalnbsp;wave and fire, destroyed much of the capital city of Tokio,nbsp;the chief port of Yokohoma, and many other towns andnbsp;health resorts. A total of 142,807 lives were lost and 702,495nbsp;houses destroyed. In 1930, 5,774 earthquakes were recorded ;nbsp;in 1931, 1,740 were felt, mostly small and doing little damage.

Separating the islands of Shikoku and Kiushiu from the mainland is the beautiful Inland Sea, 255 miles long and 56nbsp;miles wide with a coast line of 700 miles. The streams arenbsp;short, swift and of little value for transportation, but a vastnbsp;though as yet undeveloped supply of hydroelectric power.nbsp;Myriads of waterfalls add their charm to the magnificentnbsp;scenery. There are a thousand mineral springs.

Resources

Rice, wheat, barley and tea are grown in great quantities. A leading industry is the production of silk cocoons. Thenbsp;sea near Japan abounds in fish and the fishing industry givesnbsp;employment to one and one-half million people. Wood isnbsp;raised for export and reafforestation is practiced by government decree. In recent years Japan has made strides innbsp;manufacturing and already competes with the older nationsnbsp;for the markets of the Far East and Near East. The cottonnbsp;goods industry has grown enormously; and in many fields

of manufacture, Japan is forging ahead of many former leaders in these various lines.

Progress

Few nations have made as rapid material progress as Japan. She has a plan to change all the railroads to thenbsp;standard gauge within the next few years. By means ofnbsp;tunnels and electrification and bridges the whole system ofnbsp;rail transportation is rapidly gaining in efficiency. In 1932nbsp;the government subsidized ship building to the extent ofnbsp;paying fifty-five Yen for every ton of new ships made andnbsp;for every two tons of old ships scrapped.

Elementary education is compulsory. The Government supports technical schools and universities. Japan has sixnbsp;Imperial universities, and forty other institutions of university rank. In 1933 there were over 4,600 libraries with morenbsp;than 10,000,000 books. The standard of literacy is steadilynbsp;rising.

Of the 10,754,962 children of school age in Japan, 99.57 per cent attend school. English is a language of commercenbsp;and is a required study in the secondary schools. Ten million Japanese read English.

In all forms of material progress such as education, newspapers, railways; use of electricity in city, towns, villages, even in the country districts ; and also in athletic sports, thenbsp;raising and displaying of flowers, and in many forms of art,nbsp;the Japanese people and nation rank high in the scale ofnbsp;world measurements.

Currency

The unit of money in Japan is the Yen, previously valued at two Yen to one United States dollar, but in recent years itnbsp;has fluctuated greatly. The present value of the Yen is aboutnbsp;29 cents. Gold coins are 20, 10, and 5 Yen pieces; in silvernbsp;are 50, 20, and 10 Sen coins, 100 Sen being equivalent to onenbsp;Yen. Old copper coins of 2, 1, and % Sen are still in use.

Language

With the exception of the Luchu Islands no other country claims relationship to the Japanese language. It is a difficultnbsp;language to learn, it has many Chinese characters. Therenbsp;are practically three languages to be learned; the common,nbsp;the polite and the written.

Religion

There is absolute religious freedom. The chief forms of worship are Shintoism with thirteen sects. Buddhism withnbsp;twelve sects. There is no State religion, no State support.nbsp;In 1931 Shinto Shrines numbered 49,631 (besides 61,712nbsp;minor shrines) and the priests 15,199; Buddhist templesnbsp;(1930) 71,310 (besides 34,963 minor temples), one highnbsp;priest and 54,904 priestesses. In 1930 there were 2,512 licensed preachers and 1,795 churches and preaching stationsnbsp;of the Roman Catholic, Greek Catholic and Protestantnbsp;churches.

There were twenty-five forms of Christianity at the end of 1933; the Roman Catholics numbered 191,008; Greeknbsp;Orthodox, 39,936; Presbyterian, 49,717; Congregational-ists, 31,484; Episcopal, 26,618; Methodist, 33,180; Salvation Army, 15,100; Holiness, 19,357; others, 33,044.nbsp;(World Almanac, 1936.)

A widely known Christian leader of Japan states that the number of Christians in Japan has doubled during the pastnbsp;ten years ; and the total is now 500,000, of whom two-fifthsnbsp;are Roman Catholic and three-fifths Protestant. He saysnbsp;that even the newspapers in many parts of Japan are printingnbsp;articles containing the Christian message.

Missionary Occupation

Roman Catholic Missions in Japan began in 1549 when St. Francis Xavier landed. Within the century it was claimednbsp;there were 200,000 Christians in the Empire, but it is statednbsp;that Roman Catholic Missions ended in 1638 at the time ofnbsp;the Shimabara rebellion when Christianity was practicallynbsp;extinguished. Roman Catholic missionaries resumed theirnbsp;activities and Protestant missions began about 1859. At firstnbsp;the missionaries met with great obstacles, the Japanese beingnbsp;forbidden to believe in the “evil” foreign faith. With thenbsp;Meiji Restoration the doors began to be thrown open to missionary teaching. Between 1885 and 1889, when the countrynbsp;was swept by a great tide of Europeanizing reforms, Christianity made phenominal progress.

Six British Missionary Societies have work in Japan; the Canadian and United States Societies ministering there number forty-two ; while four Continental Societies also havenbsp;missionaries in this empire. In addition to these Missionarynbsp;Societies from foreign lands, there are thirteen Missions andnbsp;other organizations which are now entirely indigenous to thenbsp;Islands. Some of these were formerly under Mission control. Twenty-one denominations or church groups have beennbsp;established in Japan, all on an autonomous basis, although anbsp;number of these churches have close fellowship and maintainnbsp;a spirit of cooperation with the Mission through whose ministries they were first established.

The Japan Christian Year Book for 1932 gives a total foreign missionary staff of 1,176, and a native staff of 5,779. There were 2,052 organized churches, 831 of which werenbsp;self-supporting. The number of communicants totallednbsp;175,364, and the number of Sunday School teachers andnbsp;pupils was given as 222,414. While these figures show thatnbsp;the Church of Christ is growing in Japan and thus the Holynbsp;Spirit has agencies and channels in the church which He cannbsp;use to the further evangelization of the Japanese people, yetnbsp;it also gives emphasis to the fact that millions of Japanesenbsp;are practically untouched by the gospel. The Church ofnbsp;Christ should be fervent in prayer that the churches in Japannbsp;may be truly quickened by heaven-sent revival and carry forward their work under a mighty enduement of the Holynbsp;Spirit.

Some years ago one of the strong evangelical missions in Japan undertook in a special campaign to make such a widenbsp;distribution of gospel tracts as to leave one tract or scripture portion in every home in Japan. Even though this maynbsp;not have been fully accomplished, yet multitudes of Japanesenbsp;have in one way or another been brought into some contactnbsp;with the message of Christ.

One of the outstanding characteristics of missionary work and the growth of the church in Japan is that, while practically all the denominations are represented in the largernbsp;cities and some in the smaller cities and towns, the countrynbsp;districts have been largely neglected. The comparativelynbsp;small area of Japan, however, puts even the remotest villagesnbsp;into fairly close proximity to organized churches and missionnbsp;work. This is true even though it is reported that there arenbsp;now established preaching places in only 610 out of the 9,737nbsp;villages in Japan. Even in the light of this great need itnbsp;appears, from the history of gospel ministry in Japan andnbsp;from the present growth of the church, that there are agenciesnbsp;in that land sufficient to become the instruments of the Holynbsp;Spirit for the evangelization of rural Japan. This will conienbsp;about, however, only if the churches are visited with truenbsp;spiritual revival and walk in the fear of the Lord and in thenbsp;comfort of the Holy Spirit.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

The Alliance opened work in Japan about 1891, The principal areas of ministry have been in the southern portion of the mainland of Japan (i. e. the Island of Hondo) and alsonbsp;on the Island of Shikoku. In 1924 there were seven mainnbsp;stations and six outstations. The headquarters of the worknbsp;for many years was located at Hiroshima. About ten yearsnbsp;ago a church was established in Tokyo, thus considerablynbsp;extending the scope of the work. In 1925 an Alliance missionary couple entered Shimane Prefecture in order to givenbsp;the witness in that needy rural province. The Lord graciously blessed this advance, and by the close of 1930 fournbsp;small churches had lieen established with a total membershipnbsp;of fifty-eight. At the end of 1932 these churches reportednbsp;134 members, the largest being at Imaichi with sixty-onenbsp;’^embers.

Late in 1931 the Japanese workers and lay representatives of the churches met in conference to consider the future ofnbsp;the work and an organization was effected called the Japannbsp;J^lliance. All the organized churches, unorganized groups ofnbsp;oelievers, and all Japanese workers, at that time connectednbsp;^gt;th the Mission, became members of the Japan Alliance,nbsp;fhe Mission recognized this body to be entirely autonomousnbsp;and it was agreed that all subsidy from the Mission shouldnbsp;Cease not later than the end of 1939. The membership of thenbsp;Japan Alliance at its inception was twenty Japanese workers,nbsp;°f whom six were ordained men ; fourteen organizednbsp;J^hurches, and about thirteen unorganized groups. The fol-mwing table is condensed from the published report of thenbsp;Japan Alliance for 1932 ;

Metnbership 166nbsp;239nbsp;277nbsp;134

63

During the past few years the Board of Managers of The Christian and Missionary Alliance has taken steps to withdraw from Japan as a Mission, entrusting to the Japanesenbsp;churches of the Alliance the responsibility of carrying forward the fourfold gospel ministry in their districts and thenbsp;promoting of missionary zeal. Thus the missionary staffnbsp;has been reduced to one missionary couple and it is hopednbsp;that in the near future the entire work will be taken over bynbsp;the Japanese. One of the Japanese leaders has been activenbsp;in holding Bible Conferences in a number of cities for thenbsp;dissemination of full gospel truth, and through his ministrynbsp;and that of some of his associates a definite interest in thenbsp;fourfold gospel message has been awakened in other churches.

In 1934 the Bible Training School and Mission headquarters were moved from Hiroshima to a location near Tokyo, at Kitami, where some years previously land had been purchased by special funds. The Bible School has been conducted at Kitami with a view, not only to instruct the students in the Word of God that they might be efficient messengers for Christ, but also that they might have true missionary vision and fiery zeal for the carrying of the fullnbsp;gospel message to the neglected parts of the Japanese Empire,nbsp;and ultimately if Jesus tarry, share in the world-wide worknbsp;of The Christian and Missionary Alliance.

The message of the Alliance being truly scriptural and centered in the person and work of our Lord and Saviournbsp;Jesus Christ, appeals to people in many parts of the world.nbsp;Thank God for the loyalty of a goodly number of Japanesenbsp;to the full gospel truth and testimony. The Japanese nationnbsp;holds a strategic place in world affairs in the eastern hemisphere and the Christian church in Japan may become anbsp;mighty factor in the evangelization of eastern Asia. Maynbsp;the Alliance movement in Japan increase in spiritual powernbsp;and numbers ; as it seeks to take its place of privilege innbsp;Christ and service for Him in Japan and in other regionsnbsp;round about, in true missionary zeal.

PHILIPPINE ISLANDS

The Philippine Islands lie about two hundred miles directly east of French Indo-China, hetween 21° 10' and 4° 40' north latitude, and between 116° 40' and 126° 34' eastnbsp;longitude. They are comprised of a number of groups, in-duding the Sulu Archipelago in the south.

Area and Population

The Philippines are a large, important and strategic island group. There fire 7,083 islands extending 1,152 milesnbsp;from north to south and 682 miles from east to west. Ofnbsp;this number 462 have an area of one square mile or over ;nbsp;2,441 are named, and 4,642 are unnamed. The largest island, Luzon, contains 40,814 square miles, and Mindanao,nbsp;the next in size, 36,906 square miles. The total land areanbsp;of the group is a little under 120,000 square miles. Thenbsp;coast line is 11,444 miles, which exceeds that of the entirenbsp;United States.

The population in 1918 was 10,314,310, and the estimate in 1932 was 13,636,000. The population of the capital,nbsp;Manila (Luzon) in 1918 was 285,306, and in 1931, 390,000.nbsp;There are only two other cities with 50,000 or more population.

Climate

The climate in these islands in general is tropical. During November, December, January and February the average temperature is about 77 to 79 degrees. In April, May and June—the hot months—the average is between 83 andnbsp;84 degrees. In the other months it is about 80 degrees. Thenbsp;nights are seldom unpleasantly hot. The mountain regionsnbsp;¦of the north are as cool as September in the temperate zone.nbsp;The rains are heaviest in July, August and September, andnbsp;lightest in February and March. Typhoons occur frequentlynbsp;in the summer, but are mostly confined to the northern halfnbsp;¦of the group, the south being visited seldom. Warnings arenbsp;.sent out from Manila when storms are approaching.

Government

For many years the head of the government of the Philippine Islands was a Governor General appointed by the President of the United States, but the inauguration on November 15, 1935, of the Philippine Commonwealth Government took the Philippine Islands from under the provisionnbsp;¦of the Jones Law, passed hy the U. S. Congress in 1916,'nbsp;and made effective a new constitution of the Commonwealth.nbsp;This constitution was drawn up hy an elected conventionnbsp;of 210 members and ratified by the Philippine public almostnbsp;unanimously in a national plebiscite in conformity with thenbsp;stipulations of the Tydings-McDuffie law. In these stipulations are statements of certain relationships of the Commonwealth government to the United States during the next tennbsp;years, after which the Philippine Islands are expected tonbsp;take their place in the family of entirely free and independentnbsp;nations. One section says : “Pending the final and completenbsp;withdrawal of the United States from the Philippines, thenbsp;citizens of the Philippines shall owe allegiance to the Unitednbsp;States.” Other stipulations provide the following: Thatnbsp;the officials of the Philippine government shall take an oathnbsp;of allegiance to and recognize and accept, the supreme authority of the United States ; that religious toleration andnbsp;freedom of religious thought shall continue, and that property for religious, charitable and educational purposes shallnbsp;he exempt from taxation ; that the English language shallnbsp;he continued in the Philippine public schools during the nextnbsp;ten years ; and that the United States may exercise the rightnbsp;to intervene for the preservation of the government of thenbsp;Commonwealth of the Philippines and for the protection ofnbsp;life, property and individual liberty therein.

The American High Commissioner, appointed by the President of the United States of America is the 'Unitednbsp;States government’s representative in the Philippines. Under the new constitution the Philippine Commonwealth government has an elective President, Vice President and Legislature. The President is elected for a term of six yearsnbsp;and is not eligible for reelection. The functions formerlynbsp;executed by the Governor General as well as the functionsnbsp;usually embodied in the executive branch of a republicannbsp;government are now carried out by the President. Thenbsp;right to vote in government elections is limited to males whonbsp;are twenty-one years of age and are able to read and writenbsp;and have the necessary residence qualifications. Suffragenbsp;may, under the constitution, be extended to women if 300,000nbsp;of them vote favorably in the plebiscite within two years.

History

The authentic history of the Philippines begins with their discovery by Magellan in 1521. About 1525 Joffre de Loaisanbsp;led an expedition from Spain which reached Mindanaonbsp;Island and entered either Polloc or 'some other place innbsp;Iliana Bay. From that time the Spaniards made partlynbsp;successful attempts to gain a foothold in a number of placesnbsp;along the Cotabato River. They had many bloody fightsnbsp;with the Moros up to the latter part of the 19th century,nbsp;but were not able to subjugate the Cotabato Moros. Thenbsp;only success was the establishment of stone forts or guardhouses in a number of places. The Moros of Cotabatonbsp;never recognized the Spanish authority. In 1570 Manilanbsp;was captured and made the seat of government by Spain andnbsp;in 1810 the Philippine Islands were given representationnbsp;in the Spanish courts. In April, 1898, war was declarednbsp;between the United States and Spain, and by treaty of Paris,nbsp;Dec. 10, 1898, Spain ceded the Philippine Islands to thenbsp;United States, which agreed to pay $20,000,000 for them.

Physical Features

The extensive mountain system of the Philippines belongs to the succession of volcanic ranges of the Pacific system ofnbsp;the world’s surface. There are 20 more or less active volcanoes. Mount Apo, 9,610 feet, in Mindanao ; Mayannbsp;Volcano, 7,943 feet, in Albay ; Thai, 984 feet, in Batangas :nbsp;Canison, 7,995 feet, in Negros; Banajao, or Majayjay,nbsp;7,144 feet, are the most famous of these.

Between the mountains in the center and the sea, lie great, fertile, well-watered tropical plains. The principal islandsnbsp;have important river systems.

Resources

About 39,657,000 acres, or 65% of the total area of the islands are suitable for cultivation, hut only 9,318,000 werenbsp;cultivated in 1931. There were 13,678,000 acres under grassnbsp;or open lands and 46,518,000 acres of forest.

The chief agricultural products are sugar, abaca, tobacco, coconuts, copra, coconut oil, rice, corn, coffee, embroideriesnbsp;and cordage.

Baguio, in the hills 100 miles north of Manila, the favorite resort for government officials in the hot season, is the centernbsp;of the gold mining system, three modern equipped minesnbsp;being in operation. The output of gold in the Philippinesnbsp;in 1934 was valued at $5,815,000.

Silver, lead, zinc, copper, iron, coal, petroleum, asbestos, and manganese are mined, as well as clay, marble and salt.nbsp;The islands are rich in mineral resources but these are as

yet undeveloped. It is estimated that there are 75 square miles of coal fields containing lignite and bituminous.

Progress

There are twenty-one fine harbors. Manila Bay, with an area of 770 square miles and a circumference of 120, is thenbsp;finest harbor in the Far East with well equipped steamshipnbsp;docks.

Among the special government institutions are the Normal School, the School of Arts and Trades, the Nautical School,nbsp;and the Central Luzon Agricultural School. There are alsonbsp;provincial trade schools. The State supported Universitynbsp;of the Philippines in 1931 and 1932 had 5,765 students, andnbsp;the Dominican University of Santo Tomas (founded 1611)nbsp;about 800.

Under the supervision of American advisers a definite road system has been established to develop a national system of trunk highways and a network of roads feedingnbsp;them, in order that native products may be transportednbsp;cheaply to trade centers and that merchandise can be effectively distributed. There are about a thousand miles ofnbsp;railways in the islands, but these are all in the center andnbsp;north.

The newspapers and periodicals published in English and other languages, number nearly 200.

Currency

The peso is worth fifty cents. The coins used in the Philippines are of the following decimal denominations :nbsp;peso, one-half peso, peseta (20 centavos) media peseta (10nbsp;centavos) all in silver; five centavos in cupro-nickel; andnbsp;one centavo in bronze. Treasury certificates and bank notesnbsp;are issued in one, two, five, ten, twenty, fifty, hundred, twonbsp;hundred and five hundred peso denominations. These coinsnbsp;are minted in Manila. One centavo = %c; peseta = 10c.

Languages and Tribes

Spanish is by Filipino law an official language until 1940. Eight distinct languages and 87 dialects are spoken. Aboutnbsp;4,000,000 read or understand English.

The tribes located in the section for which the Alliance

The languages used by Alliance missionaries are : English, Spanish, Subanun, Manobo, and Tausug, while those used bynbsp;Native Workers are: Spanish, Subanun, Manobo, Bagobo,nbsp;Eilaan, Tagabili, Maguindanao, Samal, Tausug, Visayan,nbsp;Panay, Yakan, Tagalog, Cebuano, Ilocano and Ilongo.

Religions

The Islam religion and Mohammedan civilization were ’’rought to Cotabato by Sariph Mohamed Kabungsuan morenbsp;than a generation ahead of the discovery of the Philippinesnbsp;by Magellan. Kabungsuan rapidly made converts amongnbsp;lhe native pagans. The Roman Catholic religion, introducednbsp;into the islands in 1571 has a firm hold, at least four-fifthsnbsp;of the population being Roman Catholics, while there arenbsp;about 500,000 Moslems and 600,000 pagans. The Buddhistnbsp;religion is professed by 24,263.

In 1902 an independent Filipino Church was founded by Father Gregorio Aglipay, which adheres to modern science,,nbsp;proclaims that science is superior to Biblical tradition, deniesnbsp;the possibility of miracles, and conceives God as an invisiblenbsp;Father with one essence and a single person. The ritualnbsp;resembles somewhat that of the Roman Church. Latin wasnbsp;originally prescribed, but the Spanish language is now thenbsp;official tongue and encouragement is given to the vernacularnbsp;dialects. This group claims to have about 1,500,000 followers.

Several Protestant denominations have extensive organizations and probably more than 150,000 communicants. Some of them cooperate in maintaining the Union Theological Seminary, the Philippine Council of Religious Education, and a National Christian Council.

Missionary Occupation

The missionary force in the Philippines numbers about 160 representing 19 Missionary Societies, 18 from thenbsp;United States and one from Great Britain. In 1929 thenbsp;churches of the United Brethren, Presbyterian and Congregational denominations became the United Evangelicalnbsp;Church of the Philippine Islands. Efforts are being madenbsp;to promote a self-supporting and self-propagating Filipinonbsp;Church. One large denomination has withdrawn nearly allnbsp;of its foreign support, “believing that their Church hadnbsp;progressed sufficiently to begin to stand alone.”

The Church in the Philippines has developed the spirit of evangelism to a marked degree. No other field, with thenbsp;exception of Africa, has experienced such a rapid numericalnbsp;growth as the Philippine Islands. At the beginning of thenbsp;20th century there were but a few members of Protestantnbsp;churches. Today Protestant adherents number aboutnbsp;500,000.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

The Christian and Missionary Alliance opened work in the Philippine Islands in 1902 on the island of Mindanao,nbsp;the second largest island of the Archipelago. In August ofnbsp;1903 the work had to be suspended because of the deathnbsp;from cholera of the only missionary. In 1908 work wasnbsp;again begun on that island in the capital city of Zamboanga.nbsp;For several years two married couples were the only missionaries in the Alliance Mission there, but in 1923 twonbsp;young women were sent to the field and additional reinforcements have been added until there are now nineteennbsp;workers. At the present time there are eight stations, 102nbsp;outstations, 23 organized churches and a membership ofnbsp;1,760, 32 Sunday Schools with a total enrollment of 3,021.

Work is being done among Romanists, Mohammedans, and pagans. With the reinforcements to the missionary forcenbsp;new sections of the island of Mindanao have been enterednbsp;and the Gospel given to pagan tribes hitherto unreached.nbsp;The American Board (Congregational) is working in thenbsp;extreme north and southeastern portions of Mindanao, butnbsp;the rest of the island and other islands to the south with thenbsp;combined population of over 650,000 are dependent largelynbsp;upon The Christian and Missionary Alliance for the gospelnbsp;message.

The Alliance field divides naturally into districts as follows :

Zamboanga, or the Roman Catholic district Margosatubig, or the Subano (pagan) districtnbsp;Cotabato, or the Maguindanao (Islam) districtnbsp;Kidapawan, or the Manobo and Bagobo (pagan) districtnbsp;Kiamba, or the Tagabili (pagan) districtnbsp;Sulu, or the Joloano (Islam) district

Zamboanga Province

Zamboanga province lies in the western portion of the peninsular section of the island of Mindanao and has anbsp;population of 150,000. The province is largely Romannbsp;Catholic but the upper portion is peopled mostly with pagannbsp;¦Sabanun.

Zamboanga. On the point of the peninsula is the capital and principal city- of the province, Zamboanga. Here is an organized Alliance church with anbsp;Filipino pastor. In Tetuan, about two kilometers from thenbsp;city, is located the Mission headquarters and the Ebenezernbsp;Bible Institute. Work is carried on for about fifteen milesnbsp;up either coast from this city, travel being by means of auto.nbsp;There are four main points from which work is conductednbsp;in surrounding communities ; Mercedes, Curuan on thenbsp;south coast, and Malandi and San Raman on the west coast.nbsp;The first two are Roman Catholic communities, San Ramonnbsp;is a Federal Prison Farm, and Malandi is largely a Moronbsp;¦centre.

Ebenezer Bible Institute was attended by thirty-two students in 1934, eight of whom have now graduated and are engaged in active Christian work, and supported largely bynbsp;native funds. During the school term of seven months,nbsp;from May to November, the students have many opportunities for practical witnessing in Zamboanga City and thenbsp;surrounding places. Throughout the five months vacationnbsp;the students are encouraged to seek opportunities for service and thus many towns and villages are reached that mightnbsp;not otherwise hear the message.

Three stations on the northern coast manned by Filipino workers, Bible School graduates, have been opened, namely,nbsp;Sindangan, Malayal and Bakalan. From Zamboanga up tonbsp;these points are hundreds of settlements with thousands ofnbsp;pagan Subanun and Samal Moros, all unreached.

Basilan Island. This large island to the south, one hour’s run by motor ship from Zamboanga, hasnbsp;a Moslem population of approximately 30,000 people knownnbsp;as Yakan Moros, besides colonies of immigrants from thenbsp;northern islands. Practically no work has been done amongnbsp;them, but a missionary couple expects to go there soon.

Margosatubig. This station, among the Subanun pagans, was opened in 1914 by a missionary couplenbsp;who continue to minister there. At the end of 1934 therenbsp;Were ten churches, each having outstations and preachingnbsp;points where meetings are held occasionally. The leaders ofnbsp;all these churches are supported by the churches and by theirnbsp;¦own labor. The churches themselves with the exception ofnbsp;the first, have been erected wholly by the congregations. Thenbsp;combined church membership in the district is approximatelynbsp;700. Along the coast from Margosatubig to Labangan, annbsp;eight-hour run, there are many settlements where no worknbsp;is being done, though most of them have been visited oncenbsp;quot;Or twice in the last twenty years. At Labangan is a nativenbsp;worker, who spends most of his time itinerating in the surrounding district.

Cotabato Province

Cotabato is the largest province of Mindanao having a population of approximately half a million. Until 1929 nonbsp;missionary had been stationed in this province, but since thennbsp;several points have been opened. All of these, except Cota-hato City, are among pagans. There are many differentnbsp;pagan tribes in the province, each numbering several thousand people. The most important ones are: Tagabili,nbsp;Bagobo, Manoho, Tiruray, and Bilaan. There are 200,000nbsp;Maguindanao Moros, followers of Mohammed. Some worknbsp;has been done among them, but there have been few, if any,nbsp;converts. Many Christians (Catholic and Protestant) havenbsp;moved in from the northern islands and taken up homesteads.

Cotabato City. Work was opened in this port city and capital of the province in 1929 as a basenbsp;from which to reach the eight or ten pagan and Moro tribesnbsp;distributed throughout the province. In a centrally locatednbsp;chapel a group of believers support their own pastor, anbsp;graduate of the Bible School. This is a strategic centernbsp;presenting rare opportunities of reaching hundreds who passnbsp;through, into the province and up and down along the coast.nbsp;A government High School, attended by students fromnbsp;nearly all the tribes (who are able to speak English), isnbsp;located a block’s distance from the chapel and a large publicnbsp;hospital also affords contact with a large number of transients who take the truth with them as they go.

Kidapawan. Kidapawan, a settlement in a large clearing away in interior Cotabato, is the center fornbsp;work among the Manobo tribe, the largest pagan tribe ofnbsp;Mindanao with its ten subdivisions based upon linguisticnbsp;differences. This work was opened simultaneously with thatnbsp;of Cotabato City. From this center about fifteen points arenbsp;reached regularly. The Manobo tribe is a nomadic, headhunting tribe and from amongst them many souls have beennbsp;won, the gospel from the first having had quite a phenomenalnbsp;entrance. The steady, slower process of training and establishing the Christians now goes on daily as well as reachingnbsp;out to pagans to be found in the still more interior recessesnbsp;of the forests. Manobo has recently been reduced to writing and Scripture portions in that language will be available soon.

Bulatukan. This is the central district of the Bagobo tribe located near the Cotabato-Davao border. Sixnbsp;or more outlying points are reached from this center, spreading across the border into Davao province as well as southward toward the Bilaan tribe. Groups of believers are beingnbsp;gathered out from this another tribe of nomadic headhunters to rejoice in a living Saviour.

In 1931 visits were made to the Tagabili tribe of southwestern Cotabato, a very primitive group found along the coast and extending into the mountains of the interior. Fivenbsp;Bible School graduates are now laboring among these peoplenbsp;from Kiamba as a center. There are two organized churchesnbsp;and many outstations in the district and itinerating trips arenbsp;made into the interior. A Filipino pastor is laboring innbsp;Salunayan in a large thrifty colony of homesteaders whonbsp;have left the northern provinces and settled on the fertilenbsp;farm lands of Cotabato valley. The majority of thesenbsp;settlers are Catholic, but opportunities for the sale and distribution of God’s Word are excellent, and a group of believers has been formed. From this center a large outlyingnbsp;district of Manobos and Moros are also reached. In Upi,nbsp;located in the mountainous district near the coast of Cotabatonbsp;province, a former Bible School student carries on an independent work among a colony of homesteaders, on the outskirts of the Tiruray tribe, numbering about 17,000. Annbsp;evangelist of the Mission also resides there and travelsnbsp;throughout the province.

At Baguio, in Davao Province, a chapel, erected by a converted Atao chief who was brought to a knowledge of the gospel through Manobo Christians, is open for servicesnbsp;carried on by the group of believers from various pagannbsp;tribes of this district. Periodical visits are made by thenbsp;Filipino pastor of Kidapawan district across the border

several days hard mountain hiking overland. This province has approximately eight or ten pagan tribes almost entirelynbsp;unreached by the gospel.

Sulu Province

Sulu is made up of hundreds of little islands, many being simply sand bars on a foundation of coral, formed by thenbsp;swift currents which swirl around the larger islands. Thenbsp;population of the group is about 250,000. Commercialnbsp;transportation is scarce between the islands and because ofnbsp;the swift currents and tide rifts, traveling in small boats isnbsp;very dangerous. The island of Jolo has 70,000 Mohammedans and about 2,000 Romanists. Work is carried on innbsp;this district from three centers : Jolo manned by missionaries ; Bongao and Siasi manned hy Filipinos. The peoplenbsp;speak Tausug.

Jolo. Jolo is an overnight run in an inter-island ship from Zamboanga. Here is an organized church and latenbsp;in 1934 a new chapel was dedicated. Since then there hasnbsp;been a splendid growth in attendance at church services,nbsp;young people’s meetings and the Sunday School, as well asnbsp;an increase in the offerings toward the support of the churchnbsp;work.

Siasi. The island of Siasi has a Moro population of 25,000 with a few Romanists. South of Siasi there arenbsp;many islands, the largest of which is Tawi Tawi. In thenbsp;spring of 1934 an Alliance missionary joined a group of missionaries from the northern Philippines in a month’s evangelistic trip among the people of the islands of the Tawinbsp;Tawi group. The party, including missionaries and nativenbsp;workers, visited about thirty villages on fifteen islands,nbsp;nearly 6,000 tracts were distributed, about 600 gospels werenbsp;given, 50 or 60 New Testaments were given or sold, and sixnbsp;Bibles were sold. Most of the literature was in the Tausugnbsp;dialect, though some English, Spanish, Chinese, Malay,nbsp;Arabic, Bicol, Tagalogquot;, Panayan, Cebuano, and Ilocano werenbsp;distributed. The first shipment of the Gospel of Luke innbsp;Sulu-Arabic arrived just in time to be used on the trip.nbsp;About 10,000 people were reached with the message of salvation, most of whom had never heard it before.

Translation and Publication

The entire Bible is available in Spanish, Cebuano, Illongo,. Tagalog, Ilocano, Bicol and Pangasinan, and is being soldnbsp;by Alliance workers in all of these tongues except the lastnbsp;named. The New Testament has been translated into Pam-pangan and Samareno but very few are found in the Alliance field who speak these dialects. The Gospel of Luke-has been translated into the Tausug language by Alliancemissionaries and printed by the American Bible Society innbsp;both Romanized characters and in Arabic script. Parts ofnbsp;the Gospels have been translated also by Alliance missionaries into the Manobo and Subanun languages.

The Indigenous Church

Few communities have such a bewildering maze of tribes^ and dialects interwoven together in so limited a space. Thenbsp;Spirit of God alone has wisdom and power to untangle thenbsp;web. But, as the witness of the gospel is being faithfullynbsp;given. He is calling out from all of the different groups anbsp;people for the name of the Lord. From Moslem Moros,nbsp;from Roman Catholic Filipinos, from Pagan tribes of varied'nbsp;names, souls are being steadily gathered, and these in turnnbsp;are bearing effective testimony to their fellows.

Many churches are self-supporting and have outstations and preaching places for which they are responsible. Thenbsp;Bible School students, native workers, and many lay members in the churches are zealous and active in evangelismnbsp;among many tribes. The churches are growing in numbers and in spiritual power and making good progress towardnbsp;full self-support and self-government.

NETHERLANDS EAST INDIES

Netherlands Indies is the name that now applies to the vast island empire, formerly called the Dutch East Indies, andnbsp;including most of the islands of the East India Archipelago.nbsp;This latter name is applied to the groups of islands lying innbsp;the stretch of sea which connects the Indian Ocean with thenbsp;Pacific and separates the continent of Asia from Australia.nbsp;The Netherlands Indies extend from longitude 95° east tonbsp;141° east and latitude 6° north to 11° south.

Area and Population

The vast extent of the Netherlands Archipelago will surprise many. Seldom is it realized that the distance between the extreme western and eastern points of this portion of thenbsp;island world is greater than the width of Europe or thenbsp;United States.

There are thousands of islands in this vast group under the flag of Holland. Many of them are very small and practically uninhabited, while, on the other hand, some of thesenbsp;islands rank, both as to area and population, among thenbsp;largest of the island world. The five principal ones are:nbsp;Sumatra, Java, Borneo, Celebes, and New Guinea. Java isnbsp;the most densely populated land mass in the world, 821 tonbsp;the square mile. Statistics for the year 1935 give the following area and population figures for the islands named :

The area of the almost countless islands of the Netherlands East Indies totals 733,296 square miles, the population beingnbsp;60,731,025.

Climate

The Netherlands Indies section of the World Dominion Survey series is quoted here concerning the climate :

In such an extensive area as the Netherlands Indies with its mountains, hills, and snow fields there are great variations in climatic conditions. North of the equator conditions are very different from those south of it, while the climate of the coasts differs greatly fromnbsp;that of the mountain districts. The archipelago, lying, as it does, between latitude 6° N. and 10° S., is preeminently tropical. Consequently abundant rainfall, little wind, high temperature and great humidity characterize the climate of the lowlands. The islands lie directly in the region of the monoons, those winds that change theirnbsp;direction with the seasons and cause other important climatic variations. The equator forms the region of convergence for the North-East and South-East Trade Winds. Great regularity exists in dailynbsp;weather changes, in the alteration of both land and sea, the mountainnbsp;and valley winds. Dry winds have a bad effect, on several islands.

In the Alliance fields in the Netherlands East Indies the climate is tropical and there is little variation in temperaturenbsp;throughout the year. The equator crosses the central partnbsp;of Borneo, Sumatra, and the northern arm of Celebes. Thenbsp;average temperature is 79°. The only marked change in thenbsp;weather is what is known as the rainy season. The climate,nbsp;generally speaking, is humid but the nights are usually cool.nbsp;The trying feature, however, is that the heat is unrelentingnbsp;the year round, and this is wearing upon those who havenbsp;been accustomed to a cool climate.

In Borneo the average temperature throughout the year is 86°. The seasons are not divided. Most of the year therenbsp;8nbsp;are heavy downpours of rain. The rain comes with thundernbsp;and lightning nearly every week, but lasts only two or threenbsp;hours. There are one or two rains every week throughoutnbsp;the year. In the Boelongan district there are usually fournbsp;big floods each year because of the heavy rains. Travel isnbsp;difficult on the Kayan River because of these floods for thenbsp;traveler, if caught on the river at such a time, must camp fornbsp;several days on the mountain side waiting for the waters tonbsp;subside.

In Celebes there is a marked rainy season, beginning in December or January and running through March. Lomboknbsp;also has a rainy and dry season.

Government

Since the dissolution of the Dutch East India Company in 1798, the Dutch possessions have been administered fromnbsp;Holland by a Governor General and Council located in Batavia, appointed by the ruling sovereign of the Netherlandsnbsp;according to the regulations for the government of Netherlands India in 1854, revised as of January 1, 1926.

The principal government representatives in Borneo are called Residents. Under the Residents are Assistant Residents, which are located in the principal districts. Other officials are Controllers, located in all the larger towns. Gezaghebbers and Posthouders, who are mainly in the outposts.nbsp;Dyak officials are stationed at the various outposts and arenbsp;under the local Controller. Some officers commanding armynbsp;posts act as (interim) Controllers.

History

The earliest civilization of Java and the surrounding islands was derived from India. The earliest visitors were the Chinese. The Venetian, Marco Polo, visited North Sumatranbsp;in 1292. In 1509 Portuguese ships reached this part of thenbsp;world. The Portuguese were followed by the Dutch, andnbsp;still later by the British. Borneo was first possessed by thenbsp;Portuguese, and later by the Dutch and British.

Physical Features

Borneo is a mountainous island. Kinibaloe, in British North Borneo, the highest mountain peak, is 17,750 feet high.nbsp;In the Boelongan district there are many small mountainnbsp;peaks, ranging about 2,000 feet. This district is particularlynbsp;rugged, making traveling difficult. In the Mahakam districtnbsp;there is some open country, but most of the land is coverednbsp;by a dense jungle growth.

Borneo is covered by a network of rivers, large and small, the largest one being the Barito, which starts in the interiornbsp;and flows southward into the Java sea. The Kapoeas Rivernbsp;rises in the center of the island, flowing west into the Chinanbsp;Sea. The Mahakam, Kayan and Sesajap Rivers flow eastward into the Celebes Sea. The Mahakam River is navigable for launches for at least 150 miles. Small steamers cannbsp;go up the Kayan to Tandjongselor, about thirty miles fromnbsp;the coast, but above that point the rapids do not permit anynbsp;boats except the Dyak praus. Steamers can go up the Sesajapnbsp;as far as the town of Sesajap.

The Island of Celebes is oddly shaped like a starfish or octopus. The greater part of the island lies south of thenbsp;equator. No large wild animals are to be found, but therenbsp;are 160 species of birds and 118 of butterflies, more thannbsp;half of which are peculiar to the island. In the south thenbsp;mountains rise to a height of 10,000 feet. The finest scenerynbsp;in the Netherlands Indies is to be found in the forests, lakes,nbsp;volcanoes and rivers of this island. The two principal riversnbsp;are the Sadang, 250 miles long, and the Bonor Solo, 150nbsp;miles.

Lombok and Bali are mountainous with volcanic peaks rising between 10,000 and 12,000 feet.

Resources

Besides raising sufficient food for the dense population there are produced for export in Java and Madura alone,nbsp;sugar, coffee, tea, cocoa, indigo, spices, cinchona, tobacco,nbsp;rubber, copra, tin and petroleum. Java is the second largestnbsp;sugar exporting country in the world and it also supplies 99nbsp;per cent of the quinine (cinchona), the first trees havingnbsp;been brought from Bolivia.

Three-fourths of the world’s supply of kapok, one-half of pepper, more than one-third of rubber, one-sixth of tea, andnbsp;nearly one-eighth of the sugar used in the world come fromnbsp;the islands of the Netherlands Indies group. The productionnbsp;of minerals includes tin, silver, gold, petroleum and coal, thenbsp;last three being found in Borneo in considerable quantities.nbsp;Diamonds are also found on the island, but the principalnbsp;mineral wealth of Borneo will, no doubt, prove to be thenbsp;large oil wells on the east coast. The main exports ofnbsp;Borneo, other than minerals, are copra, dried cocoanuts, rubber, rattan, cane for making furniture, reptile skins, gum ornbsp;resin used in making varnish.

The Dyaks live on rice which they raise for their own use but not for export. They also raise a few vegetables, andnbsp;secure wild vegetables and jungle fruits. Bananas, pineapples and other plants, are cultivated and the government isnbsp;trying to introduce citrous fruits. Japanese lumber companies have concessions in the south of Borneo, includingnbsp;not only notable hard wood but soft wood.

Progress

Great things have been accomplished by the Dutch Government for the benefit and uplift of the people. The principal construction of railways has been in Java and Sumatra. At the end of 1928 there were 3,380 miles of railways innbsp;Java, 1,130 miles in Sumatra, and 29 miles in southernnbsp;Celebes. Java has 74,927 miles of well-surfaced roads, morenbsp;than one-third being macadamized ; in all of the other islandsnbsp;there are only 11,053 miles of roads, many of them not asnbsp;well surfaced as in Java but suitable for light traffic. Innbsp;some of the islands, like Bali, bus service is maintained between the principal points. In many regions throughout thenbsp;islands walking is the only means of land travel, thoughnbsp;horses can be used here and there, while in islands likenbsp;Borneo the rivers are the principal means of travel in thenbsp;interior.

A well-ordered system of inter-island steamship service connects the vast colony from the extreme west of Sumatranbsp;to their most easterly possession of New Guinea. Some ofnbsp;the principal coastal cities of the larger islands are ports ofnbsp;call for many steamship lines running to all parts of thenbsp;world.

The government is developing a good school system throughout the principal islands. Even in the heart ofnbsp;Borneo, schools are conducted at the outposts. The teachersnbsp;used to be mainly Menadonese and Ambonese, but they arenbsp;now seeking to use Dyak teachers. These Dyak schools gonbsp;to the third grade, then, at government expense, boys cannbsp;attend schools in larger towns where they are taught the fifthnbsp;grade. At places like Makassar, Celebes, there are highnbsp;schools where the parents can send their children, if theynbsp;desire.

The government maintains hospitals in the principal districts. The hospital in Tandjongselor, Borneo, is in charge of a Javanese doctor, who also makes regular tours throughnbsp;the district.

Currency

The guilder, or florin (old par 40.20 cents, new par 68.06 cents) is the unit of currency, which has been on a gold basisnbsp;since April, 1925. The average value for the first sevennbsp;months in 1933 was 44 cents and for a like period in 1934,nbsp;66.76 cents.

Most of the trading in the interior is by barter.

Languages and Tribes

The universal language of the islands is Malay. It may be called the commercial language, and is used in all the portnbsp;cities. There are, of course, many variations of Malay, butnbsp;for general purposes, what is known as low Malay, is thenbsp;current language of the Netherlands East Indies. Apartnbsp;from Malay the languages of this island world are legion.nbsp;Almost every island has a language or dialect of its own.nbsp;This constitutes a serious problem in missionary work, thoughnbsp;the use of the Malay language greatly simplifies and facilitates the task. Among the Dyaks of Borneo there are manynbsp;dialects, most of which have not yet been committed to writing. The people of the interior, away from the port cities,nbsp;understand nothing as a rule but their native tongue. Intonbsp;many of these languages no Gospel message has been translated.

The peoples inhabiting Netherlands East Indies spring from many sources. In the western parts the Indian featuresnbsp;predominate and in the eastern parts the Polynesian type.nbsp;There has been and still is a great deal of intermarryingnbsp;among the various tribes. The population as a whole may benbsp;considered Malay, but there are distinct divisions, such asnbsp;the Javanese, the Madoeranese, the Balinese, the Sasaks, thenbsp;Boegis, the Makassar people, the Menadonese, Ambonese, etc.

In the interior of the larger islands, notably Sumatra, Borneo, Celebes, and New Guinea, aboriginal mountainnbsp;tribes are to be found. Of these tribes the Dyaks of Borneonbsp;are perhaps the most important, and these may be again divided into various tribes, such as the Sea Dyak, the Gypsynbsp;Dyak, the Mountain Dyak, etc. Everywhere throughout thisnbsp;vast island group, in all the port cities, and away into the interior, there is a large population of Chinese. In many cases,nbsp;after a few generations the Chinese are absorbed by the native tribes, and their language is lost.

More detailed information concerning tribes in the Alliance field in the Netherlands East Indies is given in connectionnbsp;with the description of the work in the various islands.

Religions

Until the fourteenth century the religions of most of the islands in the western and central section were principallynbsp;Hinduism and Buddhism. At that time Mohammedanismnbsp;entered the field. From northern Sumatra, it made its onward conquest through Java, and has affected to a greater ornbsp;less extent the coast ports of Borneo, the Celebes, and thenbsp;islands farther east. Only one island seems to have resistednbsp;successfully the Mohammedan invasion—the little Island ofnbsp;Bali, which still maintains its own form of Hinduism. Manynbsp;of the interior tribes of these islands have not yet fully embraced Mohammedanism, and for this reason they are morenbsp;open to the Gospel Message. The Mohammedans, however,nbsp;though ignorant and bigoted, are probably less fanatical thannbsp;in other parts of the world. As a matter of fact there arenbsp;more converts to Christ from Mohammedanism in Java andnbsp;the other islands of this group, than in any other part of thenbsp;world.

The religion of the Dyak and other wild tribes of the interior jungles is Animism, consisting largely in demon worship and gross superstition. Such people, however, are more

open to hear and believe the Gospel message than the Mohammedan. As a people the Dyaks are very religious. Their religion affects their life and activities from early morningnbsp;until they retire. The Dyak does not think of going on anynbsp;journey or doing any work, without consulting the Greatnbsp;Spirit. They believe in the Creator. This Creator has manynbsp;servants and spirits abroad in the earth. They also believenbsp;in the Great Evil Spirit who is much feared. They makenbsp;wooden idols and offer sacrifices of blood.

Roman Catholic missions entered what later became the Netherlands Indies with the Portuguese colonization early innbsp;the sixteenth century and before the end of that century theynbsp;claimed about 200,000 converts in the various islands. Withnbsp;the fall of the Portuguese power in the islands, the Romannbsp;Catholic work collapsed, largely as a reaction of the peoplenbsp;against the greed, cruelty and profligate living of the Catholics. Roman Catholic missions again became active in 1808nbsp;when the first Dutch priests began work in the islands.nbsp;However, in 1902 there were only 51,000 members undernbsp;thirty-two priests at sixteen stations. With the growth ofnbsp;the Catholic Church in Holland there came a correspondingnbsp;impetus to the growth of the church in the Netherlands Eastnbsp;Indies and in 1934 there were in the islands 417,784 Catholics and 36,323 catechumens. In the same year 124,198nbsp;pupils attended 1,504 Catholic schools. The Catholics alsonbsp;maintained twenty-six hospitals, twenty-three dispensaries,nbsp;and two leper asylums. They issued twenty-six periodicalsnbsp;in Dutch, four in Malay, two in Javanese, and one in Sik-kanese. The above figures show something of the importancenbsp;of a definite increase of evangelical Protestant missionarynbsp;work in these islands.

Owing to the long occupation of the islands by the Dutch, and since Holland is predominately Protestant, several Protestant denominations have done extensive work in Java andnbsp;a few other islands, and a number of the groups formednbsp;through this ministry have become practically indigenous tonbsp;the islands, their headquarters and Conferences being in thenbsp;islands. Seven of these indigenous, autonomous churchesnbsp;have been established since 1930. Some of them have between 350 and 500 native pastors, evangelists, and teachers.

Missionary Occupation

Most of the missionary work in the Netherlands East Indies is in Java under Dutch missionary organizations.nbsp;German missionaries have been working for many yearsnbsp;among the Bataks of the northern section of Sumatra, and innbsp;a number of the islands on the southwestern coast of Sumatra. Swiss and German missionaries have an extensivenbsp;work in the southern part of Borneo, with Bandjermasin asnbsp;headquarters. Dutch missionaries are working in Centralnbsp;Celebes and also at various points on the east coast of Newnbsp;Guinea and in other islands east of Java and Celebes.

The American Methodist Episcopal Mission opened work in Sumatra, Java, and on the west coast of Borneo, but thenbsp;work in Java and West Borneo was abandoned in 1928.nbsp;They are now concentrating their efforts in northern Sumatra. The Salvation Army have established work in Java,nbsp;Sumatra, and the Celebes. Their work, while evangelical, isnbsp;largely industrial and philanthropic.

Previous to the opening of the Alliance work in the Dutch East Indies, a number of Chinese brethren, who at one timenbsp;or another had been students in the South China Bible Schoolnbsp;at Wuchow, but were not employed by the Alliance Mission,nbsp;felt the call to the Islands of the Southern Seas. Their response to the call of God to this foreign work finally resultednbsp;in the organization in 1928 of The Chinese Foreign Missionary Union, the first foreign missionary society of the Chinesenbsp;Church, and that same year the first Chinese missionarynbsp;sailed from his native land and took up residence in Makassar. In 1933 there were four missionary couples and threenbsp;young men on the field. The parts occupied by this societynbsp;are the Mahakam River District in East Dutch Borneo, Makassar, and the Island of Bangka.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

The first trip of investigation to the Netherlands East Indies was made by an Alliance missionary from Southnbsp;China in 1928, but the first resident missionaries sent outnbsp;from United States of America did not reach the field untilnbsp;July, 1929. This first party consisted of five missionaries,nbsp;and the fields occupied by them were two points on the eastnbsp;coast of Dutch Borneo—up the Mahakam River, and thenbsp;Boelongan River—to reach the Dyaks of the interior ; andnbsp;also the Island of Lombok, located east of Java. Headquarters of the mission was established at Makassar, Celebes.

Later, more missionaries arrived, and the total number in 1935 was twenty-one. The increased staff of workers enablednbsp;the mission to open other fields. Another unoccupied districtnbsp;on the east coast of Borneo, farther north, up the Sesajapnbsp;River was entered in 1932. Work was also begun among thenbsp;Mohammedan population, the Makassar and Boegis peoplesnbsp;of the southwestern arm of the Celebes ; and a mission station was established in 1933 among the Dyaks in Westnbsp;Borneo, up the Kapoeas River.

Celebes

This peculiarly shaped island lies immediately east of Borneo. Its population is extremely mixed, and there arenbsp;about fifty-three languages and dialects. The inhabitants ofnbsp;the southwest coast of the island are known as Boegis andnbsp;Makassarese, and resemble the Malays. The inhabitants ofnbsp;the interior are known as Indonesians and are composed of anbsp;number of semi-nomadic tribes. In the northern part of thenbsp;Celebes there is an intelligent race of people known as thenbsp;Minahasans, who are a light-skinned people and nominallynbsp;Christian. The Toradja people occupy the great central portion of the island. They are the mountaineers of the Celebes.nbsp;The greater part of the trade and of the skilled labor of thenbsp;island is in the hands of the Chinese of whom there are overnbsp;41,000 settled for the most part along the coasts.

The government of Celebes comprises seven political divisions with a total population January 1, 1933, of 3,087,355. This includes the entire Island of Celebes and the Island ofnbsp;Boeton, the latter having about 240,000. Three Netherlandsnbsp;missionary societies, also The Salvation Army, and Thenbsp;Christian and Missionary Alliance are working in this area.nbsp;The division of Makassar has a population of 668,546.

Makassar. Early in the history of the work, the Lord definitely indicated Makassar, the capital andnbsp;largest city of the Celebes, as the logical location for thenbsp;headquarters of the Alliance Mission in Netherlands Eastnbsp;Indies. The first phase of work to be opened in Makassarnbsp;was the Chinese Church in 1928, under the Chinese Foreignnbsp;Missionary Union. In 1932 a Gospel Tabernacle was builtnbsp;with a seating capacity of about five hundred, where regularnbsp;services have been held.

In Makassar and the surrounding district the inhabitants are known as the Makassar people, numbering about 600,000,nbsp;and speaking a language quite different from Malay. Theynbsp;are Mohammedans, usually very ignorant but bigoted andnbsp;satisfied. During the several years when services have beennbsp;held in the tabernacle, they have shown but little interest.nbsp;Recently meetings have been begun in the homes of thenbsp;people and there is now a group of earnest inquirers. Anbsp;fruitful work is carried on also among the children. In a

town about ninety kilometers from Makassar, there is another group of earnest souls, who are not too strongly Mohammedan and are giving ear to the Gospel message.

In this cosmopolitan center a Bible Training School was established in 1932 with twenty students. The enrollmentnbsp;has increased steadily until now it has reached aboutnbsp;100. In addition to this number, there are twenty ornbsp;thirty others who are able to attend the evening classes only.nbsp;While the school is conducted in the Malay language, yetnbsp;about twenty other local languages are spoken by the students. Already fifty of the students, after a year or morenbsp;of study in the Word, have gone into the field for a time ofnbsp;practical experience in soul-winning before completing theirnbsp;course. Makassar is the center of the Malay publicationnbsp;work and here also is held the Annual Missionary Conference.

The Boegis people, who inhabit the remainder of this southwestern peninsula of the Celebes, are closely akin tonbsp;the Makassar people but their language is different. Theynbsp;too are Mohammedan. They number more than two millionnbsp;and there are practically no Christians among them. Theirnbsp;response to the gospel is much less than from among peoplesnbsp;that may be considered entirely pagan. The Netherlandsnbsp;Bible Society has supplied gospel portions in both the Makassar and Boegis languages and the Mission has issued a fewnbsp;good gospel tracts in these languages'also. These have beennbsp;distributed by young men from the Makassar Bible School,nbsp;who have gone out as colporteurs and systematically evangelized the region. The Lord has sent to the Bible Schoolnbsp;a few students who speak the Boegis language and a fewnbsp;Boegis people. Through these witnesses it is hoped to reachnbsp;these multitudes with the gospel.

Rest Home. For a long time the need was evident for a home at the hills where the missionaries couldnbsp;go for a time of rest and to escape the extreme heat. Latenbsp;in 1934 God graciously enabled the Mission to purchase anbsp;piece of property in the mountains near Malino, about 3,000nbsp;feet above sea level. The land contains nearly 2,000 squarenbsp;meters and two small frame houses were already built. Thenbsp;money for this property was provided as a special gift at thenbsp;exact time that the place became available. Already the homenbsp;has proven to be a blessing to the missionaries, and its valuenbsp;will be increasingly realized in the greater efficiency of thenbsp;workers who have opportunity from year to year to “comenbsp;apart and rest awhile.”

Borneo

The extreme north of the Island of Borneo is under British control, there being three protectorates, British North Borneo, Bruni and Sarawak. There are only three portionsnbsp;of the world governed by a chartered commercial companynbsp;and British North Borneo is one of them—a company similar to the East India Company of an earlier century. Thenbsp;remainder of the island is a Dutch possession. Borneo measures six hundred and ninety miles by six hundred and fivenbsp;miles and has a total area of nearly three hundred thousandnbsp;square miles. The equator runs through the heart of thenbsp;island. Since the Alliance work in this island is confined tonbsp;the Dutch portion, we deal only with that part in this Atlasnbsp;study.

On the coast are to be found a great mixture of Malays, Javanese, Boegis, Sudanese, Arabs, Indians, Chinese, etc.nbsp;There are said to be five main divisions of the wild men ofnbsp;the interior—the Dyaks, speaking a variety of dialects ofnbsp;the Dyak language. The Dyaks, no doubt, originally occupied the entire Island of Borneo, but the coming of various races has gradually crowded them away to the interior.nbsp;The Dyak was originally a “head hunter” and a cannibal, andnbsp;in some cases may still be such, but the influence of othernbsp;races has had the effect of subduing and semi-civilizing thenbsp;wild man of Borneo. Dutch Borneo has no railways andnbsp;few motor roads. Practically the only way into the interiornbsp;of Borneo is by its rivers.

The Society for the Propagation of the Gospel and the Methodist Episcopal Mission have work in the British areasnbsp;of North Borneo. The Basel Mission (Swiss) has beennbsp;working in South Borneo for seventy years and reportsnbsp;over 17,000 converts among the Dyaks. This Swiss groupnbsp;covers the southern part of Borneo in the Barito district andnbsp;claims all territory south of the Kapoeas and Mahakam districts. American Pentecostal missionaries have settled innbsp;the center of the Basel Mission’s field.

The Alliance is responsible for all of Borneo between the territory occupied by the Basel Mission and British Northnbsp;Borneo, with the exception of a small area in northwestnbsp;Borneo where an independent Mission has been operating.

East Borneo has the following principal political divisions : Boelongan, including the area through which flow the riversnbsp;Sesajap, Kayan, and their tributaries, with a population ofnbsp;75,962; Samarinda, the region of the Makaham River andnbsp;its tributaries, having a population of 213,197; the Southeast Coast, for which the Basel Mission is responsible, containing 111,833 people.

The Alliance field in East Borneo is divided into three districts : The Mahakam, the Boelongan, and Sesajap districts.

Melak. The Mahakam district, called after the river of that name, was entered by a missionary of the firstnbsp;party of Alliance workers who reached the field in 1929.nbsp;At first the missionary resided in Samarinda, a large villagenbsp;on the coast. Later the station was moved to Melak. Thenbsp;population of the district is about 60,000. Many Mohammedans live on the coast.

In order to reach the Dyaks in their jungle homes in the interior, the missionaries have to travel by motor launch upnbsp;the many tributaries of the Mahakam River, then by nativenbsp;canoe in the upper portions of the river where the launchnbsp;cannot go. After leaving the river, the workers travel bynbsp;footpaths through the jungle as the only means of reachingnbsp;the lonely, far-off villages and long houses of the Dyaks.nbsp;About 23 villages around Melak can be reached by suchnbsp;footpaths.

In the beginning of the work there was considerable difficulty and opposition because of the influence of the Mohammedans, who had intermingled among the Dyaks, but as the witness was faithfully given by Alliance missionaries and bynbsp;two Chinese workers of the Chinese Foreign Missionarynbsp;Union, of which the Chairman of the Alliance Mission isnbsp;the director, God has blessed and results have multipliednbsp;greatly.

One of the important ways of spreading the gospel is through the distribution of gospel portions and tracts. Recent word from the missionary couple now in the Mahakamnbsp;district tells of the sale of 12,000 copies of gospel portionsnbsp;and tracts at a “Night Fair” held in Samarinda. The workers were assisted in the selling by Dutch, Malay and Chinesenbsp;Chiistians. A good supply of literature was available innbsp;Malay, Chinese, Arabic, Dutch and English languages. Anbsp;stand was erected, decorated and well lighted, and some ofnbsp;the young men also went among the crowds. The customersnbsp;represented over a score of races including Dutch, Arabs,nbsp;Malays, Chinese, Javanese and Dyaks. Some purchased onenbsp;of each kind and expressed regret that there was not a greater variety. Every gospel portion was sold and the workersnbsp;are confident that God is still speaking to hearts through the

reading of His Word. This ministry will be increasingly effective through the prayers of God’s people.

The Mahakam district is divided into five subdistricts, four of which are natural divisions formed by the four branchesnbsp;of the Mahakam River. Besides the missionary couple,nbsp;there are also several native workers and one Chinesenbsp;worker ministering in this area. The four branches of thenbsp;Mahakam River are navigable for long distances and, therefore, the launch, “The Courier” is a valuable aid to the evangelization of the district. In one year, 2,623 converts werenbsp;baptized among the Dyaks of the Mahakam district, makingnbsp;a total membership of 2,837 in the nine churches organizednbsp;in the district.

Tandjongselor. Coincident with the opening of work in the Mahakam district, a missionary couplenbsp;of the first party of Alliance missionaries sent to the Netherlands East Indies located in the Bo elong an District in 1929.nbsp;The population of this district is 45,(XX) of which 30,000 arenbsp;Dyaks in the interior and 15,000 are of various nationalitiesnbsp;in the coast villages.

Tandjongselor was chosen as the best center for first reaching the Dyaks, who come from the interior to trade atnbsp;this coast port. The witness given here has been carriednbsp;back by the Dyaks far into the interior. The Boelongannbsp;district can be well divided into four subdistricts.

• (1) The lower reaches of the Boelongan River, extending to the bad rapids which divide this district from the firstnbsp;main inland district. In this lower section are about 13nbsp;villages, in six of which services are held regularly undernbsp;the ministry of two native workers.

• (2) The Poedjoengan district, above many of the rapids.nbsp;There are eight large villages in this district and regularnbsp;church services are held in six of them. Three native workers and a government teacher, who gives voluntary assistancenbsp;in the work, are seeking to instruct the many new convertsnbsp;in this district, which is the principal center of our Christiannbsp;population. In the village of Poedjoengan is located the firstnbsp;Dyak church building, which was built during 1935 by thenbsp;Dyaks themselves.

• (3) Upper Bahau, past many more rapids. There arenbsp;about 15 villages here, some small, in which there are nonbsp;Christians as yet. A missionary has toured this region andnbsp;a native worker is beginning ministry there.

• (4) Apo Kajan. The Dutch military post for this partnbsp;of Borneo is located at Long Nawang in this area. Herenbsp;there are about 21 villages, one of which has a populationnbsp;of 2,000. In only two of these villages are there groups ofnbsp;baptized Christians. Thus a great open door beckons to thenbsp;Alliance. A few trips to this section have been made by thenbsp;missionaries and two native workers are now witnessingnbsp;here. Long Nawang is the farthest outpost of the Alliancenbsp;work in the Boelongan district. To reach here from thenbsp;present mission station at Tandjongselor requires arduousnbsp;and ofttimes dangerous travel in native boat (prau), upnbsp;the river and through many fierce rapids. The time requirednbsp;for the upward trip is from six weeks to two months, whereas the trip down river can usually be made in about ten days.

The spirit of God has worked mightily among the Dyaks of Boelongan. The first Dyaks to confess Christ were atnbsp;Long Ledjoe, ninety miles from Tandjongselor. The king,nbsp;Djalong Ipoy, made many trips to the station in Tandjon-selor and in August, 1931, he made an open confession ofnbsp;Christ and lived a faithful Christian life until the time ofnbsp;his death in 1935. A month after his conversion 225 peoplenbsp;of the village of Long Metep, where the king lived, acceptednbsp;the Lord. In 1932 over 700 converts were baptized; thenbsp;next year more than 500; in 1934 over 1,100 confessednbsp;Christ in baptism. At the last report there were morenbsp;than 3,100 baptized Christians in this district.

The reception of the gospel by the Dyaks of Borneo is a remarkable example of how the spirit of God enlightens thenbsp;minds of illiterate people, whose language has never beennbsp;committed to writing and who have no translation of thenbsp;scriptures in their tongue. These circumstances, however,nbsp;give added emphasis to the importance of the ministry ofnbsp;student-evangelists and other native workers, trained in thenbsp;Bible School at Makassar. These native workers have thenbsp;important ministry of teaching the new converts the truthsnbsp;of God’s Word and helping to build them up in Christ asnbsp;well as in witnessing to the many Dyaks who are yet in thenbsp;darkness of superstition and sin.

The new missionary couple stationed in the Boelongan district tells of the excellent work which some of the Dyaknbsp;student-evangelists have done in carrying the gospel messagenbsp;to the Poonans. These Poonan Dyaks are the genuine “wildnbsp;men of Borneo.” They wander continually from one placenbsp;to another and seem to fear and shun contact with othernbsp;people, even with other Dyak tribesmen. Three times thenbsp;student-evangelists went to them before they would listen.nbsp;The third time the Poonans were impressed with the perseverance of the evangelists and 57 of these wild, wanderingnbsp;men of the jungle definitely accepted the Lord Jesus as theirnbsp;personal Saviour. The missionary writes : “This is a callnbsp;to you from across the sea to pray for still another tribenbsp;from among whom the Lord must take out a people fornbsp;His Name.”

Before the end of 1935 eleven churches had been organized in the Boelongan district, eight of these being in the following villages: Long Ledjoe, Long Metep, Long Poedjoengan, Long Ketaman, Long Pieban, Long Djelet, Longnbsp;Nura, and Soengai Isau.

Poedjoengan. Although this village, about 160 miles up the river from the present station at Tandjongselor, is at this time one of the principal church centers,nbsp;it will probably soon become the center of missionary residence for the Boelongan district. With the large number ofnbsp;Christians in the interior, it is important that a missionarynbsp;couple shall live above the worst rapids, and it is hoped thatnbsp;soon a suitable house can be built near the village of Poedjoengan and that the missionary couple who first entered thisnbsp;district can be established there as a center from which tonbsp;minister throughout the large field included in the Boelongannbsp;district.

Malinau. This city on the Sesajap River can be reached by steamers plying along the coast and it wasnbsp;chosen as the best center for missionary residence when worknbsp;was begun by Alliance missionaries in the Sesajap Rivernbsp;District in 1932. The missionary has made many long tripsnbsp;inland from Malinau and the Lord has given a preciousnbsp;harvest. At the end of 1934 there were ten church groupsnbsp;with a membership of 418, all but five of whom had beennbsp;baptized during the year. At present there are nearly 1,000nbsp;members in these churches.

The Dyaks of the Malinau district are a very primitive people and much dissipated through drink. They live innbsp;smaller villages than in the other districts and consequentlynbsp;are harder to organize into churches. Here too on the Sesajap River are many and dangerous rapids, but God has prospered in the work and enabled the missionary to endure thenbsp;hardship of travel and isolation for Christ’s sake.

With the growth of the work it is expected that within the next year the missionary couple to be stationed in thisnbsp;district will move to the inland village of Long Berangnbsp;among the Dyaks, thousands of whom are hungry for the

Truth. They often follow the missionary from place to place walking with him many miles over rough jungle paths innbsp;order that they may again and again hear the wonderfulnbsp;story of the love of God.

The fourth and latest district to he opened in Dutch Borneo is the Kapoeas District in West Borneo. It lies farnbsp;from the other three fields, being on the opposite coast ofnbsp;the island. The residency of West Borneo including the region of the Kapoeas River and its tributaries has, a totalnbsp;population of 827,898. It is divided into four political divisions as follows :

Sinkawang .................................. 250,276

Pontianak .................................. 309,879

Sintang ..................................... 185,348

Ketapang ................................... 82,395

Balai-Sepoeake. In 1933 missionary work was begun in the Kapoeas district, a station beingnbsp;established at Sintang by one of the couples of the third partynbsp;of Alliance missionaries to the Netherlands East Indies. Sintang, a town of about 3,000 population, is five days travel bynbsp;steamer up the Kapoeas River from the coast city of Pontianak. Located at the fork of two great rivers, the Kapoeasnbsp;and the Melawi, it is a center to which the Dyaks living innbsp;the jungle come to trade. By means of these two rivers andnbsp;their branches, the greater part of West Borneo is accessiblenbsp;by launch and motor boat. However, it has been the purposenbsp;of the missionaries to establish their residence further in thenbsp;interior so that they will be in the region where the Dyaksnbsp;live. Late in 1935 word was received from the field that thenbsp;missionaries were moving from Sintang to Balai-Sepoeake.

Two student-evangelists from the Bible School in Makassar felt called of God to work in West Borneo and their labors have been blessed abundantly. These two evangelistsnbsp;are located not far from Balai-Sepoeake on the Ketoengannbsp;River, a tributary of the Kapoeas, in the midst of a population of 10,000 Dyaks speaking the same language. Thesenbsp;people have been open to the truths of the gospel, manynbsp;lives have been changed, and Dyaks who formerly worshipped evil spirits are now worshipping the true and livingnbsp;God.

In the latter part of 1935 the missionary visited this section and found about 2,000 people genuinely interested in the gospel. Upon examination of these as to their faith innbsp;Christ and their Christian experience, 508 were found to benbsp;ready for baptism. All of these were Dyaks except twonbsp;Chinese. In the little more than two years since the worknbsp;was begun in West Borneo more than 1,000 have been wonnbsp;to Christ, most of whom have been baptized. In order tonbsp;aid in the sowing of the Seed and the reaping of the harvest,nbsp;two more student-evangelists are being sent from Makassarnbsp;to this district.

Inasmuch as ministry among the Dyaks is much the same in the various districts, we are giving here a quotation fromnbsp;an article written by the missionary of the Kapoeas district :

“The Dyak long houses are not as large here as in East Borneo, but are constructed in the same fashion. What a joy and blessingnbsp;comes to the heart in climbing up the notched, log ladder into thenbsp;long house and see before you 500 or more people, who have heardnbsp;that you were coming and have gathered from near-by long houses.nbsp;Some have come as far as three days journey. Shaking hands withnbsp;500 people and their children takes time, but these dear souls seemnbsp;offended if we don’t do it. So we greet them and they are verynbsp;happy. At 7: 30 in the morning the service starts and, except fornbsp;short intervals for eating, we are teaching, singing and telling themnbsp;the most wonderful news that has ever come to their ears (or to anynbsp;one’s ears) until 12 o’clock at night.

“Speaking in a long house to a large crowd is very difficult because one side is usually open and, though the two native workers and Inbsp;took turns in speaking, we were all hoarse long before midnight.nbsp;We closed with prayer several times but the people just stayed on. . . .nbsp;Early the next morning they gathered again and we taught themnbsp;until 11 a. m. Many of these had followed us from the first day ofnbsp;our journey and had heard the gospel message many times. Likenbsp;the importunate woman, they followed us from one long house tonbsp;another drinking in every word, and in the last long house theynbsp;entered the inquirers’ class where we questioned each one individually. . . .

“We wish you could have been present at the service in which the 515th of these Dyak converts was buried with Christ in baptism. . . .nbsp;After the baptismal ceremony the chief of the long house came tonbsp;me and said, ‘Sir, I want you to dedicate this long house to God;nbsp;formerly we worshipped spirits and sang to them here, but now wenbsp;will worship God and the Lord Jesus, and will sing praises to Him.’nbsp;That he of his own volition should ask this surely touched our hearts.nbsp;We prayed that God would put a fence around that long house andnbsp;cover it with the precious blood of Christ, and keep the people whonbsp;lived in it. Praise the Lord !

“As we said good-bye on a jungle path, tears filled some eyes, and always there came the question, ‘When will you come again?’

“The signs which accompanied this glorious awakening (which by no means is at an end) were as follows : Human skulls were takennbsp;from long houses and buried; drunkenness ceased among the believers ; men returned to their wives from whom they were separated ;nbsp;men, women and children were healed, some of them at death’s door ;nbsp;and the fame of our Lord Jesus Christ is spreading throughout allnbsp;this district. This great movement of the Spirit in West Borneo isnbsp;the result of your remembering us and our district in prayer. But,nbsp;dear Prayer Helpers, an awakening that is real and from God cannot go on without the enemy getting angry. He is already makingnbsp;trouble and is bidding high for this territory which was once all his.nbsp;Our feet have trod upon this district and we by faith have taken itnbsp;for God. The burden is upon us and we have asked God to lay thenbsp;burden of prayer upon some of you. . . . God’s day for the Dyaksnbsp;is now. . . . The harvest is golden ripe. Brethren, pray for us.”

Lombok

This island, lying southwest of Celebes and east of Java and Bali, is a land of rugged beauty. The Balinese population has overflowed into Lombok, but the majority of thenbsp;people of Lombok are of the Sassak race. There are approximately 500,000 Sassaks and 250,000 Balinese in thenbsp;island, the latter being the more influential group. Thenbsp;Sassak people are Mohammedans, the Balinese are Hindus.nbsp;Representatives of other races are found also, includingnbsp;Chinese.

Ampenan. One of the missionary couples who went to the Netherlands East Indies in the first party ofnbsp;Alliance missionaries was appointed to the Island of Lomboknbsp;and took up their residence in Ampenan in July, 1929. Innbsp;addition to learning the Malay language they have acquirednbsp;also a working knowledge of the Balinese, which they havenbsp;used among the Balinese in Lombok. A student-evangelistnbsp;from the Bible School in Makassar and a colporter of thenbsp;British and Foreign Bible Society have also sown much seed.

The number of converts in Lombok has not been large, but a nucleus of truly converted people, representing mostnbsp;of the races that inhabit the island, has been gathered in.nbsp;During the first six years about 30 converts were baptized.nbsp;Among them are members of two influential Balinese families who were previously high caste Hindus. These havenbsp;made excellent progress in the faith and give forth a verynbsp;fine testimony. In one of these families a son and his wifenbsp;have been saved and are now studying in the Bible Schoolnbsp;at Makassar. The young man speaks four languages and itnbsp;is hoped that he will become an effective preacher of thenbsp;Word. A few Sassak Mohammedans have accepted thenbsp;Lord. One young Moslem man has been saved and he andnbsp;his Christian Sassak wife are also in the Bible School, beingnbsp;among the seven students from Lombok.

In January, 1932, a chapel was opened in the largest market town. This has been an excellent opportunity tonbsp;preach the gospel to many people from a large district. Student-evangelists have given valuable aid in the work. Therenbsp;are great opportunities in Lombok. The Holy Spirit is already at work breaking down the fear which seems inherentnbsp;in the hearts of all. The greater part of the Sassaks arenbsp;only nominal Moslems, and it is expected that soon morenbsp;and more will accept Christ. Many of the Balinese are dissatisfied with Hinduism and are showing an interest in thenbsp;gospel.

As in the East Borneo fields, so in Lombok, when the first missionaries to enter went home on furlough the Lord enabled the Mission to send new missionary recruits into thenbsp;district. The workers in Lombok write : “The encouragement which comes to our hearts is to behold the power of thenbsp;gospel as it works in the lives of men and women here.”nbsp;The testimonies of God’s working call to memory the account of the early church. Converts from among the Balinese, Mohammedans, Chinese, and others are courageouslynbsp;following Christ amid severe persecution and many testings.nbsp;Let the Christians in the homeland be faithful in prayer fornbsp;the missionaries, the native workers, and all the believers innbsp;Lombok as in all mission fields that the church may benbsp;strengthened and many brought to Christ.

Other Islands

Through the abundant grace of God, workers of The Christian and Missionary Alliance and of the Chinese Foreign Missionary Union have been enabled to carry the gospel of Christ to other islands and sections where the Lightnbsp;of Life had not penetrated. We give below a brief accountnbsp;of this work.

Bali. The Island of Bali lies immediately east of Java and has a population of over 1,OCK),000. It is differentnbsp;from the other islands of this Archipelago inasmuch as thenbsp;Balinese resisted the Mohammedan invasion and retainednbsp;their Hindu religion. Bali is a very popular tourist resort. Thenbsp;government of the Netherlands East Indies has not favorednbsp;missionary work in Bali but soon after the Alliance missionnbsp;entered the Netherlands East Indies the government gavenbsp;permission to the Chairman to send a Chinese missionary tonbsp;work among the Chinese in Bali. Through the conversionnbsp;of some young men whose fathers were Chinese and whosenbsp;mothers were Balinese, the witness of Christ’s salvationnbsp;commenced without the violation of any government restrictions. Late in the year 1934, officials gave permission fornbsp;the baptism of 138 Balinese converts who had been waitingnbsp;for over a year, thus bringing the total number of baptizednbsp;converts in the Alliance work in Bali to 436.

In 1935 the Government of the Netherlands East Indies required The Christian and Missionary Alliance to cease allnbsp;its activity in Bali and converts from the Island of Bali werenbsp;no longer permitted to enter the Bible Training School innbsp;Makassar. However, a number had received two years ofnbsp;training prior to this action by the government and thus thenbsp;converts in Bali continue to have the ministry of the Wordnbsp;among them and a goodly number of other souls have beennbsp;saved through the witness of these former Bible School students and of the other believers on the island. One of thenbsp;Netherland churches with headquarters in Java has begunnbsp;work in another portion of Bali.

The following request comes from the Chairman on the field in the Netherlands East Indies.

“We earnestly request the prayers of Christian people for Bali. Pray for the Balinese Christians, that they may be tended by the greatnbsp;Shepherd of the sheep. Pray for the Balinese students who have hadnbsp;to leave the Bible School in the midst of their course, that they maynbsp;give a true witness to their fellowmen in Bali with its population ofnbsp;over a million. God’s promise is ‘Behold I have set before you annbsp;open door and no man can shut it.’ ’’

Let us be faithful in prayer that the Christians in Bali may be taught by the Holy Spirit, that they may grow in gracenbsp;and in the knowledge of the truth and in Jesus, and that thenbsp;island shall be visited with a mighty heaven-sent revival andnbsp;that many souls be saved.

Soembawa. The next island to the east of Lombok is larger in size than either Lombok or Bali but has anbsp;smaller population, the number being 315,512. About 1,3(X) ofnbsp;these are Chinese, the Donggas tribe who live in the mountainsnbsp;are estimated to number about 10,0(X). These tribes are stillnbsp;pagan although the most of the inhabitants of the island arenbsp;Mohammedan. The Moslems of the coastal regions are verynbsp;bigoted. There are some Ambonese Christians acting asnbsp;school teachers and subordinate officials in Soembawa but sonbsp;far there have been no converts from among the Mohammedans and no definite mission work is being carried on bynbsp;any of these. The island has been visited by the missionarynbsp;from Lombok but the only active witnesses for Christ livingnbsp;in the island are a couple of native Christians who are carrying on colportage work as representatives of the Nationalnbsp;Bible Society of Scotland. It is the hope of our Netherlandsnbsp;East Indies mission that native workers trained in the Biblenbsp;School may soon be sent to preach the Gospel and win soulsnbsp;in this needy island.

Bangka and Billiton. The Alliance mission in the Netherlands East Indies has felt greatly the burden of the unevangelized islands round about its present field. Among those for whose evangelization great concern has been felt are the islands of Bangka and Billitonnbsp;which lie off the coast of Sumatra to the northwest of Java.nbsp;Concerning these, the World Dominion Survey Series says :

“They have valuable deposits of tin which are worked by the Chinese. Bangka (4,547 square miles) is more than twice the size of Billiton (1,872 square miles). The Chinese inhabitants of the twonbsp;islands number 96,425 and 28,609 respectively. Most of them arenbsp;recent immigrants and speak the Hak-ka dialect, while the older immigrants and the young people use the Malay language. There arenbsp;also about 107.482 and 44,094 immigrant Malays in the two islandsnbsp;respectively. The few hill tribes represent the aboriginal populationnbsp;and are akin to the Bataks of Sumatra. A Chinese evangelist hasnbsp;recently taken up residence on Bangka and a Chinese girl, known asnbsp;¦“the Billiton girl,” is training at the Makassar Bible School of Thenbsp;Christian and Missionary Alliance. This is all that is being done bynbsp;Protestant missions. The Roman Catholic Church has a small worknbsp;mostly among Europeans (1,630) in a number of places throughoutnbsp;these islands.”

Although a Chinese missionary has been working in Bangka since 1933 these two islands and the two hundred islands surrounding them are largely untouched by the Gospel witness. The work has just begun and the opposition of thenbsp;enemy is very strong. Prayer is requested that the gospelnbsp;may triumph in Bangka and Billiton and in the surroundingnbsp;islands.

Sumatra. Although portions of the island of Sumatra have been evangelized for more than seventy years, andnbsp;more than forty mission stations are listed as centers of Christian work in the island, yet there are considerable portions ofnbsp;Southern Sumatra which present a large unoccupied area.nbsp;In 1933 a missionary couple, sent out and supported by annbsp;indejiendent group in the United States of America enterednbsp;southern Sumatra and their earnest witness for Christ hasnbsp;already resulted in the winning of a few souls to the Lordnbsp;and in sowing the gospel seed in many lives with hope of annbsp;abundant harvest. Much land yet remains to be possessednbsp;for Christ in this portion of Sumatra. The harvest is whitenbsp;and the laborers are few. Pray for those now ministeringnbsp;and for others to be sent.

The latest word from the Alliance mission in the Netherlands East Indies tells of the need in the island of Madoera immediately north of East Java and easily accessible fromnbsp;the great commercial city of Sourabaya. This island has anbsp;population of 1,743,818 souls. It is a hilly country althoughnbsp;there are no high mountains. There are good motor roadsnbsp;throughout the island and a light railroad. The chief industry is in the salt fields. The people are of the sailor,nbsp;fisherman type. So far as the native people are concernednbsp;the island of Madoera is an unoccupied field, there being nonbsp;known resident Christian worker among them. The peoplenbsp;are nominal Mohammedans. The Alliance Mission has applied to the government for permission to send student evangelists to this island. Pray that the way may be opened andnbsp;that many souls may be won and a strong spiritual churchnbsp;established.

Translation and Publication Work

The Netherlands Bible Society and the British and Foreign Bible Society have provided the Scriptures in Malay, Javanese and portions of the Scriptures in other languages.nbsp;Most of the colportage work, however, is confined to thenbsp;Island of Java although some colporters travel throughoutnbsp;many portions of the islands. The National Bible Societynbsp;•of Scotland has helped in the distribution of Chinese Scriptures in Sumatra, Java, Celebes and other parts, and isnbsp;planning to increase its ministry in this part of the world.nbsp;It is not expected that the Bible will have to be translatednbsp;into the Dyak dialects for the people of Borneo since it isnbsp;available in Malay which is the universal trade language ofnbsp;the islands. The government officials desire that the peoplenbsp;of Borneo and of the other islands should learn to use thenbsp;Malay language, instead of their own tribal tongue.

The station of Makassar, Celebes, is the center of the Alliance publication work. The monthly Malay magazine,nbsp;the Kalem Hidoep (The Living Word), first printed innbsp;1930, has a growing circulation of about 1,000. This Biblenbsp;magazine in the Malay tongue edited by the Chairman, withnbsp;native assistance, is the counterpart in Malay of the Biblenbsp;Magazine which the Chairman has edited for many years innbsp;the Chinese language, assisted in later years by able Chinesenbsp;coworkers. Recently a book by the same author, an Exposition of the book of Daniel, has been translated into thenbsp;Malay from the Chinese. Gospel literature, tracts and booklets are being published in several languages. Prayer is requested that this important ministry shall be abundantlynbsp;blessed of God and be greatly increased so that multitudesnbsp;shall receive portions of the life-giving Word of God.

The Indigenous Church

Although the Alliance Mission began its ministry in the Netherlands East Indies in 1929, with the missionaries entering several language groups to proclaim the Gospel ofnbsp;Christ, yet in a little over five years the report from thenbsp;field shows 29 churches established in Borneo, with a membership of nearly 8,000 baptized believers ; two churchesnbsp;in Makassar, Celebes ; four in Bali, these latter not beingnbsp;associated with the Alliance work because of governmentnbsp;restrictions ; and one small church in Lombok. The membership now totals 8,309 and an additional 7,098 are listednbsp;as inquirers.

Missionaries are witnessing for Christ in the Malay, Balinese and Chinese languages, and to some extent in the Dyak dialects. Native workers use the Malay, Makassar, Boegis,nbsp;Tarajah, Balinese and Sassak and several Dyak languagesnbsp;or dialects. Witness is being given far and wide with a viewnbsp;to not only winning souls to Christ but to establish churchesnbsp;in every place where souls are won. It is planned to promote from the very beginning the Scriptural basis of self-support, self-government and an earnest zeal in the propagation of the gospel by all the converts. As more students arenbsp;trained in the Bible Training School in Makassar, other language groups will also be given the gospel message. Onenbsp;of the greatest needs at the present time in the Netherlandsnbsp;East Indies field is for more Spirit-filled native workers,nbsp;well trained in the Word of God, to help the missionariesnbsp;in their gigantic task of teaching the thousands of new-bornnbsp;souls, that the church may grow in the knowledge of Godnbsp;and walk in the fear of the Lord and in the comfort of thenbsp;Holy Ghost. It behooves the faithful believers in Christ tonbsp;buy up the opportunity for soulwinning and for the buildingnbsp;of a strong church among these hungry-hearted people. Letnbsp;us share in this ministry by wholehearted cooperation andnbsp;especially by prevailing prayer.

PUERTO RICO

Puerto Rico is bounded on the north by the Atlantic Ocean and on the south by the Caribbean Sea. Santo Domingo isnbsp;about 45 miles to the west, and St. Thomas 40 miles to thenbsp;east. The Islands of Culebra and Vieques to the east formnbsp;part of the territory.

Area and Population

Puerto Rico is the fourth largest of the Greater Antilles. It is 95 miles long (from east to west) and 35 miles wide,nbsp;with a coast line of about 345 miles. It has an area ofnbsp;3,435 square miles. The census of 1930 showed a population of 1,543,913 and in 1933 the estimate was 1,623,814.nbsp;San Juan, the capital, had a population of 114,715 in 1930.nbsp;The distribution of the population in 1930, according tonbsp;color, was: White, 1,146,719; colored, 397,156; others, 38.

Climate

The climate is the most healthful of the Western Hemisphere in the tropics. The temperature is moderated by the northeast trade winds. At San Juan the temperature variesnbsp;from 76.5° during January and February to 83.2° duringnbsp;July and August.

The hurricanes in 1928 and 1932 did much damage. About 500 people were killed, more than 6,000 injured and thousands were left without shelter.

Government

The Governor of Puerto Rico is appointed by the President of the United States. The Legislature—a Senate of 19 members and a House of Representatives of 39—is electednbsp;for four years by direct vote. There are six executive departments : Justice, Finance, Interior, Education, Agriculture and Labor, and Health. The President appoints, upon

confirmation by the Senate, the Attorney General and Commissioner of Education. The island elects, for a term of four years, a Resident Commissioner at Washington with anbsp;voice, but no vote, in the House of Representatives.

History

Puerto Rico was discovered and named by Columbus in 1493. Ponce de Leon conquered it for Spain in 1509-11.nbsp;It was conquered by Major General Miles in the Spanish-American War and ceded to the United States by the Treatynbsp;of Paris, Dec. 10, 1898.

The Legislature, in 1929, extended the franchise to those women over 21 who can read and write. In April, 1934,nbsp;the Legislature petitioned the Congress of the United Statesnbsp;to grant Puerto Rico statehood and a large measure ofnbsp;autonomy.

Physical Features

Through the middle of the island, from east to west, runs a range of mountains with an altitude of 1,500 to 3,750nbsp;feet, cultivable to the summits.

Resources

The soil is extremely fertile and largely under cultivation. The lower lands to the north are well watered, but irrigationnbsp;is needed in the south ; an extensive system has been constructed by the Government.

Sugar, pineapples, oranges, grapefruit, tobacco and coffee are the chief exports. Sugar production under modernnbsp;methods increased from 35,000 tons in 1899 to 784,000 tonsnbsp;in 1934-35. Cotton manufactures and embroideries are alsonbsp;exported. The coffee crop which had averaged 42,000,000nbsp;pounds annually dropped to 7,331,877 pounds in 1929 because of the destruction of coffee trees during hurricanes.

Gold, silver, iron, copper, bismuth, tin, mercury, platinum and nickel are found in the island but the only establishednbsp;industry in minerals is that of manganese ore.

There are very productive salt works.

Progress

There are 463 miles of railroad and over 1,100 miles of surfaced highways, and in 1933 there were 14,132 automobiles registered.

Education is free and compulsory. About 44 per cent of the children of school age are enrolled in the 2,250 publicnbsp;schools. In 1932-33 the enrollment was 233,457 pupils withnbsp;4,451 teachers. Illiteracy is 41.4 per cent. The Universitynbsp;of Puerto Rico in 1933-34 had 2,236 students. Englishnbsp;and Spanish are spoken.

Currency

Puerto Rico as a part of the United States of America, uses the same currency.

Languages

Spanish is still the principal language, although English is becoming the principal language of an increasing numbernbsp;of the younger generation.

Religions

The Roman Catholic religion is dominant. A number of Protestant church denominations, however, are well established throughout the island.

Missionary Occupation

Twelve United States Societies, besides The Christian and Missionary Alliance, are working in Puerto Rico.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

In January, 1900, the work of the Alliance began in this island under most unique circumstances through the ministrynbsp;of a former priest in the parish of Barceloneta. When Godnbsp;saved him from his sins and gave him the light of the knowledge of Christ, he returned to his former parish and fromnbsp;a room in his own house opening on the street, deliverednbsp;his first message. After much bitter opposition, his faithfulnbsp;ministry and godly life were used of the Lord to the conversion of many. From this work has grown the Puertonbsp;Rico mission of The Christian and Missionary Alliance.

The Alliance in Puerto Rico is unique in that the Chairman and pastors are all Puerto Ricans and the work is in reality more like an integral part of the Alliance home work,nbsp;the small subsidy being given from the missionary treasurynbsp;having ceased at the end of 1935. The founder of the worknbsp;is still one of the spiritual leaders in the field. For a number of years he and his wife were regularly appointed missionaries of The Christian and Missionary Alliance in Venezuela, Honduras, Ecuador and Peru. The present chairmannbsp;was gloriously saved and turned from the Roman priesthood to earnest gospel ministry, joining the Alliance in 1903.nbsp;Thank God for the work of the Holy Spirit in Puerto Rico,nbsp;and for the faithful pastors and evangelists among thenbsp;churches there.

Translation and Publication Work

The Alliance in Puerto Rico publishes a periodical containing excellent expositions of fourfold gospel truth, and items concerning the work of the churches. This paper.nbsp;El Misionero is well edited, printed in attractive form, andnbsp;has a fruitful ministry in the work in Puerto Rico. Maynbsp;it prosper abundantly. It was first published in 1912.nbsp;From 1926 to 1931 the name was changed to El Ftitida-mentalista, but since 1931 it has been called by its originalnbsp;name El Misionero.

• nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;The Indigenous Church

The work in Puerto Rico is prospering under the blessing of God and through the faithful ministries of the workers.nbsp;Recent years have seen continued financial pressure, but theynbsp;have been years rich in spiritual blessing and soul-winningnbsp;ministries. For several years the number of baptisms havenbsp;increased each year, the latest figure being 123. Despite thenbsp;unusual economic depression, many of the members beingnbsp;unemployed, there has been for two years an annual increasenbsp;of more than $500 a year in the church offerings. A churchnbsp;organized two years ago at Pueblito, Manati, now has a finenbsp;congregation of 100 members and a larger number attendnbsp;the services in the newly erected church building.

There are 36 outstations and the churches listed below are entirely manned by Puerto Rican pastors :

Arecibo nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Morovis

Barceloneta nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Santurce

Florida nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Eega Baja

Manati nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Altnirante

Pueblito

There are six ordained pastors, one Bible Woman, and a native church membership of 676. The twenty-five Sundaynbsp;Schools have an enrollment of 1,650 scholars.

The Alliance of Puerto Rico has recently incorporated in accord with the laws of Puerto Rico under the name ofnbsp;“Alianza Christiana Y Misionera de Puerto Rico.”

We join hands and hearts with these Puerto Rican comembers in the body of Christ and in the Alliance movement. They are true colaborers in full gospel ministries. May their work grow and prosper by God’s great grace.

JAMAICA

Jamaica is situated in the Caribbean Sea, ninety miles south of Cuba, and is the largest and most valuable of thenbsp;British West Indies.

Area and Population

The area of Jamaica is 4,450 square miles, being about the size of the State of Connecticut. The population in 1931nbsp;was 1,050,667 (whites about 20,000 and East Indians 17,775).nbsp;The estimated population at the end of 1933 was 1,090,269.nbsp;Kingston, the capital, has a population of about 62,707. Jamaica is approximately 150 miles in length and forty-fivenbsp;miles in width at the widest part.

Climate

The climate has attractions for winter tourists. With the .exception of the lowlands which are quite hot, there is anbsp;„delightful semi-tropical climate.

Government

Jamaica is a British colony. In 1661 a Constitutional Government was established consisting of a Governor, Privynbsp;Council, Legislative Council and Assembly. This was abolished in 1866 and a Legislative Council established consistingnbsp;.of official and unofficial members. In 1884 a partially elective Legislative Council was instituted. The Governor is assisted by a Privy Council and Legislative Council, consistingnbsp;of the Governor as president and five ex-officio, ten nominated, and fourteen elected members. The term of service isnbsp;limited and in the case of elected members is for five yearsnbsp;only. There are boards elected in each parish (fifteen) fornbsp;administration of local affairs.

History

Jamaica was discovered by Columbus in 1494 and remained in the possession of the Spaniards until it was taken by the English in 1655, and their possession was confirmednbsp;bv the Treaty of Madrid in 1670.

Physical Features

The land is usually low along the coasts, while much of the mountain region has an elevation of from 2,500 to 3,500 feet.

Resources

In 1933 and 1934 there were 204,795 acres of land under cultivation, of which 40,091 were given over to sugar cane,nbsp;72,909 to bananas, 40,074 to cocoanuts, and 6,265 to coffee.nbsp;The chief exports are bananas, sugar, coffee, grapefruit, logwood extract, logwood, pimento, cacao, oranges, ginger,nbsp;cocoanuts, copra and rum.

Progress

There were 210 miles of railway in 1931, 2,372 miles of highway, 18j^ miles of electric and 116 miles of steam tramways, as well as 82 miles of mule tramways. Every townnbsp;and village has postal and telegraph service.

In 1933 there were 653 public elementary schools; 142,141 children were enrolled with an average atendance of 86,582,nbsp;There are four training colleges for women and one for men,nbsp;and two secondary schools largely supported by the government, There are secondary and high schools, some endowednbsp;and others not endowed.

Currency

The legal coinage is that of Great Britain but various American coins are also current.

Language

English is spoken throughout the Island,

Religions

Christianity is the prevailing religion. The majority of the people profess the Protestant faith. However, native superstitions persist among some in the more backward regions.

Missionary Occupation

In 1933 there were the following churches and chapels; Church of England, 250 ; Presbyterian, 105 ; Roman Catholic, 75 ; Wesleyan Methodist, 145 ; Baptist, 213; Moravian,nbsp;33 ; Christian Church, 28 ; Congregational, 35 ; Salvationnbsp;Army, 55 ; Seventh Day Adventists, 91 ; Jewish, 4, andnbsp;Friends Church, 16.

The Christian and Missionary Alliance

During the years 1895 and 1896 a man and his wife from Jamaica were accepted as workers under the Alliance. Thenbsp;work was carried on by them for a number of years and thenbsp;mission was recognized as Alliance although there was nonbsp;direct financial support given. In 1902, however, it wasnbsp;partially supported by the Alliance and two years later it wasnbsp;necessary for our society to take over the entire support.

There has been a very blessed realization of the presence and working of God in the Jamaica churches. During recentnbsp;years the baptisms numbered from 32 to 152 a year. A littlenbsp;group of believers in a needy district near the station atnbsp;Devon was formed into a church, the result of the testimonynbsp;of the Devon Fishermen’s Club.

The Memorial Tabernacle in Kingston, is free of debt, has 191 members, and a Sunday School of 217 scholars.

For some time the need of the Cantonese-speaking Chinese, especially in the Kingston area, has been on the hearts ofnbsp;some of the Christians in Jamaica, and at the end of 1934nbsp;two veteran missionaries from South China, who have beennbsp;on retirai in the homeland for several years, felt the Lord’snbsp;call to fill this need.

For many years the Alliance churches in Jamaica have been faithful in the support of foreign missionary work andnbsp;in spite of the economic pressure and in addition to theirnbsp;maintaining full self-support, their missionary offerings havenbsp;continued.

There are three missionaries now on the field, also three ordained native pastors and seven self-supporting churches.nbsp;The three missionaries are all “retired” but are continuallynbsp;active in the Vineyard of the Lord in Jamaica, one amongnbsp;the Jamaicans; two, mentioned above, among the Chinese.nbsp;The seven churches have 716 members and are located asnbsp;follows :

Devon nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Harry Watch

Kingston nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Epping Forest

Coley Mt. nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;nbsp;Hrmtley

Ritchies

As expressed by some of the leading members and deacons in the churches : “The Christian and Missionary Alliancenbsp;Churches in Jamaica have a message and are not afraid tonbsp;tell it out.” May the blessing of God continue and abound,nbsp;in all the churches in Jamaica. Let us fellowship with themnbsp;in fervent love and prayer.

UNOCCUPIED FIELDS

The purpose of God in His infinite love for the world, the command of Christ, Who died that all men might have anbsp;way to God, and the brooding ministries of the,Holy Spiritnbsp;expressed in the yearning of the apostle Paul as he pressednbsp;on to the regions beyond where Christ was not named—allnbsp;combine to make the obligation upon the church in this generation a very solemn one. Means of travel and communication have increased greatly in our day. The command ofnbsp;Christ and the promise of His enabling and presence are asnbsp;real as when the first disciples went out into world-widenbsp;ministries after the day of Pentecost. The population ofnbsp;the world is continually increasing and the number of heathen souls is larger by many hundreds of millions than thenbsp;population of the earth in Jesus’ day. There would seemnbsp;to be only two reasons why there could be in our day anynbsp;unoccupied mission fields. Either governments or peoplesnbsp;refuse to permit the gospel to be preached in certain places,nbsp;or the Church is lamentably slow in her carrying out of thenbsp;Great Commission. Both of these are true.

The principal peoples of earth who are yet without the message of Christ and the territories where governmentnbsp;restrictions prohibit the preaching of the gospel are mentioned in part in the following paragraphs.

Asia

Tibet with a population of about 3,000,000, i. e. Tibet proper of which Lhassa is the capital. The Buddhist rulersnbsp;of this country under the leadership of the Dalai Lama arenbsp;determined that Christianity shall not enter their land andnbsp;every effort during the last century to enter Tibet with thenbsp;gospel message has been bitterly opposed and successfullynbsp;frustrated so far as available records show. However, it isnbsp;thought that two or more Indian Christians have withinnbsp;recent years entered Tibet as witnesses for Christ and become martyrs to His cause.

The newspajjers recently carried a dispatch telling of the determination of the Panchen Lama to take control in Lhasanbsp;and open Tibet to foreigners, so that the material benefitsnbsp;of civilization would be known by the Tibetan people. Ifnbsp;this be true, then we should pray more earnestly for thenbsp;doors to open for the messengers of Christ to enter withnbsp;the Gospel.

Several missionary societies, including the China Inland Alission and The Christian and Missionary Alliance, arenbsp;laboring along the borders of Tibet on the China side, occupying strategic points among Tibetan tribes who live innbsp;territory nominally governed by China. Two Societies andnbsp;some independent workers are at work on the Indian frontier, witnessing to Tibetans who come down through thenbsp;mountain passes into India for purposes of trade.

Afghanistan, whose Moslem rulers and people in their fanatical allegiance to Mohammed, not only forbid the messengers of Christ to enter Afghanistan, but also make thenbsp;profession of Christianity by any one in Afghanistan punishable by death. However, both on the Persian and the Indiannbsp;frontiers missionary societies are occupying the most strategic places as near the border as possible. The missionariesnbsp;are not only preaching the gospel and scattering the printednbsp;Word among Afghans who travel the caravan routes, butnbsp;they are eagerly praying and longing for the day to comenbsp;when they can enter within the now closed borders ofnbsp;Afghanistan. Many Afghans are treated in the Missionnbsp;hospital at Meshed, Iran (Persia) and in 1924 a doctor andnbsp;three other missionaries were permitted to visit the city ofnbsp;Herat, Afghanistan in order to dispense medical aid. However, though many hoped that this was the entering wedgenbsp;for missionary ministry, the door is still closed to this nation, whose population is estimated to be 6,330,500.

The countries of Nepal (population 5,600,000) and Bhutan (population 250,000), lying south of Tibet among the Himalaya mountains in the north of India, are closed notnbsp;only to Christian missionaries but to all Europeans. Herenbsp;again earnest servants of Christ are serving their Lord innbsp;gospel ministries not far from the borders, and the residentsnbsp;of these countries journeying into India are thus to somenbsp;degree brought in touch with the gospel.

Among the 562 Indian States lying for the most part within the heart of India, and ruled over by native Indiannbsp;princes and potentates, there are a number where missionarynbsp;effort is absolutely forbidden and many others where it isnbsp;totally neglected. The population of these States totals morenbsp;than 81,000,000 and, while there has been a marked increasenbsp;in the number of missionaries and of Christians, yet manynbsp;of these States are still wholly unoccupied by the Church ofnbsp;Christ.

Although missionary work is forbidden in the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics, yet there are thousands of earnestnbsp;Christians who are bearing witness for Christ even at thenbsp;cost of martyrdom and many agencies are seeking opportunities to send the Word to the people of Russia, Siberia,nbsp;and other portions of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics,nbsp;whose total population is estimated to be 168,000,000. Sovietnbsp;influence is very strong in Mongolia and in portions of central Asia, including what was known formerly as Chinesenbsp;Turkestan. Thus the Church of Christ, which has longnbsp;neglected its responsibilities for the evangelization of thenbsp;peoples of those areas, will find the task much harder.

Arabia is still closed to the apostles of Christ, but those who have labored for years in near-by mission fields are expecting that ere long some doors will open and the gospelnbsp;will penetrate even into this forbidden land of about 7,000,-000 people. Alliance missionaries from the Palestine-Arabian Border field who visited Arabia some years agonbsp;were not allowed to remain there and in one instance werenbsp;arrested and sent out of the country.

The greatest number of unevangelized people, in the vast continent of Asia, may still be found, however, among thenbsp;millions in India, China, French Indo-China and other already occupied fields where valiant soldiers of the Cross arenbsp;carrying the fight into the enemy’s territory and winningnbsp;thousands to Christ within these fields. There are still millions and tens of millions who will have no proper opportunity within their lifetime to hear the glad story of salvation unless the Church of Christ in the homelands as wellnbsp;as in the mission fields is visited with a revival which willnbsp;result in greatly increased missionary zeal.

The Islands

There has not been published in recent years any survey which is both comprehensive and accurate in its information concerning the unoccupied fields of the» world. Thisnbsp;lack is especially felt in regard to the island world. However, there are certain general statistics which should be ofnbsp;help in causing the followers of Christ to realize more clearlynbsp;their responsibility for the yet unreached peoples in thenbsp;islands.

In Papua, New Guinea, the Solomon Islands and other island groups of the South Pacific ; in portions of Sumatranbsp;and in smaller islands of the Netherlands East Indies therenbsp;is still great need for pioneer effort. Some of these islands,nbsp;however, could well be evangelized by the Christian churchesnbsp;in other islands in the same general area.

Africa

With the exception of some territory in East Africa along the Red Sea, where European governments under strongnbsp;Roman Catholic influence forbid the preaching of the gospel, the messengers of Christ can go into almost every portion of the dark continent, and the gospel is being speedilynbsp;taken to scores of tribes and millions of people who hithertonbsp;have been untouched by Christian ministry. However, therenbsp;remain millions of people and a large number of tribes andnbsp;language groups to whom the message should be given andnbsp;there are still in Africa places and peoples where Christ isnbsp;not named.

Latin America

Although the populations of the Indian tribes in Latin America are not large compared with the vast numbers ofnbsp;unreached peoples in other lands, yet it is estimated thatnbsp;there are 1Z,CX5O,OOO dialect-speaking Indians with 500 different languages. Definite advance has been made in thenbsp;last two decades in carrying the gospel to Indian peoples ofnbsp;Central America and portions of South America, but thenbsp;majority of these 500 tribes roaming the jungles of Amazonia and living in the highlands of South and Centralnbsp;America and Mexico are yet without the gospel light. Anbsp;few of these tribes have the New Testament in their ownnbsp;tongue but none have the entire Bible, and no word of thenbsp;Bible has been translated into the majority of these languages, although encouraging progress is being made.

The Bible in Every Tongue

Not only is extensive pioneer work still important that the gospel may be preached to men everywhere, but the converts must be given the Word of God both in printed formnbsp;and in spiritual instruction in their minds and hearts. Hencenbsp;the work of translating and publishing scriptures in the languages and dialects of peoples and tribes is a vital part ofnbsp;missionary ministry. The American Bible Society, the British and Foreign Bible Society, and the National Bible Society of Scotland are the principal agencies in the world fornbsp;the publication and distribution of scriptures, and they havenbsp;a large and valuable ministry in nearly every mission field.

There are nearly 1,000 languages and dialects into which at least some part of the Bible has been translated, and thesenbsp;translations are found in every continent and in many islands. The Bible has been translated into more languagesnbsp;than any other book. Yet there are hundreds of languagesnbsp;in which there is still no portion of scripture translated andnbsp;many more have but one or two Gospels. The Pioneer Mission Agency is the source of the following paragraph :

“Only three-fourths of the inhabitants of the globe have any portion of the Bible translated in their own languages. Of the 5,000 languages and dialects which are spoken by mankind, 954 possess at least a partial translation of the Holy Scriptures ; 3,000 are unimportantnbsp;and hardly demand attention; 1,000, however, still beckon for Biblenbsp;translators. Herein lies the most urgent task of the Church today !nbsp;While we English-speaking peoples multiply unto ourselves translations and editions of the English Bible, a thousand tribes perish without one crumb of the Bread of Life.”

In some primitive fields converts must be taught to read, and in all fields a living growing church must be establishednbsp;by God’s enabling before the task of the Mission can benbsp;lt;onsidered a finished one.

The Early Vision and the Unfinished Task

The early reports of the Alliance clearly present the objective of entering various fields, which were almost, if not altogether, without missionary laborers. Among the placesnbsp;mentioned in a published report of 1892 are: The Island ofnbsp;Borneo; Peru and Ecuador in South America; Szechuan,nbsp;southern and western China and Tibet; and French IndoChina. In 1893 the purpose of extension in the Congo fieldnbsp;was stated, and the Mission in Sierra Leone was recognizednbsp;as the gateway to the French Soudan. A report from thenbsp;Sierra Leone field in 1896 says, “We desire to continue onenbsp;line of stations to Timbuctoo (Tombouctoo), 759 miles fromnbsp;Tibabudugu (Dunkawali, in the Kuranko country) and another line 550 miles due east from Tibabudugu.”

Some of the fields and areas mentioned in these reports were entered in the early days of the Alliance, but for othersnbsp;the vision tarried until, in the providence of God in answernbsp;to the continued and prevailing prayer of God’s people, theynbsp;were entered in later years and new peoples reached with thenbsp;gospel. The story of these endeavors is told in connectionnbsp;with the history of the work in the separate fields.

But the task is not finished. Within the boundaries of our present Alliance mission fields, there are millions yetnbsp;without Christ and lying just beyond are other areas whosenbsp;peoples are without the Light of Life. The command of thenbsp;Master still calls, “Go ye.” The vision for the extension ofnbsp;the work into unoccupied regions where Christ is not knownnbsp;has continued and is clear and bright today in the lives ofnbsp;many. The line of advance has extended into the farthestnbsp;outposts of the early vision, but there is still need for annbsp;increased consecration. The command of Christ requiresnbsp;not only reaching all peoples with the gospel, but also teaching the Word to all those who respond to the gospel. Thusnbsp;alone can the church be properly built from among every nation, kindred, tongue and people.

We close with a quotation from one of Dr. Simpson’s reports in which comes a clarion call today :

“Through prayer and toil and many a tear and many a missionary grave He has slowly and securely laid the foundations of a greatnbsp;missionary work in many lands. And now what chiefly remains fornbsp;us is to hear the thrilling call from the Great Commander:

‘Move forward! All along the Line.’

Surely all this constitutes a sacred trust, a special dispensation, a holy calling, a glorious opportunity, a sublime vocation worthy of ournbsp;highest ambition, our hardest sacrifices and our most strenuous endeavors. Shall we not ask Him to enable us to the utmost boundsnbsp;of our Alliance constituency, and to the utmost measure of our responsibility and His ability, to rise to the realization of our duty andnbsp;our trust, and go forth saying :

“Lord, Thou hast giv’n to me a trust,

A high and holy dispensation, To tell the world, and tell I must.nbsp;The story of Thy great salvation;nbsp;Thou might’st have sent from heav’n abovenbsp;Angelic hosts to tell the story,nbsp;But in Thy condescending love,nbsp;On men Thou hast conferred the glory.

“We all are debtors to our race;

God holds us bound to one another ;

The gifts and blessings of His grace

Were given thee to give thy brother;

We owe to ev’ry child of sin One chance, at least, for hope of heaven,nbsp;O by the love that brought us in.

Let help and hope to them be given.”